IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) v A :/. %o 1.0 I.I 1.25 1^1^ 12.5 2.2 1^1 Hi 1^ 11= U ill 1.6 V] /a % > >^ ^^ '^ '/ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S80 (716) 872-4503 ^o U.X CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHiVJ/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques :\ Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D n n D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommag6e Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaur^e et/ou pelliculde I I Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque □ Coloured maps/ Cartes gdographiques en couleur "I Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ n Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Relid avec d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ Lareliure serrde peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge intdrieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutdes lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont pas 6t6 filmdes. Additional comments:/ Commentaires suppl^mentaires; L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mdthode normale de filmage sont indiquds ci-dessous. □ Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur □ Pages damaged/ Pages endommagdes I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ G D Pages restaur6es et/ou pellicul6es Pages discoloured, stained or foxec Pages ddcolordes, tachetdes ou piqu^es Pages detached/ Pages d^tachdes Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prir Qualitd indgale de I'impression Includes supplementary materii Comprend du matdriel suppidmentaire I Tj Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ I I Pages detached/ r~7| Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ I I Includes supplementary material/ Only edition available/ Seule 6dition disponible Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont 6x6 fiim^es 6 nouveau de fapon & obtenir la meilleure image possible. Th< to 1 Th« poi of 1 filn Ori be{ the sioi oth firs sioi or i Th€ sha TIN whi Mai diff enti beg righ reqi met This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film6 au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X >/ 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X aire details ues du t modifier ger une I filmage i^es The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanl (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: L'exemplaire filmd fut reproduit grSce d la g6n6rositd de: Bibliothdque nationale du Canada Les images suivantes ont 6x6 reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nettetd de l'exemplaire filmd, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimde sont filmds en commenpant par le premier plat et en terrninant soit par la dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont filmds en commenpant par la premidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbole --► signifie "A SUIVRE ', le symbole V signifie "FIN". Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre film6s d des taux de reduction diffdrents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour gtre reproduit en un seul clichd, il est filmd d partir de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche 6 droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la m^thode. ly errata ed to int ne pelure, apon d 1 2 3 32X 1 2 3 4 5 6 ijl>^'. PIIILOL I, A 11, i'i:r,i,(jw IN IMV l4 lllvN •20 H^> ^ 1> i; s c u I A ESSAYS CIIUOFLV PIlILOLOIilCAL AND ETIINO(iRAI>!ll(;AL BY ROBERT GORDON LATHAM M.A., M.I)., I'. U.S., KTC. i.Aii, i'i:r,i,u\v (ii- ivi.\(i;s (nij.iuii.: ( AMr.uiiKii: , i,,\ w. i'i;'iKi;ss(iii III'' KNci.isii JN rMVKKHlTV CuM.Ki;!; , I.ONDIJN, I.AIK ASSISTAM' I'llvyiCIAN AT illlO Mli>lH.lC.SK.\ llUSrilAh. WILLIAMS i^ XOIKJATK, 14 IIKXUIETTA STKKKT, (.'OVENT (JAK'DKN, LONDON AM) '20 SOUTH KUEDEKiriv STKEET, EDIKHUKGII. LKH'/KJ, 1(. llAirr.MAN.N. 'J. 7 »— — « 159756 '^2- ■ - . ■ I /J I llio essay pg'ical and ci he earliest ■ l))iie cases tl Ippenclices t onsists of p London ; a so p Coniparati liad merely c late Mr. justify its As a {^enei 31110 definite Ittention of t iccause there jerning it wli learchcs condr liitli any very Ire supposed Avide field u the same tii lines , and I'liere the ligl) ['anting, and, Irtilicial light. Igations may \m\ their obs( ciurity which i ^le more incun needless to Iinographical li'c disco verabl Y excuse be n Ipoii obscure j lif'v have not rilEFAC E. Tin; essays in the j)resent volume are eliiefly upon pliilo- |)<'ical and etlniograjiliieal subjeets: tliougli not exclusively. jlio earliest was published in 1S40, the latest in lbr»(). In 1)1110 eases they luive formed separate treatises and in some Ippendices to larger works. The greater jiart, howev(!r, )nsists of papers read heforc the Philological Society of London; a society Avhich has materially promoted the growth k Comparative Philology in Great Jiritain, and wliich^ if had merely given to the world the valuable researches of ic late IMr. (airnett; would have done more than enough justify its existence and to prove its usefulness. As a general rule these pa})ers address themselves to )nio definite and special question, which commanded the [ttention of the author either because it was obscure, or lecause there was something in the current opinions con- loniing it which, in his eyes, required correction. Ke- loarches conducted on this principle can scarcely be invested nth any very gcuieral interest. Those who tidvo them up Ire supposed to have their general knowledge beforehand. Avide field and a clear view, they have already taken. Lt the same time there are, in the distant horizon, imperfect liitlines , and in tlu; parts nearer to the eye dim spots diere the light is uncertain , dark spots where it is Avholly [anting, and, oftcner still, spots illumined by a false and Irtificial light. Some of the details of the following invcs- ations may be uninteresting from their minuteness; some iin their obscurity; the minuteness however, and the ob- mrity Avhich deprive them of general interest make it all le more incumbent on soi.ie one to take them u}) : and it 3 needless to add that for a full and coniphle system of jthnugraphical or philological knoAvledge all the details that re discoverable sliould be discovered. This is my excuse t excuse be needed) for having spent some valuable time poll obscure points of minute interest. Upon the whole, ley have not been superlluous. This means that J have t !l w Titr.i'Acr,. rarely, or never, found i'roni any subsequent readln;;- tlmt tliey liiid be(Mi anticipated. Wliei'e this lias been the easel the artiehi has been omitted — being treated as a iion srri-\ /)/iim. An elaborate train of reasoning submitted to tin! Fithnograjjliieal Society has on this principle been ignored It M s upon th(! line of migration by which the Poiynosiaiij portion of tlu; Facitic islands was peopled. It deduced I'tily nosia from the Navigator's Islands: the Navigators Islands] or Samoan Archi})elago , from the Italik an I Radak chains:! the Ralik and lladak chains from Micronesia; Micronesial from the Philippines, via Sonsoral and the Pelews. Soinci time after the paper Avas read 1 found that Forstcr has pro nuilgated the same doctrine. 1 ought to hnvc. known it be- fore. II(!nce the paper is omitted : indeed it was (though read never published. In respect to the others the cliief writers who have workl ed in the same iield are Dr. Scouler, Professor Turner, amlj Professor Busclnnann, — not to mention tlu; bibliographical labours of Dr. Ludwig, and the second paper of Galla- tin. 1 have no hesitation in exi)ressing my belief tliatj where they agree with me they do so as independent inves-i tigators; claiming for myself, where I agree, with tliciu, the same consideration. Of Hodgson and Logan, Windsor Earlo, and other invos-l tigators I should have much to say in the way of botli aknowledgemcnt and criticism, had India and the Indiauj Arcliipelago taken as large a portion of the present volumel as is taken by North America. As it is, it is only in few points that I touch their domain. The hypotliesis that the Asteks (so-called) reached Me- xico by sea I retract. Again — the fundamental affinitvl of the Australian language was a doctrine to which butlii Teichelmann and Sir G. Grey had conuiiitted themselvetj when the paper on the Negrito languages Avas written. TIkI papers, however, stand as they stood: partly because thcyl are worth something in the way of independent evidence, and partly because they illustrate allied subjects. I. Pnocleiitica VII. Qeograp! CONTENTS. ir inves- I. PaDcIeiitica ,.„g.,. lii!iii;;Mir.'il Lecture 1 Oil t.lie study ot' M(!(lii'iiie If* On the study ot' LiuiK'Hiig-c 2? II. Logica On the word Dislrihiiird \\\) III. Grammatiea On tile reciiirocul JM-onouiis, and the refh'etive Verh . . . /if) On the connexion Ix-twecMi tlie Idois ol" Associ.'ition nnd I'ln- riility as an iulhieuee in tlie ICvohition of inlleclion . . "iT On the word ciijinn i;i) On tlie Aorists in KA (li IV. Metrica On the Doctrine of the Ca'sura in the (Jreek senarius . . (\S On tlu! use of the si^-ns of Accent and Quantity as o-uides to the pronunciation of words diM-ived from the classical Langiiafi'es 74 V. Chronologica On the Meaning' of the word IJAPOi; St \\. Bibliographica Notice of works on tlie I'rovincialisms of Holland .... 8.") VII. Geographica On the lOxistence of a nation IxN'iring the name of Seres . S9 On the evi\i true f^'v liich we are iiiportance ot |iii;;lc fact, tli lith the P^ngl |f a liberal i urthor prefae |ious of writii ho write it ational Litei Thus havin liul the subd: |ui'|)oscs it is (•ration of tl T. r.EDKlTK A. I X A L (il K A L I.T:( Tl IM<: r>i;MVi:iiKU at IJNUEKSITV COLLKIJE, I.O^IXJN, ocTOiii'.K 14, \H'M). lustoad of (Ictuiniiig- you uitli u dissertjition u])on tlie laims and the uuuits of our J.an^U!>ji,o, it nuiy porJiaps ho. jcttcr to plunge at onc(! into the middle of niy sul>joct, and lu lay before you, as succinctly as I am able, the plan and jubstance of such I^ectures a;s, within these walls, 1 promise lysolf the honour of delivering'. For 1 consider that the list importance of thoroughly understanding, of compre- |i('ii(ling, in its whole length, and breadth, and height, and li'ptli , the language -svhich we all speak, we all read, and *ci all (in different degrees, but still each in our degree) ►ave ((ccasion to write — the importance also of Justly and Ipnii true grounds, valuing the magnificent literature of Uiicli we are the inheritors — I consider, I say, that the vast kiiportance of all this is sufliciently implied by the simple [iii^lc fact, that, in this Institution, the iMiglish Language, lith the English Literature, is recognized as part and parcel f a liberal education. It may also be assumed, without jiu-tlier preface, that every educated man is, at once, ambi- [ions of writing his own Language AV(dl ; of criticizing those lio write it badly; and of taking up his admiration of our ational Literature, not upon Trust but upon Knowledge. riius having premised, I now proceed to the divisions [nd the subdivisions of my subject. P^or certain practical juiposes it is found expedient to draw, bc.'twcen tlie consi- [cration of the English Language, and the consideration ol" 1 iNAi <;iu.\i, i.iuriKi;. till' I"!n;;lisli Literature, n liroiul liin; (A' (leiiiMrcation. Tl | kiHiU le(lji,'e of hnuUs is one tliiiii;'; the know le(l;^(! ot' tlie ni|i of j;(ioil coiiiposition is aiiotiier tirni,n'. It is one tliiiii; i. know wliat (•tiier men have written; it is another tliinj;' t know how you slioiihl yourselt' write. Tlie one is a pnji a ot' Literary History, or ot" Literai'y l>io;;ra|ihy ; the other a point ot ]{hetorie, or a point ot (irannnar. I (h» not .sm that tho two studies do not mutually assh^-t each othei'. A stmlies do so: these in a j>reat dei;ree. l''amiliarity with tl works of a Shakspeai'c or a Milton, is an ai'e<)niplishment an ai^uoniplishmont that dejtends u[)ou our taste, and ni, Avhit'li do])cnd8 also upon our loisun* — an ae( ouiplisjniici winch cannot be too highly valued, ])ut still an ac'eonipli>l ment. Familiarity, however, with tlu; rules of i:;ood writini is not a unn'o acc-oniplishment. It is a nceessary (lualitieatioi whic'li comes ho)n(^ to us all. Now if 1 am convinced lO one thin;^ more than of an(»fher, 1 am con\inced of the tnit j of this assertion; liz.: that a j^ood style conu'S not of itscjl it comes not uncalled tor; and it comes neitlun* by insliiii nor by accident. It is the result (d' art, and the r(\^ult <• ])ractise. The Rules of ^ood Composition are the rules i Ivhetoric; and it is very necessary that they be. neither m f;lected nor undervalued. Two classes of men, and tw classes only, can ])retend to dispense with them — those tliiii can write well, and those that cannot write at all. Tiio Knglisli Jjan<;ua;^(? is pre-eminently a mixed Liiiij ^uage. Its basis indeed is Saxon, but ujion this basis licl a very varied superstructure, of Danish and of I^orinniii Fi'cneh, of ]\rodorn French and of (ir(^ek, o\' Classical Liitiij and of the Latin of the i\Iiddle A^cs imported at differcii:! periods and upon ditfcu'cnt occasions. ^Vor(ls from thosij languages are comprehended by the writer just in the ])i'o portion tliat he coinprehends their origin and their dcriva] tion. Hence it is that the knowledge of isolated words it siibordinatc to the formation of a style; and hence it is tli;i;| tlio rules for their investigation are (their aim and objeiil being alone considered) akin to the rules of Khetoric. This however is but a small part of what may be oui| studies. It is well to know how Time atfects Languagi? and in wliat way it modifies them. It is well to know howl one dialect grows out of another, and how its (dder staS(' Kiiiits arc i>niiits of l'.tyiintln;;y , tli(! word Ix'iii;;' used ill its ,rr\- laxcst and its largest sense; and points nt" Mtyimdo^y iiii>t , ill n(» wiso, 1)0 ne^lei'ted or niidervalued. ill •ctnros upon tlioso (juestions will t'oi-ni tlie Mtyiiioiojj,!- ,, part ol' a course; and Lectuivs upon I'rose (.'oniposilioii V IJlictorieal part oloiie; whilst the twi), taken to,:;(tlier, vill ;:ive a course upon the l'!ii;;lish Lan^uajjjo, in coutradis- liiiictioii to one upon the Kii;j,lisli Literalurti. I In respect to the latter, I shall, j.t rej^ular iiiter\als, jix luiou some new period, or soiiie new suhjcct, and, to the Tjjcst ot" my power, ilhustrate it. 'I'lius niiicli I'or th\! divisions and sulxUvisions ot the sub- I't-iiiatter. The eonslderati(ins that come next in order are the i(»n- sidinitions of tin; manner of exhibitin";' it, the considerations Jit' the knowledp,e that can be detailed, and the considera- rmns of the trains of thouf;lit th.'it can be inculcated. ! Tliero are those wlio believe that a good styhj is not to ho taught. ]Many think that tlie habit of writing good I'rose, h like the poAVcr of creating good J'oetry; a privilege that kve are born to, and not a ])os^e.ssion that we can earn; and ti wit once said that, in order to write clearly, it Avas only [iifcessary to understand what you would write about. If Itliis Ije true, then is composition an easy matter indeed; or, in say the very least, a perspicuous style is as common as a rlcar understanding. Tlu! experience of the world has, iiwever, set aside tlu; d(!i'ision of the Avit, and the practice f inexperienced writers has bcdied his d(»gmji. To write you must understand not only tin; iiuilirr but the ntr- Thus then it is, that, with resjx'ct to the use (d books, 111 I' ivell nd with respect to the use of rules, in our attempts at the .(innation of a good style, some jjersons neglect them as iiiavailing, and some despise; them as superlluous. I Towards accurate writing Habit of some sort is indispon- pably essential. Yet tlii« indis})ensable habit is not neces- parily a liabit of tvriliiKj. A ])ersou wlio writes no more fr(>- fjucntly than the common occasions of life demand, sliall 'vcutually, j)rovided that lie will habitually write his best, \\\'\\o accurately. Now the habit of criticism , and the habit if attention essential to habits of Avriting our best , a second person is, I think, able to inculcate. iSucli a second perr- on should be familhar with bad as well as Avith good Avri- ing; even, as the ])hysician sliall grow conversant, not Avitli ealtli only, but Avitli disease also. lie should knoAV Avhat re the more egregious errors in composition ; he should I* INAlKiUli.VL I.KC'TIIU;. know also whiit are tlio more usual ones. He should I learn(Hl in the inaccuracies of good authors, and dccplvi eruditci in the absurdities of bad ones; recognii'.ing' f'alstl taste under all its disguises, and holding up, as a boaeoif to avoid, the pitiful and)ition of niarmerisni and of writiiij.1 tinely. The principles by which he tries these things, liJ cfin lay before his hearcirs: and he can illustrate ■ lem witlj a prodigality of connnentary. And those who hearkini slial tluis grow critical. And, mark — the reader that continually! and habitually criticizes others, soon comes to, continually and habitually, criticize himself. He grows fastidious, ii- it were, perforce. In this way two things may be done : our criticism ni.iyi be sharpened, and its edge niay be turned upon ourselv(;;, At this I aim, and not at teaching liluitoric systematica. r,. The father vi' Horace, as we learn from the testimony oil his son, was peculiar in his notions of education. Jn lii>| eyes it was easier to eschew Vice than to imitate Virtiio.| Too wise a man not to know that an unapproachable mod< was no model at all, he let (for instance) the modesty ofl Virgil (as modest virtues generally coiitrive to do) spc . furl itself. But he counselled his son against the prodigality nl Ijarrus, and held up, with parental prudence, the dctecteili peccadilloes of Trebonius. Now the system, that produces a negative excellence iiii morals, may produce also a negative excellen e in literal ture. More than tiiis (for the truth must be ti d) Art can! not do. For Wit, and Vigour, and Imaginati t we musti be indebted to Nature. / /iiioiv that the system of picking out, and h ding up, (uther a neighbour's foibles, or an author's inele< ncies, \>\ not a gracious occupation; the question, howeve , is, iiol| wliether it be gracious or ungracious but whether t be effi- cient or inefficient. Whosoever is conversant with the writings o etymolo- gists must be well aware, that there are few subjects wlioro- in men run wild to the degree that they run wild in 7s7'/ molor/y. A little learning, dangerous everywhere, is preemi- nently dangerous in Etymology. There has been in tl!e| world an excess of bad etymology for two reasons. The discovery of remote analogies is not only mental ox- 1 ercise, but, worse luck, it is a mental amusement as wcI' The imagination is gratified, and ('riticism thinks it liarsli| to interpose. Again, there is no language that a nuin so willingly illu- strates as lu! illustrates his own. He knows it best, and ho INAUOIIUAI- m;( ruiiK. i) itiulios it with tlic greatest case. He loves It not wisely )ut too well. lie iiiids in its structure now j'.nd peculiar [icauties; he overvalues its excellenee, and he exaggerates |ts autifiuity. iSueh are the men who talk in Wales, of the ibiqiiity ol the Celts; in (lerinany, of the Teutonic (Jrigin [)f the Konians ; and in Ireland of the Phoenician extraction )t' the Milesians. Thus then, two out of the Thousand and One causes of )a(l Etymology are the reason psychological, and the rea- son patriotic. Nciiiini cicdctidum cle Palria sua. i think that at the entrance upon an unsettled su]>jeet, uijin should boldly say, and say at the very onset of his iarccr, upon Avhese opinions he relies, and whose opinions lie distrusts, lie should profess himself, not indeed the liiiplicit folloAver of any School, but he should name the ?ciiool that he preferred. He should declare whose books lie could reconunend, and whose he would eschew. Thus, If 1 were lecturing upon (Jeology, I should say, at once, Ivliotlier 1 were what is called a Scriptural Ocologist or a l-atituc'iinarian one: And thus, in the department in point, name the writers I put faith in. In the works of Grimm uid Rask 1 place nuuh trust; in those of Home Tooko tome; and in those of Whiter and Vallancey (to name small liioii along with great) none whatsoever. In the studv of the Laniruaiies that have ceased to bo kpokon we find, in an Etymological view, one thing, and line tiling only; words as they have been affected by prc- ,ious processes of change; in other terms, the reatdls of thcs<' i)rocesses. But in the Language that we hear spoken around lis, and, still more, in the Language that we ourselves speak, [\e rind something more than rcsiiKs; avc find the jtroresst's that give occasion to them; in other terms, we see the change \is il lala's place. Within the lifetime of an individual, within ■ven a Vi>ry few years, those that look may find, not only hat certain words are modified in respect to their meaning, \n(l certain letters modified, in respect to their pronuneia- 1, but they may also see haiv these modifications arc iirought about, ascertaining — of words the intermediate Ineanings, and of letters the intermediate sounds. We nmy trace tlie gradations throughout. A\'e can , of our own Lan- jiuage, and in our own Times, see, with a certainty, what thange our Language more especially affects; wo can ob- serve its tendencies. And we can do this because Ave can ind towards what particular laxities (be they of meaning or !»(' tlioy of pronunciation) ourselves and our neighbours more; I'-^pfcially have a bias. We can, as it were, inr,phesij. ^^'c 6 INAlIcrilAI. I,K< TlIliK. (li I 1 I cannot do this -svitli tlu; Latin of Augustus ; wc cannot it Avitli the CJrcek of Pericles. Hence it is tliat wliat we ■will know, to a certainty, i Ktyniological processes, must be collected from Cotenipo rary Languages. Those who look for them elsewhere s('uli for the Living among the Dead; arguing from things un- known (at least unknown to a certainty), and so speculatinj; laxly, and dogmatizing unphilosophically. Hence it is, tiuii! in (Jotcmporary Languages, and of those Cotemporan ]janguages, in our own most especially, Ave may lay do{| and strong, and as the only true substratum of accurati criticism, the foundations of our knowledge of Etymoloj;! cal Processes. And, observe, avc can find them in a .sut'ti cient abundance provided that wc sul'ticiontly look out for them. For Processes, the same in kind, though not tlie same in degree, are found in all languages alike. No pro- cess is found in any one language that is not also fouml (in some degree or other) in our own; and no process can be found in our own language which does not (in some degree or other) exist in all others beside. There arc m such things as Peculiar Processes: since Languages differ from each other, not in the nature of their Processes, but in the degrees of their development. These are Ijold , perhaps novel, assertions, but they are not hasty ones. (1) Simjily considered as an Tnslrumeiil of Etymology I iiiia- gino that the study of Cotemporary Languages is, in its importance, of tlie very first degree; while next in value to this (considered also, as an Instrutnenl of Etymology,) is the study of Languages during what may bo called tlicii breakings -up, or their transitions. There arc; two stages in Language. Through these two st.iges all Languages, sooner or later, make their way; suim sooner than others, but all sooner or later. Of this lln; Latin language may serve as an illustration. \n the time of Augustus it expressed the relations of Time and Plan, in other words, its Cases and Tenses, by Declension am! (Jonjugation , or, broadly speaking, by Inflexion. In tin time of Dante there was little or no LiHexion, but there wa? an abundance of Auxiliary Verbs, and an abundance ot i'repositions in its stead. The expression of Time and l*lacc by independent words supers(M]c(l the expression by Liflcc- tions. Now in all Tjanguages the inflectional stage conios first. This is a Law. There are Languages that stay f(ir ever (at least for an indefinite time) in their earlier sta;;p. Others there arc again, that we nevtsr come in contact witli before they have proceeded to their later one. Language? i> I IXAL'fiUUAr, LKCTLMU:. c cannot f tliis latter kind nrc of subordinate value to the Ktyniolo- jist. Those that he values most are such as he sees in tlie |\vo stages : so beinj,' enabled to watch the breaking-u]) of \wQ, the constitution of the other, and the transition inter- iic(liatc to the two. Now our own lanf^uaao (the Anglo Saxon being borne |n mind) comes under the conditions that constitute a good md sufticient language as a disciplinal foundation in Ety- iidlogy. // ra/i be studied in Itvo slof/cs. When we come Id the Times of the (,'onquest we must gird up our loins for Ijio acquisition of a new Jjanguago. The breaking -up of the Latin (I speak for the sake of Illustration and comparison) is a study in itself. It is a ^tiidy complete and sufticient; not, however, more so than s the study of the J>reaklng-uj> of the Gothic. For in this stock of Tongues, not only did the Saxon pass into the Kiiulish, but the Ma^sodothic, the Scandinavian, and the I'risian , i-ach gave origin t(» some new Tongue; the first to ho High German, the second to the Languages of Scandi- navia, and the third to tlic jSIodern Dutch. The study then if the Languages of the Gothic stock is something more than a sufticient disciplinal foundation in Etymology. (2) 111 matters of pronunciation, living Languages have an Icxelusivc advantage. For dead Languages speak but to ho eye; and it is not through the eye that the ear is to be linstrncted. It is well for the Geologist to classify rocks, and to ar- Irangc strata, to distinguish minerals, and to determine fos- Isils; but it is far better if, anterior to this, he will study Itho Powers of Nature, and the Processes that are their ope- jrations: and these he can only study as ho sees them in Ithc times wherein he lives, or as he finds them recorded in lauthontic and undis])utod iiistories. AVith this knowledge he can criticize, and construct; without it he may invent and imagine. Novel and ingenious he uiay, perchance, be- Icome: but he can never be philosophical, and he can never he Scientific. So it is with the Etymologist. Whenever, I in a dead Language, he presumes a Process, which he has looked for in vain in a living one,' he outruns his data. The basis of Etymology is the study of existing Processes. Our Ijanguage has had its share; 1 must hasten to the consideration of our Literature. The Early Literature of most modern Nations consists of the same elements ; of Legends concerning their Saints, of ('hronicles, and of llynnis and Romances. Too much of till;-! fell into the hands of the Monks; and these Avere, too 8 INAIMJIIIAI, r.KCTl'RK. I 1 1 and l*agan times of our ancestor?,! often, the pro.saic writcM's of l)arl>uroiis l^atinity; for I'ms (if not in languafijo at least in idea) was, with tlieni, ll' rule; and Poetry the cxeeption. Sucli is the j2,eneral elia raeter of the Karly Modern Literature; in which, however, our Saxon ancestors were, somewhat (indeed much) nidn fortunate than their neighboinvs. ]\Ionkish writing was will theni an inijtortant element; but it was not the only oiif, They had an originality besides. And the Scandinavian,^ were more fortunate still. The worshippers of Odin am! Thor had a JlJi/f/io/nf/fj; and jMythologies are the Creator and Creations of Pocjtry. The Norse ^fythology is as jxw- tical as tlie (Irecian. 1 speak this advisedly. Now tlii> Mythology was connnon to all the Gothic Tribes. Tin Saxon and the Norse Literatures dealt (each in their degrcci with the same materials; they breathed the same spirit; and they clothed it in an allied Language. But the Saxon ]\Iy- thology is fragmentary ; while the Norse IMythology is a whole. For this reason Scandinavian (or Norse) Literature is not extraneous to my subject These, th(^ primeva must claim and arr(^!-t our attention; since it is from tlusr that our characteristic modes of Thought (call them (lothic, or call them Romantic) arc derived, [n the regions of Pa- ganism lie the dark fountains of our Nationality. Pesidc this, I consider that, even in the matter of Jjan- guagc, the direct Scandinavian element of tlie English is much underrated ; (3) and still more imderrated is the in- direct Scandinavian element of the Norman-French. And here, again, when we come to the Conquest, we nmt more neglecti [beauties, or I groat degree Be there i eulogies mori The Eliza lispre-eminer It is deeply, plexion of th [and much 1 is Shirley. I The transitic eays; Wit tlu'y wore t I had grown i 1)0 sobered : [of tlie write passes into diato. The. Hchool of C IVArcl'R.U, LKC'irilK. known l)ut impcrfoctly. Too many of us considor the Ag'O (if l''.li55al>eth as the Ago of vSliakspoarc exclusively. Too iiiiuiy of us have been luir^kMl by the one-sided partiality of the Sliakspearian coninientators. 1'liese men , in the mono- mania of their idolatry, not only elevate their author into a (iiant, but dwarve down his cotemporaries into pigmies. And who knows not how (on the moral side of the question) their writings are tilled even to nauseousness, with t!ie imputed maiignity of JJen .Jonson V Themselves being most malignant. This, however, has been, by the labor of a late editor, oitlicr wholly done away -with, or eonsiderably diluted, lie it with us a duty, and he it with us a labour of love, to seek those commentators who have rescued great men from tho iioglect of Posterity ; and be our sympathies with the diligent antiquarian, Avho shows that obloquy has originated unjustly; ami bo our a])probation Mith those who have corrected the errors of Fame, loosely adojjted, and but lately laid aside. Vet here we must guard against a reaction. JNIalone, and liis compeers, valued, or seemed to value, the Elizabethan Drama, just for the light that it threw up(»n the text of tlunr idol. GifFord, goaded into scorn by injustice, fought the tight on the other side, with strength and "with spirit; l)ut lie fought it like a partizan: reserving (too much, but as Kditors are wont to do.) his admiration and his eulogy for those whom he himself edited. Next came Hazlitt and (Char- les Lamb; who found undiscovered beauties in poets still more neglected. 1 think, however, that they discovered these lieauties, or at any rate that they exaggerated them, in a j^roat degree on account of their being neglected. lie there here a more (\atholic criticism ! be there here eulogies more discriminate I l)e there here tastes less exclusive I The Elizabethan Drama is pre-eminently independent, it is pre-eminently characteristic, it is also pre-eminently English. It is deeply, very deeply, imbued, with the colours and com- [ilexion of the age that gave it origin. It has nuudi Wisdom, and much Imagination. The last of our Early Dramatists is Shirley. With him terminates the School of Shakspeare. The transition hence is sudden and abrupt. Imagination d(^- lavs; Wit predominates. Amatory })oets write as though tliey Avore their liearts in their heads. Wit is i)erfected. Jt had grown out of a degeneracy of Imagination; it w^ill soon l)e sobered into Sense; Sense the predominant characteristic of tlie writers under Queen Anne. The school of Dryden passes into that of Pope, Prior being, as it were, interme- diate. The A\ra of the (Charleses comprises two Schools; the pcliool of Cowley, falsely called IMetaphysical , with an ex- 10 INAUO UUAL I.KCTURE. hi! i ' i cess of Fancy, and a deficiency of Taste, and tlio Scliool of Dry den, whose masculine and fiery intellectuality simulates, aye! and is, ji;enius. Traf^edy has run retrograde; but Co- medy is evolving itself towards a separate existence, ami towards its full perfection. The Spirit of Milton stands apart from his cotcmporaries; reflecting nothing of its age but its self-relying energy, moral and intellectual. Kow, although, the Sehools ofC-dwIey and the Schools of Dryden, differ essentially from that j)articular- section of the Elizabethan A'lra, which Ave have just contemplated, they do not differ, essentially, from anotlier section of that saiiio lera. Be this borne in mind. There are in Literature, \\u precipitate transitions. The greatest men, the most original thinkers, tiie most creative spirits stand loss alone than tho world is inclined to imagine. Styles of composition, that in one generation are rife and common , always exist in the age that went before. Thev wore not indeed its leadin-j The characteristics, but still they were existent within it metrical IMetaphysics of Cowley were the metrical metaphy- sics of Donne: the versified Dialectics of Dryden may he found, with equal condensation but less harmony, in the Elizabethan writings of Sir John Davics. The section of one age is the characteristic of the next. This line of cri- ticism is a fair reason (one out of many) for never overlook- ing and never underrating obscure composers and obsolete literature. The School of Pope, and the School of our own days, arc too far in the prospective to claim any immediate attention. And here I feel myself obliged to take leave of a subject, that continually tempts me to grow excursive. There are two sorts of lecturers; those that absolutely teach, and those that stinuilato to learn; those that exhaust their subject, and those that indicate its bearings; those that in- fuse into their hearers their own ideas, and those that set them a-thinking for themselves. For my own part, it is, 1 confess, my aim and ambition to succeed in tho latter rather than in the former object. To carry such as hear me throuuli a series of Authors, or through a course of Languages, in full detail, is evidently, even if it were desirable, an impos- sibility; but it is no impossibility to direct their attention to th(3 prominent features of a particular subject, and to in- stil into them the im])erious necessity of putting forth their own natural pow-ers in an independent manner, so as to read for themselves, and to judge for themselves. Noav as 1 would rather see a man's mind active than capacious; and. as I love Self-reliance better than Learning, I have no more NOTI'.S. n sfinmurK! cxj)CC'tiition, than, that instead of exhausting my siihjcct I may move yon to exhaust it tor yourselves, may sharpen crilieism, may indieate orij'inal sources, and, above all, suggest trains of honest, earnest, patient and persevering rcHeetion. N T K 8. XUTK 1 , p. ('.. !. '21. Tn ),(• ll i('l■tiull^S. itil iK(l ('!U(1 witli coiihdciice wo imist pruv i: tliat 'riicri- are tli ose who (• Iiavo aiiticipii toil lew rcasiiii for lielii'viiisr that tli iiitlci.'tioiial t'l(;?iioiits wen; once iiKlcpciKlciit roots: in otlu^r words (or rntlicr in a formal ('xj)ressi()n) that a ^ivcii case = the root -|- a jircjK)- sitidu, and that a fi-iven tcnso -- tlic root -f- tin; suhstantivo vorli. Now liL'lievin;;' tliat, althotigh two forms may lie thiis accounted for, the third may have a very ditl'crt'nt orijj'in, in other words, drawin;^ a dif- ference Iietween /t metliod of aecotintin^' for a i-'iven part of speecli, 1 l/ic nu'thod of so doin}>', I lind that the heariii^-s of tlie (dtjection am ar(; as follows The inde))endent words, anterior to their amalj^'amation with the root, ver as elements in intiection were either, lilve lid anterior to their till' jtresent prejiositions and the verli siihstantive , e.\]n)nents of the relations of Time and Place, or they were, like the present nouns and veibs, names expressive of ideas: and iiresiimin^' tlu; former to have been the ease, the old inHectcd fian^'iia^-es may have |K'ii<1s niioii tliis: viz. tluit Jill tlic prncosscs tlmrp oxistiiifj; .'ire tlic proi'csst's tluit exist clscwlit'rc , ••iiid tli.nt nil i)r(>c("*sf's wliieli, with a ^ivcii incrcuse of liiiiiffiiiif^o miiy at any fiitmt! time lie (Irvclopcil, uliall c.iiiicido, in kind, witli the iinuM'sscs of olhcr Laii- rimary divisions Avould he two: Istly, The processes that clianjre tii form of words, or the /'(irmal processes. [idh Th di • •liaufje tlieir vwaninfjs , or the /. 1 irocesses that jiiijiriil processes. Tho lirst of these would I)(^ based upon the afHnities and interidianpes of soiindn. tho so cond u])on the affinities and interchanijes wi ideas: tlu; sciences (amongst others) which they were erected on bein^, respectively, those of Acoust- ics and Metaphysics; and the dcfj^rees of Iltymolofjical probability would then coincide with the corn'spondence of the two sorts of pro- cesses. Few l^tymolofifiHts liavo any concojition of the enormous influence of small and common i)rocesses, provided that tho (;xtent of Lanf^uajrc that they affect be considerable. In the very ^eneralizin<^ classifica- tion of Langfua'iven de, 1'- 1. T2. ec- ,s' Were it not for tho admixture of other ((uestions, the present L ture mifrht have been entitled 77ie Sn/'/irienc>/ of lite Kn/pis/i /jonijiKUjc ir II Disiiplinid Sliidj/ in (jrammar iind hltiin:(diii]ii , ir respect ire of the fact oj its being the native Lonijiiage oj hlnylishnten. The ajipended (pialiticatimi is in no wis( iiiciit in Disc I'oh', a Spani (iraiiiiiiar from Laii;4iia;i'es re fore we can have acipiirei withstanding^ the industry, and acumon of continental critics, it may ^ tempt to collc( be doubted wh(!tlior tho rrinciples of ICtymolou-y (as a Science) havii not y(!t to be exhibited. 1 use the word e.rhihiled intentionally. 'J'liat many I',t,\ niologists apphj them I am most certain; where, however, do we tinil them detaileil in system, or nM'ojj-nised as tests? We draw too much \\\iii\\ the I'hiloloangaia>-e , wi ticc; in otlie we shall do oi Kii^laiid, of |ii.s('i|dinal In its (ilistracl nu Of these ab extent of lirtn;;' tiif Two Sta;;'e ill, it is more tiian it has j-'ci (iiilv) it is infer tlic (jiiantity of (ifcliaiij^e. Co ra;ii;'c of allie(l a iliti'erent slu (lotliic Stock II Greek ISrantdi DLsciplinal mei Let the Lan sake ; and by inii;lit think th and Cicsar, we tiinial hands th arc I he told tl i cidouce for the I tiou that in tii instead of bofi-i iliiig' our studio look illy' with CO ai'([uii'eiiients a I fc.d that tl inci'iai study of the I'olisli , Spanish, and lliin^'ariau l,!in^uaji"(;s ri'S|ii'utivt'ly. The very |ial|ialjlo reason for this is tliat, Ix:- I'liit! we can advantau^coiisly study the System of a Laii;;iiaj;e , we must lidve aciiuired a eertain (luantity of tiie detail of it. Now, in the at- tiiiijit to coUuct ideas of (ieniirul (iranunar from tlie study of a Forei;^n I,an;;iia};e, we shall liml that the Theory will be swamped by the I'rae- ticc; in other words, that, by attem|)tinj;- to do two thin^i's at once, \v(! shall do one of them iiadly. McM'cly, then, to liavc; predicated in llii^iand, of the i;ni;-lish Jjan<;iiaj;i! , that it was a good and suflicient jiisciplinal Instrument would have been to have remained silent as to its (ilistrnrt merits as such. Of these ai)Straet merits the def^'ree depends Up(^n the chronolojiieal extent of Lxnii'iiajic that we make use ot". To j^et them at their miorthumbrian (Glossaries to the original affinity iietweeu j tile (xtrcune Low' tJerman and the extreme Scandinavian Dialects: thus 1 auikiiig it indivect. It was once my opinion (out; which 1 have sinci; nidililied but not given up) that in the jtreseut English, and conse- [iliieiilly ill the IjOw Cicinianic Uranch of the Ciothic Stock, obscure hiacesof the great Scandinavian characteristics unz. the existtMice of a assive Middle or Ketlective Voice, and the peculiar exjiressioii of the w iNAL(ii;i{Ai. ij:('Ti;uK. noti;s. fJi'iiHc of tlic Definite Articiei coiild lie discovered: lint it was not ii|i(iii| tliis ideu tiiat I t'i)iiuiied the asseitioii in the text. 'J"he ([lU'Htion liuH its petrniiar diflieiiities. Words that have lonj,' pas se'na}^'e. indeed as every kind of Kncnv-I leil^fe, ninst he knowni at the expense of some other, comes upon wA nneonscionsly. The l>an;riiajrt'^ of tin' (iotliic Stock that I know hcsil are tho.se of Scandinavia ; the I'rovincial Dialect of lln^land which || have most stndied is that of Lincolnshire, and the neinhbonrinfr mari- time (.'onnti(!S. Mere the preeminence', of the Danish (Scandinavian element heinji' acknowledi>'e(i , the qnestion is whether it hi? Divvct or /h-I dhcrt. I am free, to confess that this circumstanci! sharpens my si<,dit for the perception (trne or false) of direct l>anish idements. As w c(nni| terbalanco, however, the consciousness of it enp^onders a projiortionatc self-distrust. rpon the whole, 1 wouhl rather that the sentence had run thus: Ih hircvt Sciiniliniirinn rlri/ii'/if in llir Hiinlisli is slid In he dclcvtiiini'il , iimlX licvi' (as i/i many other places) llwre is iiiic/i (jruiind I'uv the orifjiiial invcs-l lifiutor. duties of OV creatures arc IN'IKODIKTOKV Li:(Tl KK, j)i;i.ivi;i!i:i) AT TllK ^IIDDLKSKX HOSPITAL, OCTOJiKlt I, |>S47. 1'lioro arc certiiin facts of sucli ])arainoniit iinportanco, that thoy not only boar, but rcMpiirc, repetition. Tlie common duties of evcry-day life, and the connnon rules of social po- licy, arc matters -svliicli no moralist states once for all: on tli(; contrary, tliey are roitcratotl as often as occasion requi- res — and occasion requires tliom very often. Kow it is from the fact of certain medical duties, both on the part of those who teach and those who learn, bein^ (if this nature, that, with the great schools of this metropo- lis, every year brings along with it the necessity of an ad- dress similar to the one which I have, on this day, the ho- nour of laying before you. You that come here to learn, come under the pressure of a cogent responsibility — in some cases of a material, in ')tliors of a moral nature — in all, however, most urgent and most imperative. To the public at large — to the vast mass of your fellow- croaturcs around you — to the multitudinous body of human beings that sink under illness, or sutler from pain — to tin* whole of that infinite family^ which has bodily, not unmixed with mental affliction , for its heritage upon earth — to all who live, and breathe, and feel, and share with yourselves the connnon lot of suffering — here, in their whole height and depth, and length and breadth, are your responsibilities of one kind. You promise the palliation of human ailment: hut you break that high [)romise if you act unskilfully. You call to you all those that are oppressed ; but you may aggra- vate the misery that you should comfort and relieve. You lioar with you the outward and visible signs, if not of the high wisdom that heals, at least of the sagacious care that 16 INTIloDrc'TuKV l.l'C'l I lu:. iilloviatcs. Less tlijui tlii.s is a stoiu' in tln' plac(; of hrcad and less tliaii this is poison in the t'onntain-sprin^s of Ikijx' Not at i>r('S('nt, indccMl, but within a few hricf y.ars it wiln 1)1' so. Shoit as is human lifi', tho jKM'iod for the h'arniiii; of your proiV'ssion is but a frartion of th alone, are i'ondest of talkiu;;' thus; and men (»f no standin;i' of any soi't are fondt st of bein;^' their! echoes. It is the current paradox of your practical men, i. v. oi men who can b(! taught ity practice alone. Clear your heaiUj of this nonsense. It will make you e^^otists, and it will make you empirics: it will make you nu'u of onr; idea: it will niakf you, even when you iancy it would do you just the contrnrv.j th<^ wildest of speculators. The practice of practical men, in the way I now use; the words, is a capital plan for makiiii: anythini;- in the world, save; and except practitioner.*. Weill this has seemed excursive, but it is not so: it is ;i reason a<^ainst the j)uttin^' otV of your l<'arnin;;-time. When vour lirst case comes, xou nmst be as tit I'or it as you arc rciady tor it. A difference between old practitioners and bej^inners tlicro always will be — so lon^- at least as there is value in expe- rience, and a difference between a<;(' and youth; hut tlii> ditferenco, which is necessary, nmst be limited as much as possible, nmst bo cut down to its ])i'oper dimensions, and nmst by no means whatever be i»crnuttod to exa!j,geratc it- self into an artificial magnitud(^ If it do so, it is -svorsc than a simple speculative error, — it is a mischievous delusion: it engenders a pernicious procrastination, Justifies supineness, and creates an excuse for the neglect of opportunities: it wastes time, which is bad, and encourages self-deception, which is worse. A difference between old practitioners and beginners there always will be: but it should consist not so much in the (|uality of their work as in tlie ease Avith which it is done. It should be the gain of the practitioner, not the loss of the patient. UN I'ln: Nil i»v or Mi'Licisr. 17 Nuw, if I d'u\ tliotio wlioiii 1 liJiNc tlic Ikiuoiu' to adilrc.'ss jiu injustice! ol' bm)j)osiii}4- tliiit the iiioi'iil roasoii.s tor disi'i- |liii:il j»n;|iariition, (liiriii};' tlic course' of study now {il)out to entered iut«t, were thrown awny upon tlieir minds and jDiiseiiiu'es, I slu)uid l)i' at IHm riy to inai<.i' slioit woriv ottliis [lilt ot' my ar;;unient, and to di>[tos(^ ol mucli ot" it in a most Iriet' and .summary manmr. I should b^ !»t liUt-ify to say, |i hni;;iia^c more phiin and eomidimcntary , a., 1 uiorc^ co^;f'nt jian |)eisuasiv(' , that you mi/s/ he nj. to your v ^ik wlien lull bef^in it. It' you 8tund)b' at the ibj shoM, you linve Irokcn (bjwn tor at'ti'r-litV. A bbnub'r .at the ( Mmmcncomont taihu'c tor the tinu' to come, l-'urthcrmore; mahi praxis a niisib-mcanor in tb(! eyes id' the haw, tor whicdi you may |r>t l)c mulcted by a jtiry, and afterwards be j^ibbcted by lie press. This fact, which there is no (b'uyin;;', ou^ht to ic conchisive aj^ainst thi; })reposterous docti in<( wlii(di 1 liave pcpu.seil: coiu'hisive, however, as it Is, it is one whicii I lave not chosen to put prominent. Let a better feolin weeks, ov days, or even hours, to play with. It is a sufficin space for you to lay in that knowledge of your profcssid which the (sxperience and opinion of your examining boaiv have thought proper to require. 1 believe the amount thus re quired, to be, like the time granted for the acquisition li it, a fair amount. But it is not a high one, and it is ikI right that it should be so. Standards of fitness that arc sij np for the measure of a body of students so numerous ;ii those in medicine, rarely err on the side of severity. Tiiol favour mediocrity; and they ought to favour it. It is satd and that is all they have a right to look to. AVhat tliel profess is never very formidable; and what they require generally less than what is professed. But the time that it sufficient for this modicum (or minimum) of professional Icani ing is not the time sufficient for the formation of a pract tioner of that degree of excellence whicli the competition > an open profession, like that of medicine, requires as tli] guarantee of success. An examining board has but one poiil ft\ I'MK STl 1»V <»F MI'.DICINi;. 19 Lo liink to — it must son that you can ])racti.so with safety to he public. It iicvor ensures, or professes to ensure, that .on shall practise with success to yourself, or even that you i-liiill practise at all. In tlu; eyes of an Examiner, as in those rf a commissioner of lunacy, there are but two sorts of in- lli\i(luals; those that can be let loose upon the public, and Ihosc that cannot. In the (>yes of the ])ublic there is every [Iciirec of excellence, and every variety of comparative merit br demerit. Now as to the way of attaininfj; tliese lii<^-hcr degrees of [ncrit, and the rewards, moral or material, which they ensure which follow tliem as truly as satisfaction follows riglit ac- rions, and as penalties follow wroni;- ones. The opportunity i\(' have spoken of. It consists in the whole range of means nid ap[)liances by which we hero, and others elsewhere, nail ourselves of those diseases that humanity has suffered, Hid is sntfering, for the sake of alleviating- the misery that hey seem to ensure for the future. Disease with us is not riiily an object of direct and immediate relief to the patient kvii(» (>ndures it, l»ut it is an indirect means of relief to suf- ferers vet untouched. Out of evil comes good. We make c helpful to the sound; the dead available to the li- inn'. Out of pestilence comes healing, and out of the cor- hiption of death the laws and rule of life. SuH'ering we liavo, and teaching we have, and neither must be lost upon run. It is too late to find that these ol)jects, and objects like them, are repugnant and revolting. These things should liavo been thought of before. Your <'hoice is now taken, and |t must be held +o The discovery that learning is unplea- sant is the discovery ofani'stake in the choice of your pro- fession; and the sooner you remedy such a mistake the l)etter the better for yourselves, the better for your friends, the jf^'ttor for the public, and the better for the profession itself. Steady work , with fair opportunities — this is what nnikes M'actitioners. The one without the other is insufficient. There |s ail expenditure of exertion where your industry outruns rour materials, and there is a loss of useful facts when oc- casions for observation are neglected. .Se(! all you can, and hear all you can. It is not likely tiiat cases will multiply themselves f(»r your special obser- ptions, and it is neither the policy n| of beginners. 13eforo this power is attaiiuMl your observationj must be disciplined into the accuracy and the rapidity ofaii] instinct; and to this power of observation — attainable niih ox Tin: sirDV oi- Micnrcixr:. )v lons^ prnotico, and nfto.r lono; practieo — a liigli power of fc'riectiou must be superadded. Xo pucli power must be presumed on. If the student de- liiilc liimself, the disease will undeceive him. The best [iractitiouers, in tlie lon<^' run. are those Avliose memory is Jtnrod with the greatest number of indiN'idual cases — indivi- llnal cases well observed, and decently classified. It is cur- Mitlv stated that the ])eculiar power of the late 8ir Astlcy ["onper was a ])0wer of memory of this sort, and I presume \]\!\i no better instance of its value need be adduced. Now memory for cases implies the existence of cases to re- Inoniher; and before you arrange them in the storehouse of !\our thoughts you must have seen and considered; must have iisod both your seiises and your understanding; must have loen. touched, ami handled with the one, and must have Mndorstood and reflected witli the other. I ain talking of these things as they exist in disciplined intellects, and in retentive memories; and, perhaps, it may 11)0 objected that I am talking of things that form the ex- Iception rather than the rule; that I am measuring the power lof common men by those of extraordinary instances. 1 weigh juiv words, when I deliberately assert, that such, although ])nrtinlly the case, is not so altogether; and that it is far less ilio case than is commonlv imaf-ined. In most of those in- stances whore avc lose the advantage of prior experience, hy omitting the application oj' our knowledge of a pi'cvious similar case, the faidt is less in the laxity of memory than [in the original incompleteness of the observation. Observe iclnsely, and ponder well, and the memory may take care if itself. Like a well-applied nick-name, a Avell-made ob- jsorvation will stick to you — whether you look after it or ne- ;:lo('t it. The best way to learn to swim is to try to sink, and it is so because floatation, like mennu'y, is natural if yiiu set a])out it rightly. L-^i those who distrust their re- niond)rance once observe closely, and then forget if they can. Ther(> are good reasons for cultivating this habit at all times, but there are especial reasons whv those who are on the threshold of their profession should more particularly cultivate it. Not because you have much to learn — we have all that — nor yet because you have the privilege of great opportunities — we have all that also — nmst you watch , and rotloct, and arrange, and remember. Your time of life S'ives you an advantage. The age of the generality of you is an age when fresh facts are best seized: and best sei/.ed hecansc they are fredi. Wlutlu'r you are prepared to un- derstand their whole import, as you may do at some future 22 IXTRftDI*! roliV LKCTlur.. ! i i ! li period, is doubtful. It is c(3rtain tlint tlio effect of their no- velty is to impress them more eogently on your reeolleetioii, And this is praetiee — practice; in the j^ood sense of tlK[ term, and in a sense ^vlJich induces mo to guard against thej misconstruction of a previous application of it. A few .soiij tonces back 1 used tin; phrases prdvtical men, adding- thai those so called weu men who could be taught l»y practitd only. I confess that this mode of expression Avas dispamj ging. For the purpose to -which it was applied it was mcantl to be so. It is a term you must be on your guard against. Praclice is so good a thing of itself that its name and ajjpoll lation are applied to many bad things. Slovenliness is jdiic- tice, if it suits the purpose of any one to call it so; con- tempt for reading is practice; and bleeding on all occasions! Avhen you omit to purge is |)ractice; — and bad practice ton Be on your guard against this: but do not be on your guaii against another sort of practice: the practice of men avIioI first ol)serve, and then reflect, and then generalise, and tlim reduce to a habit their results. This is the true light for yim| to follow, and in this sense practice is not only a safe guid' but the safe guide. It is experience, or, if you choose al more })hilosopliic term, induction. Theoretical men can bi| taught by this, and the wisest theories are taught by it. When I said that practical men wore taught by practito only, I never implied that they were the only men that prac- tice could teach. Experience makes fools wise; but fools arc not the only persons who can profit by experience. See and hear — the senses must administer to the under- standing. Eye, and ear, and finger — exercise these that they may bring in learning. See and hear — the senses must administer to their own improvement. Eye, and ear, and finger — exercise these, that they may better themselves as instruments. The knoAv- ledgc! is much , but the discipline is more. The knoAvledgc is the fruit that is stored, but the discipline is the tree that yields. The one is the care that keeps, the other the cul- tivation that supplies. The habit of accurate observation is l)y no means so dif- licult as is darkly signiiied by logicians, nor yet go easy as is vainly fancied by empirics. It is the duty of those Avho teach you to indicate the medium. Tlic tenor of some of my observations runs a risk of mis- reprcsentation. It has I'cen limitr'd. It has spoken of cases as if there was nothing in the Avhole range of medical study but cases; and of observation, as if the faculties of a me- dical man Averc to take a monomaniac form, and to run upon Ihe illustration O.N 'J'HK SltDY Ol' AIKIMCINK. 23 )serv.'itiori only; of hospitals, as if tlioy consisted of beds iti ])atients alone; and of clinical medicine and of clinical rgfiy, as if tlievcj was no such a paramount subject as phy- jlduy. and no such important subsidiary studies as chemistry [id botany. It is all hospital and no school — all wards and no jusc'um —all sickness and no health. This has been the lino lat 1 have run on; and I feel that it may be imputed to mo hat I liave run on it too long and too exclusively. Whether untlcrvalue the acquisition of those branches of knowledge lliic'li are collateral and subordinate to medicine, rather than clcinonts of medicine itself — which are the apju'oaches to po temphi rather than the innormosst shrine — will be seen in lie t^C'cjuel. At present 1 only vindicate the prominence which jiis been given to clinical observation, by insisting upon the liburdinate character of everything that is taught away from lie bed, and beyond the sensible limits of disease. No single libjeet thus taught is tin; direct and ])rimary object of your (arning. The art of healing is so. Y(i ■ learn other things liat you may understand this; and in hu itals at least you Lara tliem Avith that \lew exclusively, i you Avish to be physiologist, chemist, or botanist, irrespectivelv of the liedical application of the sciences of physiology, chemistry, Ind botany, there are better schools than the MidtUesex llos- lital, or, indeed, than any hospital Avhatever. There they ay be studied as nu\theniatics are studied at Cambridge, r as classics at Eton — simply for their own great and in- creiit values. But here you study them differently , that is, ^ mathematics are taught at a military college, or as clas- ics are taught at the College of Preceptors, for a specific mpose, and Avith a limited vicAv — Avith a view limited to he illustration of disease, and Avith the s|)ecific ])urpose of endering them indirect agents in therapeutics. If you could ontrive the cure of disease Avithout a knowledge of morl:>id rocesses, it Avould bo a Avaste of time to trouble yourself ivith pathology; or if you could bottom the phenomena of 'lliseased action Avithout a kiinwlcdge of the actions of health, jhysiology would be but a noble science for philosophers, r if you could build up a system of physiology , dotermin- nn; the functions of organs and the susceptibilities of tis- iies, inde})endent of the anatomy^ of those organs and those issues, scalpels Avould be as irrelevant to you as telescopes; ind if these three sciences received no elucidation from che- mistry, and botany, and physics, then Avould chemistry, and lotany and physics, have the value — neither more nor less — f the art of criticism or of the binomial theorem. What Jyoii arc taught in the schools is taught to you, not because it !l 21 lNTRnT)r('I'OKV I.Kf'l I lil". is ■worth knowing;- — for Latin, and Gvock, and Mathcniatk} are worth knowing' — but becanso, bcloro patients can \\ cured, thoy are necessary to be learned. And, in order to be taught at all, they must be ti\\\<:\\ systematically. It is an easy matter to ask for a certaii amount of these two collateral sciences — to pick and cho(J just the parts wanted for use, to require just that 7n<)(Hni' "of botany which illustrates the PharmacopaMa, and just tlm- fraoincnts of chemistry that )nake prescriptions safe, :ii urine intelligible. It is easy, I say, to ask for all this: li the art of thus teachin<^ per sn//nfn has yet to be discovcvi The -svhole is more mana.f^eable than the half. AVhat it in; bo with others is more than 1 can tell; l)ut, for my dv, ? particular teaching, 1 would sooner take tlie dullest boy iVi:- the worst school, and start him in a sul)ject at the ri-! end, than begin at the wrong end with the cleverest priz man that ever flattered parent or gratifi paramonnt an! cxclnsivo t<»n;:n(', dcvclojicd. at Hrst, rapidly and at the n- pf-nso of tlic smaller lan;;na^'r's of tin; world, and, suhst;. qucntly, slowly anfl at that of tlio innr(> wicbdy-diiVusod oiie;i,[ shall have roplacod tlif still nunnTous ton^nos of tho niiv-l toontli contniy; and whon all tin; dialocts of tlu; world sIimI! be nior;;,od into ono Universal Lnn^nafjo, tin; sanii^ snlijctt-l matter for tho study of tho structuro of Lan C\. (1, suhst.j isod Olios, tlio iiiiif.. oriel slinll i> subject-l :ts growtlil study of| that tli(yi t(,'.St coil]. iiiodora! ley li,'i\>, o sp(>c;,r CO — tl- e; l>"t. / d in liii, spokrr ll<1^ I( t; ' 1 earn ill:: r toniruf. rtari('(> in an oljjcot ig- it thai No o]ii- ty of the ability of in eitlier. 3n {\\mPi\ i of siiii- lontal fa- also ,^ivi' lag'o and le of the The re- > of spc- alue, for smporavy !oiit cen- it is em- liotlii'd lias inipru\(;d. J>ecaii.s(j the iscii'iititic kiioulcd;^*! whiidi lio all w ho want thu key , is (so to sayj locked up in it, luib iiKi'i'ascid some hundred per cc^ut. 15ut it may go down again. Suppose, for instance, that jiiuw writers of pre-eminent merit, eniiobhi some of the mi- liior languages of Europe — the Danish, Swedish, Dutch, (&.c. ISiK'li a fact would divide the attention of surans — attention Iwhicli can only be bestowed upon some second, at the ex- liK'iiije ol' some first, object. In such a ease, the extent to jwiiich the German language got studit.'d would be affcfcted jiiiucli in the' same way as that of the French lias been by Itlic (levelo[tment of the literature of (jerniany. Or the area over whi(di a language is s[)okeii may increase; las it may, also, diminish. Or the number of indivitluals that speak it may niultipiy — |lhi' area being the same. ; Or the s])ecial application of the language, whether for the ]iiir[ioses of commerce, literature, science, or politics, may linoiiie changed. In this way, as well as in others, tlie IJiglish is becoming, day by day, more important. There are other inHuenees. ; High as is the value of the great classical languages of (ircoce and Kome, we can easily conceive how that value I mi;^lit be enhanced. Let a manuscript containing the Avorks |uf some of the lost, or imperfectly preserved, writers of an- tiquity be discovered. Let, for instance, (iibbon's desitlerala — the lost !>icads uf Livij , the Oriilions of J/yperides, or the Dra- iiHis of Mcnander — be made good. The per-centage of classi- cal scholars would increase; little or nnich. Some years back it was announced that the Armenian i language contained translations, made during the earlier centuries of our era, of certain classical writings, of which [the originals had been lost — lost in the interval. This did not exactly make the Armenian, with its alphabet of six- aiid-tliirty letters, a popular tongue; but it made it, by a liaction, more popular than it was in the days of Winston and La Croze, when those two alone, of all the learned men tit' Europe, could read it. Translations tell in another way. A\'liatever is Avorth read- ing in the Danish and SAvedish is forthwith translated into (ieriiian. E. g. Professor lietzius of Stockholm wrote a good Manual of Anatomy. He had the satisfaction of seeing it translated into German. He had the further satisfaction of hearing that the translation ran through five editions in less time than the original did through one. Now, if the (Jermans were to leave off translating the 30 its iiii: siiDv (tr i.ANtii A:|)ortant — one. Tlio stnuturo of tlio human body i.s worth knowing', (>V('n if thi! inv('Hti;;at()i* of it be neither a ))rai'litioner in medicine nor a teaeher of anatomy; and. in liU(i manner, the btrue- tnre of lh(! human lan<;ua>>e is an imi)ortant study iiresnec- tive (»f tho partieuhir forms of speech whereof it nuiy taci- htat(! tlio ac((uirenient. Tlie words on th(! dia;;ram-ljoard Avill now be ex[)lainod. Tliey aro meant tn illustrate the cbiss of facts that compa- rative! philoh)<;y supplies. The first runs — Klein : f'lrtin :: Prtil : Pclilus. It shows tlio extent to wliich certain ideas aro associated. It sliiiws, too, sometliinf? more; it shows that such an asso- ciation is capable of Ixiing demonstrated from the phen(»m(!na of language instead of bein^ a mere u priori speculation on tlie part of tho nu'ntal philoso])her. h'Irin is the (jlerman f(»r ailjective, the English of the l^atin word /niintlits. In (Jer man the word is rein. Now, notwithstanding the difference of meaniiig in the two tongues, dean and /,h'iH aro one and the same word. Vet, how are the ideas ol clcdnlincaa and lilllnii'ss connected? Tlic (ireek language has the word /u/pocoris/na , meaning a knii of oukarment , and tlu^ adjective hypocorinlir. Now, clfdii-ncss, or mud-ncss, is one of the elements that mak(! Iiijljocorisfic terms (or terms of endearment) ap])licable. And so is smtf/lnt'ss. Wc talk of pri'ffi/ lillle ffcurs, a thousand times, where wo talk o^ prcKij bin denrs once. This, then, explains the connexion; this tells us that clean in English is kk'in in German, word for word. Vou doubt it, perhaps. You shake your head, and say, tiiat the connexion seems somewhat indefinite; that it is just one of those points wliich can neither hv. proved nor dis- proved, lie it so. Tho evidence can 1)e amended. Observe the words pclil and pclilus. PctU (in French) is exactly what Ucin is in German, i. c, lillle. J'cliliis (in Latin) is very nearly what clean is in English, /. c, desircf/ , or f/esirahle. That pclil comes from pclilus is undeniable. Hence, where tho German mode of thought connects the ideas of smullness and cleanness, the Latin connects those of mallncs and (Icsiralulilt/; so that as pclil is to pclilus, so is klcin to clean. In the diagram this is given in the formula of a sum in the Rule of Three, I I 32 ON' Tin: sTi;i)V or i.anoiaci:. The words just noticed explain the connexion of ideas in the case of separate words. The forthcoming help us in u much more difficult investij^ation. What is the import of such sounds as that of the letter s in the word father-*'? It is the sign of the plural number. Such is the qrestion — such tluj answer ; question and answer connected in the word /'afhcrs solely for the sake of illiis- tratidu. Any other word, and any other sign of cast;, num- ber, person, or tense, vvould have done as well. liut /i' the answer a real onoV Is it an answer at aH? llow come such things as plural numbers, and signs ofj plural numbers, into language? llcjw the particular plural i before us came into Ijcing, I (^annot say; but 1 can show how some plurals have. Let us explain tlie fidlowing — Nyi rz=z J. Nyi-u-de ==; trr. Ngu z=z i/iou. Nyo-n-da = i/e. NijH =~ lie. N(/r - n - da ::;= Ihey. J la z=i mill. Me -cam := mc. The da (or dc) in the second colunm, is the sign of the plu- ral number in a language which shall at present be naiiie-j less. It is also the preposition willi. Kow tvHh denotes associaltdn ; association pluralilij. Hence Ngi-n-dc = I + == 'i' if, nslcad of saying /'alliera , Ave said fdilicr ?n(i)iij , ov /'(illwr /)i- i/cr; reduplieation l)eing one of tlu! niake-sliifts (so to say) t' this ])eri(>(l. The languages allied to the ( Jliinese belong iu this (dass. In the second stage, the separate words eoaIesc(;, but not perfectly as to disfigure their originally separate eharae- er. The llungarian persons have illustrated this. Langnagc o\v hceonics Avhat is eall(>(l (((Jdhilhidk'. TIk! ]iarts etdiere, ut the eohesion is imperfect. The majority of languages re agglutinate. The Latin and Greek tongues iUustrate the third stage, 'he })arts originally separate, then agglutinate, now beconu^ niodilied by contact as to look like secondary parts of a ingiC word ; these original separate substantive characters ciiig a matter of inference rather than a patent and trans- areiit fact. The s in falltcn^ (which is also the .v in paf/r-s m\ TtdriQi^-g) is in this predicament. Lastly, inflections are replaced by prepositions and anxi- iary verbs, as is the case in the Italian and French when ()iiij)are(l witli the l^atin. I'ridy, tlien, may we say that tin! phenomena of speech re the phenomena of growth, evolution, or development; hill as such must they be taught. A cell that glows, — not crystal that is built up, — such is language. r>ut these Avell-dcvised selections of suggestive examples, [s'hcrehy the student may rise from y a-ticulars to generals, cc, are not to be found in the ordinary grannnars. Indeed, It is the very reverse of the present system; Avhero there ire twenty appeals to the memory in the shape of what is [ailed a ru/c, for one appeal to the understanding in the [liape of an illustrated process. So muidi the Avorsc for the ["xisting methods. Mdidds applied to growing trees — cookery-book receipts For making a natural juice — these are the paralhds to the tirtiiieial systems of grammar tn llicir worst /onus. The belter [•an be excused, sometimes reconnnended ; even as the J.,in- la'au system of botanical teaching can, in certain cases, be [ised with safety, prorirled at trays that its artificial character pc cxji/aiHCf/ hcforeliand , and insisted an throaf/liinit. To stand on tin; level of the Linna'an system, an artificial irannnar must come under the following condition : — Jt must Y'uve l/ir student notldiaj to unlearn wlicn he cumes to a natural one. 3G i>N Tin; >i'ii>v oi" i.AM.r \(;i:, How can this bo donoV It can be doiiG, if tlio ar aninia vlan will Ijc content to teach forms only, leaving proccs; alone. Let liini say (for Instance) that tiie Latin for — / call is roc-o. Thou callcst , vuc - as. ('J Call/'fu/ , I ralinL ror-ans. <■«>(■ -avi iVc .^( Jiut do not let him say that active aorists are formed froiil futures, and passive ones from the third person singular i' the perfect. His forms, his paradigms, Avill be right: lii rtiles, in nine cases out of ten, wrong. I am satisfied tlm languages can be taught withoiit rules and by paradigms onlv This recognition of what has been called arli/'icial graii.l mar for the teaching of special languages , as opposed t th le general grammar ot tin! comparative jilnloiogist, slitniL serve to anticipate an objection. 'Would you/ it may U asked, 'leave tlie details of languages like the Latin, (iredi French, German, i^c. — languages of eminent ])ractical uti- lity — untaught until such time as the student shall hiiv: dipped into Chinese, touched upon Hungarian, and taken i general idea of the third stage of develoi)inent from the La tin, and of the fourth from the French V If so, the penoiJ of life when ihe memory tor woi'ds is strongest will have pa? sed away before any language but his own mother-tongue \\\ \ )een ac Tl quir( le recou'n ition of such a thiny,- as artificial -jr immar an- th wcrs tins 111 tl le neii'atiV' If a special language be wantoi'i let it be taught by-times: only, if it cannot be taught the most scientific manner, let it be taught in a manner little unscientific as possible. \\\ this lies :in argument against the ordinary teaching- speak as an Englishmanj of Knglish. What do we le I y if Li the ordinary teaching of what is called the gra f the Enoli^ih lanjiuage there are t\\o elements. Th AI'Ll iiininil lero !: something professed to be taught which is not taught, bus which, if taught, would l)e worth learning; and there is some thing which, from being ahn-ady learned better than ni) is III can teach it, requires no lessons. The one (the latter vetice of the Lnii'lish tongue. This tit tl le use aiu pr Englishman has already. The other is the principles o grammar. With existing text-books this is an impossiliility What then is taught V iSomething (1 am quoting from wli;i I have Avritten elsev.'here) undoubtedly. The facts, tlm anguagc is more or less reyular: that there is such a tl iiiiJ jiii assuming t jvev grammar Ithe li'rammar o.v Tiin srri>v of i.sxdiAiiR. 37 manner a- >Tannnar: that cortiiin expressions should ho avohled, arc ill niattors worlli knowing-. And thoy aro all taui;lit even l)V the worst nietliod of ti'achinf;-, liut are tlieso the y)roper objects oi' si/sfemaffc teaching? Is the importance of tlieir ac- Liisition ((puvahmt to tl'.o timtt, tlio trouhle, and tlio dis- lilacoiiiont of more vahial)Ie suhj(H't8, \vhic-h are involved in [heir explanation V 1 think not. Oross vulgarity of langnao-e Is a fault to bo prevented; hut the proper prevention is to be i'ot from habit - not rules. Tho proprieties of the iMiglish language are lo be learned, like the ])roprieties of P^nglish man- liers, by conversation arul intercourse: and a proper school for loth, is the best society in which tlui learner is placed. If llliis 1)0 good, systematic teaching is superfluous; if bad, in- snfticient. There arc undoubted points where a young; por- Isuu may doubt as to the granunatical ])ropriety of a certain pxprcssinn. Tn this case let him ask some one older and jinorc instructed. Grammar, as a arf , is, undoubtedly, i/ie yiil of spcn/i/nf/ mid wnt/iir/ correclh/ — but then, as an art, jit is only rerpiircd foi' foreign languages. For our onnt we jliave the necessary ))ractice and familiarity. The true claim of l^nglish granmiar to form part and par- Icol of an English education stands or falls with the value f the philological knowledge to which grammatical studies may serve as an introduction, and with the value of sci(m- litic granmiar as a (//scfjif/'iifil study. I have no fear of l)eing- ut what it tli grammars are not good things V What if they are absolut SOllIK itim badV Jn such a case, the classical to n-iut s cease to be lo (■ly ai'ii; except for themscdves. Kow, one of the few things that more us eless than a little l^atin is a little (Ireek. Am I wrong in saying that, with nine out of ten wl learn both Latin and Oreck, the knowledge of the tw(j toii-i gues conjointly is not greater than the knowledge of one oi them singly ought to beV Am [ wrong in believing that the tendencies of the f[p: are in favour of decreasing rather than increasing the amount of time bestowed upon (dassieal srholarshipV Unless 1 be so, the necessity for a limitation is a})paroiii.l To curiail English — to (dimiiiate one of the classical toii-l gues — possibly that of Pericles, at any rate, cither that P ericlcs or o f c: icero to substitute for the orumarv cii- ments of a so-called elassieal education illustrations from tl Chinese, the Hungarian, or the Tumali — this is what 1 h ■ } reconnnen If: we ded. 1 cannot but feel that in so doing I may seem to some t" have been false to my text, which was to eulogize thir I' diilological. They may say, Call i/ou this hacking your /'rifiidi: do. It is not by glorifying one's own more peculiar stii dies that such studies gain credit. To show the permanont, rather than the accidental, elements of their value, is the best service that can be done for them. It is also good sci- lire I gO( vice to show that they can be taught with a less expendit of time and labour than is usuallv bestoAved on them. l>ut| IK'; the best service of all is to indicate their disciplinal val and to show that, instead of displacing other branches ut knowledge, they so exercise certain faculties of the miml a> to prepare the way to them. iglcncss M'l"Allllli;irJ llilll SOllKJ ///f /e(/r/iiiiij\ ^vliat it til' absolutilvi ;o l)c loan!; ngs that i.j :)f ten wl iO two tOll-j of one oil of tlie afrti ho aniountl 1 apparent, I «sical toii-[ lior that ot'l linary el s from tli'l liat 1 li;n\ O SOllU! I \ ize thiiii;- /r I'vk'iiih'. 3uliar ^\\\- ennaneiit. 10, i.s til' good su :pendiliii' leni. ])ii lal vahii anclios (ii 3 mind ;h II. OX THE AVOIM) DISTltWLT/J/K AS USED IN L()GI(\ liKAl) BEFORE THE rilllJ^LOGICAL SOCIETY. DECEMIJKK THE I8tH 1857. Til pa] )er is an attonii)t to reconcile the lofi'ical )caking' rouglil i'cseni ho word Dislribulcd. means universal: '^'a term is . others. | In no<4ative ])ropositinns this rchition is connective on m. side, disjunctive on the oUwr. In — All men are mortal, All heroes are men, the middle term men forms a part of the chiss called mnvM\ by bein;;' connected with it in the way that certain contents | are connected with the case that contains them; whilst it als stands in connexion with the class of lierucs in the way that] cases are connected with their contents. In — No man is perfect. Heroes are men, the same doul)le relation occurs. The class ;//r/??, howovcr, ] though part of the class Iwro. is no ])art of the class pcr/'crl but, on the contrary, expressly exchuled from it. Now this expression of exclusion constitutes a relation — disjunctivo indeed, but still a relation; and this is all that is wanted to give an import to the prntix (//s- in dhUributed. Wherever there is distribution there is inference, no matter whether the distributed term be universal or not. If the or- dinary rules for the structure of the syllogism tell us the contrarv to this, thev onlv tell the truth, so far as certain assumptions on which they rest are legitimate. These limit us to the use of three terms expressive of quantity, — all, )wne, and so??ie; and it is rpiito true that, with this linntatioii, universality and distribution coincide. Say that Some Y is X, Some Z is Y, and the question will arise whether the Y that is X is also the Y that is Z. That some Y belongs to both classes is clear; whether, however, it bo the same Y is (lo\d)tful. Yet unless it be so, no conclusion can be drawn. And it may easily be different. Hence, as long as we use the word sofiii\ we have no assurance that there is any distribution of tho middle term. Instead, however, of .sow6' write a//, and it is obvious that some Y must be both X and Z ; and when such is the case — Some X must be Z, and Some Z must be X. Universality, then, of the middle terni in one ])remiss is, by no means, the direcl condition that gives us an inference, l)ut only a secondary one. The direct condition is the distiilMi- tion. Of this, tlu; universality of the middle term is only a sir/n , and it is the only sign w(> have, because all and some are the only words we have to choose from. If others were ox nil', WOIU) lilSTHlBVTllI) AS ISKl) I\ I,)(iir, 41 lalltt^vod, the appcnranc'O wliicli tlio two words {tUaUihitlcil .and Xvnn'crxdl) liave of uein^^ synonviiKtus would disappear. And Ipo they do when we abandon tli(> limitations iinp(»scd upon T\is by tlio words all and aomc. So they do in the nnmcri- eally definite syllogisin, exeniplifi(Ml in — INfore than half V is X, More than half V is Z, Sonic Z is X. ISo. also, they do when it is assumed that the V's wiiicli are IX and tlie V's which are Z are identical. Y is X, The same Y is Z, Some Z is X. In each of thes(> formuhc there is distribution without liniiversality, /. c. there is distribution with a (piality other jtlian tliat of universality as its criterion. TIh; following' ex- tract not only explains this, but j>'ives a fresh proof, if fresh ^)ro()f he needed , that dislribuU'd and mi/rcrsal arc used syno- iivmoiisly. The "comparison of each of the two terms must he equally with the Avliole, or with the same part of the third torin; and to secure this, (I) either the middle term must bo llistributed in one premiss at least, or (2) the two terms must 1)0 compared with the same speciiied part of the middle, or \{'.\), in the two premises taken toj>'ether, the middle must be llisti'ihuted, and soinethinf;- more, thou<;h not distributed in If'itlier sino'ly." — 'fho/npso)!, (hiftinc of llic Lawi^ o/' Thoiujlil, § 3U. Here dislribulcd means untrersal; JMr. Thompson's being- the ordinary terminology. In the eyes of the present writer I'Mistrihuted in one premiss"" is a contradiction in terms. Of the two terms, dislritniled is tlie more general; yet it h not the usual one. That it has been avoided bv De Morgan jlias been shown. It may be added, that from the Port lioyal hoiiic it is 'v\diolly excluded. The statement that, in negative jiropositions. the relation Js conneitive on one side, and disjunctive on the other , re- |(|uircs further notice. It is by no means a matter of indif- ference on -which side the connexion or disjunction lies. (a.) It is the class denoted by the major, of which the jiiiiddlc term of a negative syllogism is expressly stated to form wt part, or from which it is disjoined. (/>.) It is ilie class lenotcd by the minor, of which the same middle term is it'xpressly stated to form part, or with which it is connected. Xo man is perfect — Jiere the proposition is a major, and the middle term ?n(tn is [oxpressly separated from the class perfeel. All heroes are men — 42 ON Tin; woHi) nisTRinvTKn, as usrd in i.ooic. hero it is n minor, and tiio niiddlc term man is oxpros^Kivl connct'ted witli chiss Iwro. A eonnfH'tivc relation to tlio major, and n disjunctive rr. latjon to tlio minor arc impossible in negative syliof-iMiis, The exceptions to this arc only apparent. The two hkimI prominent are the fornnilic Cimcslrcs and Camenca, in hotli of which it is the minor j)remiss Avherein the relation is (li^j junctive. l)Ut tliis is an accident; an accidcMit arisin*^' out tlie tact of the major and minor l)einf;- convertible, Hohardo is in a diil'erent predicament. Bohanln, along witlJ BaroLo, is the only I'ormida containing- a particular nc^gativi as a premiss. X(»av the ])articular negati\es are, for so nianvi of the purposes of logic, particular affirmatives, that tin v| may be neglected for tlu^ present; the object at present beiii;; to ascertain the rules for the structure of truly and un(|nes- tionably negative syllogisms. Of these we may prcdicat' tbat — their minor })roposition is always either actually altii- mativc or ca]iable of becoming so by transposition. To go further into the relations between the middle tonnj and the minor, Avould be to travel beyond tiie field undtr present notice; the immediate object of the ])rcscnt ])a])or being to explain the import of the word (listribidctL That it| may, both logically and etymologically, mean rclalcil Id lin ('/(/SSI'S is clear — clear as a matter of fact. Whether, howovcr,! ri'Jak'd In two chtsses bo the meaning that the history of lo^ii gives us, is a point upon Avhieh I abstain from giving an oi)inion. I only suggest that, in elementary treatises, tin: terms vnivcrsal and dislribulcd should be separated more widely than they are ; one series of remarks upon — a. Distribution as a condition of inference, being follows! I by another on — h. Universality of the middle term in one premiss as a sigiil of distribution. So much for the extent to Avhich the present remarks suj:- gest the purely practical question as to how the teaching of Aristotelian logic may be improved. There is anotlicrJ however, b(iyond it; one of a more theoretical, indeed of an eminently theoretical, nature. It raises doubts as to the pro- priety of the word tdl itself; doubts as to the propriety oil the term univcrstd. The existence of such a word as (dl in the premiss, altliou,i;iil existing therein n)erely as a contrivance for reconciling tlie| evidence of the distribution of the middle term with a certii amount of simplicity in the way of terminology, coulil scarcely fail, in conjunction with some of its other properti(>. to give' it what is here considered an undue amount of iml inay say instc ON TiiK wouD rnsiniRiTj:/) as vhv.t) in looic. 43 [nortaiice. Tt niado it look liko tlie opposite to none. Yet tliis is what it is not. Tlu; opj)osito to ntiiic is not-tio/w, or xome ; [the tipposito to all is o//^'. In one and ^/// we liuvc the lii^licst laiiil lowest nninlxTS of the individiuils that constitute a ehiss. Ill iiniio and some wo have the dill'eronce hotween existence laiul non-existence. Tiiat all is a mere nio{h^ oi' some, has been insisted i»n by many h)gieians, denied by tew ur none, lie- twoon all and some, there is, at best, but a ditlVreneo of deji;ree. lictwecn some and none, the difference is .a difference of kind. Isn/iic may, by strenf;theninir , be converted iiuo all. No |stiTni:thening may obliterate the difference between all and 'iinl-ii/l. From this it follows that the loj^ic of none and some, I till' lou'ic of connexion and disjunction (the lo<;-ic o\' In'o si<;ns), , if! iimcli more widely different from the lo<;ic of jiarl and Iniiiilc (the logic oi' lliree signs) than is usually a(bnitted; the I former being' a logic of pure qualilij, the latter a logic of {qiuililij and quanliUj as -well. lliis the a(bnixture done good? I doubt whether it has. [The logic of pure and sim.])lo Quality would, undoubtedly, have given but little; nothing l)ut negative conclusions on nnoside, and possible particulars on the other. Nevertheless lit would have given a logic of the Possible and Impossibh;. Again, as at present constituted, the <^)uantitative logic, the I logic of all and some , embraces either too much or too little. .///is, as aforesaid, only a particular form of more than none. 1 80 is ?NOsl. IS'ow such syllogisms as — Most men are fallible, Most men are rational, Some men are both frail and fallible; or, Some frail things are fallible, avo inaduiissible in the Aristotelian paradigms. A claim, lliowciver, is set up for their admission. Grant it, and you I may say instead (tf f?iosl — Fifty-one per cent., v^c. ; but this is only a particular instance. You may combine any I two numbers in any Avay you like, provided only that the sum bo greater than unity. Kow this may be arithmetic, and it may be fact; but it is scarcely formal logic; at any rate it I is anything but general. It is the logic of some and its modifications one, all, and \(iiiijllt//if/ behreen one and all, as opposed to the logic of the |i*imple absolute some {some the opposite to none), and a little Uonsideration will show that it is also the logic oi' the prohal/le, pvitli its modification iho jfroven , (proven h probable ^ as «// is 44 ON Tin: woiii) hisiHiiirTh:!). am uhku in r.odic. lyonw iiH o|h>o8(mI to tin; logic of tlio possih/i- and impossihlc Let, ill Hiu'li a pair of propositions us — Somo c»f tlu! mon ot tlio iirigafl<» wore bravo, Soino of tlio inon of tlio brigadn woro killed , tlio number oxprossod by somi', as well as the number of tin men of the briyudc, bo known, and the question as to wlictlKrl Some brave men were killed, is a problem in the doctrine of chances. One per cent, nfl each will make it very unlikely that the single brave man Mas also the single killed one. Forty-nine per cent, of oaclil will make it highly probable that more than one good soldid met his fate. With fifty on one side, and fifty-one on the I other, W(i have? (me at least. With all (either killed or hrtiv we have the same; and that without knowing any numbers I at all. III. (ilUlMiMATKA. OX THE llEClPJiO(JAL PRONOUNS, AND ON THE liECmiOCJAL POWER OF TIIE REFEE(JT1VE VERB. UK A II liKFOKE TIIE rillLOLOUlCAL SOCIETY, JiAUCU '22. 18-ii. The present paper is upon the reciprocal pronouns, and upon certain forms of the verb used in a reciprocal sense. It is considered that these points of language have not been put forwards with that prominence and care which their value in the sdlution of certain problems in philology requires. Too often the terms Reciprocal and Reflective have been made synonymous. How far this is true may be determined by the fact that the middle verbs in the Icelandic language have been called by so groat a philologist as Rask reciprocal in- stead of reflcclivc. This is equivalent to treating sentences Hke we strike ourselves, and we strike each other ^ as identical. Yet the language with which Rask was dealing (the Icelan- dic) was the one of all others wherein the dift'erence in ques- tion required to be accurately drawn, and fully pointed out. (See Anvisning till Isliindskan, pp. 281, 283.) In all sentences containing the statement of a reciprocal or mutual action there are in reality two assertions, viz. the assertion that A strikes (or loves') B , and the assertion that B strikes [or loves) A; the action forming one, the reaction an- other. Hence, if the expression exactly coincided with the fact signified , there would always be two propositions. This, however, is not the habit of language. Hence arises a more 40 ox Tin; itiocii'iiooAii I'uoxouxs. I compendious form of expression, j>iving ori!j,in to an ellipsis of a peeuliiir kind. Phrases like Klcoclcx the first, whilst the first sn])plies the verh to the seeoin Each, however, is elliptic. Tiie first is without the object,! the second without the verb. Tlnu the verb must be in the plural (or dual) number, that one of the nouns must be in the nominative case, and that the other must be objectivi is self-evident from the structure of the sentence; such bcin^'j the conditions of the expression of the idea. An aposiopesis takes place after a plural verb, and then there follows a clause wherein the verb is supplied from what went before, When words equivalent to each oilier coalesce, and become compound; it is evident that the ccnposition is of a very peculiar kind. Less, however, for these matters than for its value in elucidating the origin of certain deponent verbs does the expression of reciprocal action merit the notice otl the philologist. In the latter part of the paper it will appear that for one branch of languages, at least, there is satisfac- tory evidence of a reflective form having become reciprocal, I and of a reciprocal form having become dej)Onent; this latter | word being the term for those verbs whereof the meaning active, and the form passive. Beginning with those methods of denoting mutual action i where the expression is the least explicit and unequivocal, it appears that in certain languages the reciprocal character of the verb is implied rather tlian expressed. Each man AW,- cd at his brother — or some equivalent clause, is the general | phraseology of the Semitic languages. ]\Iore explicit than this is the use of a single pronoun (personal, possessive, or reflective) and of some adverb equi- valent to the words nmliially , interchangeably , &q.. This is the habit of the Latin language , — Eteocles et Potynices invicvm se trticidaverunt : also of the French, although not invari- ably, Q. g. s'entr'aimer, s'enlredire, s'enlrebatlre: also of the Moeso-Gothic — galeikai sind barnam th;iim vopjandam seina misso = o^oioL eiGi JtaidHoig totg TCQoGcpojvovOLV allijkoLg — loquentibus ad invicem. — Luc. vii. 32. Deutsche Gramniatik, iv. 322, and iii. 13. The Welsh expressions are of this kind; the only difference being that the adverb coalesces with the verb, as an inseparable particle, and so forms a compound. These particles are dym, cym, or cy and yni. The former is compounded o{ dy . ?\gx\\^y\wg iteration , and //w denoting w//- iii(d action; the latter is the Latin cntn. Hence the reciprocal power of these particles is secondary: e. g. dymhorthi, to aid ON THE UECIincOCAL l>HOXOLNS. 47 Lutually; (hjmcldmJhi , to dispute; (hjmgani, to love one an- iitlicr; (hjmyiiddi , to vex one anotlicr; (Jijmyrcdii , to trust one [mother, or confide; (lymgiiratv, to strike one another, or iiglit; hjrwcnni/s, to desire nmtnally; cijffftdnrtbod , to know one anotlics; cijdaddanuad , to promise mutually; cydwysUitw, to il(Hl[ 14. Mailast, talk to each other ^ converse. Talast, ditto. Mu'Uz \)n. Yaf|jrudnisnial, 9. melumc i sessi sanian = colloquanun" sedentes. ih. 19. Edd. S»| mu'last })eir ru/, adr h<'ii' skiliasl, at })eir iimndi |)ar finnast pa. -I Fostbra-'dra-Saga, p. 7. they said to each other before they parted from each other tli.tj they should meet each other tlicrc. Yngvi ok Bera satu ok HUiiduz vidr. — Ileiiiiskr. Yngl. S. p.'Jij (Jris.s niajlti; hven'r ero pessir nicnn or sx-.x Itilast r/V/ blioligal Avaldi svarar; l)a er llnlHVeydr Ottarson ok Kolfinna dothir iniii[ 01. Trygyv. Saga, ]). 152. (iriss said, v.ho are these jjcrsons vlil l(dk together so blithely V Avaldi answers, they are Halfrid "i[ tarson and Koltinna my daughter. Ttdast is similarly used it Feroio. Kviidusl, bespoke each other, occurs iu the sauie som' ])at var einn dag at liraud ok Fiiibngi fundust ok /trntej Yatnsdada-Sag. p. l(i. 15. Mettiest, nicet each other, meet. blidliga. ON TiiR nEripuocAL rnoxoixs. 53 Rigsmal. 32. Edd. Saern. Kung':'!! aff Ffi'rancliricho , kiingcn aft'J^ngland, oc kiuigon aft' jcliottliuid skule moles til Chalis. — Lettor from Borgoii in I.').il, Iniui .Saiulingor til dot Norsko Folks Sprog og Historic, i. '2. 1 5,V Tiio king of Franco, tlio king of England , and the king if Scotland should 7neel each other at Calais. Tlirougliout the Danish, Swedish and Feroic, this verb is bed as a deponent. 16. Rekaz, vex each other. gunuiar margir erase gagn-hollir, enn at virisi rekaz. niulti homines sunt inter se admodnm benevoli, sed tamen tnuluo se (vel) in convivio exagitant 17. Sakaz, accuse each other, recriminate. at vit mynira siafrum sacaz, ut nos ipsi mutuo insectemur. ef viji einir scolom saryr^om sacaz. si nobis duobus nsn veniat amarulontis dicteriis invicem nos lacessere. sculoj) inni her Siiryrjjom sacaz. 18. Saz, tooked at each other. Haradis-Mal. 28. ^gis-drecka, 5. Ibid. 19. Edd. Ssem. saz 1 augv fadir ok modir. tlioy looked at each other in the eyes , father and mother. Rigsmal. 24. 19. Sffittazj settle between each otlicr, reconcile. — Atla-Mal. 15. p]dd. Sami. Koimi vinir J)veggia [)vi vid, at J)eir srcttuz, ok liigdu konungar fetefuu mod ser, ok hilluz ok gerdo frit melhnn sin. — Hcimsk. L'ngliiig-S. 42. Tlioro oame friends of both in order that tlioy should be recon- ciled, and the kings sent messages between them, and met and liiiade peace between them. — ^Also Vatnsd. S. p. 16. 20. Seljas, to give to each other. seldz eijia. Sig. Qv. iii. 1. Edd. Saira. juramenta dederunt inter se. 54 ON TIIF. URCIlMiOCAI, PRONOUNS. 21. Sendaz, send, or let pass between each other. K.ato sanity iiis, scnduz far-Iingi, lirnduz lK'i])t-yrl>i hvjirki ser iiiidi. Atla-^^fal. Mj. Thoy sat in the same town ((hvoUiiig), Tlioy sent heltveen each other claii;^^('r-tliou;^lits , Thoy fetched Itetwccn each other hato-wurds, Not either nutij did tlicy love each other. Here, over and above tlic use of senduz and hendaz^ sir] equivalent to h/nanden. 22. Skiliaz, part from each other. Shiliamz Solav-Lioo. M', Skiliaz. 8igurd-(^vi|). i. '1-i. Skiliomc. Ibid. o.'^. Edd. Saiin, Vit sjUjiust, tve tint part — Occurs in the poem I»rinilda (st. 109) in tlio Feroic dialed In Danish and Swedish the Avord is deponent. 23. Skiptust, interchanf/c. i)eh' sh'pUist morguni giuf'tnn vid inn vetriun — Vatns-du;la-S. thoy made interchanges with each other with many gifts for tliej winter. Also in the Fcroie. 24. Strujast, strike one another, ftr/ht. Feroic. og motast tair, og strujast avlaji lanji. — Faroying- Sag. \i\ Foroic text. « ok ma-tast })oir, ok borjast nijok loingi. — Icelandi.sh text. do jnijdtes og strode nioget lionge iniod hinandon. — Dauisli text. they met and fought long against each other. at e vilde vid gjordast stalbroir, og slrujasl ikkji longur. -I Foroic text, p. 21. at viH f/cro/»j*7 folagar, onberjamsl oigi loingr. — Icelandic text. at vi skuUe blive Htalbrodc og ikke slaaes Ucngor — Danish inl that Avo should become comrades and not fight longer. The active form occurs in the same dialect: tojr struija jiu langji. 18. 25. Truasc, trust each other. vol mtvttcrn j)a}ir truazc. For Skirnis. Edd. Skid. ON THK UnriPJlOCAL PRONOUNS. 55 2(). IJnnaz. Sec Vcittaz. 27. Vr;;i/, atlaclc oaoli olhcr. vilcat ec Mt i]) icijiir *vv/?r. ^Eglsdrocka 18. Edd. Stem. 1 will not that ye two anyry attack each other. 2S. Vcittaz , contract niiitudlly. \y,\\ ll('l;;i ok Svava rrittti: varav, ok iinnoz forJ)0 iiiikit - -Ilid- liiis ot Sviiva pactum ,s|»oiisalitiuiii i/itrr se conlraaerunt, et alter \lliTiiin iiiiritico amaritnl. — lladdiiigia-Sk. between 29 and 30. 21). \^'^J)a/>, throiv hcltvrcn each other. urpuz a o4)oni. Atl.-M. IV.). Edd. Suein. verba inter se jaciebant. Such is a portion of tho cxfimples that prove the recipro- lal power of tho roHcetive or middle verb in tiie hin^ua^e If Scandinavia; and thai, during' all its stages and in eaeh if its derived dialeets. It eannot be donbted that to this [ircumstaneo certain verbs in Danish and Swedish owe their i'|jon('iit form: vi/. vis/ass, wo ti^ht (strike one another); \i brollits, wo wrestle; ri omgass, we have intercourse witli; Vt miilas, we meet, Swedish; vi duues^ avo fiii,'ht ; li shilles, we prt; ('/ modes, wo nn-et, Danish. In the late.-«t Swedish [raminar, by C. L. Daae, this reciprocal (veks(dvirkende) power is reco<;nized and exhibited. See Udsigt over det Hvensko Sprop,s (Jranunatik. Christiana, 1837. The same is llio i\lolbech's Dauske Urdboi^- in vv. skHles, slaaes, modes. Next to the Norso languages the Frencli affords the best Instances of tbc reciprocal power of the reflective verb; as Khdtlrc, s' aimer, s entendre, se quereller , se reconeUier , se dis- \ukr, and other words of less frequent occurrence. Cos (Mifans saxmuicnt, s'adoraient, se sont jetes a mes pieds en Iruifuit. — Les Inseparables, A. I. S. 1. Lcs licpublics Italiens acliarnes a sc delruirc. — Pardessus (I. ()5. This has been recognized by an old grammarian, Restaut, rIio insists upon tho use of tho adverb enire , in order to avoid the ambiguity of sucli phrases as '^vous V(nis dites des injures;" "nous nous ecrivons souvcnt;" ^'Pierro et Antoinc \e loucnt a tout moment." By a Avritcr in the Museum (vriticum tho reciprocal power ^f the Greek middle has been indicated. For the classical (anji'uages the question has not mot with the pro})er investi- wtion. Passages where the sense is at least as reciprocal OS in the line V I 56 ON rnn RROipROfAi, pkonouns. XiiQUt^ X (dh'ihov Xu^trtjv kuI 7ii(ST(6aavTO — 11. vi. 23.'^, must bo numorous. in the Dutch luiifiuafjo tlio use of z/'rh for elknndcr is ^ peculiarity of tli(; ( Juddcrlaml and Ovcrys.scI dialects; a, ''zij lieht zich cslag(ui," for "zij hebhen elLatiilcr Rosla-^cn.'' Sco Opnierkingen onitrent den (loldersclien Touj^val, jrl Taalkundif; Ma}:;azijn ii. 11. }>. 103. Of tlio use of ser for himmden or hverandre, when uiuonil bined witii the verb, we have, anionfjst other, tiu? folluwiii;:| example in the Icelandic version of the Paradise Lost: — Ef frii tilsyndar- punkti hley])tu srr planctur fram, ok nuvtlusl mikluin gny 6 niidjum hinini. B. 6. Similar to this are tlie phrases vi sr os igjen, wee seen (each other) a<;aln, in Danish, and ivir sehen uns nucd('r,\\\ German. Examples from the ]\I. H. (jr. are }:^iven in theli G. iv. The Turkish sign of the reciprocal verb is identiial with the deir.onstrativo pronoun, /. e. {jH. This may possil bly indicate a connection bc'tween the two forms. Other points upim the subject in hand may be collootm!! from the Deutsche (Jranmiatik, iii. 13. 82; iv. 451. llci" tlie adverbial character of tiu; JNI. Ii. G. eimmdcr for einandm. the omission of ('i)i, as in anander for (m cinundcr , and tin.' omission (real or supj)0scd) of under in ^'tvider cin ==■ tvitkrl eifiandc>\" are measures of the laxity of language caused bv the peculiarity of the combination in question. At proseni it is sufficient to repeat the statement, that for one group of languages at least there is satisfactory proof of certain deponents having originally been reciprocal, and of certain reciprocal expressions having originally been reflective. I % ON THE CONNEXION BETWEEN THE IDEAS OF ASSOCIATION AND rLUIlAEITY AS AN INFLUENCE IN THE EVOLUTION OF INFLECTION. BEAD BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY. MARCH 9, 1849. It is well-known that by referring to that part of the Deutsche (Jrainmatik which explains those particii)ial forms whifh (like y-cleped in Englisli, and like yesprochcn and the participles in general in (iernian) begin with ge or y, the tollovving doctrines respecting this same prefix may be collected: — 1. That it has certainly grown out of the fuller forms ka or ga. 2. That it has, probably, grown out of a still fuller form kam or gatn. 3. That this fuller form is the (Jothic equivalent of the Latin cum ==^ with. Such are the views respecting the form of the word in ques- tion. Respecting its meaning , the following points seem to be made out : — 1. That when prefixed to nouns (as is, not rarely, the case), it carries with it the idea of associalion or collection: — M. G. sin^s= a journey , ga-sin\Hi = a cotnpanion; O. M. G. pcrc^=hill; ki-pirki={ge-hirge) a range of hills. 2. That it has also a frequentative power. Things which recur frequently recur with a tendency to collection or asso- ciation: — M. II. G. ge-rasse(=ruslling\ ge-rumpel = crufnpling. 3. That it has also the power of expressing the possession of a quality: — 5S ox THE CONNKXION BETWEEN TUE II»F,AH OK ASSOCIATION i^O, ox Tin; (I in: li A.-S. Kiig. A.8. Latin, fcax /tdir , gc-i\'i\\ rumiiliis. In'ortc Itidi't, _^//'-li('ort nntlnlus. Tliis is Ix'ijuiso cvciy oltjctt is jissociatcd with lite olgoct tli.'it poKscs^cs it — a sen iiilh niivcs^^a wunj sea, Tlui pri'sciit wiidr lia> little duiilit tliut tins Tuniali ;;raiii mar ot" Dr. 'riitsiicU .supplies a similar (ami at the .'aint: tiiiMJ u very iiitcllij^iblfj a|iplifHtiun of a particlo ((HiivHli.iit to tim Latin cum. Ho Ijclicvcs tliat tlio Tuniali word =^ «'//// is what woiiLl commonly he called the si;;n of the plui'al mimhei' of tlic |)Ci'S(tiud pronoiuis ; just as ///t'-c////< and le-ciiin would hecoim; e(|uival('nts to nos and ms, if the tirst syllables W(!r(! uouii- native instead of (»bli(jue, and if the preposition denoted in- definite eonjunctien. In such a case; iin'cifiji would mean f <'/)'. Sucli is the illustration of the posnihle power of a possildo cond)imition. TIk; reasons i"or thinkiu};- it to have a reality in one lan^uaye at least lie in the following forms: — 1. T\\i' Tuniali word for /rtt/i is (fa. 2. The Tuniali words for /, f/aiu, and he respectively are nr/f, ?(f/o. tif/u. 3. The Tuniali words for fie, ye, fliey arc nf/in-de, ngon- da, n{/en-fla respectively. 4. The Tuniali substantives have no such plural. \\'itli them it is formed on a totally dilferent principle. 5. The Tumali adjectives have no plural at all. 0. The Tumali numerals (even those which express more tlian unity and are, therefore, naliira//{/ plural) /lare a plunil. AVlien, however, it occurs, it is formed on the same prin- ciple as that of the plurals of the substantive. 7. The word da = with is, in Tumali, of a more varied ajiplication than any other particle; and that both as a jire- position and a ;;o47-position : — daiira ::r= soofi (da = f)i, aura ;:= ?ie/f/hb(mrhood) ; du/om:^=in (with) front {face); d-ondid = roundabout {ondul=^ circle); dale = near {le = side), ^c. 8. Prepositions, which there is every reason to believe arc already compounded Avith da, allow even a second da, to })rcccde the word which they govern: — daher deling = over the earth [her =z eaiHh). 9. The ideas with me, with thee, ivith him, are expressed liy ngi-dan, ngo-dan. and ngu-dan res]>octively; but the ideas of with us, with you , with them arc not expressed l)y nginde- dan, ngonda-dan, ngenda-dan; but by peculiar words — tinem =^with us; toman -^^ with you; tenan = with them. (iX Tin; ('i).NNKXION IlKTWKrN TIIK IKK.Vfi 01' VMS' iCIA HON ».^r, 59 Oil tli(^ otlicr liJiiid, tli(! I'tilldw iii^f ['act is, as far as it ;40cs, a,:.';iiiist this view, a tad iijioii wliirli others may lay iiioro Micss than \ho. pruscfnt writer. '*/Jn{/, i^c. ; further instanees are, (fiini//i/,'i, 'into the; hut' iro/n); diium <)V (loliim , 'in the ^rave.' (r.) As a postposition it aji- IK'IK Is an n: («l(/\litn , 'on the head'; tincicdun, 'on tlu^ dav Takiiiijj the third of these rules literally, the plural pronouns i^liiiuld end in don rather than in da and dc. It is eonsidered that over and above the lij^ht that this particular formation i^if real) may throw upon the various mc- lliods by which an infiiH-tion like tlnit of tin; plural number iiiav b(! evolved, and more especially upon the im[)ortant but neglected phainmnona of the so-ctdled inrliiaive and exclusive plurals , many other points of goneyal gramnuir may bo illus- trated. ON THE WOED CUJUM. READ BKFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, MARCH 9, 1849. The writer wishes to make the word ciijiim, .as found in a well-known quotation from the third eclogue of Virgil, — Die mihi Damwta cnjvm pec-us? the basis of some remarks which are meant to be suggestions rather than doctrines. In the second edition of a work upon the English language, be devoted an additional chapter to the consideration of the grannnatical position of the words mine and thine , respecting which he then considered (and still considers) himself cor- rect in assuming that the current doctrine concerning thoni was, that they were, in origin, genitive or possessive cases, and that they were adjectivc^s only in a secondary sense. !Now whatever was then written upon this subject was writ- ten with the view of recording an opinion in favour of ex- actly the opposite doctrine, viz. that they were originally adjectives, but that afterwards they took the appearance of oblique cases. Hence for words like mine and thine there are two views : — 1 . That they were originally casea, and adjectives only in a secondary manner. 2. That they were originally adjectives, and cases only in a secondary manner. In which predicament is the word crijum? If in the first, it supj)lies a remarkable instance of an unequivocally adject- ival form, as tested by an inflection in the way of gender, having grown out of a case. If in the second , it shows how truly the converse may take place, since it cannot lie doubted that whatever in tliis resjject can be predicated of cujus can be predicated of ejus and hvjus as well. Assuming this last position, it follows that if ciijiis be originally a case, we have a proof how thoroughly it may take a gender; whereas if it be origii-ally an adjective, ejxi^ * hora for \ ON TIIK WOUD crjUM. 61 and hiijus (for by a previous assumption tliey arc in tiio same category) are samples of the extent to which words like it may lose one. Now the termination -us is the termination of an adjective, and is nol the termination of a genitive ease; a fact that fixes the onus prohauili with those Avho insist upon the genitival character of the words in question. But as it is not likely that every one lays so much value upon this argument as is laid by the present writer, it is necessary to refer to two facts taken from the Greek: — 1. That the class of words itself is not a class which (as is often the case) naturally leads us to exjiect a variation tVoni the usual inflections. The forms ov, ot, ^', and ot,', ov, a), are perfectly usual. 2. That the adjectives og = £Oi,*,* xofog ; - :roioi;, and oiog, arc not only real forms, but forms of a common kind. Hence, if we consider the termination -Jus as a case-ending, we have a phajnomenon in Latin for which we miss a (ireek efjuiva- lont; whilst on the other hand, if we do not consider it as adjectival, we have the Greek forms oto^' , xotog =^ nolog and og = fV)g, without any Latin oncjs. 1 do not say that this argument is, when taken alone, of any great weiglit. In doubtful cases, howtver, it is of value. h\ the pres(!nt case it enables us to get rid of an inexi)licable genitival form, at the expense of a slight deflection from the usual power of an adjective. And here it should be remeinbered that many of the arguments in favour a case becoming an adjc^ct- ive are (to a certain extent) in favour of an adjective be- coming a case — to a certain e.rlent and to a certain extent only, because a change in one direction by no means neces- sarily implies a change in the r( verse one, although it is something in favour of its probability. Probably unius, u/lius, il/ius, and alterius. are e{i ally, as re- spects their origin, adjectival forms with ejus, citjus, and hujus. Now it must not be concealed that one of the arguments which apply to words like mine and Ihihc being adjectives rather than genitives, does not apply to words Wkii ejus, cu- jus, and hujus. The reason is as follows; and it is exiiibited in nearly the same words which have been used in the work already mentioned. — The idea of partition is one of the ideas expressed by the genitive case. The necessity for expres- sing this idea is an element in the necessity for evolvi'"- " genitive case. With personal pronouns of the singi ' ber the idea of partition is of less frequent occuri t -J hova for woru, ■>iotog^=^ciiJiis; oiog = /iwj'«s ; tog :^ ejus (18oU). 62 nx -I'lIK WOUD CVJC.U. [ r with most otlier words, since a personal pronoun of the s'm- iiulur number is tlie name of a unity, and, as sucli, the name of an object far hiSs likely to bo separated into ])arts tliaii the nanu! of a collection. Phrases like s.itme of llwm, one nf you, 711(1)11/ of us, (tnij of litem, few of ns, (Siv., have no jiiia- Jogues in the singular nunibrr, such as one of me , a few oj thee, &c. The partitive words that can cond)ine with sin^ii lar pronouns are comparatively few, viz. /t(f/f, qumier, jxiri. &c.; and they can all combine equally with j)lurals — lialf of 7(s, a quiirler of tUem, a portion of vs. The partition of a singular object with a pronominal name is of rare occurrence in language. This last statenuiiit proves something more than appears at first sight. It proves tliat no argument in favour of the so-called shu/uliir genitives, like mine and thine. can be drawn from the admission (if nuule) of the existence of the true plural genitives ou-r, you-r, thc-ir. The two ideas are not in the same predicament. Again, the convenience of expressing the difference be- tween suus and ejus , is, to a certain extent, a reason for the evolution of a genitive case to words like is; but it is a reason to a certain extent only, and that extent a small one, since an equally convenient method of expressing the difference is to be fouml in the fact of there being two roots for the pronouns in question, the root from which we get ea, />/, e\m. ejus, etc., and the root from which we get sui, sihi, suus, &c. Here the paper should end, for here ends tlie particular suggestion supplied by the word in question. Two questions however present themselves too forcibly to be wholly passed over: — I. The great extent to which those who look in Latin for the same inflections that occur in (ireck , must look for them under new names. That two tenses in Greek (the aorist like i-tvjt-Ga, and the perfect like tt-TV(p-a) must be lonkeil for in the so-called douh/e form of .1 sinr/le tense in Litiii (vie-si, fno-mordi) is one of the (ddest facts of this sort. That the Greek participle in -^evos [rvTCToufvoc;) must be soughi for in the passive persons in -mini is a newer notice. II. The fact that the character of the deflection that takes place between case and adjective; is not si/if/le but f/tnih/c It goes both ways. The change; from case to adjective U one process in philology; the change from adjective to case .nnother; and both should be recognized. This is mentioned for the sake of stating, that except in a few details, there is nothing in the present remarks that is meant to be at va- riance with the facts and arguments of five papers already laid before this Society, viz. those of Mr. Garuett on the ON* TIIU WOUU CULM. 03 Formation of Wc.rds iVuin Intlectod Cases, and on the Ana- lysis of the Verb. The ])apors allmlod to really deal with two series of lacts: — (A.) J)c/linion with itlftititij of form. — In this the inH^'Ction is still considered an infleetion, hut is dealt with as one dif- ferent from what it really is, /. c. as a nominative int^t(>ad of an oblique one. Some years back the structure of the Finlandie sugg(!sted to the present writer: — 1. A series of chanj;es in meaning whereby such a term as wvV// travcs might (^qual nuinj. 2. The existence of a class of words of which scslcrliiim was the ty])e , where an obliqiK* case, iritli a cofivcrlible (c>- viliKi/fiiii , becomes a nominative. 3. 'VUv. possible evolution of forms like /Iitc/i/ha, /Jtictiihum z=lhicliiom ., fhicliiosum, from forms like /hicliilnia. Mr. (larnett has multiplied cases of this kind; his illustra- tions from the JJasquc being pre-eminently typical, /. c. like tlio form aeshniiiim. If the modern vehicle called an omnilnia li.'ul heen invented in ancient Rome, if it had had the same n.'inic as it has now, and if its plural for)ii had be(!n omnlhi, it Avould also have; been a typical instance. Words of the hypothetical form /hichiba ., /hicliihum , have not been discovered. They would have existed if the word just quoted had been (if nsed in ancient Kome at all) used as an adjective, omnibua cunus., onuiibit csseiht , omnibiim plau- slnim. (1).) Di'fleclion ivilli nupcrafUiilion. — Here th^ inflection is (lonlt with as if it wei-e not inH(!ctional !.• t ra ^cal. This is the case with J'qptot,'. AV^ords \\ko it~, as pro\ed by the ge- nitive i~l-Sy and the so-called pclrifH'd (verslriiicrle) nomina- tive cases of the German grammarians, are of this class. ON THE AORISTS IN KA. REAU BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, MAUcii 11, 1853. A well-known rule in the Eton Cirook Grannnar may sorve to introduce the subject of the present remarks: — "Quinque sunt aoristi primi qui t'uturi prinii characteristicam non assu- munt: ed^r^xa posui, idaxa dedi , r)za misi, ei'Tca (fhvi, -iivsYxu liili*' The absolute accuracy of this sentence is no part of our considerations: it has merely been quoted for the sake of illustration. What is the import of this abnormal x? or, chanr-cliang-(S-iig^ tvijj-G-ei^ rvrp-s-TOv^ i^c. The moods are ecpially el'ficient in the supply of small voxvols, The doctrine, then, now stands that k is the older foria but that, through the influence of third persons singular, in ture forms, and conjun^-tive forms, so many s-e& bec.iniel developed, as to supersede it except in a few instances. TIk Latin language favours thi?: view. There, the old future like cap-s-o, and the preterites like vixi (ric-si) exhibit a small | vowel in all their persons . c. //. vic-s-i, ric-s-isti, vic-s-i/, i^cc Still the doctrine respecting this influence of the small vowl in the way of the developement of sibilants out of guttin'aM is defective until we find a real instance of the chaniic as Bunipil. As if fiiuiial value o the Sorbs of lorin of the pi tlio Lithuanic with the Serb L'liaractoristic eases it is tha m:sa Sing. 1. non'/.f 2. llOSZf 3. noszf' Dual 1. no.szfi 2. noHz^ 3. UOSZ(? I'lur. ]. noszfi 2. noszr 3. nu.sz<( ON THE AOUISTS LV~KA. 67 I Buiiiod. As if, for tlic very purpose of illustrating the occa- ioiial value of obscure diaUfcts, the interesting language of tlic Serbs of Lusatia and Cotbus supplies one. Here tbo ^'oiin of the preterite is as follows; the Serb of Illyria and Sho Litliuanie being placed in juxtaposition and contrast Iwilli the Serb of Lusatia. Where a small vowel follows the iliaractoristic of Hhe tense the sound is that of sz) in other cases it is that of ch [kfi) I.ISATIAX. Sill},'. 1. non'Mich . . 2. uoHxesze . . 3. nos/,rsze. . Dual 1. noHzachn'C 2. noHzestaj . 3. noH'AeslaJ . I'lur. I. noszar//;n// 2. uosizesce . 3. nus'Mc/tu . II.T.YUIAX. MTIIIIANIC. (l(n\o>io , doniie Inesziau. . (/onoso, (lonijo nosziei . . Jonese, donije nosziei . . 1 nesziewa. r/ones».;:uio, doiiijijsino rfonososte, donijestc . r/onesosze, donijeszc . neszietn. neszie. noszicmo. uosziete . ucszic. . . LKXTlSn. nessu. uessi. nesse. nossaiii. nessat. nesse. ON TIIK nSV. Tii'ag 710& idgag xaa(h f.ioi i}oc<^ez£. or, Hkco vekqcov K£vd'^(ova y.ai axorov nvXag. Ilakai nvi'i]y£tovi>Ta xra neTQOv(.i£vou. Faiteq' diKCdog fffO e^iog r« ncaQo&H'. Ttvag noiy idgag xaade jiiot &uc(^eTe. Second Foot. — In the second place, it is also matter of |iii(lifferonce wln^ther the foot be sounded as August or as august. iLi tlio first of the four lines quoti'd above we may say either rinQav or vfMQCOV .^ without violatinj:^ rhythm of the verse. Third Foot. — In this part of the senarius it is no longer a |inattor of indifi'erence whether the foot be sounded as August i)r as (ingust\ that is, it is no longer a matter of indifference miictlior the arsis and the quantity coincide. In the circum- Istanoe that the last syllal)le of the third foot 7nust be accen- tod (in the English sense of the word), taken alonac- Iclite, three dramas where licences in regard to nu^tro are pro-eniinently conmion, the number of lines wherein the sixth jsyllable (/. e. the last half of the third loot) is without an jarsis, is at the highest sixteen, at the lowest five; whilst in the roniainder of the extant dramas the proportion is uu- Idouhtf'dly smaller. 1. In all lines where the sixth syllable is destitute of ictus,* |the iambic character is violated: as — Qo^yA^v TTEQn^avTEg fioyig noXXa) ttoi'm. Avoiv yiQC loiv 8e 6rQav)jy£ixni (pvyrj. 70 ON THR UOCTIUNi: OF TIIK CAKSURA IN TIIK ORF.EK .SEN'ARIUH. ON THE DOC'T Tlu'so are facts wliidi may bo vorifi(Ml citlicr \>y ici'oiriii.l to tlio tra<;c(lians, or by coiistructlnjjj sonarii like tlio liin. b\st (juotod. The only dit'ticulty that occurs arises in detiri niinin;;-, in a (b\'ul lan ^ vvv ^ iV:c. 2. CircuiiiHex futures; as vs^d, re^ico, &.c. 3. Words abbreviated by apocope ; in which case the pcmiM timate is convcnted into a final syllable; dco^i ^ cpBi3Ba'&' xi\ tllT {VMy &c. Now the fact of a syllable Avith an arsis being, in Greek | rarely final, taken along Avith that of tiic sixth svllablc requiring an arsis, gives, as a matter of necessity, the lii- cumstancc that, in the Greek drama, the sixth sylhible slinll occur anywhere rather than at the end of a word; and tliis is only another Avny of saying, that, in a t)-agie senarius, tlie| syllable in question shall generally be followed by other syl lables in the same word. All this the author considers as ni| truly a matter of necessity, that the objection to his view ot the Greek cajsura must lie either airainst his idea of tlio I of a word ; as ON THE DOCTRINE OF Till: C'AKSIUA IN TIIK GKDEK SF-NAUIUS. 71 iiatnro of the accents, or nowhere; since, tliat beinjj tul- linittcd, tlie rest I'oMows of course. As the sixtii sylhihle must not bo iinal, it nuiyt be fol- [lowtiil in the saiiK; word by (UK! .--ynabh',, or by more than one. 1 . The sixlli sijlldOU' followed hy one stjllitble in the same word. — This is only another name foi" the seventh syllabh; oceur- Iring J*t the end of a word, and it gives at once the liephthi- 'uiiuicr ca.'.snra: as — /fxo) VE'AiHov Kivx^^Kova KOI (SzoTov TivXag. [y.TtjQioig y.kadoi'aci' ti-eGrifiueivi, (hu)v re ircduvcov xb y.ui Greiayiic£(t. Kow tliis arrangement of syMables, taken by itself, gives anything rather than a hephthimimer ; so that if it were at this ponit that our investigations terminat(!d, little would be done towards the evolution of the rationale of the caesura. It will appear, howevcjr, that in those cases where the eircuin- stancd of the sixth syllable being followed by two others in the same words, causes the eighth (or some syllable after the eighth) to be final, either a penthimimer caisura, or an equivalent, will, with but few (!Xee|)tions, be the result. This we may prove by taking the eighth syllable and counting liack from it. What follows this syllable is innnaterial: it is the number of syllables in the same word that precedes it that demands attention. 1. T/ie ciyhth syllable preceded in the same word by nothing. — This is equivalent Ui the seventh syllable at the end of the preceding word: a stat(! of things which, as noticed above, ijives the hephthimimer ca'sura. 2. The eighth syllable preceded in the same ivord by one syl- lable. — This is e<|uivalent to the sixth syllable at the end of the Avord |)r(H'e(ling; a state of things which, as notie(!d above, rarely oceurs. Wh(;n, bow'ever, it does occur, one of the three conditions under which a final svllable can take an arsis must accompany it. Each of those conditions requires notice. y\\a\Ao. the result is a pen- thiniimer ca'sura; sinc(3 the syllable preceding a monosyllable is necessarily final. 72 (»x Tiin Dor ruiNi: «ir riii; CAKsricv iv nir. (iUF.r.K si-naum's, ON TIIK D'»( Uy.cii at^i^uv Gov K\vx((i uviiaioa y.tjcaQq. No roinark lias boon inndo liy critics upon linos constnutcil in this niaiuHT, sinco tlio cicsura is a ponthiiniinor, and cnn 8('(|uciitlv tlif'ir rules am nndistnrlicd. /i). W'itli //o///-syIlal»i(! circuiullox futures constituting; tlic tliinl foot, there AV(tul(l \n\ a violation of the current v\\V> respeclin;; the cit'sura. Notwithstanding this, if tlio view of the ])resent paper ho true, there would bono violation of the iambic character of tho scnarius. Against such a line i\i Attj'w TO aov viiito 7ro&ci\i'ov avXiov there is no ar;junient a priori on tho score of tho iambic character boinpj violated; whilst, in respect to objections dc rived from evide c a posfcriuri , there is sufficient reason fur sueh linos being rare. y). ^^'ith /;o/y-syUables abbreviated by apocope , "vvo have the state of things which the nictrists have recognised tnulor the name of (piasi-ca.'sura; as — Kei>T£ixs f.i)j (fiidiaiy* lyto ] 't^xdj' IlaQtv. .T. — T/ie cif/h/h aylldltlc preceded in (he some word hy IW'i syllfdtlea. — This is /e preceded in tlie same word hy three or more Uiku three syihdjles. — This is equivalent to the fourth (ur some syllable preceding the fourth) syllable occurring at the end (»f the word preceding; a state of things which would include the third and fourth feet in one and tiie same word This concurrence is denounced in the Supplement to the Preface to the Hecuba, wheni, however, the rule, as in the case of the quasi-ca*sura, from being based upon merely em- pirical eviileneo, ro(piires limitation. In lines like — Kta xctXXu rroAA iir£iy.c(6cii | div.caov ?;i', or fan imaginary example), Toiq aoiGiv ((a':TiSi]CtTooccoiG\t,i' civSgaGt ^ there is no violation of the iambic character, and consequontlv no reason against similar linens having ])e('n writt(>n; altliouirli from the av(>rago jirojiortion of (Jreek words like ezsixaGai and aa.rid)]GTQO(poLaiv , there is every reason for their being rare. After tho details just given the recapitulation is brief. ON THE DnrxniXE OP Tlir CAESURA IN TIIK QUEER SENARH'S. 73 1. It was oseontial to tlio clinrnctcr of tho senarius that tlio sixtli PvllaMc, or latter lialf of the tliird foot, should have an arsis, ictus iiietricus, or ncoeiit in the Eii{j;lish sense. To this condition of the iambic rhythm the Greek tragedians, eitlicr consciously or unconsciously , adhered. 2. It was the character of tlie Greek lan;;uajje to admit an arsis on the last syllabic of a word only under circum- stances comparatively rare. ;i. These two facts, taken together, caused the sixth syl- lable of a line to bo anywhere rather than at the end ot a word. 4. If followed by a single syllable in the same word, the result was a hophthimimer caesura. 5. If followed by more syllables than one, some syllable in an earlier part of the line ended the word preceding, and 80 caused cither a penthimimer, a quasi-ca;sura, or the oc- currence of the third and fourth foot in the same word. G. As these two last-mentioned circumstances were rare, the general phenomenon presented in the Greek sonarius was the occurrence of either the penthimimer or hephthimimer. 7. Respecting these two sorts of cajsura, the rules, instead of being exhibited in detail, may be replaced by the simple assertion that there should be an arsis on the sixth syllable. From this the rest follows. 8. Respecting the non-occurrence of the third and fourth feet in the same word, the assertion may be withdrawn en- tirely. 9. Respecting the quasi-csesura, the rules, if not altogether withdrawn, may be extended to the admission of the last syllable of circumflex futures for to any other polysyllables with an equal claim to be considered accented on the last syllabic) in the latter half of the third foot. ! ! KEiMAlMvS ON THE USE OF THE SIGNS OF ACCEN'r AND QUANTITY AS (lUIl)ES To THE riiONUNClATION OE WORDS DEIU TED EUO^r THE ( lASSK AE EANGUAGES. AVnn EAllTJCUEAll IIEI EKENCE TO ZOOEOGICAL AND ]U)TANICAL TEIIMS. KItOM TlIK ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL IILSTORY, JUNE, l-'^j'.). The text upon wliicli tlio followirifi: remarks liavo sufjj^^cst- ed tlieinsclvcis is the Accentu.atod List of the JJritisli Lr- pid()j)tor.i, witli J lints on the Derivation of the Nanies, puhliished by tlie Kntoinoh)r>ical Societies of Oxford ami Canibridj^e; a useful contribution to scientific terniinolo|i:y — useful, and satisfied with beinc^ so. It admits that natura- lists may be unit nrned , and provides for those who, with a love for botany or zoolo^xy, may have been denied the advantage of a classical education. That there are many such is well known ; ami it is also well known that tlicy liave no love; for coniuiittin;;' themscdves to the utterance of Latin and (Ireck names in the ])resem'e of investigators wlio are more erudite (though, i)erhaj)s, less scientific) than thciii- selves. As a rule, their pronunciation is inaccuiate. It is inaccurate without being uniform — for the ways of goiiif,' wrong are many. Meanwlnle, any directions toward the right are welcome. In the realities of educational life there is no su(di tliin^^ as a book for unlearned men — at least no such thing as a good one. There are make-shifts and make-believes (id ON THE USE OF THE SlCiXS OF .VrTENT AND QUANTITY. 75 inftniUim; but tlicrc is no such an entity as an actual book. Some aro written down to the supposed level of the reader —all that are so written belnj;- useless and ottensive. Others are cncundx'red with extraneous matter, and, so encumbered, err on the side ot" bulk and superfluity. Very rarely is there anything; like eonsisteney in the supply ot" information. Tiie work under notice supposes a certain amount of i^mo- ranie — ignorance of certain accents and certain (juantities. It meets this; and it meets it well. That the work is both a safe and reliable guide, is m^ither more nor less than what we expect from the places and persons whence it has pro- ceedecl. It is likely, from its very merits, to be the model on which a long line of successors may be formed. For this reason the principh^^ of its notation (t"or thus we may generalize our expre;-sion of the principle upon wdiich we use the signs of accent and (juantity as guides to pronunciation) may bo criticised. In the mind of the present writer, the distinction between accent and qnantity has neither been sufficiently attended to nor suificiently neglected. This is because, in many respects, they are decidedly contrasted with, and opposed to, each other; whilst, at tjie same time — paradoxical as it may ap- pear — they are, for the majority of practical purposes, con- vortilde. That inadvertence on these points should occur, is not to be wondered at. l*rof( -sional grammarians — men who deal with the purely pliilological (pn-stions of metre and syllahiHcation — Avith few exceptions, confound them. In English Latin (by whi(di 1 mean Latin as pronounced by Englishmen) there is, in practi(>e, no such a thing as (piantity; so that the sign by which it is denoted is, in ninf; cases out of ten, superfluous. Mark flw arcent , and the nuan- U(y will lake care of //se//\ I say that there is no snch i\ thing in English Latin as quantity. I ought ratln^r to havi; said that J'jif/lish //uant/fh's are not Lalin f/iianfi/ies. In Latin, the length of the syllable is dt t(!rmined by the length of the vowels and eonsoiands comldned. A long vowel, it followed in the same word by another (/. e. if followeil by no consonant), is short. A short vowid , 'if followed by two consonants, is long. In English, on the other hand, long vowels make long, whilst short vowels mako short, syl- lahles; so that the (piantity of a syllable in English is de- tonnined by the qnantity of tin in Lr.tin. in English it is Ion Knglish, long in Latin. »• vowel. The / in jiius is shoit The e in mend is short in 76 ON rnK usK or riii: signs of .vrifRNT and quantttv. This, however, is not all. There is, besides, the follow- ing; metrical paradox. A syllable may be iiuKbi lon^^ hy the very fait of itis being short. It is the })ractiee ot" thu English language to signify the shortness of a vowel by doub- ling the consonant that iollows. Hence we get such words as jiKU'fl , linolly , massirc, &.c. — words in which no one cun- siders that the C(»nsonant is actually doubled. For do wo nut pionotince j)i/(c(f and jiilii'd alike? Consonants that appear double to the at/c are common enough. Keally double con- sonants — consonants that sound double to the ear — nre rarities, occurring in one class of words only — viz. in com- pounds whereof the tirst ebnuent ends with the same sound with which the second begins, as soNf-lesa , hook-casi', &c. The doubling, then, of the consonant is a convcmtional modi! ot ex[)ressing Ihe shortnt^ss of the vowel that precedes, and it addresses itscdf to the eye rather than the ear. But does it addr(,'ss itself to the eye only? If it did, pi- tied and i>il(etl , bi'ing sounded alike, would also be of the same ((uantity. We know, however, that to the English writer of Latin verses they are not so. We know tiiat the first is short ipliied), the latter long {pitied). For all this, they are sounded alike: so that the dit1^"erence in quantity (which, as a metrical fact, really exists) is, to a great de- gree, conventional. At any rate, we arrive at it by a se- condary process. We know liow the word is sp(dt; and wo know that certain modes of spelling give certain rules of metre. Our senses her(i are regulated by our experienc(!. Let a classical scholar hear the tirst line of the Eclogues read — Patulic tu Tityre, &c., and he will be shocked. He will also believe that the shock fell on his ear. Yet his ear was unhurt. Ko sense was offended. The thing which was shocked Avas his knowledge of tlie rules of prosody — nothing more. To English ears there is no snch a thfng as quantity — not even in hexa- meters and pentameters. There is no such thing as quan- tity except so far as it is accentual also. Hence come the following phenomena — no less true than strange, — viz. (I) that any classical metre written according to the rules of quantity gives (within certain narrow limits) a regular re- currence of accents; and (2) that, setting aside such shocks as affect our knowledge of the rules of prosody, verses writ- ten according to their accents only give metrical results, English hexameters (such as tln^y are) arc thus wri.t(>n. \w the infer' uces from these remarks there are two assump- ON THE USi: OK Till: SKiNS OF A<;CI:N'T AN'l) QUANTITY. / / tions: 1st, tliat tlio olJ-lasliioned modo of prouuncitition be adhered to; 2nd, tliat when wc pronounce Greek and Latin words as they are pronounced in the recitation of (J reek and Liitui poetry, -we are as accurate as we need be. It is by means of tiiese two assumptions that wo pronounce Tilijre and iHtlulce alike; and I argue that we are free to do so. As far as the ear is concerned, th(i a is as long as the /, on tiie strength of the double I which is sup})ose(l to come after it. It does not indeed so come; but if it did , the sotuul would be the same, the quantity diiferent (for is not iialuUe jtrunounced imUule'i). It would be a quantity, however, to tlic eye only. This pronunciation, however, may be said to be exploded; for do not most men under fifty draw the distinction which is here said to be neglected V Do not the majority make, or fancy they make, a distinction between the two words just quoted V They may or they may not. It is only certain that, subject to the test just indicated, it is immaterial what they do. Nine-tenths of the best modern Latin verses were written under the old system — a system l)ased not upon our ear, but on our knowledge of ceitain rules. Now it is assumed that the acctn-acy sufficient for Lnglish Latin is all the accuracy required. Ask for more, and you get into complex and diflicult qu'.'stions respecting the j)ro- luuK'iation of a dead language. Do what we will, we can- not, un one side, pronounce the Latin like the ancient Ko- nians. Do what we will, so long as wo keep our accents riiiht . v.u eannot (speaHng Latin aftt-r the fashion of Lng- lishuKn) err in the way of quantity — at least, not to the ear. A short vowel still gives a loeg syllable; lor the con- sonant which follows it is supposed to be doubled. Let it be admitted, then, that, for practical purposes, Tilyre and patukc inay^ be proiionnced alike;, and the neces- sity of a large class of marks is avoided. Why writ(!, as the first word in the book is v.jitten, l^ipilio'itiilw? Whttlur the initial syllable be sound' p- or pnpe- is indiifereni So it is whether the fourtli be uttered as -utvn-, or -Oiih~. As far as the ear is amrcnir^l they are both long, because the consonant is is doubled. In dreek, nc/TmLklLovvidca is as long as nuniXXiiovidca. Then comes iMaclinon, where the sign of ([nantity is again useless, the acce>.t alone being sufficient to prev<'nt us saying cither Makhaon or Mahaon. The a is th(> a in fate. "We could not sound it as the a in fa^ 'f ^^'<' would. VierUhv. — What does the ouantity tell us hereV That the / is pronounced as the / in the Greek niovog , rather than 78 ox TUP. Vfil) or TIM', St(iS"S 01' Af'CKNT AN'l) QirANTITY. as tho i in the l^atin pins. But, in Kn{;lish Latin, we pro- nonnco both alike. Suvrly l*i'tris and Pic'rhlw tell us all that is needed. Crula'(jl. — Wiiether lon«j^ or sliort, the i is jji-onouncod iIkj same. Sf.U(i'pis, liapw, and Na'pi — The (") hero prevents us IVoiii siyi;;- Jti'ipjHC and y<}/>ji{. It wouhl certainly bo ineh'^am and unusual to do so. Tested, liowevc^r, by the ear, tlic words riippw and niippi take just the same phicc in an Kng- lish Latin verse as nipc-fc and m'tpe-i. Is any one likoly to say sf'tH/jt/ifs? Perhaps. There ari. The accent, however, guards against this. The second (") is useful. It is certainly better to say car- dafNtN-rrs than carffftmi/i-ess. because the c is from the ( J reek ?;. And this gives us a rule. Let the (') be used to distinguisji »/ from e, and a from o, and in no other case. I would not say that it is necessary to asc it even here. It is better, how- ever, to say jMarhi'ion than Machmn. By a parity of r(!a- soning, tho ("), rejected in the work before us, is sometimes useful. Let it be used in those derivatives where e rejilacos ri, and o replaces co\ cff. having written Machutln , write, as its derivative, Machtinnidw — /. <*. if the word be wanted. This is the utmost for which the signs of quantity am wanted for English Latin. 1 do not say that they are wantid oven for this. One of tho mechanical inconveniences arising from tlio use of tho signs of quantity is this — when a long syllal)lt! is accented, two signs fall upon it. To remedy this, tin.' work before us considers that the stress is to be laid on the syllab'c ;;/Yr^^/////7 tlic arceii/. Yet, if an accent mean anytliiiii:', it means that the stress fall on the syllable which it stands airr. A few remarks upon words like P'wrida', where the accent was omitted. — Hero two short syllables come between two long ones. No accent, liowevcr, is placed over either. Kvi- dently, quantity and accent are so far supposed to coincide', that -the accentuation of a short vowel is supposed to niako ON TIIK USK or TIIK SKINS Ol' AfCKST AND QUANTITY. 79 WO pro- II u.s all us i roiii Thr njf ill list it look like a lon«!^ ono. It is a nmttor of fact, that if, on a word like Cassinpc , we lay an accent on tliu last syllable but one, we shock the cars of scholars, especially metrical OIK'S. Does it, however, lenj^^th(!n the vowd? The editors of the work in question seem to think that it docs, jind, much more consistent than scholars in fjeneral, hesitate to throw it back upon the preceding syllable, which is short also. jMotrists have no such olijection; tlx^ir practice! being to sav Cassiopc without detriment to the vowel. The ento- mologists, then, are the more consistent. Tlicy are, however, more consistenr, than tliey iiecil be. If ill! accent is wanted, it niiiy i'all on the shortest of all jKissilile syllables, (iranting, however, that (.'tiss/ojtc (whe- ther the o l>e sounded as in /lOfe or /lol) is rcpuiinaut to metre, and ('((sst'ojte to theory, what is their remedy y It is I'irliiiiily true that (Vtssfopc is pronounceable. I'oj)e writes — ''Like twinkling stars the misrcllanu's o'er." No man reads this tnisct'llunien; few read it tnlscelluniea. The mass say fn/s'irf/tnift's. Doing this, they nink than upon the second." True! but this im[)lies that w(! say I'dssiojiii Is -c , how- ever, one bit the longer for being accented, or can it bear one iota i!(ore of accent for being longV No. Tak(> -at {\'i)\\\ peal , and -/ from pel, and the result is pe — just as lon,<;- or just as short in one case as the other. The same power of accenting the first syllable is ''parti- eulurly the case in those words in which tin? vowel / can as- sume the power of y. Latin scholars are divided as to the proper accentuation oi' mn//rn's , Tulliida , and others: though custom is in favour of maUvri's, tmt/ /crcs appears to b(! more correct." lie it so. L(ft Diulicrrs be iniih/crcs. ^^'hat be- couios, however, of the fourth syllable? The word is no (jmi- flrisyllable at all. What is meant is iliis: — not that certain fjuadrisyllables with two short vo,»-eIs in the middle are ilitfienlt to accentuate, but that tlu^y are cc^rtain words of which it is difficult to say wheth(U' they are trisyllables or (|uailrisyllal)les. For all practical purposes, however, words like Cassiopc 80 ON THE U8K OP THK .SKiNS OF Af-'CENT AND glANTlTV. are quadrisyllables. They are, in the way of metre, chori- ambics ; and a chorianibic is a quadrisyllable foot. Thov ■were pronounced Cassiope, &c., by Enj^lish writers of Latin verses — when Latin verses were written well. Let the pronunciation which was pood enough for Vincent Bourne and the contributors to the Musai Etonenses be good enough for the entomologists, and all that they will IIkh have to do is not to pronounce cratwgum like slrnlagcm, car- daminc's like Tfieramerws , and vice versd. Against this, accent will ensure them — accent single-handed and without any sign of quantity — Cardamines , Thenimenes, craUcgum, stra- tagem. V. CimONOLOGICA. ON THE MEANING OF THE WORD ^APOS. HEAD BEFORE THE I'lIILOLOUlCAL SOCIETY. APRIL 11, 1845. Tlic words GKQog and sariis are the Greek and Latin forms Idfa certain term used in the oldest Jiahylonian ehronology, the moaning of which is hitherto undetermined. In the opi- inion of the present writer, the sarus is a period of 4 years and 340 days. In the way of direet external evidence as to the value of I the epoch in question, we have, Avith the exce})tion of an I unsatisfactory passage in Suidas, at the hands of the ancient I historians and according U) the eurrcr.t inteipretations, only the two following statements: — 1. That each snrus consisted of 3600 years (fry). 2. That the first ten kings of Babylon reigned J 20 sari, [equal to i:^2/)()() years; or on an average 4I{,200 years apiece. With (lufa of this sort, we must either abandon the chrono- logy altogether, or el^e cliange the power of the word i/ear. The first of these alternatives was adopf^ 1 by Cicero and Pliny, and doubtless other of the anci(Mits - conlcmiiumus iclifiin fhtbi/fon/t/s el cos qui e Cauatso ac/i .s/fiii:i obserrt/nfcs ?ni- Jiieris et modihus sicllarum ciirsus perscqunnhir; contlonHcmus \mqmim lios aul slullilia' aut vunilalis aut iminiilr)ili(r tpii cccclxx tnillia (tfinanim, ut ipsl dicitnf, /nuHumciK/s romprr/icHsa conti- nent. — Cic. (Ic Divinal.^ from Coi-ys Ancioit J''n/f///icN/s. Again \~e diverso Epif/cfics a/n/d Bahi/lo)iius ix'C.W annnnt/it obscrvn- \tmes sidennn cocd/ibus /afcrcid/s iiiscnfda< dorcl , r/raris auclor inpiimis: qui minimum licroaus cl Critodcmus cccclxxx anno- 6 82 ftM Tllr; MKANlN'fl OV tltli WOIin dUQO^. rum. — Pliny, vii. 50. On tlio otlior hand, to alter tlic va!ii,> of the word hog or annus has been the resource of at leas: one modern philologist. Now if we treat the question by what may be called tli lenlitUve method, the first step in our inquiry will be to Hii!! some division of time whieh shall, at onee, bo natural \\\\ itself, and also sliort enough to make H) sari possible \m\> of an average human life. Fortius, even a day will bo tuii long. Twelve hours, however, or half a vvx^^il'iQov, will give us possible results. laking this view therefore, and leaving out of the account the 2yth of February, the words hoq and annus mean, not a year, but the 730th part of one; .'JfiOO of which makfi a sarus. In other words, a iw//.s'=1800 day-times and him night-times, or 3G00 half vvi^^^eqk, or 4 years + 340 days, The texts to which the present hypothesis applies are cu tain passages in Eusebius and 8yncellus. These are found- ed upon the writings of Alexander I'olyhistor, Apollodorus, Berosus, and Abydenus. From hence we learn the lcii}:tli of the ten reigns alluded to above, viz. 120 sari or 591 yoars and odd. days. liehjns of this period are just })ossible. It is suggested, however, that the reiyn and life are dealt witli as synonymous; or at any rate, that some period beyond that during which each king- sat singly on his throne has been recorded . The method in question led the late Professor llask to a different power for the word sarus. In his /Eldsle Hebrimk Tidretjnung he writes as follows: "The meaning of the su- "called sari has been impossible for me to discover. The "ancients explain it difll'erently. Dr. Ludw. Idelor, in his ^^Handbuch der malhematischen and lechnischen Cfirono/oyie^ i. "207, considers it to mean some lunar period; without how- "ever defining it, and without sufficient closeness to enable "us to reduce the 120 sari, attributed to the ten ancient kings. "to any probable number of real years. 1 should aliiio>; "believe that the sarus wi^s a year of 23 months, so thattlie "120 sari meant 240 natural years." p. 32. Now Kask's iiy- pothesis has the advantage of leaving the meaning of the word reif/n as we find it. On the other iiand, it blinks the question of ett] or anni as the parts of a sarus. Each doc- trine, however, is equally hypothetical; the value of the sarus, in the present state of our in((uiry, resting solely upon the circumstance of its giving a plausible result from plau- sible assuinptions. The da/a through which the present \\ritor asserts fVr his explanation the proper amount of probability are contained in two passages hitherto unapplied. 1-2 hours), in i naoa Xakdatc ON Tin: MI'.ANINO OI" Tin: Woiil) o'aoo;. S3 le account 1. From Kiisrbius — ts ( lieroHiis ) sannn rx anuis 3000 \ciiit/l(ii. Addit cddni iiescio (jium ucruiii ac i?osiiiu: neruiii ait liiiii initiis consdtrt', sosuiii an tit's (iO. Sic tile de vclvrnm ntore ](iiiiios ciimpukil. — 'rraiislation of the Armenian Kusebius, }>. 5, {\v\n I'f'i(///it'ida J/is/oricontt/i Crticinutn , p. -WW): I'aris, IS 11. 2. IJcrosus — Gagos df loriv t^axooicc xal Tpt(J;|;fcAta fT»/, vt'igog dt t^axoOia, (Jw0(Jot,* t^ijXovTcc. — From (,'ory's /Indent t'nif/tiwnts. Now tli(! assumed value of tlu; word translated i/ear (vii-. 12 hours), in its application to tlie passages just (piuted, {jfivea |(ir the powers of the three terms tiiree divisions of time as iiiitund as could he exj)et:ted under the cireunistane.es. 1. Haooog. — The sosus = 'M\ days and 30 nights, or 12 lidurs X 00, or a month of 30 days, ^t)v TQiaxov&t'iiiii^Qos. Aristotle writes — i] ,aj}i/ ylccxavLX)] fxvov ^(Qog roi) ii^iav- Tou, TuVTo de tt«t« rr}v tmv Xaldaicov ip^rpov, einsQ 6 acigog noisi /if/VKS ctkrjviavKov oh^', o'l yivovxai it] ivtavxol xal tifjvts f^. 81 OS Tin: Mi;AsiN'(i i>v riii; wnnu aago:. In .loaoplius wo find tho rocojjjnition of un anniix w/w/nw containing' as many frtj as tlic ncrus did: STtfira xcd di' uQh tijv xril Tjjv tvxQriazCav , av e Jif voovv aGTQoloyiai^ xal yn)- ^fTQiccg nksov jryi' zov C^sov aiirors* miQccdiiiv niifQ ov/, i^i afjQjaAwt; aurofg nQoiiTtetv ^it) ^iiOuaiv e^ccxoGiovg fviuviov; diK TooovTov yaQ 6 fieyccg eviuvrog TthjQovtcd. — Aiftir/. i. :;, The followinfi; doctrine is a sn^^cstion, viz. that in the word .sY/,s7/,s' we have the II(d)rew dd •-— s/.r. If tliis l)o tnir, it is probable that tlie sostts itself wa.s ordy a secondary di vision, or sonu; other period nndtiplicd by six. Snch woull be a period of five days, or ten hrj (so-calhul). \Vith tliis view we get two probabilities, viz. a snbdi vision of the nientli, and the alternation of the numbers (i and 10 throuf'hout; i.i: from the hog* (or 12 hours) to the sarus (or fivo ycarsj. After the readin;:,- of this paper, a long discussion followcl on the question, how far the Sftrus could be considered ii> belonging to historical chronology. The Chairman (Professor Wilson) thought there could be no doubt that the same prin- ciples which regulatcnl the mythological periods of the Hin- doos prevailed also in the Babylonian computations, altliou^'Ii there might be some variety in their application. 1. A mahfnjtKja or great age of the ilindoos, comprisinj the four successive yiiyna or ages, consists of 1,. '{20,000 yoais. 2. These years being divided by 'MM), the number ot days in the Indian lunar year, give 12,00(1 periods. 3. By casting off two additional cyphers, these nund)ors are reduced respectivcdy to 132,000 and 120, the nund)ois of the years of the )>aroi of the ten Babylonian kings, whilst in the numbers 12,'}(>0 and 3000 we have the coincideiue of other elements of the com])utation. * In tho courHC of the evonin}; it was stated, that e.von by wiitprs quoted by Syiu-elliis tzoq had heeii triinslafed ilnji; ami a reference \\;\< made to an article in the Canihridire I' hilolojrloal Mnseuni On the Dup of f/ir H'cck, for the opinion of Oailly in modern, and of Anniaiiii^ and I'anodorus in aneiiMit tiini's: ravta txr] i^usQag iXoyi'aavTO oroia auxcJg. -J). '10, vol. i. See also p. I'i, VT. BIHIJOGlUrmCA. mnTJOGiiAniiCAr. tsotice of tuv. WORKS ON THE I^IIOVLNC'IALISMS OF II01J.ANI) FROM TArEUS BY YAN DEN BERG] I AND IlETTEMA IN lllE TAALKUNDIG MAGAZJJN. HEAD BKFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCU'^T. Van den IUtj^Ii , Taat. Mat/, ii. 2. 19;i-2l(). GuoNiNGKN. — Latinuan, J'roeii' vitn kleine taalkundifje bij- (Init/eii tot bcler kennia van den tonyval in de Provincic Grunin- iji'ii. — (jroninj^on I h22. J. Sonius Swuiifiin.'vn, Comment: dc diahrto (lro)iin ."^1*' %>** V /A Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 & M ^ <\ 86 i!im,i(»iii;Ai':iicAi, MiTic!; of tiih works ^^c. Siibdialects iiidicatcMl l)y J. A. ms existing; ((f) on tlio l''ii( ,. land frontier, {!/) in tlio Fens. 1j. Van ]>olhnis. — (Joll(!Ction of (ironinj^on nnd Oiuiiiclaul Avords not found in llalnia's Lexieon; '.villi notes l)y ("liumtt. Steenwinkol, and IMalnoe. j\IS. In tlii? library of the ^laat- schappij van Nederlandsclie Letterkunde. OvEiMJt^EL. — J. II. llalbertsnia, /'rocrc tuni cni JJ'nonla, bockje van lui Ovcrijxt'lscli. — Overijsselsclien Ahnanak vuur Oinllicid en Lcitteren, 1S.'](). ]\I. AVinlioif, Jjindrcchl rar Aiicri^xcl . hvccdc dnd; . met nrL' (philoloiiieal as well as otiierj adiilcclxciihtffcn (hjor ■/. A. ('Iidliihi — (,'anii)en, 17h2. 'W \\. Van jNIarle, Sdmciixjtrdki' fiissr/ioi r/i snait/,- zan //. as (Icr (jdukki(j nrvl in Ic mcnif/lc zini en en lu'crcn-krccht il.r ffk-n hoc of ha zt', op ilc marki (c JJcvenlcr van vcryiintjc vrij- (lag. — Ovorijselsclien Almanak, t^c, itl si/jira. Over (le Tn-enf/isrhe Vora/en en Klanlnvijz'njinijen ^ .: derlandsche Letterkunde. (Jeldehlam). — H. I. tSwaving, Opr/ave van eenhje in iU'l- (terland gehrnikelijke woorden. — Taalkundig Magazijn, i. I, pp. 305. Ihid.— Ihid. ii. L ])p. 7()— SO. Optnerkingen omlrenl den (lelderschen Tongval. — Ibid. ii. 1. pp. 39S — 42(j. I'he fourth section is devotrtl to some pe- culiarities from the neighbourhood of Zutphen. N. C. Kist, Over de ver n'issiingvan zedelijke en zinne/ijl.i' Hoedanigheden in sommige lletawsehe Idio/iswen. — • Nieuwe W'n- ken der IMaatsch. van Nederl. Letterkund. iii. 2. 1834. Slaaltje van Graafschapsela' landlal. — Proeve van Taalhwi- di/k' Opmerkingen en BedenUngen, door T. (1. C. Kalckholl. — Vaderland-3che Lctteroefeningen for .June 182(i. Appendix to the above. — Ihid. October I S20. Het Zeumerroaisel: a poem. 1834? — -Ivnown to Van dcii Bergh only through the newspapers. ])('lieved to have bocii published in 1834. Ef Se/iaassen-riejen , en praolparlicken fnssen Ifarmenen Dur- teld. — CJeldersche Volks-AInianak, I83r>. Zutphen Di.ilcrt, r.ii'.noOKAriiKAr, noi'H'i-; or inr. woijks vltc, 87 [ic fishoikcrmm. — Geldersehe \'olks-Aliiianak, 1S36. Dia- lect of ( >v('r \'('lu\ve. Hue Mc/s/cr Maorfcn baor(f/nan baos Joosten en sclial dcirin- (/(■//. — Gt!ltl<'i'st'lie \'olks-Alniannk, JS-SO. Dialect of I iijni. iipf/dir ran ccnitjc in (icJdvrhDuI (/('hn(il,cUJ/,e trourdcn ac. — II. 1. Swavin^'. — Taalk. ISliv^. iv. 4. pp. 'M)1 — \VM). .Uinlcckcninyen Icr vcrhctcrinfj en uHhrcidinij dcr opmvrkinoen mlrcnl den Geldcrsclicn Tunyvul. — TaaL ]\Iag. iii. 1. pp. :jij-so. A. \'an (Ion J)er^li. — A\\)rds from the provincial dialects (it the Vclinven; with additions by H. T. l''olnior. — i\18. Library of the Maats( hap})ij van Kederlandsclie Lettcrkundc. Handbook, containing;' the explanation and etymoloay of si'veral obscure and antiquated words, t\:c. occurrinpj in the (ieUU'rland and other ncighbourinji' Law-books. — l^y J. C. ('. V. ll[asselt]. — iMS. Library of the Maatscliappij van No- ilerlandsche Letterkunde. Holland, — Schceps-pnial , ten overJijden ran Prints Mau- rila van Oranr/c. — lluy■ had the a])i)(','ir- ance of hein;;- an adjectival tcjrnunation , as in Mcdic-m J^ersN'-iis i'ate(l as the substantiv(> iimihi' of a nation or poo])le from avIuuico the article in (picstion (i. e. the scifr artiide) was derived. The Seirs therefnp; were the; hypothetical j)roduc(!rs of the article that bore tluir name {scrir). Whether this view involves more improbabilities than the current one will be seen from the forthcoming' ob- servations. — 1. in the first [)b'ice the crude ^'orm .svvvc was neither Latin nor (ireek, so that the -ic could not be adjectival. 2. Neither was it in th(> simpler form acr- that the tenu was introcbiced into tin; classical lang'ua,ii,es so that the ad- jectival -ic nu_i>ht be appeiuled afterwards. — 3. Tlie name in question wliat(!vt!r mifi;lit liave been its remote orifiin was introcbiced into (ireq^u; from the Seiiiitic tongues (])robably the J/hoenician) and was the word p'"*: in Isaiah XIX. 9. where the pi (the -ir) is not an adjectivn! ap})endage but a radical ])art of the word. And here it iiiav be well to indicate that, except under the improbable suppor-i- tion that the Hebrew name Avas borrowed from the Greek or Latin, it is a matter of indifference wlietlierthe word in qins- tion was indigenous to the ^Semitic Jianguages or intnxhuod from abroad, and also that is a matter of indifference whotiier silk was known in the time of the Old Testament or not. It is sufficient if a term afterwards a])plied to that article Ava? Llcbrew at the time of Isaiah, (^f any connection betAVCfii the substance called pi-i':j and a nation called Seres there is in the Semitic tongues no trace. The foundation of the pre- sent scepticism originated in the observation that the suppo- S(k1 national existence of the Seres coincided Avith the intro- duction of the term seric into languages Avliere ic- Avas an adjectiA'al affix. — As early as the Augustan age the substantive -SVvr.s' ap- pears by the side of the adjective Scricus. In Virgil, Ho- race and Ovid the Avords may be found and from this tiiiift doAvuAvards the express notice of a nation so called is found through a long series of Avriters. — ISJotAvithstanding this it is as late as the time of Mela be- ).\ I'liK i;xisi'i;.\<'i; oi' a nation r.r.AitiNc Tin; na>u; i^( 01 foro we find nny .lutlior iiHMitidnina- with detail and jirfci- sidu M f:<'(i;^rajiliical nationality for tho Serot<. ''lie (^Ida) (liscribos tlicin as a Acry lioiicst ]km)|)1iisj!('(tcd, since it helon^s to the amhiunous tdass of what iiiav ho called convertible descriptions. The same story is told of an African nation in Herodotus IV. Kill. io the statement of ^fela wo may aihl a notic(! from Am- iiiinims IMarcelliiius of the f|nict and ])eac(\'d)h^ character of the S(n-es (XXIJI. (5.) and a statement from the novelist Ilelio- (Idriis that at the nuptials of 'rhea. 4i)4. (Jonnnrdini). Now notices more detinite than th(! above of the national (■xi!^ten(•e of tlio Seres anterior to the time of Justinian we have nunc whilst suhserpiontly to the reiij'n of that emjx'ror tluM'o is an ('((ual silence on the ])art botli of historians and .i;eo- p-apliors. Xeith(!r have modern ethiuturapliers found un- rqnivocal traces of tribes hearin*;- that nauiC. The ])robability of a confusion like the one indicated at the connnencM'ment of the ])aper is incrt'ased by the facts stated in p. 222. of the Textrinum. Here we s(;e that besi(U)s Paiisanias, Hesy(diius, IMiotius and other writcu's give two sonses to the root .syv-whicli they say is (1.) a worm (2.) the name of a nation. Probably Cleuiens Ak'xandriinus does tlio same vij^ia %qx^6ov ^ y.ai (jrJQag ^Ivdixovg ^ xa) tovg TTfQi- fQyovg jioa^vxag %aiQtLV smnag. A ])assaiL!,e from Uli)ian (Tex- trimnn p. 102) k\ids to the belief that (jrJQCcg here means silk-worm. Vestimentorum sunt onniia hanca lincaque, vel si'rir(( vol bombycina. Finally the probability of the assumed confusion is veri- tiod by the statement of l^rocopius ccvTij de ioriv ^ ^iftu^u, f| I'jg fi(6ifc(6t TTiV sGd-rJTcc Igydtii^Gd-nL ^ rjv naXai \U:v"FAXr\vtg M}]dL}irjv sxdlovv ^ xavvv 61 (jtjQLXt]V 6voudt,ovaiv. (l)e Bell. P(Tsio. I. 20.). Militating; against these views I find little unsusceptible of ex])lanation. — 1. The expros'^ion arjQLXK diQ^iara of the author of the Pe- liplns Claris Erythrar-i means skins from the silk country. 2. The intricacy introduced into the question by a passage of Procopius is greater. In the account of the first intro- duction of the silk -worm into Europe in the reign of Justi- nian the nu)nks who introduced it having arrived from In- ilia stated that they had long resided in the country called 92 C)\ THK KXISTENCF, OF A NATION IlKArUNr, Tlin NAME ^^(\ Sorinda inlinl)i(0(l by Indian nations wlioro tlioy had loarnorl liow raw silk niijulit he. produc^id in tlio country of tlm lionians (Toxtrinuni p. 2',i\). This is so much in favor of tin: root Sor- l)einj;- frcntilo, but at the sanio time so mucli against tho Seres boinf;- (Jhiiicse. Sanskrit scholars may porha])s al- just tliis matter. The Serinda is probably the fabulous So- rendib. In tlie countries around the orip;inal localities of the silk- worm the naiDC for silk is as follows — Tn (Joroan Sir. Chlnoso sc. IMongolian sirkck. Mandehoo sirghc. It is the conviction of the present writer tliat a nation called Seres had no geographical existence. ON THE Biyrw CJ BEFOT It is consid( between the L nesus Cimbricj improbability sucli a connec concurrent bel (■nee. This, he following can the knowledge tions conquerei and indefinite : "iving- any fui the (Jinibri wa of the geograp that thus their ; wards until it 1 htnd, where tl graphical kno\ 1,'ettiiig farther of the languag ncd in order, : Of Sallust a home of the n intimation of that country. nostris, Q. Ca Consul absens ON riTE EVIDENCE OF A CONNECTION BETWEEN THE CIMBIII AND THE CJI EllSONESUS CIMBRIC A. UK AD BEFORE THE nilLOLOGICAL SOCIETY. FKUKUARV 9, 1844. It is considered that the evidence of any local connection between the Cinibri conquered Ly Marius, and the Cherso- iicsus Cinibrica, is insuthcient to count(!rbaIanco the natural improbability ot' a long and difficult national inioi-ation. (Jf :tiii between the Cindiri and the (iauls oi'daul, sueh must liav- been fanuliarly known in l^onu;, since slaves of both im>. must there have been common. (.';esnr, whose evidence; ou<^ht to be conclusive (inasimul. as ho know ot" (Jormany as W(dl as of (Jaul), lixes them in the south of tho Marno and tSeinc. This wu learn, njt trmu the direct text, but from inf(;renco: ''(Jallos — a Jielgis M;i- trona ot Sefjuana dividit." Jicll. Call, i. 'M5el<.;as — s(»l(,s esse qui, patruui nostrum memoria, omni (iailia, vex;it,i, Teutones (Jimbrosquc intra fines suos in<;redi prohibueruut." Hell. Gall. ii. 4. IS'ow if the Teutones and Cinibri had movnl from north to south, they would have clashed with the bel- g;o first and with the other (Jauls aft(M'wards. The couvcim. however, was the fact. It is ri^ht hero to state, that tln' last observation may be explained away by su])posing, either that the Teutones and Cinibri here meant may be a remnm of the confederation on their niurn , or else a portion that settled down in (Jaul upon their way; or finally, a division that made a circle towards the pbicc of their destination in a south-east direction. None of tlu^se however seem the plain and natural construction; and I would rather, if reduced tn tlio alternative, read ^'(Jt'iffum/a" instead of ^^Gallin^^ than acquiesce in the most probable of them. Diodorus Siculus, Avithout defining their locality, (hal? throughout with the Cinibri as a Gaulish tribe. Besides this, he gives us one of the elements of tho assumed indistinctm^s of ideas in regard to their origin, viz. their hypothetical connexion witli tho Cinnnerii. In this recognition of what might have been called tho Cimmeriun theory, he is followeil by Strabo and Plutarch. — Diod. Sicul. v. 32. Slntho vii. Plutarch. Vit. jVariL The next writer who mentions them is Strabo. In con- firmation of the view taken above, this author places i\v Cinibri on the northernmost limit of tho area geographically known to him, viz hci/ond Gaul and in Germany, between tho Rhine and the Elbe: rav da reQadvav., cog sizov, oi'fif' nQoOccQXTioi naQtjKovOi tw Slxeava. rv(OQit,ovTKi, d' dm) rav exjiokav rov 'Prjvov kafiovxsg rrjv dQ^rj^ f^^XQ'' ''^^'^ 'V/A/JfOj. Tovtav de etol yvaQL^ataroL iJovyaupgoo zs xal Kc^(iQOL (is iiii: i;vii)KN('i: (ir a cdn.vi'.ciion iir/rwKi-.v Tiir, cniiuii Sn\ '.)5 (lyvcoOTU )jiiiv tdriv. [\\. iv.) I'urllicr jtroi)! that this was the tVoiiticr ot" thd Uoiiian world wc ^(.'t iVoni th»! statciiicnit which soon follows, viz. that 'Hhiis umcli was known to the Kdiiiaiis tVoni tluMT succcsst'ul wai's, and that nior*' wonlcl luivc hern known had it not bci-a tor the injnnitiun of Au- musIus forbidding' his j^cntM'als to cross tin; Klhc" (li. iv.) N'cjh'ius I'atcrculus aj^rccs with his cont('iii[)t)rary Straho. He idac'cs tht-ni beyond the iJhino and deals with them as (icnuaiis: — "tnm Cimbri ot Tentoni transceiider own sake only, were worth discussin^j,', even at the exjieusc of raisin;^* a wholly independ(!nt question. Such hovvevfr ii is not. If the (Jimbri wore Celts, tin; imj)r')])al)ility of llujr originatin;;' in the Cindjrie Cluu-soncse would be increased, and Avith it the amount of e\ idonce ro(|uired; since, layiii;' aside other considerations, the natural unlikelihood of a larj;(; area being traversed by a mass of emigrants is greatly en- hanced by the fact of any iritermodiate portion of that ;uv;i being possessed by tribes as alien to each other as the (iauls and Germans. Hence therefore the fact of the Cimbri hoin;: Celts Avill (if proved) be considered as making against tin' probability of their origin in the Cimbric Chersonese; \vliil>t if they be shown to bo Goths, tlu; difHculti(!s of the sup- position will be in some degree dinunisluKl. Whichever way this latter point is settled, something will be gained for tlio historian; since the supposed presence of Celts in the Ciui- brie Chersonese has complicated more than one question in ethnography. Previous to proceeding in the inquiry it may be well to lav down once for alias a postulate, that whatever, in the way of ethnography, is proved concerning any one tribe of tli' Cimbro-Teutonic league, nuist be considered as proved con- cerning the remainder; since all explanations grounded upon the idea that one part was Gothic and another part Cdtii have a certain amount of prima facie improbability to sit aside. The same conditions as to the bunlen of proof apply also to any hypotheses founded on the notion oi retirinf/ Cim- bri posterior to the attempted invasion of Italy. On this point the list of authors quoted will not be brought l^elow^ the tiuio of Ptolemy. With the testimonies anterior to that writer, bearing upon the question of the ethnography, the attempt however will be made to be exhaustive. Furthermore, as the question in hand is not so much the absolute fact as to whether the Cimbri were Celts or Gotlis. but one as to tlic amount of evidence upon which we believe them to be either )s Tin; F.vioKNM' ni' v cdn'six'TIiiv ni;T\vi:r;\ Tin: ciMimi I'tr. 97 lllic oiic 111' the otluT, .statciMciits will In; iiotlird under tlm liiiid of <'vi(U'iico, iMtt l)r».'iius(! tlicy Jiriiii)»ly bc'i-ausi! tliey have cNcr been lookcfl upon aH sucli. ||l.';;iiiiiinj; then with the (iernianie origin of the Ciinhro- JTfUtiinie conletlcration; and dealin^i- si'|tarately uith suedi jiiibcs as aro separately inention(!d, we fir>t timl the Ainl'i'oiics. — In tlu! Anylo Saxon poem called tlu^ 'l^'avid- jci's .Snn;^', there! is a notice ot a trihe called )'//i//n\ l'//iht(is, lor I'nihniii. Sulim, the historian ul' Denmark, has alhjwcd lliiiiiself to inia;;ino that those represent tin; Amhnmoi , and jtliiit their iianu! still exists in that (d' the island Amron of jtiir coast of iSleswick , and perhaps in .inicrluiid , a part of Idlijciihur;;'. — Thorpu's note on the Traveller's !S(.»n;j,' in the \Oiih\i' Kxoiiii'nsia. 'Jhidiiii's. — In the way of evidences of there boinf^- Teuto- nrs amongst the (lernians, over and above tlu; associate men- Itioii of tlieir names with that (d' the ("imbri, there; is but little. Thoy are not so mentioned either by Tacitus or Strabo. I'tolciiiy, however, mentions a) the Ttutonarii, h) i\\o Tcu- tuiits; TtmovoaQioL xcd (Jvlquiwol — 0aQadnvm> dl xal |2i'>(/icjv, Tivtovfg xcd "Jiui{)KOL. JJesides this, howexcr, l;iri;uiiicnts have been taken from a) tlu; nvcaninj^- of tluj root \kul = people (\)hH/a, M. (J.; \)C(J(l, A. S. ; (//of, (). II. (J.): \l.i} the Sdlliis Tcu(oOcrf//iis: c) the supposed connection of the jliresoiit word JJcul-scIt =z (k'rma)i with the classical word Teul- |w/«. These may briefly be disposed of. I a.) It is not unlikely for an invading nation to call thom- bi'lves Ihc nation, flic lutliuns, Ihe jicopic, &.('. Neither, if the Itribo in (juestion liad done so (presuminj^' them to have been (iiriiians or Goths), would the word employcMl be very un- like Tci//on-c's. Although the word \vml-u = tuition ov people, is fifiiendly strong in its decdension (so making the plural hj/z/f/wAvj, it is found also in a weak form with its plural yhidl-m-- Teuton-. See Deutsche Grammaiik , i. OiJO. /'.) The Sallus Teuloherfjius mentioned by Tacitus [Ann. i. OO) jean scarcely have taken its name from a tribe, or, on the jotlier hand, have given it to one. It means either ike hill of //«' iitvple, or the city of the people; according as the syllable -hmj- is derived from huirgs^^a hill, or from b(tu?-(/s =^ a citij. In either case the compound is allowable, e. rj. diot- vm,\mhlic way, O. H. G.; thiod-.>r^////o , robber of the people, |'*.S. ; YQ6({-cijnin(/, peod-wmrr, boundary of the nation^ A. S.; |l)iiHl-/^///r/^ l)i6d-?rV/;-, people >i way, Icelandic; — Theud-t'-w//-?/A-, ^\\f^\\A-e-linda, Theml- i-r/ot ha , proper names (from ])iud-): Imil-herac, «W/-perac; /Wo?/-p('rac, (.). II. (1.; himin\mh'i>;, 'Wbiorg, Icelandic (from bdirgs z=:i hill) — ^/sc/purc, hasalimrc, 7 98 0\ THE F.VinRNOR (>r A CoNVKCTlON KiyrWHKN TUB CIMBRI &.(•. OS" Tltft KVII t % saltz^nvc, &c., O. H. G. (from haitrgs^citij). The partiru- lar wort dioi-imruc=^cwiias magna occurs in O. H. G. — >nbri on the other, we have the clue to the mis- conceptions assumed at the commencement of the paper. There is no proof that in the eyes of the Avriters under the Republic, the origin of the Cindn'i was a matter of either doubt or speculation. Catulus, in the History of his Consul- ship, connnended by Cicero (Bruhis, xxxv.), and Sylla in his Commentaries, must have spoken of them in a straightforward manner as Gauls, otherwise Cicero and Sallust Avould have spo- ken of them less decidedly. (See Plutarch's Lffe of Marius, and nolc.) Confusion arose when Greek readers of Homer and Herodotus began to theorize , and this groAV greater Avhen formidable enemies under the name of Sicambri Avere found in (lennany. It is highly probable that in both Strabo and Tacitus we have a commentary on the lines of Horace — Te cicde gaudentos Sicambri Compositis veneraiitur iinnis. ''Kimulem (wdth the Chauci, Catti, and Cherusci) Germanise sinum proximi Oceano Cimbri tenent. parva nunc civitas, 7* :; J'; loo OS* Tin: i:vii»i:.N('K ot" a connectiok between* the oiMiiiu &.(:, OS THE EVID sed gloria ingcns: vetorisquc fanirc lata vestigia nmncnt, utraque ripa castra ac spatia, quorum anibitu nunc (|U()(jU(' motiaris nioleni nianusque gcntis, et tarn magni exitus iidcin — oceasiono discordia; nostras et i-iviliuin armoruni , oxpu;;- natis legionum hibernis, etiani Gallias att'ijctavere; ac rursib pulsi. inde proxiinis tcmporibus triumphati niagis quam victi sunt." (German. 38.) Justin. — Justin writes — "Simul e Gennanid Cinibros — inundasse Italiani." iS'ovv this extract would be valuable if we were sure that the Avord Gennania came from .Justin's ori- ginal, Trogus Pompeius; who was a Vocontian Gaul, livinff soon after the Cinibric defeat. To him, however, the toriii Germania mu;:-t have been wholly unknown; since, besides general reasons, Tacitus says — ''Germanise vocabulum receiis et nuper additum : quoniam , qui primuin Kli(;uum transgress! Gallos expulerint, ac nunc Tungri, tunc Germani vooati sint: ita nationis nornen, non gentis evaluisse paullatiiii, lU omnes, primum a victore ob metum, mox a seipsis invento nomine Germani vocarentur." Justin's interpolation of Ger- mania corresponds with the similar one on the part of Strabo, Such is the evidence for the Germanic origin of the Cinihri and Teutones, against which may now be set the followinf; testimonies as to their affinity with the Celts, each tribe being dealt with separately. The Amhrones. — Strabo mentions them along with the Ti- gurini , an undoubted Celtic tribe — Raxk xov tcqos "yJ^(iQa- vag xal Tcovy£vovg tioIe^ov. Suetonius places them Avith the Transpadani — "per Ain- bronas et Transpadanos." [Cwsar, § 9.) Plutarch mentions that their war-cries Avere understood and answered by the Ligurians. Kow it is possible that the Ligurians were Celts, Avliilst it is certain that they were not Goths. T/ie Teutones. — Appian speaks of the Teutones having in- vaded Noricum, and this under the head KeXtixa. Florus calls one of the kings of the Teutones Teutobocclius, a name Celtic rather than Gothic. Virgil has the following lines: — late jam tiun ditionc prcmebat Sarrastes populos, et qute rigat a^quora Sarnns; Quique liufas, Uatuluinque teneut, atque arva Celennae; Et quus maliferaj despectant nmniia Abella?: I'entotnco ritu o.>!iti torquore caieias. Tegmiua queis capituiu raptus de subere cortex, ^i^ratteque micant peltse, micat aureus ensis. — ^En. vii.737 — 743. ON' THE EVIDEXOE OF A COXXKCTION BETWRKN THK CIMinU SiC, 101 Xow tlus word cuicla may l)o a provincialism from tlio neigh- lionrliood of Sarraste. It may also (amonf^st other things) 1)0 unients drawn from the descriptions oitlitT of their physical conformation or their manners. The silence of the Gothic traditions as lo the Cimbri beinj^ Ger- manic, proves more in the way of negative evidence than the similar silence of the Celtic ones, since tlie Gothic le- (.'ends arc the most numerous and tlui most ancient. Jiesides this, they deal very espocially with genealogies, national and individual. The name of Jiojorix, a Cimbric king men- tioned in Epilotne Liviuna (Ixvii.), is Celtic rather than Go- thic, although in the latter dialects proper names ending in -rh\ [Alaric, Genaer-ic) frequently occur. Measuring the evidence, which is in its character essen- tially cumulative, consisting of a number of details unim- portant in themselves, but of value when taken in the mass, the balance seems to be in favour of the Cimbri, Teutones and Ambrones being Gauls rather than Germans, Celts rather than Goths. An argument now forthcoming stands alone, inasmucli as it seems to prove two things at once, viz. not only the Celtic origin of the Cimbri, but, at the same time, their locality in the Chersonese. It is brought forward by Dr. Pritchard in his 'Physical History of IMankind,' and runs as follows: — (//.) It is a statement of Pliny that the sea in their neigh- bourhood was called by the Cimbri Morimantsa , or the dead mi =^ mare morlmim. (p.) It is a fact that in Celtic Welsh mor martvth =z tnare mortuum, morimarnsa, dead sea. Hence the language of the Cyimbric coast is to be considered as Celtic. Now the following facts invalidate this conclusion: — (I.) Putting aside the contradictions in Pliny's statement, the epithet dead is ina])plicable to either the German Ocean or the Baltic. (2.) Pliny's authority was i writer named Philemon: out of the numerous Philemons enumerated by Fahricius, it is lik(dv that the one here adduced was a con- temporary of Alexander the Great; and it is not probable that at that time glosses from the Paltic were known in the Mediterranean. (,'}.) The subject upon which this Philemon wrote was the Homeric Poems. This, taken along with the freography of the time, makes it highly probable that the orifjinal (ireek was not KCh^qol, but Ki^iiEQLOf, indeed we are not absolutely sure of Pliny having written Cimbri. (4.) As applied to Cimmerian sea the epithet dead was applicable. (•').) The term JJorimarusa =^ mare 7nnrlmtm , although good Celtic, is better Slavonic, since throughout that stock of languages, as in many other of the Indo-European tongues i I 104 ox Tin; kviukxoe of a connection ijetwekn the ci.mbui i^r, I on thi: kvidiJ 1 1: -t ih ■»(? (the Celtic and Latin inclndofl), the roots mor and ;;jo/v moan sen and ^mr/ respectively: — "S(>j)tenitri()iifilis Occanus, Aiiial- cliinni euui Mccaticus appellat, a Paroj)aiiiiso aninc, (|na Scv- thiani alluit, quod nonien ejus ^cntis lin^uti si^nifieat eo'n. j:;(datuni, IMiilenion Mor/'mnrusam a Ciuihris (qu. Cifnmcrm vocari scrihit: lioe est inarc murluum usque ad proniontoriuin Rubeas, ultra dcinth; Croritiim.^^ C'^-) One ])oint, however, still remains: it may be dealt witli briefly, l)ut it should not be •wholly overlooked, viz. the question, whether over and above the theories as to tlio lo- cation of the Cind)ri in the ('imbric (.'liersonese, tlierf; is reason to believe, on independent grounds, that Celtic tribes wore the early inhabitants of the })eninsula in question? I| such were actually tlie case, all that has preceded wonjil, up to a certain point, be invalidated. Now 1 know no suf- ficient reasons for believing such to be the case, altliouiili there arc curr(!nt in ethno^>;rap]iy many insufficient ones. 1. In the way of Philology, it is undoubtedly true tliat words connnon to the (Celtic tribes occur in the Danish i)\ Jutland, and in the Frisian and Low German of Sh.'Swiok and Holstein; bvit there, is no reason to consider that thfv belong to an aboriginal (\dtic tribe. The a priori probabi- lity of Celts in the peninsula involves hypotheses in ethno- graphy which are, to say the least, far from being generally recognized. The evidence as to the language of aborigines derived from the significance of the names of old geogra- phical localities is wanting for the Cimbric Chersonese. 2. No traditions, either Scandinavian or German, point towards an aboriginal Celtic population for the localities in question. 3. There are no satisfactory proofs of such in either Ar- chajology or Natural History. A paper noticed by Dr. Prit- chard of Professor Eschricht's upon certain Tumuli in Jut- land states, that the earliest specimens of art (anterior to the discovery of metals), as well as the character of the tu- muli themselves, have a Celtic character. He adds, however, that the character of the tumuli is as much Siberian as Celtic. The early specimens of art are undoubtedly like similar spe- cimens found in England. It happens, however, that such things are in all countries more or less alike. In Professor Si(d)old's museum at Leyden, stone-axes from tumuli in Japan and Jutland are laid side by side, for the sake of compari- son, and between them there is no perceptible difFerencc. The oldest skulls in these tumuli are said to be other than Gothic. They are, however, Finnic rather than Celtic. 4. The statement in Tacitus [German. 44.), that a nation on the Baltic cal 1,1 the P.ritiJ existence of I „„t (Jerinan,! exist in thef Kstlionian. It is consi| propositions Cinihri conqi tzerlnnd, anj and Anibroni no nntion noil 4. That ther[ existed north plied to the i tjio iidi;d)itan f[V.y/ Indian i cnh'ia we are in the term once Cinmiei theory as to no data, but preatest vari( oriranized Ce the Ligurians divisions upo Provence. fniiiui Sir, I ON Tin: kvidence of a connection DrnwEEN the ciMniu i^c. 105 the Bfiltic cnllod the yT^'stli spoko a lan<;uap;o somewhat akin to tlio I'ritisli , cannot bo considorod as conclusive to the existence of Celts in th(! North of (Tcriiiany. Any lan<^Tia<:e, not (leriii.'in, would ])robal)Iy so he denoted. Such niipht exist in the niothcr-tongiu; of cither the Litlmanic or the Kstlioninn. It is considered that in the forcfroinj? pajjes the following propositions are either proved or involved: — 1. That the Ciinbri conquered by INIarius cune from either Gaul or Swi- tzerland, and that they were (yclts. 2. That the Teutones ,111(1 Anibrones were equally Celtic with the Ciinbri. 3. That no nntion north of the Elbe was known to Republican Rome. 4. That there is no evidence of Celtic tril)es ever havinjiij pxistf'd north of the Elbe. 5. That the epithet Cimhrica ap- plied to the Chersonesns })roves nothing; more in respect to tlio inhal)itants of that locality than is proved by words like Wexl ])u1i(in and }\orlh- American Indian. (). That in the word cdh'ia we are in ])ossession of a new Celtic p:loss. 7. That in the term Jl/orimarusa we are in possession of a gdoss at onco Cinmierian and Slavonic. 8. That for any positive theory as to the Cimbro-Teutonic learrue we have at present no (lata, but that the hypothesis that would reconcile the creatost variety of statements would run thus: viz. that an ortranized Celtic confederation conterminous Avith the l^elgre, the Linurians, and the Helvetians descended with its eastern divisions upon Noricum, and with its western ones upon Provence. 106 ON TIIK KVIDENCK OF A CONNF/'TION UKTWEKN TUi: CIMIUU ir, ADDENDA. A M JANUAUY 1859. (1) In this papor the notico of the Monumontnm Ancyraimm is omitted, rt is CLM1?JU(^VI<: F/P (IHHIIDES ET SKMXONKS ET EJVSDEM TKACTVS ALU GERMANORVM I'OI'VIJ PER LECJATOS AMKUTIAM MEAM ET J»()]'VLI JiOMAM TETIERVN'J'. This seems to connect itself with Straho's mitic.., It may also connect itself with that of 'i'acitns. Assuminj,' the ClIARIIDES to be the Ilarudes, and the llarndes to he the Che- rusci (a doctrine for -which I have given reasons in my edition of the Germania) the position of the Cindjri in the t(^\t of Tacitus is very nearly that of them in the Inscription. In the inscrip- tion, the order is Cimbri, llarndes, Seninones; in Tacitus, Che- rusci, Cimbri, Seninones. In both cases the 3 names are assu- ciated. f i; fi ¥ (2) I wonld now modify the proposition -with which the preceding; dissertation concludes, continuing, however, to hold the iimiii doctrine of the text, vi/. the fact of th(^ (/imbri having been un- known in respect to their name and locality and, so, having hccii pushed northwards, and more northwards still, as fresh arons were explored without supplying an undoubted and nnequivocal origin for them. I think that the Ambrones, the Tigurini, and the Teutoiios were Gauls of Helvetia, and South Eastern (iallia, and that tlio alliance between them and the Cimbri (assuming it to be real' is primd facie evidence of the latter being Galli also. But it is no more. That the Cimbri were the Eastern members of the confedera- tion seems certain. More than one notice connects them witli Noricum. Here they may have been native. They may also have been intrusive. Holding that the greater part of Noricum was Slavonic, ami that almost. all the country along its northern and eastern frontier Avas the same, I see my way to the Cimbri having been Slavonic also. That they were Germans is out of the question. CIaiil:< could hardly have been so unknown and mysterious to the Ko- ADDENPA. 107 nans. OiUil tlicy know well, and (jlonimny sufficiently — yet no Ivhiic f the Scordisci who are (JalatiVi; thence upon the 'I'aurisci, iwlio "are also Galatre, then upon the Helvetians &c. — Slrabo. 7, p. i''^. For a fuller explanation of the doctrine which makes the Cimbri jMissjItlc Slavonians see my Edition of I*richard's origin of the I Clitic nations — Supplementary Chapter — Ambrones ^ Tigurini, 'fciiloiirti , fioii, Slavonic hypothesis &.c. heeii nil- OX THE OrJGTXAL EXTENT OF THE SLAVONK^ AllEA. UKAI) BEFOKE THE rillLOLOGlCAL SOCIETY, I'KimUAKY 8, IHJO. The current, opinion, tliat a j^rcat portion of the area now occnpioil by kSlavoniaiKs, and a still greater portion so dmi- pied in tlio ninth and tenth centuries, Avero, in the times ot Ca'sar and Tacitus, eitlier (lernian, or sonu'thing other tliiin what it is t'ounil to be at tin; beginning:,' of the period nt authentic and contemporary history, has appeared so unsa- tisfactory to the j)resent writer, tjiat he has been induccil to consider tlie evidence on which it rests. What (for in- stance) arc tlio grounds for believing that, in the /irsl con- tury, Bohemia Avas not just as Slavonic as it is now? Wli:i; the arguments in favour of a (lermanic population hctween the Elbe and Vistula in the xcrond? The fact that, at the very earliest period when any dc- finite and detailed knowledge of either of the parts in qiu's- tion commences , both are as little German as the Ukraim is at the present moment, is one Avhich no one denies. How many, however, will agree with the present writer in iIk' value to be attributed to it, is another question. For lii« own part, ho takes the existence of a given division of tlio human race (whether Celtic, Slavonic, Gothic or auglit i'h- on a given area, as a sufficient reason for considering it to have been indigenous or aboriginal to that area, until rm- sons he shown to the contrary. Gratuitous as this postuLitf may seem in the first instance, it is nothing more than tlio legitimate deduction from the rule in reasoning wdiich forbii!^ us to multiply causes unnecessarily. Displacements tluro- fore, conquests, migrations, and the other disturbing cau?f> are not to be assumed , merely for the sake of acconntiii;; for assumed changes, but to bo supported by specific evi- dence; wdiich evidence, in its turn, must have a ratio to the probability or the improbability of the disturbing causes ON* TI!R OUlCilNAl, KXTKNT itV Till', SLAVoN'IC AUI'-A. 109 allcircil. 'rii('S(! positions seem so stilt-ovidcnt, tiwit it is only \j\ i:uiin)!iiini(/uaf/i' , we have, ovir and above the external evidence which makes the Ja/y^'is Harmatian, internal evidence as well; evidence sul)ject unlv to one exception, viz. that perhaps the name in (juestiou \v;i> not native to the population Avhich it designated, but oiilv a term applied by some Slavonic tribe to some of tlunr neigh- bours who might or might nv)t be Slavonic. 1 admit that this is possible, although the name is not of the kind that wouli be given by one tribe to another ditierent from itself. Ail- mitting, however, this, it still leaves a Slavonic population in the contiguous districts; since, whether borne by the [ni pie to whom it was applied or not, J(tzy(/ is a Slavmiii gloss from the Valley of the Tibiscus. Next conies the question as to the dale of this population. To put this in the form least favourable to the views of the present writer, is to state that the first author who mentions a population in these parts, either called by others or cal- ling itself Jazyges , is a writer so late as Ptolemy, and tluii he adds to it the qualifying epithet MetanuMoi [Mtxavamia , a term suggestive of their removal from some other ami, and of the recent character of their arrival on the Damibt. Giving full value to all this, there still remains the fact nl primary importance in all our investigations on the subjcit in question, viz. that in the time of Ptolemy (at least) there were Slavonians on (or near) the river Thciss. At present it is sufficient to say tliat there are no a prinri reasons for considering these Jazyges as the most western of the branch to which they belonged , since the whole ot the Pannonians may as easily be considered Slavonic as aiighi else. They were not Germans. They were not Celts; in which case the common rules of ethnological criticism indiKO us to consider them as belonging to the same class with the population conterminous to them ; since unless we do this, we must assume a new division of the human species alto- f)N run OUKilN'AI, KXri'A'T OK Ttin SLAVOSMP ARHA. Ill ^'t'tlior ; a fact, whidi, though possihh', and oven prol)ahU>, i(i not lightly to bo taken up. So iMiU'h tor ♦^he a iniuri i)rol)al)ilit('8 : the known fait^* hy no iiicaiM travoi'sc thoin. The I'annonians, wo loarn from Dio, wcro of tlio saiiio class with th(! Ulyrians, /. v. tho iiortluTU trihos ol' t:liat nation. Tli('s(! nuist hav(! hclongiil to one of tlirf'G divi lis; the Slavonic, the Albanian, or some division now lost, (//'thfsc, th(! latter is not to he as- Miiiicd, and tho lii.t is more |>r(»l'a])le than the sccitud. In- ileod, the more we ui.iko tho Pannoniuii.s and Ulyrians other tliiin Siavonie, the more do we isolate! tin; Jdzi/i/rs; and the more we isolate these, the more s of the previous Slavonic population are Hke the traces of the Celtic occupants of CornAvall, the rule rather than 8* 116 ON TUB ORiaiNAL EXTENT OP THE SLAVONIC AUEA. ii > the exception. ]\rost of tlie geograpliical iiaiues in Altmark are Slavonic, the remarkable exception being the name of the Old March itself. The ►Slavono-Gerinan frontier for the parts south of Alt- mark becomes so complex as to require to stand over f'nr future consideration. All that Avill be done at present is to indicate the train of reasoning applicable here, and appli- cable along the line of frontier. If such Avas the state (if things in tlie eighth and ninth centuries, what reason is thfi" for believing it to have been otherwise in the previous ones? The answer is the testimony of Tacitus and others in tli" way of external, and certain etymologies, &c. in the wav of Internal, evidence. Without at present saying anytliin- in the way of disparagement to either of these series of proofs, the present writer, who considers that the inferen- ces which hav3 generally been drawn from them are illeiri- timate, is satisfied with exhibiting the amount of a pmri improbability which they have to neutralize. If, when Ta- citus wrote, the area b(;twoen the P^lbe and Vistula was not Slavonic, but Gotliic, the Slavonians of the time of Charle- magne must have immigrated between the second and ciglitli centuries; must have done so, not in parts, but for the Avhole frontier; must have, for the first and last time, displaced a population which has generally been the conqueror radier than the conquered ; must have displaced it during one of the strongest periods of its history; must have displaced it every- where, and wholly; and (what is stranger still) that not per- manently — since from the time in question, those same (ier- mans, who between a. 200 and a.d. 800 are supposed to have always retreated before the Slavonians, have from a.d. SDH to a.d. 1800 always reversed the process and encroached upon their former dispossessors. . ,11 ADDENDA (1859). (1) The details of the Slavonic area to the south of Altmark aio as folloAvs. Brandi'tihurg ^ at the beginning of the historical period, was Slavonic, and one portion of it, the Circle of Cotbus, iw so at the present moment. It is full of geographical names .signiiicant in the Slavonic languages. Of Germans to the East of the Elbe AnnnvDA. 117 tlii'ic an' no signs until after the tinio of Cniarlcniagnc. lint tlio [ Kllic is not even their eastern boundary. The Saale is tlie river which divides tlie Slavonians from tlu^ Thnringians — not only at the time Avhen its drainage tirst conies to he known, hnt long attciwanls. j\Iore than tills, there were, in the llth and I2th cen- tiiiics, Slavonians in 'rimringia, Slavonians in Franconia — facts which can he found in full in Zeuss vv. Frankisclie nml Thi'irm- il'm'he Slaiven — (Dir Jtrutscheu mid die Nucldxu'Sliimme). Saxon;/ hrings ns down to the point with which the j)receding iiMIu'r conclnded viz: the frontier of Hoheniia. 'J'liis was in the saiiic category with lirandenlmrg. In Leipzig Slavonic was spo- ken A. D. 1327. hi Lnsatia it is spoken at the jiresent nionient. When were the hy])otlietical (Jermans of all these jiarts (diinina- tcd, or (if not eliminated) amalgamated with a poj)nlation of in- tnulcvs wIki displaced their langnage , not on one sjxtt or on two, hut every where V It' the Slavonians of the time of Charlemagne Avere indigenous til tlio western ])i *ion of their area, they were , a fortiori, indi- ;;'oii(ius to the eastr . At any rate, few who hold that the Ger- 'iiiiii |)o]mlations of rxdiemia, JVIecklenhnrg, Lnnehnrg, Altmark, liiaiideuhnrg. Saxony, Silesia, and Lnsatia are recent, Avill ihmbt their heing so in J'omerania. In his Edition of the (Jermania of Tacitns the only Germans nut of the Klhe, Saale and the Fichtid (Jeliirge, recognised hy the |ii('sont writer are certain intrusive ^[arcoinanni ; who (by hypo- tlicsis) derived I'roni 'riiuringia , reached the Daiinhe by way of the valley of Xaah, and jiressed eastward to some point un- known — hnt beyond the southern frontier of Moravia. Here the)" skirted the Slavonic ])opulations of the north, and formed tit their several areas the several ]\rarclies from Avliich they took their name. As far as Ave have gone hitherto Ave liaA'e gone in the direc- timi of the doctrine that the Sla\'onians of Franconia, Thuringia, Saxony, Altmark, Lunehnrg, ^Mecklenburg, Holstein , and Bran- ilenhui'g »ltc. Avere all old occupants of the districts in Avhich they were found in the 8th, 9th, lOth, and Iltli centuries; also that the present (V.ekhs of I^ohemia and ]\[oravia, the present Serbs of Lnsatia and Hrandenbnrg, the present Kassubs of Pomerania, and the ]»resent SloA'aks of Hungary represent aboriginal ])oj)u- lations. We iioav ask hoAV far this Avas the case Avitli the fronta- ^eis of Xorth-eastorn Italy, and th*^ Slavonians of Garinthia and Ciirniola. The conchision to Avhich Ave arrive in respect to these will apply to those of IJosnia, Servia, and IJahnatia. That the Gariiithians and Garniolans Avere the descendants of the Oarni of the Alpes Garnicai Avonld never have been doubted '•lit for the foUoAving statements — '"^Tlie Krobati Avho noAV oc- 118 ON THK OUIf;iNM, KXTHNT OF TlIK St.AVOMC AliKA. t: I i|. **cupy the parts in tlic (lireotlon of Dclmatiii arc derived tVum "the Unhaptizcil Krohati, the Krovati A.spri so-called; win; "dwelt on the otherside ofTnrkey, and near France, coiitcrini- ")i<»us with the Unhaptized Slaves — i. <>. the Serhi. TIh' wniil "Krobati is explained hy the dialect of the Slaves. It iiiciius "the p(issess(trs of a larj,'e conntry" — Constanlimis PorjihijiUjiji- neln-— I)c Jihn. Imp. M. I'd. P trilic "(7£i'6«) sejjarated. Five brothers led them. Chikas, and IjuIicIh,, ''and Kosentes, and JMuklo, and Krohatos, aiul two sisters, Tupi "and Buga. These with their people came to Delniatia — Tlif "other Krohati stayed ahnnt France, and are called liehtkroliati. "/. e. Asjtri Krohati, having" their own leader. They are sulijict *'to Otho the j^reat king of France and Saxony. They contiiiiic "Unha])tized , intermarrying" {Gv^iiicvd'SQiaq y.al aydnag f'pvrc. "wi.h the Turks" — r. 30. p. 9b. — The statement that the Kni;i- tians of Dalmatia came from the Asprocroatians is repeated. The evidence, however, lies in the ])receding passages; njion wliidi it is scarcely necessary to remark thai bcl = rv/iih' m Slavonic, an'l aspro=: while in Romaic. So much for the (h'oatians. The evidence that the Scwijiiis were in the same category, is also (^)nstantine's. — ""It must ln' **nndprstoo(l that the Servians are from the Unhaptized Servians, "called also Aspri, beyond Turkey, near a place called J^iiki. "near France — just like the (Jreat (h'ohatia, also Unl)ai)tiz('il *'and White. Thence, originally, came the Servians — c. M. /).99 Jn the following passages the evidence improves — "The same "Krohati came as suppliants to the Emperor Heraclius, bofoiv "the Servians did the same, at the time of the inroads of tlic "Avars — By his order these same Krohati having concpu'ieil "the Avars, expelled them, occupied the country they occupied. "and do so now" — c. 31. p. 97. Their country extended from the River Zentina to the iVnntior of Istria and, thence, to Tzentina and Ohlebena in SerA'ia. Tlioir towns were Nona, Belogradon, lielitzein, Scordona , C^hleboiia. Stol])on, Tenen, Kori, Klaboca — (c. 31. p. 07. 98). Their couutrv was divided into !l. Supan-7ics (Zovnafiag). 'I'hey extended themselves. From the Krohati ''who canio intu "Dalmatia a portion detached themselves, and conquered tho Illy- "rian country and Fannonia" (c. 30/). 95). The further notices of the Servians are of the same kiiul. Two brothers succeeded to the kinguom, of which one oH'orcil his men and services to HeracHi - . \.lio placed them at first in the Theme Thessalonica, where tiiey grew honiesicic, crossed tlif Danube about Belgrade, repented, tixrned hack, were placeil ADDKXDA. 119 iiiScrvia, in the parts .icciij)i('(l by tlic Avars, and, finally, wore !,„|,tizc(l. {c. 32. //. <)9.) it is clear that all this applies to the Slavonians ot'(M'oatia, lidsiiia, Servia, and Slavoiiia — i. c. the tiian.lo at tlu^ jnnctioii of tiic Save and Danube. It has no ap])lication to Istria, C^arnioia, ('iiriiitliia, and Styria. Have any writers so applied itV Some hnvo, some have not. More than this, many who have never ;i]i])liod it argue just as if they had. Zeuss, especially stating that the Slavonic pojmlation of the parts in question Avas earlier than tliiit (if Croatia, still, makes it recent. Why? This will soon he .s(M'ii. At i)resent, it is enough to state that it is not hy the direct a])])lication of the ])assage in ]'or])hyrogeneta that the an- tifiuity of the Slavonic character of the Carinthians, (Jarnicdans, ;iii(l Istrians is impugned. 'flic real reason lies in the fact of the two ])opulations being uliko in other res])ects. "What is this worth? Something — per- haps, imich. Which way , however, does it tell V That depends (111 lircninstances. If the ('roatians be recent, the Carinthians should he so too. Jiut Avhat if the evidence make the (!arin- tliians oldV Then, the recency of the Croatians is impugned. X(i\v Zouss {vv. Jlpenslawctt , Caranlani, and Creinarii) distinctly shews that there Avere SlaA'onians in the present districts before the time of Iferaclius — not much before, but still before. AVhy lint iimchy "'They came only a little before, inasmuch as I'roco- jiiiis "gives us nothing but the old names ('arni, and Norici". lint Avliat if these Avere Slavonic? The present meaning of the root Cam- is March., just as it is in V-kraiii. In a notice of the year A. 1). 974 Ave find 'Sjuod Carn- "iiila vocatur, et quod viilgo vocatur Crcina 7narcha^*., the SlaA'o- 11 ic word being translated into German. Such a fact, under or- iliiiaiy circumstances Avould make the Cam- in Alpes C«/-«-ica.', a Slavonic gloss; as it ahnost certainly is. I do not, lioweA'er, kiiinvthe etymologist Avho has claimed it. Zeuss does not — though it is from his pages that I get the chief evidence of its being one. Croatia, Bosnia, and Servia noAV come under the application iiftlio Constantine text. Let it ])ass for historical ; notAvithstanding the length of time lictwcen its author and the events Avhicli it records. Let it pass for historical, notAvithstanding the high probability (if Vrnhijzi, a Avord used in Servia before the Christian a-ra, being th(> same as Krobali. hot it pass for historical, notAvithstanding the chances that it is only an inference from the presence of an allied population on 'idtli sides of Pannonia. Lot it pass for historical, notAvithstanding the leadership of the live brothers (one the eponynms A'robalos) and the two sisters. t20 ON TlIK OUKilNAr, F.XTKNT OK TilK SI^AVOMC AUF,A. 11 .i- I () the Lithuanians. In respect to the former, I think a case can be made out for continiiing the earliest occupancy of the populations represoutoil by tho Jjiefs of ('Ourland, and the Rahwas of Estonia to tho Oder at least; ])orhaps further. This moans along the coast. Their ex tent inland is a more complex question. '^IMie so called Fin \\)'\w thesis in its full form is regarded, by the present writer, asunteualili'. But between this and a vast extension of the Fin area beyond its present bounds there is a groat ditt'orenco. It is one thing to con- nect tho Basks of Spain with the Klionds of India; another tn bring the Estonians as far west as the Odor, or oven as tho Klbc It is one thing to make an allied population occup.ant of Sweden, Spain, and Ireland ; another to refer the oldest poptilation of west- ern Russia to tho stock to Avhich the eastern undeniably belongs. AI)|)F.N1>A. 121 «« iiHich av \ns involve This latter is a more (nicstion of more or less. 'I'lio otlicr is a dif- tVioiu'c, not of kind, l»ut nr(l('<;r('0. Witli tliis distinction we n»ay ■.tiut from tlu' most sontiicrn jxirtiou of tiic present I'j^rian area; whii'li is that of th" Morduins in the (Jovernment of I'enza, Or wciiiav start from tlie most western Avhii'h is tliat of the Liefs of Courland. Wliat are tlie traces of Fin oc('U]»ancy between tiieso ;tiiil the A'istnhi and Danube — the Vistula westward, the Danulx^ on the South. How distinct are they? And of what kind? We. iiuniitt ex^tect them to be either obvious or numerous. Say that tliov are the vesti<;es of a stat(^ of thinj^s that has jiassed away ;i tlmusand years, and we only come to the time of Nestor. Say that they are doubly so (dd, and we have only reached the days i){'lIeriidotus; in whose time there had been a sufficient amount iifcMicroachmentand displacement to fill the southern ijlovernments (if Russia with Scythians of Asiatic orij^ln. 'I'he Britons were the occ'U])ants of Kent at the be<^-inning- of our a-ra. How faint aro tlio traces of them. We nuist rej^ulate, then, our expectations iiccordiufj; to the conditions of the (|uestion. We must expect ti) tiiul thinj:;s just a little more l'};rian than anj^ht else. From that ])art of Russia which could , even a thousand years ii|,'o, exhibit an indigenous po])ulation we nnist subt ict all those districts which were occupied by the Scythiani. \Vo do not know how much comes under this category. We only know that the Agathyrsi were in Hungary, and that they were, probably, iiitnulers. We nuist substract the, (Jovernments of Kherson, Eka- tininoslav, and Taurida at the very least — nnxch of each if not all. 'J'hat tliis is not too nnich is evident from the expressed opinions of competent investigators. Francis Newman carries the Scythia of Herodotus as far as Volhynia, and, in Volhynia, tl\(>ro were Cumanian Turks as late as the 1 1th century. Say, liowpver that the aborigines Avere not Fins. At any rate they wore not the ancestors of the, present Russians — and it is the original area of these that we are now considering. In the Xiirth there were Fins when Novorogod , and in the East Fins wlion Moscow, was founded. In Koursk , writes Haxthausen, there is a notable difference in the })liysiognomy of the inhabi- tants; the features being Fin rather than Slavonic. I now notice the name of Roxolani. Frichard and, doubtless, others besides see in this a Fin gloss, the ternrination-/rt;/i being the termination -/rt?«e/j in i^noxnolttincfi , llamelninen and several other Fin Avords, i.e. a gentile termination. It does not folloAV irom this that the people themselves were Fins. It only follows that they wore in a Fin neigbourhood. Some one who spoke a language in which the form in -loin- was used to denote the name of a people was on their frontier, and this frontier must have been South of that of the Roxolani themselves — else how 122 O.N rili: oitKilNAI, KXIKNT OT Till: SI, AVONir AIM; A. o-f III (lid it conic, to the cars of the (Jrccks and K'oniausV Iftiiis were iint the I'asc, tiicu was the name native, and the Un.xohmi were l'j:;riMn. In eitlier case we have a I'Mn j^loss, and a Fin lociditv wn;;j;cst('(l hy it. Xnw the conntry of the Ho.xolani either readied, or approached, tiie |)anul)e. In the acconnt of Ilert»(httns a ])o])nIation named Nruri nccu. j»ied a nnirshy district at the liack of th(^ Scytluan area; pin hahly tlie marshes of ]Mnsk. This is, ]»(>rliaps, a Kii, ;.j|(iss. The town of Nnri/m in tlie Ostiak conntry takes its name t'riMu tlie marshes ronnd it. 'I'he I/itlmanian hinj:;naj^e avoids the h'tter/". -nsin;^/^ instoiul; Kometimes m. The (JrcM'k rpikf(0 is myhx in Lithnanic. The nami', then, that a Fin hicality wr»nhl take in the montli of a Iiitiiii;i- iilan wojild not he /-""insk hut J/insk, or /'insk, and tliesc arc the names we find on what 1 tliiiik was, at one time, tlu^ Finiio- liithnanic frontier. I should add tliat tlie Knur- in /uH/z'-sk seems to ho the Knur- in /u»//r-hind, the k'nr- in /u*/'-alli (a Fin ])oi)nlation of tlic 3Iid(lle .\j:,-es), and tlie Car- in the eminently, and almost tv- jiically. Fin /u/z-elians. This is not nnudi in the way of evidence. ]Much or little, liow- PV(>r, it is more than can he j^ot for any other ])o])nlation. Much (ir little it is got at hy a very cursory investigation. No sjx'cial ic- soarch has heen instituted. No tunmlus has heen appealed to. Nd local dialect has heen analysed. Xo ordnance map has licoii pored over. All this Avill, douhtless, he done in time, and it', when it has heen dane, uo coniirmation of the prrseiit doctrine be found, the jjroponuder v ill reconsider it. If the evidence point elsewhere he Avill ahandon it. At present ho brings the early Fin frontier to ]Minsk and IMnsk. There it touched that of the Lithuanians. To make these tlip most eastern members of the Sarmatian stock is, at the first view. to fly in the face of the testinnniy of their present position. Tlii'V are, in one sense, tlu most Avestern. The (Jermans of Prussia touch them on the sid(^ of Euro])e. Between them and the Fins of Asia, the vast Kussian area of the ({overnnients of Smolensk", Novogorod L^c. intervene. Speaking laxly, one may say that all Kussia lies beyond them. Nevertheless, it Is Avith the Fins of Estonia that they are also in contact; Avhilst the explanatinn of the (lerman and Russian contact is transparently clear. Tlio Germans (as a matter of history) cut their Avay through avIidIc masses of Shwonians in I'omerania, before they reached tlioni; so displacing the Slavonians to the Avest of them. The liussiiuis (again a matter of history) pressed up to them by a circuit fmni the south and Avest. The Lithuanians have ke])t their position- but one population has stretched beyond, and another has pros- Al>I)f,NI)A. 12.T .(•il ii|i to tluMii. Tlicir limj^imj^d is cin'mctitly akin to tlio Sanskrit. Their |iliysi()j^nt»niy is tlw most Kin ui' any tlioronj^hly EurDpcan |ioj)i'.liiti<>n. Tlu'ro were nn Slavonians, /// silii, to the Kast of tin- Litlinanir iucii : none tirij;inMlly. My cnrrdaclniicnt and clianj^'c of ]ilart> tlKM'i'urc, ill later times, many. 'I'liere are, as aforesaid, all ihc liiissians of the j)resent moment. The ipiestion, however, he- fun' us is the ori;j;inal area, the primordial sUks. Tlic westw ard extension of tlie I^ithnanlans is a matter npon whieli I do not press tlie details. 1 think that the N'istnla may have heen to them and the Slavonians what the Uhinc; was to the (iniils and (Jermnns. 'i'iie main (|nesti(tn is how far ean we hrin;^ tliciii south V What justifies ns in making them reaeh the Carpathl ;nisV At ]»r(^sent we find thom in Livonia, Conrland, East Prussia, \'ilii!i, and (Irodno; hut further south than (Jrodno nowhere; no- wlicrc, at least, Avith the detinite charaetevisties of name and lan- ;:nMj;<'. Kvery inch that is g'iven them south of (irodno must have its |)nt]»er evidence to sujtport it. 'I'lic (Jothini of Tacitus are the first ])oj>ulation that we may make liithuanic. What says Tacitus? They were notCJermans; their laniiuaj^e ])roved this. 'Hiey were not Sarmatians. Tins Sarinatians imposed a tribute njton, as on men of anothi>r stock — Irihiiln ut aUeuiijeuis impouiml. The (j>uadi did the same, ll' noitlicr (iermans nor Sarmatians what were theyV ^lemhers of .a stuck now extinct y 'I'he rule aj^-ainst the tin necessary nniltiplica- tidii of causes forbids ns to resort to this sui»])(»sition. Do ho onc(^ and we may always be doinj^" it. Were they FinsV Say that they were, and wliat do we j;ain by it? We may as well proloufj; the hitlmaiiia area frf»m (Jrodno us the Fin from ]'insk. Nay, better. That (Irodno is Jiithuanian we know. 'I'hat I'insk was Fin w(> Infer. Wei*o they Scythians V We know of no Scythians beyond tlio Maros; so that the reasoning Avhich t
eo]»le. There is a country, then, of the (Jothini sufficiently far * Tlie term Turk is used in its wide Ethnulofrical sense, and includes '111! Sci/l/itt: 121 (IN I 111: ••ItM.INAI, KNIMNT Ol' Till; SI.AVdMC AKC.A. «rmtli to Itc ill ntiitiict -with tlu' (^iiadi and Sariiiata' tlio <^)ii;i(|i in Mnravia and I pjicr llmi;;ary, iIm- Sariiiatu' in tlio pint, lictwccii flic 'I'ln'ifss and tlic DaniilH', (liillicia meets these cinKli- tions. It was a niininj;' cnnntry. ({allieia is this. It was mi rli,. rpjier N'istnhi - |M'i»lialdy at ItH head-waters. ,Vt the mmiili di the same river the name re-apitears, in that id' tlie (Inl/ntwi's, Umi <»nes, (!f/t/ti\ucs Siv. nt' the AimImt etnintry. 'I'hese were eitiier tin nearest nei;ililmiirs of tlie Aestyii, ortiie .Vestyii tiiemstdves uiidir n iiaiiie other than (lermau —tor Aestyii is an nndouhtecl (leniiiin ji,'h>ss, Jnst like A'.sV- in A',s7- onia. .Are we jnstiti<'(l in identit'yinj;' these two ]io|>nhitiniis on the Htren^th of the nameV No. Wliat wo arr justified in doju;', however, is this. We are jiistitied in plaeinj:; on the I'ronficr nt b th a h\n};'na;^n in whitdi tlio root art of n natimiiil name. At tlie l»e';innin};' of tlio historical period these (Jothones were the liitiiannians of ICast Prussia, and their nei;;:l)ours railed tlicni CnihU.ii. They were the eon}j^(>ners of those Jiithnaniaus wiiosc area, even now, extents as far south as (irodno. It is easy to conneet the (Jothones with (Jrodno; hut Avlint ((in uocts (Jrodno with (Jothinian (JalliciaV What can eonneet it imw v All is INdish or Jiussian. What are the prooTs that It v^as imt mi from the hej^innin;;'? The followinj^ — the ]»opulations hetwccn (Jrodno and the frontier of (Jallieia, ajjpear, for the first time in history in the IHth century; Imt not as lV)les, nor yet as Ixussiiius, hut as Lithminians — "cum Prulhenira et Lithuamca liniiua lui- hens maj^iia ex jiartf similitudinein et intcdligentiam" — 'Miiij,'n;i, ritu, reli;;ione, et nuirihus magnam hah(d)at cum Lilhitanis , Pni- thenis et Sa/'ingHis'* (the present Lithuanians of East Prussia i **conformltatem". We cannot hrinjjf these quite down to (Jallicia; and this is nut to be Avondered at. The first notice we have of them is very nearly the last as w(dl. 'V]\o narrative which }j;ives us the preceding texts is the narrative of their subjugation and extinction. "What was the name of this iteopleV I ])remise that avo get it through a double medium, the Latin, and tlie Slavonic — the lat- ter language always being greatly disguised in its adaptation tn the I'ormer. The commonest form is .laczwingi (Lat.) Jatwyazi (Slavonic); then (in documents) Gcluin-vAiK ^ a word giving the root Got/ton-. Finally, Ave liaA'e '*l^)llexinni Gclharum sen I'rus- sorum gens'*. Such are the reasons for connecting the (Jothini of the •\[arc'it- niannlc frontier Avith the CJothlni of the Baltic, and also for makiti;: both (along Avith the connecting JaczAvingi) Lithuanians, Tlii^ latter point, hoAvever, is unessential to the present investigation; Avliich simply considers the area of the Slavonians. For the jmrts ADItKXDA. I2i iKntli t»r c\n' ('ariifitliiims, it was liinltctl l»y a ctrntiiiiiiius liiu^ „l' Goli'iiiii, iit'liihr/Miv, ami (litthmivs. Whatever tlid.se wt-ii' tlicy «crf iu»t Slavonic. Siu'li is the sketeh of tiie chiet" reasuiis tor Itelieviiii;' that oii;;i- iiiilly tlie Nistuhi (th<'r(' or tiieieal)oiith) wa.s the Ixmiidary of th«' SliivoiiiaiiH on tlie North ICast; a lieliet' conlirnietl l»y tlie plieno- iiii'iia tiC the lan^iiaji'e.s spoken, al tiie present moment, lieyoml tliiit river. 'I'iiey fall into few diiilects; a fact whieh is /iriiim /'tirir iviileiK'e of recent introdnction. The Polish hraiich shews itself ill varieties an.l snl»varieties on its western frontier; the Uiissiau nil its southern and south-'.-astern. The further tliey are found Kiist antl North, the newer they are. 1 may add that I Hnd no facts in the s|)ecial etlnudoj^y of tho liirly I'oles, that coni|)lioate this view. ( )n the contrary, the spe- (i;d facts, such av they are, are conlirmatory rather than auj;ht ilsc of th(^ wioii, or conciuest. I'nder the early kinj^s of the hlood of i'iast an Individual wlndlv unhistoric) , the loc.ilitv for their exiihdts aiiil occupancies is no j)art of the country ahout the present capi- tal, Warsaw; but the district round I'osen and (inesen; this liciiij; tin' area to which the earliest le^icnds attach thenistdves. Where this is not the case, where the Duchy of I'osen or Prus- hiau I'oland does not give us the ciirliest signs of iNdish occu- |iaiu'y, the parts al)ont Cracow do. At any rate, the legi-nds lie in the west and south rather than in the east; on the Saxon or the Holiendan frontier rather than the I/ithuanic. The Slavonic area south of the Carjtathians gives us a much iiKire complex ([uestion — one, indeed, too c(unplex to investi- gate it in all its hearings. Tiiat there wore both Slavonians and Lithuanians in Dacia, Lower Ma'sla , Thrace, and, even, ^[acedon is nearly certain — ami that early. Say that they were this at tlu^ beginning of tho liistorical period. It will, by no means, make them aboriginal. Such being the casi> 1 limit myself to the statement that, at tlie heginnlng of the historical ]»eriod, the evidence and reasou- injj,' that connects the Thracians with the (leta;, the Gettu with the Daci, and the Daci with the Sarmatlan stock in general is suffi- cient. Whether it makes them indigenous to their several areas is another (juestion. It is also another ([uestiou wliether the relationship betw^een thoni was so close as the current statements make it. These identify the Getai and Daci. I inmgine that they ivere (there or tliereabonts) as dift'erent as the Bohemians and the Lithuanians — the Getic Jjithuanians, and the Dacian (Daci=: 2'S«y.0() Czekhs; both, however being Sarmatlan. I also abstain from the details of a question of still greater 126 ON TlIK (MlKilNAL KXTEXT OK TITK SLAVONIC AUKA. iii" ■'tj i it ^1 importanco and interest viz: tin' extent to wliicli a third Inw'^w.v^c of tlic class vliic'li contains tlio Slavonian and liitlinanic may onn;iv nut have been spoken in the ]);u'ts nnder notice. There was nidiii for it in the iiiirts to the Sonth of the l-'in, and the east of the hi- thnanic, areas. There avms room for it in the ])resent (Joveruiiiciits of J^odolia, and Volhynia, to say nothing- of large portions nf the drj\inaj;e of the Jjower Dannhe. 'JMie lanj^naj^-e of sufli aii area, if its structnre coincided with its {^eoj^raphical ]»osition Mould be liker the Jiithnanic and the most eastern l)rMnch of the Sla- vonic than any other Jjanguages of the so-called Indo-Kuropcaii Stock. It would also be nu)re Sarmatian than either (ierinan or (Jlassical. Yet it would Ix^ both (Classical and (Jerman also, on the strength of the term Indo-Euroi)ean. It would be the most Asiatic of the tongues so denominated; with some llgrian !it'liiii ties, and others with the languages in the dii'ection of Aniiciiia, and I'ersia. It woidd be a language, howevei", which would soon be obliterated; in as nnu-h a the ]»arts upon which we placo it were, at an early date, overrun by Scythians from the East, and Slavonians from the West. AN'hen we, know Volhynia, it is Turk, and I'olish, — anything but aboriginal. Such a lan- guage, however, might, in case the po]>ulatiothetical series of arguments. It litis long been known that the ancient, sacred, and literary huignngi' of Northern India has its closest graiumatical afiinities in Euro]i('. With none of the tongues of the neighbouring countries, with no form of the Tibetan of the Himalayas or the ]iunnes(^ dialcits of the north-east, Avith no Tanuil dialect of the southern jiart of the Peninsula itself has it half such close resend)lances as it lias with the distant and disconnected Lithuanian. As to the Tiithuanian , it has, of course, its closest afiinities Avith the Shivonic tongues of Kussia, Bohemia, Poland, and Sci- via, as aforesaid. And when we go beyond the Sarnnitian stock, and bring into the field of comparison the other tongues - litic ([ucstiou into an liy])otlu'sis as to tlic origin of vegetation in ;'cii('ral) would pronounce the (ic/iiis to l»e European. The zoo- liMMst, in a case of i«ooh)gy, would do the, sanu'. Mnlutis intilandis, t\n' logic of the philologue should he that of tho naturalist. Yet it is not. 1. The area of Asiatic languages in Asia allied to the ancient Luiiguage of India, is smaller than the area of European langua- ;;(',s allied to the Litlmanic; and — - 2. The class or genus to which tlie two tongues <'qually helong, is rojtresented in x)Lsia hy the Indian division only ; whereas in Europe it falls into three divisions, each of, at least, e(jual value \vith the single Asiatic one. Nevertheless, the so-called Indo-European languages are de- duced from Asia. I do not ask whether, as a matter of fact, this doducti(»n is right iir wrong. I only state, as a matter of pliilological history, that it is made, adding tliat tlu^ hy]»othesis which makes it is illegitimate. it rests on the assumption that it is easier to hring a jxipulation tidia India to liussia than to take one from liussi;' to India. In the CMse of the more extreme language of which it takes cognisance this postulate becomes still nu)re inadmissihle. It assumes, in tho matter of the K(dtic (for instance), that it is easier to hring the [icople of (Jalway from the Punjab, than the tribes of tlie i'unjab from Eastern Euro})e. In short, it seems to be a generally received rule amongst investigators, that so long as ^v(' bring oiir migration fnim east to west we may let a very little evidences go a very hiu^' Avay ; whereas, so soon as we reverse the process, and suji- posc a line from Avest to east, the converse becomes requisite, and a great deal of evidence is to go but a little Avay. The effect (>f tliis has been to create innumerable Asiatic hypotheses and fi'w or no European ones. Kussia may have been peopletl from I'cr.sia, or Lithuania from Iliudostan, or Gri'ece from Asia, or ;iiiy place Avest of a given meridian from any place east of it — but the converse, never. No one asks for proofs in tlie former case; or if he do, he is satistied with a \'ery scanty modicum: whereas, in the latter, the best authenticated statements undergo stringent scrutiny. Inferences fare Avorse. They are hardly al- hiwcd at all. It is all ''theory and hypothesis" if Ave resort to them in ciises from Avest to east; but it is n(» "theory" and no "liypothesis" Avhen we follow the sim and move westwards. JiOt the tAVo lines be put on a level, and let ethnographi- I'iil pliilology cease to be so one-sided as it is. Let the jiossibi- litv (if a Western ori";in of the Sanskrit language take its natu- lal place as the nuuuber of an alternatiA'e hitiierto ignored. I do not say Avhat Avill follow in the Avay of historical detail. I only 128 ON TIIK OUICilNAL KXTKNT OV TIIK SLAVONU; AIIKA. say (in tlio ])ro.s('iit i)ii]»or tit least) tliat the logic of an importiint class of pliilological questions will be iniprovtid. As it stands ;it ])resent, it is little more than a reuiarkahle ])henoinenon in the j)atholo<;y of the philological mind, a symptom of tlie niorhid con- dition of the scientific imagination of learned men. Turning westwards Ave noAV take up the Slovenians of (.'ariii- thia and Styria on their western frontier, not forgetting the sou- thermost of the Czekhs of liohemia. How far did the JSlaVim'u' area extend in the direction of Switzerland, (Jaul, and Italy V In the Tyx'ol we have such geographical names as Schani-(7:. Gsh«?7z-thal, and Fm/,9/<-gau; in the Vorarlherg, Ked-;j«7; ami Windisch-»Jrt//'C?. p]ven where the names arc less definitely Sla- vonic, tiie compound sibilant tsh, so predominant in Slavonic, so excej)tional in (fcrman, is of frequent occurrence. This, |k'i- ha])s, is little, yet is more than can l)e found in any country known to have ])een other than Slavonic. Again — a Slavonic po]»ulation in the Vorarlberg and Soutlicni Bavaria best accounts for the name r/;n/-elicia. If the Slavonians are aboriginal, and if the (V.ekhs are the same , the decisive evidence that, within the historical period, they have both receded is in favor of their respective aroas having originally been greater than they are at present. Sucli being the case, we may bring them both further south and fur- ther Avest. HoAV far? 'J'his is a question of minute detail, not to be answered oft'-hand. The nile of parsimony, hoAvever, by Avhicli Ave are forbidden to nmltiply stocks unnecessarily, carries tlipiu to the frontier of the (iauls in one direction, and the Italians on the other. If so, there may luwe been Slavonians on the frontier of Li- guria. More than this the llhaiti may haA'e been Slavonic also, i3ut many make the Etruscans Khaitian. Is it possible hoAvever, that even tlu- Etruscans Avere Slavonic? I knoAV of niimerous opinions against their being so. I knoAv of no facts. ON THE TERMS OF dOTHl AND GETAi:. OBSERVATIONS LAID BKFOliE TJIE ETHNOLOGI- CAL SECTION, AT THE MEETING OF THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE, HELD AT BHiMINGHAM 1849. So far from the Gotlii and Getse being Identical there is no reason to believe that any nation of Germany ever bore the former of these two names until it reached the country of the population designated by the latter. If so, the Goths were Gothic, just as certain Spaniards are Mexican and Pe- ruvian; and just as certain Englishmen are Britons i.e. not ;it all. The Goths of the Danube, etc. leave Germany as Grutungs iind Thervings, become Marcomanni along the Bohemian iind Moravian frontiers, Ostrogoths and Visigoths, on the Lower Danube (or the land of the Geta;), and Moesogoths (from the locality in which they become Christian) in Moesia. What were the Goths of Scandinavia V // k not I ivho m the first by many scores of investigators to place all the imineroup populations to which the possible modifications of the root G — / ^ipply in the same category. I only deny that that category is (Jerman. Few separate the Jutes of Jutland, from the Goths of Gothland. Then there is the word ritce; which is to Gut-, as JFill-iam is to 6'M/-ichi: a form that was probably Lithuanic. If J-\-t, as it occurs in the word Jute, be, really, the same as the G-irt m Got or Goth, we have a reason in favour of unc of the earlier Danish populations having been Lithuanic. The four islands of Sealand, Laaland, Moen, and Falster formed the ancient Vithesleth. This division is of consider- iihle import; since the true country of Dan, the eponyinus of tjie J)anc's, was not Jutland, nor yet Skaane, nor yet tyen. h was the Four Islands of the Vithesleth : — "Dan — vox \>n\m super Sialandiam, Monam, Falstriam, et Lalandiam, cujus regnum dicebatur VitlieslvtU. Deinde super alias pro vincias et insulas et totum regnum. — Petri Olai Chron. 130 ON TIIK TFRMS OF COTIII AM) CUT. IE. .ii 4 % Rcgum Dania'. Also, "Vidit nutem Dan rof;ioncm snam, mi- per quain rognavit, Jutia-n, Fioiiiani, JfUhcalclh , ►Scaiiiam quod c's.s(>t bona." — Anna). Ksroui. p, 224. That tin Swedes and Kowvegians are the newest Scandinii- vians and that certain IJgrians were the oldest, is undoubtfil. ]>ut it by no means follows that the succession was siniplf. JJetween the first and last there may have been any amount o! intercalations. Was this tlio casoV My own opinion is, tli;ii the first encroachments ujjon the originally Ugrian arcii of Scandinavia were not from the south-Avest, but from th' south-east, not from Hanover but from Prussia and (Jourlaud, not Gcrniau but Lithuanic, and (as a practical proof of tlie inconvenience of the present nomenclature) although nut G erraan , Golhic. Whether these encroachments Avere wholly Lithuanic, ra- ther than Slavonic as well, is doubtful. ^Vhen the arclian- logy of Scandinavia is read aright, /. c. without a Gorman preposscssio)!, the evidence of a second population will be- come clear. This however, is a detail. The Gothic historian Jornandes, deduces the Goths of the Danube first from the southern coasts of the Baltic, and ultimately from Scandinavia. 1 thinlv, however, that wlioovor reads his notices will be satisfied that he has fallen into tin' same confusion in respect to the Germans of the Lower Da- nube and the Getie Avliose country they settled in, as an English w'riter would do Avho should adapt the legends of Geoffroy of Monmouth respecting the British kings to tlie genealogies of Ecbert and Alfred or to the origin of" the warriors under Hengist. The legends of the soil and the legends of its invaders have been mixed together. Kor is such confusion unnatural. The real facts before the historian were remarkable. There were Goths on the ]jOwer Danube, Germanic in blood, and known by the same name as the older inliabitants of the country. Tliore were (Jothones, or (Juttones, in the l^altic, the essential part of Avhoso name Avas (!oth-\ the -n- being, probably, and al- most certainly, an inflexion. Thirdly, there Avere Goths in Scandinavia, and Goths in an intermediate island of the Baltic. \\'itli such a series of 6'o///,-hinds, the single error of mistaking the old (Jclic legends for those of the more recent Germans (noAV called Uothi Avould easily engender others ; and the most distant of the three Gothic areas Avould naturally pass for being the oldejt also. Hence, the deduction of the Goths of the Danube from the Scandinavian Gothland. ON THE JAPODES AND GEPIl)^.. UKAD HEFOUE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, JANUARY IjTH 1857. Of the nations wliose niovcnionts are connected witli tlie ilcclino and fall of the Roman empire, though several are iiKire important than the Gepidta , few are of a greater inter- est. This is because the question of their ethnological re- lations is more obscure than that of any other similar po- pulation of equal liistorical prominence. How far they were (ioths rather than Vandals, or Vandals rather than Goths, liow far they were neither one nor the other, has scarcely bfiou investigated. Neither has their origin been determined. Nor have the details of their movements been ascertained. That the current account, as it stands in the pages of Jor- nandcs Diaconus, is anything but unexcepiionable, will be shown in the present paper. It is this account, however, which has been adopted by the majority of inquirers. The results to which the present Avriter commits himself are widely different from those of his predecessors ; he believes them, however, to be of the most ordinary and common- )lace character. Why, then, have they not been attained ong ago? Because certain statements, to a contrary effect, Icing taken up without a due amount of preliminary criti- cism, have directed the views of historians and ethnologists towards a wrong point. These, however, for the present will be ignored, and no- tliing, in the first instance, will be attended to but the pri- mary fj.cts upon which the argument, in its simplest form, de- pends. These being adduced, the ordinary interpretation of tliom will be suggested; after Avhich , the extent to which it is modified by the statements upon which the current doctrines arc founded will be investigated. If we turn to Strabo's account of the parts on the north- eastern side of the Adriatic, the occupancies of the nume- 9* 132 ON Tlir, JAl'OJ)i:,S AND fiKPIDAK. 'I ' * rous tribes of the Jloinan proviiieo of lllyriciiin, wo shiill fin,! that no sli<;lit proininent'.u I.s j^ivcn to tlio poitulation callrl 'luTtodeg. Tliey join the Carni. Tlic Culpa (Knknjtig) Hows tliroufi,li tlu'ii* land. Tluij stretch alonj^' tho coast to tlK- rivir Todanius; Scniti is their chief town. The Moentini, the Avcu- (loata;, the Auripini, are their chief tribes. Vendos (Avendu is one of their occupancies. tSuch are the notices of Strain, rtoleiny, Appian, and Pliny; Pliny's form of the word bein^' Japydes. The lapodes, thon, or Jajiydes, of tlie autliors in quostlnn, arc neither an obscure nor an inconsiderable nation. Tlnv extend alonj? the sea-coast of tli'^ Adriatic. They occup'v the valley of the C'ulpa. They are Illyrian, but contermi- nous with I'annonia. As Pliny seems to have taken his name from Straho, tlii; authors Just quoted may all be called Greek. With the latent of them we lose the forms 'JccTtodes or Japydes. As the Koman empire declines and its writers become less and less classical, their geographical records become less .sy- stematic and more fragmentary; and it is not till we get to the times of Probus and JMaximian that we find any naiuo approaching 'ra;rod£t,\ Probus, howev(;r, plants a colony of Gepidw within the empire {Vopiacus, Vit. Vuh. c. IS). The Tervings also fight against the Vandals and Gipedes [Ma- mcrtimis in Gcnelhl. Max. c. 17). Sidonius makes the iicivo (lepida {(Jcp/da (riix) a portion of the army of Attila. I'^iiially, wo have the Gepidae, tho Lombards, and the Avars, as tho three most prominent populations of the sixth century. The Gepid locality in the fifth century is the parts about Sirmium and Singidunum — Alt Schabacz and Belgrade — within the limits of Pannonia, and bevond those of lllvn- cum, ?'. e. a little to the north of the occupancy of tliu la- pedes and Japydes of Strabo and Pliny. There is, then, a little difference in name between Japyiks and Gepidic, and a little dift'erencc in locality between the Gepids and lapodes. I ask, however, whether this is sufficioiit to raise any doubt as to the identity of the two words .^ Whe- ther the populations they denoted were the same is anothor matter, i only submit that, word for word, Japijd and iiephl arc ene. Yet they have never been considered so. Gn the contrary, the obscure history of the Japydes is generally made to end with Ptolemy; the more brilliant one of the Gepidue to begin with Vopiseus. This may be se(;n in (iib- l>on, in Zeuss, or in any author whatever who notices either, or both, of the two populations. There is a reason for this; it does not, however, lio in The name t (i\ IMF. .lAi'oin's ANi> (;t:i'n)Ai:. 133 the (litlcroiu'o of naiiif. ^\'^i(lo)• onos than tliis are ovorlook- (il bv evon the most cautious of investigators. Indeed, the !t(knnwlc'dfj:o(l and known varieties of the; word (Jepida' itself, ;ii'c tar more diver<;ent iV(»ni each other than CcpUhc is from JiijiijOcs. Thus (jiypides, rijTicadsg, rerCTtcadig, ar(! all ud- luitti'd varieties, — varieti(^s that no one has ohjeeted to. Nor yet does the reason for thus ifi;norinf^ the connexion l,(t\vc'eu (icp/dff and Jtt/ii/dcs lie in the difference of their lY'sjicctive localities. Vor a jx'riod of conquests and inva- sions, the intrusion of a population IVom the north of lUy- liiuiii to the south of I'annonia is a mere trifl(! in the eye lit' the ordinary historian, who f;enerally moves larjjjc nations triiin (ine extremity of Europe to another as freely as a chess- iilayer moves a queen or castle on a chess-board. In fact, MiuK! change, both of name and place, is to be expected. The nauH^ that Strabo, for instance, would p;ct through an lllvrian, ^'opiscus or Sidonius would get through a CJothic, ami Procoi)ius tlu'ough (probably) an Avar, authority — di- roftly or indirectly. The true reason for the agreement in (piestion having been i;;nore(l. lies in the great change which had taken place in the political relations of the populations, not only of Illyri- ciini and Pannonia, but of all parts of the Roman enq)ire. Tho .lajiydes are merely details in the conquest of Ulyricum and Dalmatia; the (jlcpid history, on the contrary, is con- iiw'tod with tliat of two po])ulations eminently foreign and intrusive on the soil of Pannonia, — tho Avars and the Lom- liards. How easy, then, to make the Oepida; foreign and intmsivo also, llarely mentioned, excc])t in connexion with iho exotic Goth, the exotic Vandal, the exotic Avar, and tho still more exotic Loml)ard, tho Gepid becomes, in tho (V(\s ot" tho historian, exotic also. This error is by no means modern. It dates from the I'rign of .lustinian; and occurs in the writings of such seem- ii);; authorities as Procopius and Jornandes. With many iscjiolars this may appear conclusive against our doctrine; ■^iiii'c Procopius aiul Jornandes may reasonably be consider- ji'il as competent and sufticient Avitnesses, not only of their [t'oroipi origin, but also of their Gothic affinities. Let us, lifiwever, examine their statements. Proco])ius writes, that "till" (lotliic nations are many, the greatest being the (loths, handals, Visigoths, and Gepaides. They were originally h'llled the SSauromatie and l\Ielanchl?eni. Some call them the (lotic nations. They differ in name, but in nothing else. They arc all whiteskinned and yellows-haired, tall and good- looking, of the same creed, for they are all Arians. Their 134 ON Tin: JAl'OKKS AND (i niMDAi:. liingUii<;o is one, culled (jiotliio.*' This, thoiij^li clear, is far from iinoxccptioiiablo (//. Vttnd. i. 2). '^riKjir ccdiiiiion Ian- giuige may have been no older than their common Arianism. Again, the Sciri and Alani are esj»ocially stated tu Im, (loths, which neither of them were, — the Alans, not ovm in the eyes of such claimants for (Jcrmany as (Jrinnu ainl Zcuss. Jornandes writes: "Quomodo vero (ieta>. CJopid;c(iue slut parentes si quairis, panels absolvam. IMeminisse dehcs, un' initio de Scanziai insida*, grcmio Uothos dixissc egresses cum lierich suo rege, tribns tantum navibiis vectos ad citerinri> Occani ripam; qiiarum trium una navis, ut assolet, tardiiis vccta, nomen genti fertur dcdisse; nam lingua eoruni piuia (k'panla dicitur. lline factum est, ut paullatim et cnnupti nomen eis ex convitio nascerotur. Gopida' namque sine dii- bio ex Oothorum })rosapia ducunt originem: sed quia, ut dixi, (lejutnla nigrum ali(piid tardunupie signat, pro gratuiti convitio Gepidarum nomen exortuni est, quod nee ipsuui, credo, falsissimum. Siint enim tardioris ingenii, gravimes corporum velocitate. Hi ergo Gepidjc tacti invidia, dndum sprota provineia, cunnnanebant in insula Vischc anmis vadi? circumacta, quam pro [)atriosermone dicebantCJepidojos. iS'uiic earn, ut fertur, insulam gens Vividaria ineolit, ipsis ad iir- liores terras mcantibus. Qui Vividarii ex div(;rsis natioui bus acsi in unum asylum collecti sunt, ct gentem fecis:;c noscuntur." I submit that this account is anything but historical. Be it so. It may, however, be the expression of a real (Jotliie aflinity on the part of the Gepids, though wrong in \U do- tails. Even this is doubtful. That it may indicate a }Mdi- tical alliance, that it may indicate a partial assuniptiim nl a Gothic nationality, I, by no means, deny. I only deny that it vitiates the doctrine that Japydoi and Gcpklw. are, ac- cording to the common-sense interpretation of them, the same word. The present is no place for exhibiting in full the reason^ for considering Jornandes to bo a very worthless Avriter, a writer whose legends (if we may call them so) concerniu.i: the Goths, are oidy Gothic in the way that the fables ot Geoffrey of Monmouth arc English, i. e. tales belonging to a country which the Goths took possession of, ratiicr tliiui tales concerning the invaders themselves It is suggested then, that the statements of Procopius auil Jornandes being ignored, the common-sense interpretation ut the geographical and etymological relations of the IitjMk!^ ON Tin: JAl'ODKS AN'I) OKl'inAE. 135 'oniiuoii laii. >n Ariaiiisiii. tatod to far I nntl Ccp/dfC — word for word, and placo for place — l>o ullow- rd to take its course; tlie IJIepicue heiii;;' looked n[)()u us lllyriaiis, whatever may Ix; the import of that word; oeen- iiiiiits, at least, of the country of the laj)od('s, and probably not oven I til''"' descendants Vjirnnni ainl ida'(iue slut i debes, luc ^'re.sse« cum ad citerimi 'let, tanliiis Doruni pii:i;i ct corrupti' pic si no (hi- ed quia, lit pro gratuitn nee ipsuiii, i, graviort'j dia, duduiii amnis vaili- l(htjos. Kuin' psis ad nil- rsis natioiii item fccissc torical. Be real (.Jotliif >; in its (lo- cate a })(ili- ^unlpti^ll 111 only ck^iiy >(!((! are, ac- [n, the same the reasons ss writer, a eonceniiii,:.' c fables i>t cloni^'ing tu rather tliaii )eopius ami pretation nf the liijMh Thus far the criticism of the ])resent paper j,'ocs towards sriiuratini;' the (ji('j)i(be from the stock with which they are generally connected, viz. the (Jerman, — also from any emi- :;raiits from the ])arts north of the Danube, c. //. Poland, Prussia, Scandinavia, and the like. So far from doinj^- any- iliinj,' of this kind, it makes them indi;:,(Mious to the parts to tho north-east Of the head of the Adriatic. As such, what ucro tlievV Strabo makes them a mixed nation — Kelt and I. lllyriau. What is lllyrianV Either Albanian or Slavonic; it being jllvria where tlie populations represented by the Dalmatians (if Dahuatia come in contact with the populations r(!pr(3sent- ed by the Skipetar of Albania. The remainin<;- object of the j)reseiit })aper is to raise two fi't.'sh (|U('stion3: — I. The first connects itself with the early history of Italy, and asks how lar migrations from the eastern side of the Adriatic may have modifiiMl the ori<;inal population of Ital} ollK'tl imc" perhaps much — m tins way is su_i;j;( th ■;ted by Nicbuhr; suiii^ested, if not absidutdy stated. Tlu; (jhaonian name, as well as other ^eon'rajjliical and ethnolonical r(da- tiiiiis, is shown to Ix; common lo both sides of the (Julf. (Jan tlic class of facts indicated lusreby be enlar^'edV Tin; name, whitdi is, perhaps, the most important, is that of the (ialubri. TIk'so are, writes Strabo, a ^''people of the Dardaniatfie, in \vlios(^ laud is an ancient city" (p. *>l()). ^Vord for word this is Citlabri — Avhate\'er the ^•eo<;raphical and ethnolo_ti,'ical itioiis may be. Without beint,^ exactly Japodes, these Cla- are in the lapod mdi^hbourhood lal in Without b(;ing identical, the name of the Italian Iapyp,es liich was to all intents and purposes another name for Calahri) is closely akin to la])odes so that in Italy, AVO ave Calabri called also Iapy<:;es, and, in lllyria, Iapod his. At th(! same time the change from / to d is, at the present moment, a South Italian characteristic. The Sicilian ttir Idlo was hrddo. On the other hand, this is a chanfj,e in tli(> wrong direction; still it is a change of the kind required. 130 ON Tin: .r.vi'oiM'.s and (ir.piKAK. ' I 1 ! i1 Tho ovifloncn that tlioro was a forfif^n jxtniilatitm in ('a- labria is satisfactory — tlu; most dctiiiiti! I'act ucmiij^- tin; statp- incnt that tlie Sallciitincs woro partly Cretans, associatfil Avith Locriaiis and Ilhjriuita. (Set; Cahdnia.) Af,'-ain, tliis district, wherein the legends concerninfij Dju med ])revailed, was also llu; district of the Daiinii, wliom Fostns (v. Jjfiuiiia) connects with lllyria. 1 sujigc'st that, if the Caiahri W(!ro (Jalabri, the lapy;;!^ were lapoih's. Without enlarfj;inf^ upon the views that tin deilnite recognition of Illyrian elements in Southern Itiilv suggests, we proceed to the next division of our suhjcct. ' 2. Is there any connexion between the names lapud-cs aiil lapei-us? The answer to this is to be found in the exposi tion of the criticism requisite for sueli problems. Speriai evidence there is none. The first doctrine that presents itself to either the ethno- logist or the historian of fiction, in coimexion with the name lapetus, is that it is the name of some eponymm — a nauic like Hellen, or yliolus. Ion, or Dorus. But this is opposdl by the fact that no nation of any great historical proniinoiue bears such a designation. Doubtless, if the Thracians, the Indians, the ^Egyptians, &.Q. had been named lapcli, tlic doctrine in question would have taken firm root, and that at once. But such is not the case. May it not, however, have been borne by an obscure pn pulation? The name Greek was so born, no, at first, was the name Hellen. So, probably, the names to which we owe the wide and comprenensive terms Europe, Js/a^ Afrkn, and others. Admit then that it. may have belonged to an obscure population; — next, admitting this, what name so likf as that of the lapodesV Of all known names (unless an exception be made in favour of the -gypt in /E-gypl) it \\\\\>i be this or none. No other has any resemblance at all. AVho were on the confines of the non-Hellenic area? la- pyges on the west; lapodes on the north-west. The sii;;- gested area was not beyond the limits of the Greek niytlio?. It was the area of the tales about Diomed. It was the ana of the tales about Antenor. It was but a little to the nortli of the land of the Lapithw , whose name, in its latter t\vii- thirds, is I-npo(h It ran in the direction of Orphic and Bac- chic Thrace to the north. It ran in the direction of Cyclo- l)jcan and Lestrygonian Sicily to the west. It was on tlic t)orders of that lerra incoynila which so often supplies epo- nymi to unknown and mysterious generations. Say that this suggestion prove true, and we have the fii'^t of the term lapodes in Homer and Hesiod, the last in the ON TIIR .lAl'OKKS AM) fir,lMr>AI". i:n mil, wlioiii Gormnn p,c'np.alojj;it'8 ol'tlio •roo'.'riiiiliy otMoninndcs and in tlio Tr.'iV('ll(M''s Soiif; — unloiss, iiidi^iMl, tlif niodnni iianin Sr/id- lifirzhc word ior word, (IcjtiiL In tlio 'rrav(dl<'r's Son;;- we ^'ft ihc word in a (Jcnnan t'unn, (ii/\)t' or (ii/liffs. Tin; (Ji/\)as arc iiiciitioni'd in conjunction with tlu! If'rmfs. Ill .loniiindcs wu ^et (Ja/ji as tiin lioad of tlic (Jotliic <;onn- iilo;:i('s: — lloruni or^o (ut ipsi suis fabulis iVrunt) primus tiiit (iii/i(, qui j^eiiuit llalnial; llalnial v( ro noimit Auj^is, i^c Now (idjit Uei'o. may stand lor the oj)onymus of tlio (ic/iifftr, or it may stand I'or Jtt/t/u'f, tlio son of Noah. iMoro than one of till' old (Icniian jxulifirccs hc^^lns with what is called a (Jotliic h'f;('nd, and ends with IIk; book of (ieni'sis. To concdude: tlu; boarin;^ of the criticism ujiou the etlino- logy of the populations which took part in the destruction of tli(! lloman empire*, is su;:<;estive. Tliere arc several of tlioiii in the same catej^ory with tluj riepida\ MiiUtlin mutandis: every iioint in the previous criticism, which apjilies to the Ocpida; and lapydes, appli<*s to the Huyi and lihirli. Up to a certain period avo have, in writers iiioi'C or less classical, notices of a country called Jihcrlia, and a population called Uluvli. F(»r a shorter period subse- quoiit to this, wc hear nothing, or next to nothing, of any Olio. Tliirdlv, in the writers of tli(! 5tli and Gtli centuries, when the creed begins to bo Christian and the authorities (Jerman, wc find the Ihigi of a Iiu(/i-l(ind , — liiu/i-land, or the land of llic liu{/i , being neither more nor less than the ancient province of Rltcctiu. ^Jame, then, for name, and place for place, the agreement is sufficiently close to engender the expectation that the Blurti will be treated as the liuf/i, under a classical, the liugi as the RIkl'U, under a German, designation. Yet this is not the case. And wdiyV Because when the Uugi become pro- minent in history, it is the recent, foreign, and intrusive (iotiis and Huns with whom tlu>y are chiefly associated. Add to this, that there existed in Northern (jrermany a popula- tion actuallv called Rugii. For all this, however, Rur/iland is lihaHia , and Rhevlia is Rufiiland, — name for name and place for place. So, pro- bably, is the modern Slavonic term Ruczy. VIII. ETlINOLOCilCA. ON THE SlilUECTIVn V OF CEKTAIN CI.ASSES IN ETHNOLOGY. KllOM TIIK nilLOSOlMIICAL MACSAZINE FOlt I\IAY 1S5: To tlio investigator who believes in the unity of the Iiii- nian ispecies, '\vhetli(!r lie be a proper ethnologist, or a Zdolo- gi.tril»iition (^vorywlicrc! niul n luor.'il as w(^ll aw a ])hyrti('al scries of chanutcristics. Siii'dy, it' tho (jiuistiou uiidi-r notii-c be a ([ucstion that must hr. studied iiidruetivcly , Man j^ivcs iifl till' tit-dd tor onv induction. Ik'turu I conio to th(! special point ol" the present notieo and to tho exphmation of its soniewliat enij;inatical heading', 1 must l"urth(!r detiiu! tlie sort of doctrine endxxlied in what 1 liHve called the Ixdief of th(! unity of our species. I (U) ii(»t call the upholder of the dev(d»>pinental doctrine a believer of this kind. His views — whetluu* rij^ht or wronj; — are iit variance with the current idt-as attaclied to the word spe- cies. Neither do 1 identify with the recoj^nition of sin<;l(! <|)ecies the hypothesis of a nndtiplieity of })rotoplasts, so loiuj us then (ire disiritnih'd over scrrnil ijcni/i iiiihicdl rcfifrrs. The essential (dcnncnt to the idea of a single species is a sinj;le ireo^'raphical centre. For this, the siinjjlest form of the- pro- toplast community is a single pair. All this is mere definition and illustration. The doctrine itself may he cither rif^ht or wrony this means forms and varieties which once existed become extinct. The more this extinction takes place, the greater is the <»blit!ration of those transitional am! intermediate forms whicli connect extreme types; and the greater this obliteration, tlie stronger the lines of demarca- tion between geographically contiguous families. Hence a variational modification of a group of individuals simulates a diffration of transitional forms. The geographical distribution of the different etlnndogical divisions supplies a full and sufficient confirmation of this view. 1 say ''lull and sufficient," because it cannot b(; said that all our groups are subjective, alt brought about by dis- j)lac'eni(!nt and obliteration. Some are due to siniph; isola- tion; and this is the reason why the question was simplified bv the omission of all the ifisu'or po])ulations. As a general rule, however, the f?iijn! dc/in/lc llw class ^ the (jrcatcr the tlis- phici'mcnt ; displacement which we souKitimes kn;)W to have taken place on historical evidciic*^, and displacement which we sometimes have to infer, in thus inferring it, the lan- guage is the chief test. The greater the area over which it is spoken with but little or no variation of dialect, the more recent the extension of the population that speaks it. Such, at least, is the jnimd facie view. A brief sketch of the chief details that thus verify the po- sition of the text is all that can now be given. 1. The pojjulations of South-eastern Asia, Alongol in phy- siognomy and monosyllabic in speech, have always been con- sidered to form a large and natural, though not always a primary, group. Two-thirds of its area, and the whole of its frontier north of the Himalayas, is formed by the Chi- nose and Tibetans alone. These differ considerably from each other, but more from the Turks, Mongols, and Tongusians iiround. In the mountainous parts of the Assam frr)ntier imd the Burmese empire, each valley has its separate dia- lect. Vet these graduate into each other. 2. (central Asia and Siberia are occupied by four great groups, the po})ulations allied to the Turk, the populaticms allied to the jNIongol, the populations allied to the Mantshu, and the populations allied to the Finns. These are pretty dftinitely distinguisluul from each other, as well as from the Chinese and Tibetans. They cover a vast area, an area, ^vllich, either from history or inference, we wxw certain is iar wider at present than it was originally. They have en- croached on each and all of the populations around, till they meet Avith families equally encroaching in the direction of China and Tibet. This it is that )nak(!s IIh; famili(;s which aro called Turanian and Monomjllahic natural groups. They arc cut off, more or less, from each other and from other 142 ON THE SL'IUKCTIVITY OF CEUTAIN CLASSES IN ETHNOLOGY. populations by the displacement of croups originally more or less transitional. The typical populations of the centre spread themselves at the expense of the sub-typicals of the periphery until the extremes meet. 2. The circumpolar populations supply similar illustrations. Beginning witH Scandinavia, the Lap stands in remarkable contrast with the Norwegian of Norway, and the Swede of Sweden. Why is thisV Because the Northman rcpiosents a population originally German, — ^a population which , how- ever much it may have graduated into the type of the most southern congeners of the Lap, is now brought into contact with a very different member of that stock. 4. This plucnomenon repeats itself in the arctic portions of America, where the Algonkin and Loucheux Lidians (Indians of the true American type) come in geographical ccrtact, and in physiological contrast, with the Eskimo. Consequently along the Loucheux and Algonkin frontiers the line of de- marcation between the Eskimo and the Red Indian (cur- rently so-called) is abrupt and trenchant. Elsewhere, as along the coast of the Pacific, the two classes of population gra- duate into each other. 5. The African family is eminently isolated. It is, however, just along the point of contact between Africa and Asia that the displacements have been at a maximum. The three vast families of the Berbers, the Arabs and the Persians, cannot but have obliterated something (perhaps ?niich) in the way of transition. 6. The Bushmen and Hottentots are other instances of ex- treme contrast, /. c. when compared with the Amakosah Caffros. Yet the contrast is only at its lieight in those parts where the proof of Caffre encroachment is clearest. In the parts east of Wallfisch Bay — traversed by Mr. Galton — the lines of difference are much less striking. Such are some of the instances that i"ustrate what may be called the "subjectivity of ethnological groups,*' — a term which greatly helps to reconcile two apparently conflictinjr habits, viz. tli.at of thinking with the advocates of the unity of the human species, and employing the nomenclature of their opponents. PxVKTTCU] GEXEllAT. ITvlXCIPLES OF Pllirx )[.( )(II( !AL CLASSIllC.VllOX AND THE VAr.UE OE GROUPS, wnu PAirriCULAR REFEHKNOE TO THE I.ANCUJAGES OF TJIE IX J )0 -EUROPEAN CLASS. READ BEFORE THE ETHNOLOGICAL SOCIETY, 28TII FEBUtAftY J849. In vcspcct to the lanf^uages of tho Indo-European class, it is considered that the most important questions connected with their systematic arrangement, und viewed with refer- ence to the extent to which they engage tlie attention of the present writers of philology, are the three following: — 1. The f/m'sf/on of the Fnnilmnenlal Etnncnts of cerlnin Lan- guages. — The particular examph; of an investigation >f this kind is to be found in tho discussion concerning the extent towliich it is a language akin to the Sanskrit, or a language akin to the Tamul, which forms the basis of certain dialects of middle and even northern India. In this is involved the question as to the relative value of grannnatical and glossa- vi.'d coincidences. 2. The question of the Independent or Sidiordintfte Ch(traeter (if certain Groups. — Under this head comes the investigation, as to whether the Slavonic and Lithuanic tongues form se- parfite groups, in the way that the Slavonic and (Jothic ton- gues form separate groups, or whether thoy are each niein- Ijors of some higher group. The same inquiry applies to tlic languages (real or supposed) derived from the Zend, and the languages (real or supposed) derived from the Sanskrit. 3. The question of Extension and Addition. — It is to this that the forthcomin*; observations arc limited. 144 OKNKUAL PKIXf'IPLK.S OK inill.OLOtilCAI, CLASSIFICATIOX &C. (IKNKUAIi I' I l! I f Taking- as tlie centre of a frroup/tliose forms of spcach wliich luivo boon recognised as Indo-hnropean (or Indo-Gennanicj, from the first recognition of the group itself, we find the languages derived from the ancient Sanskrit, the languages derived from the ancient Persian , th(; languages of Greece and Rome, the Slavonic and Lithuanic languages, and the languages of the Gothic stock; Scandinavian, as well as Germanic. The affinity between any two of these groups has currently been considered to represent the affinity between them all at large. The way in which the class under which these divisions were contained, as subordinate groups, has received either addiliim or c.ck'nsion , is a point of phih)logical history, which can only be briefly noticed; previous to which a difl'eronee of meaning between the woi'ds ailditmi and extension should be explained. To draw an illustration from the connnon ties of relation- ship, as between man antr;iliii wore to change rapidly in one direction, and the I'^ng- lisli ot America in another, great as would ho th(> ditt'er(nice resulting from such changes, their ctlinoh»gical relation would he the same. They would still have the same affiliation with tlic same mother-tongue, dating from nearly the sann; epoch. Ill ethnological philology, as in natural history, desa'ttl is tliP paramount fact; and without asking how far the vahu; thus given to it is liahle to be refincid on, wo leave it, in i>;uli .'science, as we find it, until some future; investigator •hall have shewn that cither lor a pair of animals niU des- urmlcd from a connnon stock, or for a pair of languages not iiii^nnating from the same mother-tongue, a greater numi)cr lit" jicnoral propositions can be predicated than is tlie case; witli the two niost dissimilar instances of (iither an animal or a language derived from a common origin. LantjiKiges are aUicd just in. proiHution as they were seiiaraled from Ihe same lanyuaye at the same epoch. The Slime epoch. — The word epoch is an equivocal word, and it is used designedly because it is so. Its two meanings require to bo indicated, and, then, it will be necessary to ask which of them is to be adopted diere. The e/ioch, as a period in the duration of a language, may be simply chronological, or it may he philological , properly so called. The space often, twenty, a hundred, or a thousand years, is a strictly chronological epoch. The first lifty years after the Norman conquest is an epoch in the liistory of the Eng- lish language; so is the reign of Henry the Third, or the Protectorship of Oliver (h'omwell. A definite period of this sort is an epoch in language, just as the term of twenty or thirty years is an epoch in the life of a man. On the other harul, a period that, chronologically speak- ing-, is indefinite, may be an epoch. The interval between one change and an other, whether long or short, is an (ipoch. The duration of English like the English of Chaucer , is an epoch in the history of the English language; and so is the ilnration of English like the English of the J^ible translation. For such epochs there are no fixed periods. With a lan- >'uage that changes rapidly they arc short ; with a langnage that changes slowly they are long. Now, in A\diich of these two meanings should the word bo used in ethnographical philology? The answer to the (pies- tion is supplied by the circumstances of the case, rather than 10* 148 (iKXKUAl- I'UINCll'I.KS (»!' I'lllI-OI-fMilCAl, CI.A.SSlriCAIKhN i^C. Gr.NKKAI. 1 by any abstruct propriety. We cannot '^\\v, it the first niciin. inf^, evf^n if we wisji to do so. To say in what yt^ar of tliM duration of a common motlier-tongne tlie (J reek separntcil fron\ the stock that was common to it and to th(^ Latin i> an impossil)ility; indeed, if it couKl h(i answered at once, it would bo a question of simphj history, not an inferoiuv from etlmoh)gy: since ethnolo«iy, witli its pahcontolofiicil reasoning" from effect to cause, speaks only where historv. witli its direct testimony , is silent. We cannot, then, in ethnolo<^ical reasoning-, get at the ))rc'- cise year in which any .one or two languages separated frnm a common stock, so as to say that f/i/s si'parak'd su Ioikj lif- forc, the other. The order, however, of separation we can get at; sinn wo can infer it from the conclition of the mother-tongnc .it the time of such separation; this condition being denoted Iv the condition of the derived language. Hence the philological epoch is an approximation to the chronological epoch, and as it is the nearest approximation that can possibly bo attained, it is' practically identical witli it, so that the enunciation of the i)rinciple at which we wish to arrive may change its wording, and now stand as follows. — Lanyuayea are allied, J ml in proporlion as Itiey were separdlcd from the same lanyuaye in Ihe same slaye. ^Jow, if there be a certain number of well-marked forms (say Ihree) of dcvelopnnjnt, and if the one of these ;;oiiiciili' with an early period in the history of language, another with a later one, and the third with a period later still, we liavr three epochs wherein we may fix the date of the sepMration of the different languages from their different parent-stocks: and these epochs are natural , just in proportion as the forms that characterise them are natural. Again, if each epoch fall into minor and subordinate pe- riods, characterised by the changes and modifications of the then generally characteristic forms, wo have the basis tor subordinate groups and a more minute classification. It is not saying too much to say that all this is no liypn- thesis, but a reality. There arc real distinctions of charac- teristic forms corresponding with real stages of development; and the number of these is thre^e ; besides wdiich, one, at least, of the three great stages falls into divisions and sub- divisions. 1. The stage anterior to the evolution of inflexion. — Here each word has but one form, and relation is expr(\sse(l by mere juxta})08ition, Avith or without the superaddition of a change of accent. The tendencies of this stage are to com- fiEN-KUAI- l'llIXfII'M"« or ririLOLOfilfAT. CTASSTFICATIOX SiO 149 l)inc words in the way of composition , but not to go furtlicr. Every word rctcains, throughout, its separate substantive ili.'iriicter, and lias a Uioaning independent of its juxtajtosi- tioii with the words with which it combines. 2. The stag(! wlierein infiexioiis are df!veioj)ed. — Here, words originally separate, and afterwards placed in Juxta- |it).sitioii with others, as elcnumts of a compound term, so far ili:in^e in form, or .'-(» far los(! their separate; signification, as to pass lor adjuncts, either prefixed or ])ostfixed to the iii.'iin word. Wliat was once a word is now tiie part of a word, and what was once Composition is now Derivation, certain sorts of Derivation being called Inflexions, and cer- tain Inflexions being called Declensions or Conjugations, as the case may be. 3. The stage Avherein inflexions become lost, and are re- placed by so})arate words. — Here case-endings, like the I in IKilr-i , are rephaced by prej>ositions (in some cases by post- positions), like the /o in to fatlicr; and pers(nial endings, like the in vnc-o. are replaced by pronouns, like the I in / call. Of the /'irsl of tliese stages, the Chinese is the language wliith affords the most typical specimen that can be found in the present lalr date of languages — hile , considering that wo are looking for a sample of its earliest forms. Of the last of these stages the English of the year 1841) affords the most typical specimen that can be found in the present early date of language — early, considering that wo are looking for a rsample of its latest forms. Of the second of these stages we must take two languages as tiie samples. 1. The (Week. — Here we have the inflexional character in its most perfect form; /. e.. the existence, as sej)arato words, of those sounds and syllables that form inflexions is at its iiiaxiiiium of concealment; i. e., their amalgamation wath the primary word (the essence of inflexion) is most perfect. 2. T/ie Circassian, Coptic, or Tvrkisli. — In one of these (it is difficult to say which) the (existence as separate words of those sounds and syllables which form inflexions, is at its iniiuinum of concealment; /. e., their amalgamation with the primary word (the essence of inflexion) being most imperfect. This classification is, necessarily, liable to an element of confusion common to all classifications where the evidence is not exactly of the sort required by the nature of the ques- tion. The nature of the question here dealt with requires tlio evidence of the historical kind, /. e., direct testimony The only evidence, however, we can get at is indirect and inferential. This engenders the following difficulty. The ir)() (iKNKKAI, riJINCIIT.KS or I'llM.ni.Ol. IC \l. ( I.ASSIIICAI ION I'ic n(!W('st liuiguji^c of (.say) tlio InnjiUii^cs ui' tlin ^ccoiidinv lorinatioii may Ix' nearer in cliriniolooy, to i\\v oldest laii j^uago of tlu' lliirtl, than to llic lirst f'ornuMl lanj;nat;(' uf its own class. Indeed, nidess we assume tlio suspension ot' all (•lianj;c lor lonj;' epoidis, and that tlio.se coincido with tlir periods at which certain lan// has already connnanded mueh attentieii; sn that it is not tho int(^ntion of the present writer to say iiimli about it, Alonj;-, however, with this form go others; c. {/. Tho English Ship hccomes in Danish. Skip as in Skiphm — Fish — Fisk — Fiskt'rton — IForm — Onn — Onnshi/ — Church — A'irk — Ormskirk &e. &c. In like manner the Roman casira becomes — In English Chester or cesler, in Danish caster and (v//,s7o;. Contrast the forms Vmlcaster , hamcas/er Ac. with Chester, or ^\cester and this difference becomes aj)parent. Now the river Ouse in the parts about VVansford scp.-i- rates the counties of Huntingdon and Northampton — in tho former of which no place ending m-hy is to be found, and all the castra are Chester:, as Godmanr/i Entj/is/i , (lust 1. Tshetshentsh, Iskni '2. (Jhinese fski/i Enijlisli , Niind I. Avar, Isltimiij '1. 'I'ilx'tan, bfidzoma KiKjlish, sand I. (Circassian, /is/iak/itdt '2. (Jhinese, ska Kfitjiisk , leaf I. 'rslietsheutsli , (ja lni,usli, ija '2. Chinese, ///• Kntjlisk , tree. Mi/Jeji, vhi' Circassian , dzi'y Chinese, shn /'Jfitjlish, stone Audi , kinzii Siamese, kin Etnjlish, soa I. (Jeorf^ian , agiva 1. (yhinese, sku// ■=: nji, ua, tvoe Tibetan , bu English , liair Kasikumuk, tshara ON TfJF Ari'INITIKS OF TFIK LANOUAGKS OF CAlPASrS SiC. 159 :'. Jili , /ifira Siiijii)lM>, fiftrn Kiiijlish, liair I, Avar, siih Aiizukli, Sdh Tsliari , sal) ■}. Ihiriiicsc, s/iahrn Maiiipiir, S(im ScHigplio (()), S(im luiijlish, hair I. 'rslictslicntsli, />(iz<'rrs/i •J. Karycii , fchnsii Taiikliul , hosi'/i luKjlis/t, I lead I. (i corgi an , lan'i i.azir, // Siiauic, Ir/iinn •1. CiiincHO , li'u , sen Auaui, III lin Ava, kaiKj (;'>) EiKjJish , IhmkI I. Audi, »ii(')\ tnao'r i. Assam, mur Kii(jJis/i , 1i(>nd I. Alisiu", /.7/// , alifi Altclvcsck , zr/io '.'. Karen , /tho Maiii|nir, kok Tanklinl, akan I'Jii/lis/i, ninntli I. l-('stH (Jiiinese, .s7// Kiajlish , foot Ivasiknnmk, ilzlian Khamti, lin hUajlish, foot Mizjpji (3), kn.j, kocg I. )nj«no , hhse 'jS nh/it' i. iCO ON Tin: ArriMTiKs or tuk i-A.\(;rA(ii;s ov caica.si .s &.c. Maiiiymr, k/inng 'rankhul, ak/tit KiKjUsh , foot Audi , ts/ii'ka Knhitsli, Idfj .nii, takkln/ai (iaro, JHchok KiKjlish , foot (i(>orj«ian , ]u'ehi ^Faplu , jtoka ■■=-— leg KtujUsli , fiii;4or Mlnj^rolian , kiti Moitay, khoit=:=:h(iml l^lay, knZH^=^(1a English, liaiul (jr corgi. in, eheli Ijazic, ieh j\riiigr('lian , ekr Suauic, s/ii Cliiiioso , s/ti'H English . hand Audi, katshu Kabutsh, koda Klioilm, khut Manipnr, khut English, blood Ab.sne, Ishu, sha 'rslictshcntsh, zi IiM^us, zi Siu};;i»ho, sat Souf^'jdio , zyai Kapwi , the ]V[arain, aztji Chainplmng, azi Lnliuppa , ashi Taukiml, asu English , blood liido , e Miiiiipur, J Koibu, hi Glaring, hi English , blood Tisbctshoutsh, yioh Circassian , tlih ('iiincsi^, chine English . skin < 'ircassian , jfeh (/'bin CSC, pi English , skiix Dido , hik Tibetan , shhugshha English , bone 'rsbctsbentsli , dyaekt Ingiisb, tekhh Aknsb, likka Tsbari, rekkn Kbaniti, nitk Sianu'sc, krailitk English , great (Georgian, didi Mingrelian , didi C7anton , t(i Knan-cbua , la, da Tonkin, dvu ('ocbin-cliiiiese , dai Tibet, ee Ava , kgi (j) ]May, dn Teina, tn English, bad Mingrelian, moglach Suanic, ehntja (Chinese , go gok Mon , kah Ava, fnakaung (■♦) — dl/c (2) English, warm Ingush, tan Tibetan, dzho English, blue ]\rizjeji (;^) , siene (Jhinese, zing 'I'ibetan, swongbha English , yellow Circassian , khozh (iX TIIK AKFIMTIES OF THE LANOlAdJ^S OF rAlTASlS &C. 161 •J. Altassiau , kfia CliiiioKC , chiiatig luifllish, ^rccn I. Avar, iit\s/ieriu Aiiziikli, nrdjin Iiif.nisli , send ']. 'niictan , ahjanggu Hwjlish , l)olow I, (icorji'iiin , ktvenH-t, kwerno '1. AviV, huukina Yo, itiik I'a.ssuko, hi)ko Kiiliuni , akiia Kiifilis/i . (lup 1. licsf^ian , zo Akiish, zn Audi, st'tv Dido , zis Kasikunmk, zribri Alizjoji, Izd Alta.s.sian , srka '1. Tilictan, (hig luiijlis/i , tlirpo I. (icorgiaii , Sfimi liUzie , Jum Mingrcliau, sanii S)iaiiii', semi t Cantdii ( Miincso , sam Kuaiichua, ,sv/=Thou. Defective in the nominative singular. Sing. Plural. Nom. much Gen. nian-i mach-i Dat. ninii-au mach-en Aceits. man inach Abl. man-ei mach-ei. Nom. di si-mach Gen. daw-i * si-mach-i Dat. daw-on si-mach-en Aeeus. daw si-mach Abl. daw-ei si-mach-ei. The signs of the persons of the verbs are -in ^ -/,v, -/; - tu , -tnc ; e. y. am Or duclii. ' Or fa-ko I's Sii . • the, tlifii, K' that this qntxitinii oi ox run AFKiNiTiKs OK TiiK i,.\\(irA(ii:s (»!' r.MCAsrs Sir. 103 (Idition of •Hows; an or nia, iruljir. (jtis-//j = ftU(l-iV) qus-w = iiu(l-».v (|iis-/ x=z au(l-/7 qiis-*//« = n\u\-imus (|Us-»// = ;iu«l-i7/.v (\ns-iiir r^ t\\n\-iu/il. TIh' addition ol' iIm; sound of / /ic/j)s to form tlic li'Mti pro- tiritc. 1 say Iwlps, because; if we c'onii)ar<' tiio fornj s-k^t-i-on =. ] miidf, with tlio root hitn , or the forn) /'c-f/i/s-t-nn = J heard, with the root ijus, avc son, at oncu, that th«3 addition lit' / is only a intrt of an inticttion. Hoyond this, tlie tenses become complicated; and that bocaiise they are evidently formed by the ajjfglutination of separate words; the so-called inij)erfect bein^- undoubtcidly t'onncd by affixing; the })reterite form of the word lo make. Till' ))orfect and future seem to be similarly formed, dele tnun the auxiliary -^^ ^<'; as may be collected from the follo- wing paradigms. 1. riural — Prcsenf, st-ani, st-ut, i-st-i = sumus, rsfis, sunt. Smiuliir — P/rlt'rilr , u-t-aii, u-t-as, u-d-i = fni, fuisli, fuit. Sin;iul i; -am Future , I. fi'-qus-t-n hiu-f/us-y in ■an iv-(jus-t-oi \);\i-(/usg'i-stam •)_ \)',\i-i/us-g'in- as hn\-(/us-g'i-stut :\. hiii-qus-yen •i hiii-q us-g'i-sti Or fa-ko-t-ou, &c. 11* 164 ON TIIK AKI'IMTIKS *»1' Till: l,AN(tr.\. Pr Noa-rad ON Tin: Ai KiNiiins or tiik i.AXfirAOKH ok rvrcAsts v'ir. Ifif) S-ah z= mil fatlwr; h-nb = ttur father. It'-ah = i/n/ /'(il/trr: s -ah •■ ~ i/oar fat/irr. T-uh ~ -- his (hrrj falhi'r ; rah --■ their father. "2. W'licn tli<' jn'onoun is governed by a verb, it is simi- liirly iiu'orporat'Ml. '.], Hence, tlie only inseparable lorni of tlie personal pro- noun ist(t be found when it governs the verb. In this case tlio forms are : Sa-rti = I IFa-ra = tln»u f'i = he ffa-ra ^^^ we .S a-rii = yo. Il-hart = they. In sii-nt , fra-ra, ha-ra , sa-ra, the -ra is non radical. The word ii-hart is a eonipound. Tli(! ordinal - /ir.s/ is uchnni. This seems formed from ,ll;il =: otic. The ordinal = .srrwr/ is ar/i. This seems unconnected with the word n>i- = two:, just as in English, second has no (.'ty- iii(il();;ical connection with ftro. Tlie remaining ordinals are formed, by affixing -tifo, (and liii some case) prefixing -a ; as Cardinals. 3, Chl-/>a* 4, P's i-6rt 5, CUn-lta (i, V-ha 7, Wis -ha H, A(v-ha «), f<^-ba 10, S'wa-^rt Ordinals. .4-clii-/J/o y/-p s i-nto J-v\m-tno V-intif lin-into A-w-nio S h-into f^w-ento. In the Absno verbs the distinction of time is the only distinction denoted by any approach to the character of an InHection ; and here the change has so thoroughly the aj)- poarance of having been effected by the addition of some sojiarate and independent words, that it is doubtful whether nny of the following forms can be considered as true inflec- tions. Root , (/wis 1 =:r^ ride 1. Present., C'wis l-rt/> = I ridei==equitu. 2. Present, C'wis l-oi7 := I am riding. Nou-raJical. f Or, am in the hatiit of riding. 160 ON Till'. vrKiMTii:!^ or rm; i.ANoiAors or cMiAsrs Sic. InifH'rfi'rl, ( 'Vis'l-r/« Pirl'rrl. (fwis'l-// /'lust/iiiim/irrft'ct , ('Vis \-rfirn Fttliirr, (j'\visl-«»/ equiltthnm. i'(/i(Hiiii. ('i/iiHiiri'rani. equituhn. T \ nnnilicr is sliown liv tlio pronoun. AimI cud a complication. I'lie pronoun apitcais li(> p('rs(»n ami liorc nnist bo notici in two forms: — 1st. In lull, .SY//Y/, warn SiC. •ind. As an inscparabh* prefix; the radical letter luin:; prefixed and incorporated with the verb. It cannot, huwovci, be said that this is a true inilexion. 1. Sittg. 1. sard .v-c wisl-oiV = / ridr i. wara »-i; \visl-(>»7 -— lluni ridest 3. ui /-c Avisl-o// = he rules. 2. Phir. I. hiira fui-v'wM-oil :r^ tre ridr '1. s nva s -\^ \wa\-uiI =• yr ride 3. »/////v>-syIlai)ic ; (2.) that the distinction ihawn by Klaproth between the ]\[izhd/diedzhi and Les<;ian monps is ujitenable; both bclonf;inf? to the same class, a fact liy which the phihdojjjic ethnojiraphy of Caucasus is, pro iiinhis siinplified. Uj)on the first of these points Schiefl'ner \\rit'i' ((',) Jhhilirr (c.) K'alirr (r.j Cunrcrsioe. •\vai ^vai wain >vai vaix \\aij;(> wailn Avaixl M airi vaiji'tili w ailnli wail 10 \\ ai^dili 'txo . 'txai. 'txoii 'tXdX . . 'tXO<^() . 'txiiln. . 'tzoxi . . 'txori . . Hx.p^n in;. nxiiil. oiixiia. t'XIIS. • iXMsi'. «>u\sc. l)i. Mii oxri. sun oxani. . . . siiiia a'txn . . ais oxar. . . . asl »»xia. siix nxarx. siilo dxarld. suxi (ixarxi. Mui o>;irci. 'txo<;'t)li. suj^uh oxarji'iih. 'Ixnlnli. snliih oxarjnli. ijiTc oxarijort'. — - oxardali. 'txtilrc . sulrc oliarlorc 'txiiji'dili sii;j,'uili oliar^iiili. That sonic of tlioso forms arc no truo infioxions, hut .'i|i- ])on(l(Ml jircpositions, is spctMlily stated in tlio text. If so. it is prohaMc that, in another author or in a ditfcroiit 4. ah ■>. I'.x (). .i''' 1 . \\( Till ■1 a illsn , )Vri which It Iwcn/ij — - K The c(»i the latter th(! latter iriaii in oi tiv(^ is <;i> 111 v(.'rl) .\(hl to th tlic cmidit The ten (1.) Pre to the inij ;2.) lni| (3.) Ao (I.) '', 1 hut V jiii-l, •':' vowel /'"///'/; (\u iho ^ rfcc (5.) I'ln (Ck) Th( ino(lilicati( 1 j^ive the.n. Tl hcon too < The fir! ON rm: 'nsiii i.AN(;r.\ mi- CAUIUNAI. I. :\. 4. (i. OKDI.NM,. elm (luilirc. si si !};•('. Xn >"ln'^- alu'w .... (llicAvloj^c. P>^.i y\\\'^i\ jctx .... jcixloj^c. \vi»rl .... worlojjc. CAUUINAI.. OUDlNAL. H. l.Mi-l . . . . llJirlni;0. <). ISS . . . . . issldji'c. 10. itt . . . . . ittl(i;i('. II. clia-itt . . oliii-ittli>'>('. \-2. si-itt . . . . si-ittln^c. 1!>. t(|(M'X(:. . . i(|(M'Xl'ln ]*xauzt(|a = 20 X 20 + 100. 1000 = sai- t4auzi(|a it-aicja = 2 X 400 + 200. The t'oniinonest sif^ns of tlie plural nunilK-r are -/ and -.sv, tlio latter = « in Twiietslients. Tiio suffixes -ne and -hi, tlid hitter of wliieli is found in J^es<;ian, is stated to be (Jeor- ;:iaii in origin. Iso reason, however, ajiainst its b(;ing na- tive is ^ivon. Ill ve-riis, the simplest form is (as usual) the imjierative. .\(ld to this -a, and you have the infinitive. The si<>;n of the conditional is he or //; that of the eonjunctive le or /. 'I'he tf'uses are — (1.) Present, formed liy addinji^ -t( or -V to tl le root: /. c to tli(> imp(>rativ(' Inrni , and (dian<;in<;' the vowel. y'l.) Imperfect, by addiiij; -/• to the present. (3.) Aorist, formed by the addition nf -;• to the (I.) '*•. rff'C't ; the formation oi which is nut expressly {jivcn, hut \ iucli is said to diflVr from tiie present in not clian<:in The t'uture is cither the same as the present, or a m(»( lilicat ion of it. tl 1 jL;ivi' the names of those moods and tenses as i find ii'i!i. 'V\\i'. lani;uajie of the Latin grammar has, probably, bi'cn too ( ■h.sel V mil tnt.'d The first and second persons arc formed by appending 172 (»N TIIK ri Slir I.ANl.l :A(iF,. tlio ])ron(»nns oitlicr in the iioininativo or the instructivo fnim. I TshetslKin] Tliat an ()l»li(|iio lorni o!' tlio pronoun slionlcl npjicar in tl, ])r'rsonal inHcxion ot verbs is no more than what tlic if searches of" iho late ^fr. (Sarnett, with wiiich we are all s taniiliar, have taus nutici 10 licnder ol nouns. \\ lien certiuii wonls (adjectives or the so-called verb substantive) folldw certain substantives, they chan^-e their initial. Thus hafxlcon Wiv = //w iJiop/u-/ is, hatxhsensi Ik\ z.- Ilic prophels (irc, wa.^i tv?i ^^^ llw hroihcr is , wasar //a -: ///r lirnllicrs are. Ai^'ain — naw Jn --■ l/ic ship is, nawr Jii=(ln' s/iips dir: bstiuno jii=//i(' tri/'t' is, bsteo dii^^t/ic /rircs art'. This is said to indicate len der, but how do we know wliat fjender isV The words themsidves have neith(>r form iidv inflexion which indicates it. Say that instead of gender it means sex, /. c. that the chan^fes in question are refjulntpd by natural rather than Maiijii u'ivi I'K'iiisioii tl rircassian, In the V In the 1 to h(! foui the Circas l.S-ah=: W-ah: ]i-ah = To win I f^n-xw - Vi = l Tin- uiii iibove the ON I'HK iisiii i,AN(;rA(ii:. 173 Tslictsliiiiits (wo may say Lf'S<4ian) forms of spnoch of wliich ilir ;;r!iiiiiiiatii'al structure has liceii iiivcstij^ati'tl ; ;i notiio wliicli suj^gosts tl»e (juestion coneoniinj; its atliuitics and ilassilie-ation. The dtifliMision jtoiiits ti> the r^Tiaii , or l'"in, class of lan- :iiii-(s; ^vitl^ wliicli not only tin! 'rsluitslicnts, but all the iitlid' lan^ua^es of Caucasus ]iav<^ Ion-;' been known to liavu iiii.sct.ilancous affinities. The rcscniblancc, howovur, may iiidiv! ai»i)ar(m it tl lan real Tl i(! so-ca 11. m1 cases ma }■ illations of substantives and prepositions rather th 1 tli(liate|y connecti'd. In the way i.t vocabularies the lists of the As/a I'dli/tjlolht have hm^' lieen iiiinpeteiit to show tliis. In the wav of . II-Hli = ««r ftther. i S-ab :://((«/• father. l| S-ab ----//^y), tho double forms of the lushi plurals trai and Leo su^f;;(!st the likelihood dl tluiir beinj^ exclusive and Inclusive; one denotinfi^ the speaker i)Ut not tho person spokcm to, the other both the pcrscui spoken to and the person "svho speaks; plurals of this kiml bein^- well known to be conunon in many of the ruder lan- guages. 1 1 ON THE NAME AND NATION OF THE DA- (lAN KIN(i DKCEUALrS, WITH NOTICES OF THE A(iATIIVUSI AND ALAM. ItKAU I'.KFOUK TIIK rillLOLOOK.'AL SOCIKTV, Al'UlL 17T11 1H54. Tlic text of Herodotus places the Agntliyrsi in Transyl- vania (there or tJiereahouts). (Sec; F. \\'. Newman On Sey- tliia and th(! surrounding;,- ( 'ounlri* s, aeeordin;^- to Herodotus, I'liilolo^ieal Soeiety's Proceedings, vol. i. p. 77.) Tlie subsepithet l>ein<^' picli. The same epithet is applied to tins (ic/o/ii] also a popula- tion of the Seythia of Herodotus. Fur accurate knowled;;e the locality of the Aj;athyrsan8 was too remote — too rcnnotf; until, at least, the date of the Dacian wars; hut the Dacian wars are, th(Mnselves, eminently Miijifrfect in their details, and unsatisfactoiy in respect to ilic authorities for them. Tlicre is every reason, then, for a nation in th(» locality tif the A^athyrsi reniainin<^ obscure — in the same j)rcdica- iiipnt i^say) with the Hyperborei, (»r with the occupants of Tliuic. lit there is no reason for supposing- th(> obliteration of ic j»('opI(! socalhii'; nor yet for supposinj^- a loss of its naine, till wlK'tlicr native ot ctii; rwise. llonce, when we ,i;(t the details of Dacia we nuay rcason- il'lv look out for Aiiathvrsi. How tar nnist we expect to Hnd their name unmoditicd? llii.< depends upon the popiUation throu<^h whom the classi- 'iil writers, whether Latin or (Ireek, deriverl it. is'ow it is Hibniitted , that if we rind a notico of them in the fifth cen- tury A. I)., and that in au ac4:ount relating to Dacia and 17G ON nii: nami: and naiion m riii; i»a( ian kin(i ^^c. l^uuionia, tlie medium lias, ])r(iljal)ly , been ditlVrdiit IVom tli.'it tIir(Mii;li wliicli I hrddiitiis, jiiiii)n;;st tlic Orcck itilunii > of til*' UliU'U Sea, obtained his accouiit.s. Tlic (btails ut' tlii« dillVn-iui' ol' mi'dium arc not very iiii|)nitaiit, and tin; (li> ril.s.siuii ol" tliciii Nvoiihl be cpisoilitMl to tlu' present |»!ij)or, if not irrcbivant. It is cnou^b to rttniark , that a ditfcrciuv y)^ medium is jjrobaldc; and, as u consciiucntM- tliercuf, a ilit- fcrcni'o in tlu; form of the nann;. This is pnliniinary ami introductory to the notice of the foUowin^' passage of Priscns, to whom \vc o\v. Another fo. ai i^also in I'lisciis) i> '^ xaj I'ijoi. 'I'hcy an; specially caMcd .il.aliii Uuniii. .hii' nantb'S lorm is Aenlziii. IMaci' lor ])lacc, tiiis {^ivcs us the A;:athyrsi of Herodotus as near as i-an bo expected; and, name i'or nanu' it dms the same: tlie inference bein^' that th(; A/:at:iri of I'riM;ii> arc the (U'sceii(hints oi the Atjdihijisi of IIero(h)tus. Of cmusi , c'vi(b'nce ol' any kind to the mii;ration , extinction, or clian;;( of name on tin; part of the; |)opulation in (piestion would in- validate this view. Su(di (ividence , however, has not hciii prochu'cd , nor lias the present writer succeeded in iindiii;:, though he has soui;ht for it. Descendants then of the Aijiillnirsi , and ancestors of the Ak<(l:iri may have formoil part ol' the population of Daiia when Domitian and 'rrajan louj^ht against l)cc(d)alus; a ]);iit that may iiave been large or small, we.-ik or powerful, li'i mogeiuous with the rest of Dacia or ditlV'rent from it. i\^- sundng it to have Ix'cn different, it may still have sujijiiii'il .soldiers — even h'a(b'rs. l)ec(d)alus hinis(df may as ea>ilv have belonged to tlio Agathyrsan part (d' Dacia as to tuiv other. A very little evidence will turn the balance in so obscure a point as the pr( sent. Now, no (Jerman and no Slavonii' dialects givt; us citlit;uitive ev .tiliilliifisnn .if/dllii/rsuiif ili('i,ritimat( nisc. little Now tlu [lie extent iM tlu; Sc) fiU'ts is ei The presei the Agath} the preseni arc Af/ul/ii/i \iii(l (lie .\(i If Af/at/ii word in an lor word, i for an uni time in Th SIUIU! ])0pU tain dil'ticu identical. It is not, iiiight b{! 1 Turk so t other than were some them. Me present nu pose it to SlljIpOSC! tl lhijis-[A/,ai Even this jioimlation Turk stoc be it so. apart, the wide a par The del (tN TlIK NAMK AND NATION oi' Till: HAf'IAN KINO &('. 177 to which tlicy stand {done, <»r are strcn^thcniMl liy tlio coin- (i(U'n((' of others, hi the h»tt(!r cas(; they assume importance ill j)ro|)ortio). to the mutual 8Uj)|)ort tlicy j;iv(' oacli other; till! valuu of any two bein^ always more than double that ol cither taken siiij^ly. On the other hand, eaeh must rest on some si-jtaratf sub- >t;uitive eviih'iu'e of its own. To say that Jkrchalioi nuts an .[ijiiiliijrsitii hcnn/st' lite .U/iillu/mniis nwrc 'J'ifrAs, and that th(! .ti/ii/lii/rsans were Tur/:s Inrduxc Jhrchdhis way our o/' llwin, is illegitimate. There must b(! some special evidence in each case, little or much. Now the evidence that the Ayalliyrsi ■were Turks lies in the extent to which {a) they were Scythians {Skolo(i), and i/y) the Scythians {Skololi) Avere Turks; — neither of which facts is either universally admitted or universally denied. The present writer, however, holds the Turk character of tlio Aj;athyrsi on grounds wholly ind(^pi!ndent of anythinj^ in tilt present paper; indeed, the sugficstion that the Aratziri arc AfnillnjrM is, not his, but Zeiiss'. — (See Die JJculscltcn iitul (lie .\(ichh(inil(imme , v. liultjari, ]). 711,} If A(/(itlnjni- hi' Akatzir- in some older, Avhat is the latter word in any newer form? — for such there probably is. \V«)rd tor word, it is probablv the same as h'lutztir, a denomination for an uniloubtedly l\irk tribe which occurs for the first time in Theophanes: — Tovqxoi ano rr]q iojag oiJs Xct^aQovg ovo^K^ovOiV. This is A. D. 020. Whether, however, the siime populations were diuioted is uncertain. There are cer- tain difticulties in the su])[)Osition that they were absolutely identical. It is not, however, necessary that they should be so. There iiii<,dit b(^ more than one division of a {j^reat stock , like the Turk so called. Nay, they might have been populations other than Turk so designated, provided only that there were some Turk po})ulation in their neighbourhood so to call them. ^lore than this. The word may be current at the present moment, though, of course, in a modified form. Sup- pose it to have been the Turk translation of /y/r/z/.v ; or ruther, suppose.' the word piclus to be the Latin translation of A«/(i- lliijrs-[Akalzir-): what would the |)rol)able conse(pience l)eV Kvcu this, that whereever there was a jxiitilcd n»r tdtlaned) population in tlus neighbourhood »tf any member of the ^reat Turk stock, the name, or something like it, might arise. 1)1' it so. If the memljers of the same Turk stock lay wide apart, the corresponding painted or tattooed populations lying wide apart also might take the same name. The dctuils suggested by this line of criticism may form 12 178 ON llli: \A\Ii: AMI NAI'ION ul" IHi; KAf'IAN KINO &C. the PubjcH't of another paper. In the jjresent, tlio nutlinr hazj;r on::- - «■ Ax>/.' /Tfj," //AriP/'ot ; seein;;' that Ibn (lUO- tU^ who nu'ntions th«' (ielmii^ knows n(» i\lani, whereas the anthors who describe the Alani make (with one excep- tion abont to be nnticrd) no nuntion ol' the (lelotii, lu! i(l< ii- tilies the two j)opidatit)ns , (leloni and Alani, or vice rer lie deduces somethin};' more irom this root / — // (/, — v). Let th(! nam(! tor the Alans have reached tho (Jrecks oftlii' iMixino thruu;j,h two ditl'iTcnt dialects of some interjacciit .S'(/. anmiaji-e let tin; form it to(dv in (Irefd^ have b( een nari.-vl- labic in one case, whereas it was imparisyllabic in the otlui'. and we have two plurals, one in ~ot , as iVAoJi'ot, "jXavvat. \'lkavot^ and another in -f-g, as Ft'lcovfi^, "/Jlavi'fi;,"yl/.(cvi^. — -possible, and (i>'en probable, modifications of the orijiiual nam(», what(!ver that was. Now, name for name, Alavii c()m(!H very near ilkliivt^;\ and in this sinnlarity may lie the explanation of the statement (d' Herodotus as to tlie existoiut' of certain ScijIliinH (inrl>s ('Kkltjvtg 2.xv\}(a) — iv. 17. 1<>S, If so tliese Scylliiini (ircc/.s were A/a/is. The oxc(!ption, indicat(;d a few lines above, to the fact of only (»n(i author mentionin;;' both (irloui and Alani, is to bo found in Ammianus Mareellinus (xxxi. 2. \'.\. I h. flu' j»assa;;e is too lonj;' to fptoto. It is clear, however, that whilst his Aliini are sjioken of from his own knowlodj;(!, his f are brought in from his book-learninijr, /. c. from Ilorodotu ,(' mil in } N O T 1^: s. Ni.Ti; I. Evidi'itre of nnif kind /O //ir tnif/n/lio». e.x Unction nr ilitiiijir of iK/iiir '" t/ie pat't in i/Histimi inmld iiirnlidatc this rifir. Siic/i criilriio' /las not liieii pvoiliiiiil ijC- — IMie fuller consideration ot" tlu; (lUestieii in- volved in tliis stiitoniont is to l>o found in Dr. W. Smith's Dirlinnary Of f! reek (lad Honau iieograpliii vv. Ilunni, Hcythin. und Sarmnlin. KOTHS. 179 Ml IK .'. Tlir ih-liiils siiiifii'slrd hji this line n/' iriliiisw ffr. — 'riid'c (irr tii tlir I'lFfct that ill tlif Wdiil .li/(i//ii/isi we fj-ct nil oirly 'I'liik ;:lo.ss, ot' wliicli tli(' lii^ttoiy is soiiiovvhut ('nriiiii,s. It exists, at tiif iircsciit iiiDintiit in Miij;' lain!, hir. iii;,' coiiu' cm Hiiii<'iuv. It exists in SiUcrin , on the vrrvtioii- III r •' f till! Aini'ric'ii. Kliir.i liiic \vc liinc it ill its ul)- If is Mii> i;ii;,''lisii wiii'il llnssm ii'viati'ii t'lH'iii. jl is till- Sihcriim word Viiiy tlieiiiselves. liy wliuinV \\\ no oiK! so ](rolialily as Uy the ^'akllts. WliyV Iiccaiise they tattoii tlieiiisel\-es. It' so. it is |iroi(aiile that f'i>l:iiii:/iir ami 'J's/iti/nn/z/iir \rf (Uic am I th same u cinl ; at any rate likel V im aiiiiiir in a likch luii;Mii;;-e has heen claimed for it. I,"t it , then, lie coiisidcjcd as a 'I'lirU word, meaniiijf njintlfil, tnltitinut, l,iiiiilcil. — |iro\isioiially. It may appear in any ]iart of tin; Turk area, jinivided only, that sonii; nation to which oiio of the tliroc precedinj; ad- jii'tlM's applies he I'oiiiid ill its iieiH-liliuiirliood. It may apjiear, too, in any -tatf of ;uiy Turk form of speech. iJiit there are Turk t'orms of speech ;is far distant from the Le' a and Tiiiifinska as Syria or Constantinople; :uiil tliert! art! Turk ;jlosses as old as Herodotus. One of these the pre- Miit writer helicjves to he the word .If/nt/ii/rsi . hein^f provided with spc- that tli(! nation so called wero either themselves ciid eviihnce to shew the .V^athvrsi are calleil the pifli th f.irks or on a Turk fioiilier. Now A^ratliyrsi; and it is siibniitted to the reader that the one term is tin triiiisiatioii of the other — the words .Ifjiit/ii/rs (also .lliiitzir), }'iil\ii""* ^ '^ o / Hiotographic Sdences Corporation 33 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ^:v"Q > fe^ ^^^ V^ 6^ ON THE LANGUAGE OF LANCASIIIKE, UNDEll THE llOMANS. liKAD BEFORE THE 1II8T(JKICAL SOCIETY OF LANCASIIIKE AND CHESHIRE. HTli JAXUAUY, 1857. In the present paper, advantage is taken of tlie local clia- racter of the Historic Society of Lancashire and Cliosliire. to make the name of the county serve as a special text for a general subj(!ct. What applies to Lancashire applies to any county in Roman England. The docti'ine is as follows — that in Lancashire particularly, and in England in general, the predominant language for the first five centuries of our era was not Latin but British. The writer is so far from laying this down as a novelty. that he is by no means certain , that it may not be almost a truism. He is by no means certain, that there is a single one of those to whom he addresses himself, who may now hold, or even have held, the opposite opinion. He i.s fully aware that excellent autlioritics have maintained both sides of the question. He is only doubtful as to the extent to wdiich the one doctrine may preporiderate over the other. H' the question were to be settled by an appeal to the history of the more influential opinions concerning it, avc should find that , in a reference to the earliest and the latest of our recent investigators, Dr. Brichard would uiaintaiu one side of the question, Mr. AVright another. The paper of the latter, liaving been printed in the Transactions of the Society, is only alluded to. The opinion of Dr. Brichard is I ooverors ( conveyed in the following extract — ''The use of languages really cognate mu.st be allowed to furnish a proof, or at least a strong presumption, of kindred race. Exceptions may in- ox TIIR LAXGUAdK OV T-ANT \'tiuices, Las scarcely ever exterminated the native idiom of luiv people, unless after many ages of subjection; and even tlicn, vestiges have perhaps always remained of its existence. In Ih'itain, the native idiom was nowhere superseded by the Koman, though the island was held in subjection u})Avards lit' three centuries. In Spain and in Gaul, several centuries of Latin domination, and fifteen under German and other modern ilvnas^ties, have proved insufficient entirely to obliterate the ancient dialects, which were spoken by the native people before the Keman conquest. Even the (rypsios, who have wandered in small companies over Europe for some ages, still preserve their original languape in a form that can bo everywhere recognised."* Upon the whole, I think that the current opinion is in favour of the language of Roman liritain having been Latin; at any rate I am sure that, before I went very closely into the subject, my own views were, at least, in that direction. "What the present language of England would hav«^ been, had the Norman conquest never taken place, the analogy of Holland, Denmark, and many other countries enables us to dennine. It would have been as it is at present. What it would have been had the Sa.von conquest never taken place, is a question wherein there is far more speculation. Of France, of Italy, of Wallachia, and of tlie Spanish Penin- sula, the analogies all point the same way. They indicate that the original Celtic would have been superseded by the Latin of the Conquerors, and consequently that our language, in its later stages, would have been neither British nor Gaelic, but Roman. Upon these analogies, however, we may refine. Italy was from the l)eginning, Roman; tlus Spanish Peninsula was invaded full early: no ocean divided (jaul from Rome; and the war against the ancestors of the Wallachians w-as a war of extermination." f In these preliminary remarks we find a sufficient reason forgoing specially into the question; not, hoAvever, as dis- C(»vGrers of any new truth , nor as those who would correct * Kastoni Oiii^in of the Celtic Languages, p. 8. f English Language, Tii'st Kditiou, p. (58. 182 ON Tin; ; i\(ir.\(iK ok lancasiiiiu:, inoki; iiii': uomans. some general error, but rather, in a judicial frame of mind, and with the intention of asking-, first, how far the actual evidence is (eitiier way) conclusive; next, which way (su))- jjosing it to be inconclusive) the presumption lies; and thirdly. what follows in the way of inference from each of the on- posing views. What are the statements of the classical writers, siihc/juciit /(} Ike rcduclion of Britain , to the effect that the Romans, when they conquered a Province, established their language? 1 know of none. I know of none, indeed, r//?/t'//o/- to the Bri- tannic conquest. I insert, however, the limitation, Ijocaiisc in case such exist, it is necessary to remember that tluv would not be conclusive. The practice may have changed in the interval. Is there anything approaching such a statement? Tliero is a passage in JSeneca to the effect ''that where the Roman conquers there he settles." But he conquered Britain. Therefore he established his language. Add to this that wliere he established his own language, there the native tongue became obliterated. There- fore the British died off. If so , the Angles — when they effected their conquest — must have displaced, by their own English, a Latin rather than a British, form of speech. But is this the legitimate inference from the passage in question? No. On tiie contrary, it is a conclusion hy no means warranted by the premises. Nevertheless, as far a.s external testimony is concerned, there are no better premi- ses to be found. But there is another element in our reasoning. In four large districts at least, — in the Spanish Peninsula, in France, in the Orisons, and in the Danubian Principalities —^ the pre- sent language is a derivative from the Latin, which Avas, undoubtedly and. undeniably, introduced by the Roman con- quest. From such clear and known instances, the reasoni'i^' to the obscure and unknown is a legitimate analogy , and the inference is that Britain was what Oallia, Rha'tia, Hispania, and Dacia were. In this we have a second reason for the fact that there are mtiny who, witli Arnold, hold, that except in the parti- cular case of (.Treece, the Roman Avorld, in general, at the dale of the break-up of the Empire, was Latin in respeet to its language. At any rate, Britannia is reasonably sup- posed to be in the same category with Dacia — a country conquered later. ON nil'. i,AN(irA(;K or i.ancasiiiui;, inih-.k tiif. ^v<>^r\^•s. 183 loman con- rcnsoniiit;' On tlio other hand, however, there are the follo\Ying' eon- siilcrations. I. Jn the fir.st place the Allele coM(|Uost was gradual; so ^laihial as to give lis an insight into the character of the piijiuiation that was conquered. Was this (in language) La- tin? There is no evidence of its having been so. But is ilicro evidence of its iiaving been British? A little. How iiiucli, will be considered in the sequel. II. In the next place the Angle conquest was (and is) in- L'Oiniil'te; inasmuch as certain remains of tin; earlier and non- .\i)i;lo i)(ij)ulation still exist. Are these Latin V Decidedly not; hut on the contrary Jiritish, — witness the present liri- tons of Wales, and the all but liritish Cornish-men, who are now British in blood, and until the last century were, more or Ici^s , ]>ritish in language as well. But this is not all. There was a third district which was slow to become Angle, viz.: part of the mountain district of Cumberland and ^\\.'stmorelanfl. A\'hat was this before it was Ant;leV Kot Roman but ]]ritisli. Again — there was a time when JMonmouthshire, with (no doubt) some portion of the adjoining counties, was in th<; same category in respect to its non-Aw^le character with Wales. What was it in respect to language? IS'ot Koman but I^ritish. Again — mutatis mutanrl/'s. Devonshire waste Cornwall as Monmouth to AVales. Was it Koman? No — but, on the lontrarv, British. Now say, for the sake of argnnient, that Cornwall, Wales, and Cumberland were never Roman at all. and consequently, that they prove nothing in the question as to the introduc- tion of the Latin language. But can we say, for even the sake of ar>t. Guthlac would have been Komans. As the argument, then, stands at present, we have traces of the British as opposed to the Anglo, but no traces of t!ie Latin in similar opposition. Let us now look at the analof/ies, viz: Spain, (inchulitifj Portugal,) France, SAvitzerland and the Danubian Principa- lities; in all of which we have had an aboriginal population and a Roman conquest, in all of which, too, we have had a third conquest subsequent to that by Rome — even as in Britain we have had the triple series of (A) native Britain?, (b) Roman conquerors, (c) Angles. What do we iindV In all but Switzerland, remains of the original tongue; in all, without exception, remains of the language of the population that conquered the Romans; in all, without exception, something Roman. In Britain Ave find nothing Roman; but, on the contrary, only the original tongue and the language of the third po- pulation. I submit that this is strong ptimd facie evidence in favour of the Latin having never been the general language of Bri- tain. If it were so, the area of the Angle conquest must have exactly coincided with the area of the Latin language. Is this probable? I admit that it is anything but highly im- probable. The same practicable character of the English parts of Britain (as opposed to the Welsh, Cornish, and Cum- brian) which made the conquest of a certain portion of the Island easy to the Romans as against the Britons , may have made it easy for the Angles as against the Romans ; and vice versa, the impracticable character of Wales, Cornwall, and Cumberland, that protected the Britons against their first invaders, may have done the same for them against the se- cond. P so, the two areas of foreign conquest would coin- cide. I by no means undervalue this argument. It is almost unnecessary to say that the exact conditions under which Britain was reduced were not those of any other Roman Province. In rospe viii^- hegui liiiving boj. juftic'iontly attention o ilevelopod. time to ace tluencos. (lanl, w Narbonensi Koinii' of ^laujihterci the {zround lanipaigns The "con nn»^niTts ot Lan.LMiage iiiilar v.ncY{ who opposi and call it That Trj and thorou Kow, th |iri)vincos a no moans tliat the an Spain, Swi ^Yas the exi and the j\I It was suf gory with no attempt Africa v ]ire-cminer that the v sumptions native tril Atlantic is fact, that classical I country in of Latin : of trace , the whole In Panr guage of ox Tin; i.AxorAfiK or i^ANfAsrriUK, indki; thi: iio^rAx.s, 185 In respect tu Snain, the lionian occupancy was early, ba- vin};' be^uii loiifif before tliat of Nortbcrn and (Jontral (Jaul, liiivinu begun (lurinj^ tbo Punic -wars, and bavinf;- become Mifticiently settb'd by tbe time of Augustus to command tlie attention of Strabo on tbo strongtli of tbo civiHzation it bad developed. In Spain, tben, tliere was priority in point of linio to account for any extraordinary amount of Konian in- fluences. (laul, witb tbe exception of tlie earlier acquisitions in tbo Narl)onensis, was tbe conquest of one of tbe most tborougb- p)ing of conquerors. Tbe number of enemies tbat (^{csar, slaughtered bas been put at 1,000/100. Without knowing the grounds of this calculation, we may safely say that bis campaigns wore eminently of a destructive character. The conquerors of tbe Breuni , (Jenauni, and similar oc- o',',p.".'.'.+s of those parts of .Switzerland where tbe Itumonsch Language (of Latin origin) is now spoken, were men of si- milar energy. Neither l)rusus nor Tiberius spared an enemy who opposed. ])0tb were men who would *^make a solitude aiul call it peace." That Trajan's conquest of Dacia was of a similar radical and thorough-going character is nearly c(U'tain. Kow, tbe evidence that the conquests of the remaining provinces were like those of the provinces just noted, is by no moans strong. At the same time, it must be admitted that the analogy established by four sucb countries as Gaul, Spain, Switzerland, and IMoldo-AVallacbia is cogent. What was the extent to wbicb Africa, I'annonia, Illyricum, Thrace, and the Mcesias Avere Romanized? Of Asia? 1 say nothing. It was sufficiently Greek to have been in tbe same cate- gory with Greece itself, and in Greece itself we know that no attempts were made upon tbe language. Africa Avas Latin in its literature; and, at a later period, pre-eminently Latin in its Christianity. But tbe evidence that the vernacular language was Latin is nil , and the pre- sumptions un'avourable. The Berber tongue of the present native tribes of tbe whole district between Egypt and the Atlantic is certainly of higb antiquity; it being a well-known tact, that in it. several of the names in tbe geography of classical Africa are significant. Now this is spread over tbe country indifferently. Neither does it show any notable signs ot Latin intermixture. Neither is there trace, or shadow of trace, of any form of speecb of Latin origin throughout the whole of Tunis, Tripoli, Algiers or INForocco. In Pannonia and Illyricum, tbe same absence of any lan- guage of Latin origin is manifest. Pannonia and Illyricum 186 ON nii; r-ANfUAfir of irANs. Ji - have had irioro tlian an avfiraf|;o amount of subsoqiiont eon- quorors and octupants — (iotlis, Huns, Avars, iJul^aiiaiis, Sla vonians , ever m , liow- oi' tlio Servian , Ilun JiOui.siade Archi])ela_n'o. That there was a hypotliesis at the hottom of No. I is evident. Neither is there; much (louht as to the fact of that hypothesis lioiii;; ■wronj I ludd in IH4,'i that, all over Oceania, there was an (dder ])o|)n- hition of ruder manners, and darker colour than the Malays, tlu' proper Polynesians, and the populations allied to them; tiiat, in jiroportion as these latter overspread the several islands of tlicir ])resent occupancy tlie ahorigines were driven toAvards the interior; that in Australia, Tasmania, New Guinea &c. the ori;;inal hlaik race remained unmolested. This view led to two presumptions; — hotli inaccurate; 1. That the rnder trihes were, as sitch, likely to he Negrito; 2. Tliat the Negrito tongues would he allied to each otlier. The vicAv, held hy uic uoav, will he given in a future notice. ON THE NE(iKlT() LAXCillAXilX ki:ai) UKFORK TlIK I'll 1 LOLOG U'AL SOCIETY I'KHIUAUY 10, I84;<. By tlio term No<;rit(> is iiionnt tliuso tribes of t'lc Asiatic and Aii5ro. Of the Negrito localities the most western are — The Andamun Islanda. — A \'ocabulary, collected by ]^ieu- tonaut R. II. Colebrooke, a[)pears in tin; Asiatic liesearehes, vol. iv. p. 410. The native name is j\[incoj)ie. An histo- rical notice of them appeals as early as the ninth century, in the Travels of tlm Two Arabians, translated l)y Jienaudot. The Mcobar and Canticohur Is/aiids. — In the largest of those it is stated that, in the interior, blacks are to be found. The current assertion concerning- the language of the rest nf these islands is, that the Carnicobar is Peguan , and the Nicobar INIalay. — Asiatic l{((H(!archos, iii. dO'.i. i.lalacca. - - The Samangs of the interior are Negrito. For the single Vocabulary of their language, see (Jrawfurd's Indian Archi})elago, or Klaproth's Kou\ eau .Journal Asia- tique , xii. 239 , where Crawfurd's Vocabularly \f> reprinted ivithout acknowledgement. The Orang Jienua are not Ne- grito; neither are the Jokong Negrito. For thirty- words in tho latter language, see Thomas Raffles in Asiatic Researches, !^ii. 109. In this list twelve words are shown by Kafi i)G Malays, and Humboldt states the same of two more. 3tlior sixteen may or may not be of Negrito origin. ir may no ranff iJdai. Humboldt, L'ber die A'atci- othor sixteen may Samangs are the Orang ^miche. Sumalra. — The Battas of Sumatra are INlalay, not Negrito iMarsden's Sumatra, p. 203, and Rienzi's Oceanic, vol. i.). 192 ON Till-: NKdlUTO r,AN(iUAfiK.S. The Suinatran of Parkinson's Journal (p. 198) is the Arabic of Aeliecn. Tlie true Negritos of Sumatra seem to bo, 1 . The Orang Coobur). — These are stated to be pretty nu- merous between Paknibang and Janibee. — Marsden's Suma- tra, p. 35. 2. Tlie (hang (Joogoo, — who are described by the Smna- trans of Laboon as b(nng' 'nore Orang Utang than man. — IMarsdoi's Sumatra, p. '6o. Speeiuieus of the Orang Goo"Ou ((Jougon) Ilienzi states to have seen. Jle says that I'aov come from Palembang and Menangeaboo, and he calls them Pithecomorphi. For an historical notice as ea'dy as 960 A. d., probably referring to the Blacks of Sunu^.a, see Klaproih in Noii- veau Journal Asiatique, xii. 239. Borneo. — The Bi.ajuk of Born' : is not Negrito but Malay (Crawfurd's Indian Archipelago) ; neither are the Dyaeks Negrito. The statement of JVIa^sden and Leyden is, that the Dyacks are whiter than the rest of the natives of Borneo: and the remark of more than one voyager is , that the Dy- acks of Borneo look like ocuth Sea Islanders in the midst of a darker population. Are the Marut, Idongs, Tidonji,s, or Tirungs of the north of Borneo .Segrito? In Kienzi's Oceanic there is a Borneo Vocabulary which is headed Dyack, Marut and Idaan, the three terms being treated as synonyms. Of this Vocabulary all the words are J\[alay. That there are Negritos in Borneo is ir 'st probable, but of their language we possess but one word, ap n, father* (and that more than doubt- ful) ; wdiilst of their nan •> we know nothing ; and in respect to their locality, wo ha\ only the statement of Kollf, tliat in the north of Borneo L icks are to be found on the Kee- neebaloo mountain; a sta' ment, however, slightly modifieil by the fact of his calling hem Idaans or Maruts (sec Earls translation of the Voyage 3i the Doorga, p. 417). Oonipap' the name Idaan in Borne with the name Orang Udai, ap- plied to certain rude tril s in Malacca. The Sooloo hlands. — In^re are positive statements that the Sooloos cont.'.in Negritos. They also contain ]\lalays: as may be jicen in a Sooloo vocabulary in Rienzi's Oeeauic, vol. i. The Manillas. — The Isola de Negros testiiies its population by its name. Hervas calls it the Papua of the Philippines. In Panay are the blackest of the Philippine Negritos. Kienzi would term them Melanopygmaji. In liohol, Leyte and ^a- mar, there are Negritos (Lafond Lurcy, ii. 182.); also in * Mithr. i. 598. ox TIIR NEORITO LAXOUAflRS. 193 Cayagan (L.ifoid Lnrcy, ii. 1&2.); also in Capul or Abac illorvas). For 'he two main islands tliere arc, — 1st. In Mindanao, two Mild tri'ofs inhabiting the interior, the Ji.'in- t.-cliilen and the llillunas. Tiio proof of these two tribes beinp: Negrito is the strongest for the llillunas. They arc; till! Kegros del Monte of the Spaniards (liervas, (Jatalogo ilcllo Lingue: Ad(lung, i. 00 1 J. Near JMariveles are the |i:orots or -^'Etas (Agtas of Ilervas); and of these we have late and positive evidence, first to the fact of their being Negrito, and next to the difference of their language from the Tagal. — (Lafond Lurcy.) Secondly, in Luyon, the Zam- balen of Adelung are Negrito. These are the Jilacks of P.anipango. The Blacks inhabiting the other parts of the island are called Ygelots; and Mount St. Matliew, near Ma- nilla, is one of their well-known localities, and the Illoco mountains another. Here they were visited by Lafond Lurcy. They Avere all alike, and all under fV»ur feet six (French measure). Italonen, Calingas, and Maitim are the names under which the Philippine Blacks have been generally des- tribed. Agfa and Maitim are said to be indigenous appel- lations. — Hervas. Formosa. — The Formosan language is I\Ialay. In the in- terior, however, are, according to the Chinese accounts, — 1, the Thoufan; 2, the Kia-lao; .*i . the Chan tchac) chan; ■1, the Lang Khiao, — aboriginal tribes with Kegrito charac- ters, each speaking a peculiar dialect. — Klaproth, Recher- ehes Asiatiques. The Loochoo Islands. — The current Loochoo language is Japanese (Klaproth, Rech. Asiat.). But besides this, Ado- lung mentions from Pere Gaubil and Cosier, that three other languages are spoken in the interior, neither Japanese nor Chinese; and we are now, perhaps, justified in considering that, in these quarters, the fact of a language being abori- ginal, is prima facie evidence of its being Negrito. Java. — Here the evidence of an aboriginal population at all is equivocal, and that of Negrito aborigines wholly ab- sent. For the Kalangs, see Raffies's History of Java. The (lark complexions on the island 13ali show the darkness, not (if the Negrito, but of the Hindoo; such at least is the view •if KafHes opposed to that of Adelung (Mith. i.). There is 110 notice of Blacks in Fnde (otherwise Floris), in Sumbawa, or in Sandalwood Island. Savoo. — If the Savoo of modern geographers be the Pulo ^abatu of Dampier, then there Avere, in Dam])ier's time, lilacks in Savoo. The Savoo of Parkinson's Journal is Malay. Timur. — In this island Negritos Avere indicated by Peron. 13 194 ON THK NHfiUITO I,ANfii:AfiF,S. Frcycinot describes thoni. Lafond Lurey lisd a Timor l)la(k as a slave. Of tlieir language he gives I'our words: — mn- nouc, bird; viwi, woman; fima, five; a?npm, ten. All tlicvs( are iMalay.' Omhuii. — In Freyeinet's Voyage the natives of Onibay aro described as having olive-blaek complexions, flattened noses, thick lips , and long black hair. In Arago * we find a .sIkiH vocabulary, of which a few words are Malay, whilst tlir rest are unlike anything either in the neighbouring language of Timor (at least as known by JIaffles's specimens), or in any other language known to the author. Upon what gromuls, unless it be their cannibalism , the ()nd)aians have bectn clas- sed with the New Zealanders, is unknown. The evidence is certainly not taken from their language. Between Timor and iS'ew Guinea we collect, either from positive statements or by inference, that, pure or mixed. there arc Negritos in at least the following islands: — I, Wetta; 2, KissaV; 3, ServvattyV; 4, LetteV; 5, MoaV; (!, IlomaV; 1, Damma; 8, LakorV; 1), Luan; 10, Serinatta: (1, Baba; 12, Daai ; 18, Sei-ua; 14, the Eastern Arrous: IT), Borassi. (Kollfs Voy. ; Earfs Translation.) The language of the important island of Tinior-Laut is Malay. From a conversation with the sailor Forbes, wlm was on the island for sixteen years, the author learned that there are in Timor-Laut plenty of black slaves, but no black aborigines. Celebes. — In the centre of Celebes and in the north there are Negritos: the inhabitants call them Turajas, and also Arafuras: they speak a simple dialect and pass for abori},'i- lies. (Raffles, History of Java.) Of this language wo liavi' no specimen. Gaimards ]\[enada is the Menadu of Sir Stam- ford Kafttes, and Iiaffles"s Menadu is IMalay. (Voyage de I'Astrolabe, Philologie, ii. 191.) The remark made by the col- lector of this Menadu Vocabulary was, that those who spike it were ivhiler than the true Bugis, ami that they looked like South-Sea Islanders, a fact of value in a theory of the Dyacks, but of no value in the enumeration of the Negritos. J>o\irou, Gdmnwn, Salawadf/ , Jjo//c/i//f.— Vnv oa<:\i of diese islands wo have positive statements as to the (existence ot Negritos. Gilolo. — In Lesson's Natural History the inhabitans of *'i- l(do are classed with those of CJammen, J5attenta, t^c. as Negritos. The same is the case in the jMithridates, whore the inference is, that in all the ^Moluccas, with the exccp- * \ "ule Note A. ON THE XKdIUTO LANdUAfiRS. 105 iriKtr-Laut is i'or aboriiri- of kSir Stain- liiiiii of Aniboyna and Tornati , Ke<^ritos are to be found in tlio interior. I'or Guebe see the s(!qiiel. The Teclees. — Tlic Teetce Islands of IMearcs, the .Tauts lorAeauw of the jVlithridatcs, sixteen in number, are Negrito. (Mean-'s, Voyage, Adclung.) ^)hij. — According to Adelung this island is Negrito. The object of Avhat has gone before is less to state wliere Ni'oi'itos are to be found than where they are to be looked Ifiir. Ilenee many of the above notices indicate the probable rather than the actual presence of them; and those state- iiitnts concerning the j\Iolucca localities that nre taken from ?\jtematic books (and as such at secondhand) are all subject t'l one exception, viz. the fact that the tribes described as Ariifura, although in current language Negrito, are not ne- cessarily so. An instance of this has been seen in the so- lallod Arafura of j\Ienadu. The same applies to the so-called Ariifiua of Coram , (Handbook der Land-en Volkenkunde van NiHlerlandsch Indiii. P. P. Roorda van Eysinga. Amster- dam 1841 ; indicated by Mr. Garnett,) which is Malay. In tlie quarters about to be given in detail the evidence is less ixceptionable. Sew Guinea. — ITero there is little except Negritos; and lieie we meet with tlie name Papua. Wliat is said of the Papuas must be said with caution. Physical conformation leiiig the evidence, there are in New Guinea two nations, if not more than two: — I . Those of the North, with curly hair, which are subdivided into the pure Papuas , and the Papuas that are looked upon as a cross with the IMalay (Quoy, Gai- inard and Lesson in the French Voyages). 2. Those of the South, with lank hair, called by the French naturalists Ara- turas. The author was unable to determine who were n.cant liy the Alfakis of Quoy (I)urville's Voyage, iv. 740). To the language of these Alfakis are possibly referable the ten words of Lesson. These are the numerals, and, they areas miulit b(! expected, ]\[alay. For the Soutii of New Guinea we not so much as a single vocabulary or a single word. Wiiiyioo. — The Waigioo and New Guinea liave been fre- '(iicntly confounded; avo have therefore deferred speaking of tho latter until we could also deal with the former. Without ';m^ into the conflicting evidence, we may state that there I'll! two Vocabularies wherein arm is kai)iatii, and three wherein arm is hramine. ( )f the first division we have — h^t, the Vocabularies of the Uranie and Physici(!nne Cor- vettes, under Freycinet, in 1817, 1818, 1819, as given in Arao'o's (the drauglitsinan's) Narrative, p. 275, English trans- liitifin; and 2ndly, the Undetermined Vocabulary of Den- l.'i* 190 ON riii; NKdiiiTf) K.\Niow this hiiiguage is the Waii; IIKM of Arago whilst the Waigioo of Dentreeasteaux is the IV piia ot Arago. Among the Vocabularies of the second clibl wo have (iaimards Kawak Vocabulary, stated ospeciallvf (Voyage de I'Astrolabe, IMiilologie, vol. ii. p. [.').'{.) to havohiiiil colhicted at Kawak in Waigioo in IS) 8: here (inn is hramini:] Now a vocabulary (that will soon be mentioned) of the Xcwl Guinea Papuan of Port Dorey was collected during the oxf pcdition of the Astrolabe by the same naturalist, .Al. (iail mard. With this vocabulary Gaimard's Kawak coinoido, rather than with Arago's Waigioo and Dentrecasteauxs Uii determined Vocabulary. This nuikes the third vocal)iilarv| for these islands. The fourtli is Gaimard's Poi't Dorey Vu cabulary (Voyage do I'Astrolabe, Philologie, ii. 14().). TIkI fifth, Dentrecasteauxs (or La Hillardiere) Waigioo Vocakl lary. This represents the same language as those last-inoii- tioned, inasnuich as in it (irm is hramine not Lapiani. Tin- sixth vocabulary is the Utanata, from Dutch authorities (viilc ►Soc). This akin to the Lobo Vocabulary. -I 'Y rans. (ireogr. Ibid. The next is Forest's Vocabulary. See Forest's Voyage to Now Guinea. Such are the data for New Guinea an.l Waigioo. Dalrymple's Vocabulary will be noticed in tliej sequel. (Jik'Im'. — The Guebe Vocabulary of the Astrolabe (Pliila- logic, ii. 157) is the Guebe of Freycinet's Voyage in ISh, when it was collected by Gaimard. The Guebe of Araffol (under Freycinet) also approaches the Guebe of CJaiinanl. According to D. Durville the Guebe is Papuan. The autJH'r however considers it ]\Ialay, though there was some rcscm-l blance to tlie Papuan, inasnuich as many jSIalay terms were common to both these dialects. From New Guinea westward and southward the No<]fritos| no longer isolated. are rhe following are Negrito Islands, or Negrito Archipelagos: — 1. New Britain; 2. New Hanover; Ii. New Ireland; 4. .So- lomon's Islands; 5. Queen Charlotte's A ;'chipelago; G. boiii- siade Archipelago; 7. Isles of Bougainville; 8. Bouka; 'J. New Georgia; 10. Admirality Isles, — York, Sandwich. Port- land ; 11. Santa Cruz Archipelago ; 1 2. Arsacidos ; 1 3. Espi- ritu Santo, or New Hebrides, — Mallieollo, Erromango, TaniKi. Erronan, Annatom; 14. New Caledonia; 15. Warouka, Blidi- * >Sec Note B. <»N TIIK NI'JilM'IO l,AN(iU.\(iK.S. 197 land Banks's Island. — Astrolabe. Tlio Ticopian is not Nc- jito but Polynesian. — Voyage do I'Astrolabe. [Fiji hlonih. — In tlie Fiji Islands the physical character the natives is half Negrito and half Polynesian. Here Ji> tlie Mcgrito limit to the east; that is, of Negrito tribes |a> existing at the present moment. The languages of the list just given are known to us iirnugli the following Vocabularies. ]'i'if In'lffnd iSic. — (iainiard's Carteret Harbour Vocabulary. I- Voyage de 1 Astrolabe, I'hilologie, ii. 143. Durvilles Port Praslin Vocabulary, incorporated with iGaimard's Carteret Bay Vocabulary. — Ibid. Dalrymple's so-called New Guinea Vocabulary. The word hi-cttlk'ti was used because, unless there were natives of |No\v Ireland on the coast of Ncav Guinea, Dalrymple's Vo- cabulary is a representative of the Papuan. It coincides Iwith those of Durville and Gaimard from New Ireland: it livas collected by Schouten and Le j\Iaire. It is also the iMw Guinea of I)e Brosses. Vocabularies of four small islands are given by Dalrymple laiul De Brosses, via. of jMoses Island, JVIoa, Iloorn Island, lanil Cores Island. These are the vocabularies of Reland Diss, xi.), referred to by Adelung. Miiidcolo. — In Queen Charlotte's Archipelago, or perhaps laiiiung the Solomon Islands, lies an island in name resem- ilin;,' one of the New Hebrides. Durville called it Vanikoro, Ikt Captain Dillon assures me that the true name is Mani- Icolo. C)f the langiiage spoken hero we have a vocabulary Itollected by Gaimard in three dialects; the Vanikoro, the iTanema, and the Taneanou. Voyage do I'Astrolabe, Philo- )?ii^ ii. 1G4. Mtillicollo. — Cook's Island is MallicoUo. A glossary occurs lin Cook's Voyages. Tdiuiti. — A single vocabulary in Cook's Voyages. V(7)' Caledonia. — A short vocabulary in Cook. A longer lone ill Dentrecasteaux and La Billardiere. IH" the Fiji we have a few words by Cook, a long voca- Ikilary by (Jaimard (Astrol. Phil. ii. 136), Port regulations, land MS. Scripture translations, Avhich afford us full and iHitticient samples of the language. To deal with this as |N('!:rito the Polynesian element must be eliminated. I In the way of Fthnography Madagascar is Asiatic; since |its language , as lias been known since the time of Reland, is Malay. For this island the evidence of physical charac- ItcT gives two or more races, but the evidence of language |"nlv one. 198 ON TlIK NrMMlITO K AN(li;A(!i:S. AuslruUa. — In this island we have vocabularies for tlJ foUowinfi^ localities: (1.) Murray Island; (2.) Caledon iJavj (3. 4.) Endeavour liiver; (5.) the Burrah P>urrali tribe; ((],! Limestone Creek; (7.) Port JMacquarie; (S.) Port Jackson; (D.) Meriero Downs; (10.) Jervis Bay; (II.) Hunter's lljvfi vide Threlkeld's (Jranunar; (12, 13, 14, 15.) Adelaide, J one of these beinf^- Teichelmann's and Schiinnann's (Iram- niar; (10.) (Julf St. Vincent; (17, 18, P.), 20.) Kino- (Icor-cs Sound; (22.) Grey's Vocabulary; and a few others. Van Jj/cmen's Land. — Here, as in Australia, everytiiinf;' js Negrito. In the way of Vocabularies, we have for the North, — (1.) Gaimard's Port Dalrymple Vocabulary, takon down from the mouth of a Van iJiemen's Land woman at King George's Sound, with an P^nglishman as an interprcti r — Voy. Astr. Phil. ii. \). In the South we have (2.) Cooks Vocabulary, collected in Adventure P>ay, S. K. of Van Dii- men's Land, — nine words. (3.) Dentrecasteaux's, or La Billardiere's Vocabulary. (4.) Allan Cunningham's Vocalm- lary, collected in 18l'J at Entrance Island. (5.) Dr. Lhot^ ky's Vocabulary, derived from Mr. M'Geary, and represent- ing the language of Hobart's Town. — Journ. Geo. 8oc. ix, Besides these, there is a Vocabulary procured by ]\Ir. Ro- bert Brown when in Australia. It nearly represents the saiin; state of language as Dentrecasteaux's Vocabulary. Besides those remarks, another class of facts should be indicated. In the south of Japan, and in the Marianne Islo;, there are statements that Blacks Itave been: — 'Pere Cantova (in Dupcrrey and Freycinet), and Adelung (Mithr. i.). From Rienzi also wo learn a statement of Liitke's, viz. that in Pounipet, one of the Carolines, there are abundaine nf Blacks at this moment. These may by indigenous. The hy- pothetical presence of Negritos may account also for certain peculiarities of the Polynesian of the Tonga Islands. Then; arc traces of them in the Navigator's Archipelago. Croz't (see Pritchard's Phys. Hist.) mentions Negritos in Now Zea- land, and Cook speaks to a tradition of aboriginal Kegrito> in Tahiti. Such are the notices of the Oceanic Negritos in respect to their distribution and the amount of evidence afforded hv the specimens of their language. The current opinion is. that over a certain area Blacks of a certain race or races were aborigines. This o})inion there is no reason to distuih or to refine upon; the general question is as to the unity or the multiplicity of these races ; but the more specific oh- ject of the present paper is to ascertain how far that qii'^s- tion is decided by the comparison of their languages, llic ox I'liK M:(;iai'o i,.\N(ii'A(;i;s. 199 )Uf^. The Iiv- .;,t', wiiy is to ascend in tlio classification, and to bo^in with (litiTiniiiin*,^ tlie uniforniity of spoocli over limited areas, and ,vi(liin natnral boundaries. The most convenient locality to Iruin with is — Sew (liiinca. — That four out of the seven New Guinea Wnbuiaries (supposinj;- them to have been collected inde- i('ii(lontly of each other) represent either dialects of one iin;iiiiif2;e, or else lanf,niaf2;es closely allied, appears on the til-fit comparison. These vocabularies are, — a) Oaimard's l!;i\vak; b) Gaimard's Port Dorey; c) Arago's Papua; and ii\ Dentrecasteaux's Waift'ioo. To these Forest's Vocabulary itupposing always that his words have not been incorpora- ted in the vocabularies that came after him) approaches more closely than to the other two. ENfU-isii. FoRKST. Dkntrecahtkaix, &c. fish ecu iom''., Malfii/? bird inoorsankoou mazankehcne. }Han sononinan snone, Mnlaijf tvoman binu \A6n6 , fllalai/ ? fire for afor. ivaler war owar, Malay 'f sand yean ione. house rome roinua, Malay? hook sofydino sarfedinne. sun rass riass. i If tlic two remaining Nocabularies the Lobo comes nearer to Forest tlian the Utanata does. Neither, however, coincide with Forest, as Forest coincides with the first four: nor yet do they coincide so closely with each other. ENor.isn. Forkst. Loro. arrow ckay larakai. bird moorsankeen mannc. hog ben ])0(n , Malay :■' island meossy nusii. sun rass orak. Iree kaibus akajuakar. tvoman binu inaAvnnia, tvater Avar malar. yes io oro. Kncmsm. Forest. IItan.vta. bow niyay anmre. / iya area. slave omini manoki. 3Ialay ? 200 ON Tin; NKiiiiii'o L.v.N(ir.V(ii;«. Knolish. Fokkht. tree kaibns .... walcr Avnr yes io Utanata. kai , wood. warani, Malay 't aioa. Again: 1 'tan ATA. baKin ]tif;-ani checks awanm dcalh iiamata drink (lo) nrnmka erening jauw aro;1 eyes manui feathers wicj^ii (jreat napittcki hands too inaro hog 00 handsome nata here aro head oopaiiw iron ])uniti knife tai lemons nnmda mile rniniiti long marawas lay (lo) aikai man marowanc moulh irio noon kamoti aroa plate pigani rain komak river Avaiari iiapotoki rope Avarauw sago kinaiii slave maiioki seek inatigati speak (lo) iwari take atvay (to) namatoraui Loiio. I)iiip,au. waiiwiriougo. naniata , Malay ? makiiiu, ami also eat. nrwawa. inatatongo, Malay f wo oni , M(day 'f uahittoki. iiiiiiango iita, Malay? booi, Malay? naiigowic. inairi. iiimin. wui'usosi. toori,/or chopping. imiuda. notie. niaraAvas. kookoimanse. marowaiio. oriongo. ool'toto, evening. ])ii'iug. komak. walar uabotik, water great, war as. kakana. mooi. namitik. iwav. motara. Netv Ireland. — As far as wo have vocabularies for evi- dence, tlie language of New Ireland is one. ExoT.isH. Port Praslin. Cartkrkt Bay. Dalrymplk. beard katisscndi kambissek incambosiser, A/. arms limak pongliman, M. bananas oiinn tacliouner, M. O.N riii; NKMiiio i,A\ lanciaukis. tlio voc'iibiil.'irics g(!n('rally of I'ort Jackson, and tlio parts south and cast of Port Jackson: — l^^yt', mcul, K. Jl,; tnillK , L. ('.; noso , cnuirfht , K. 11.; murrn, Ji. C: ears, mnlkuh, V.. \\.\ molio, V. ]\liic(|UMri»!: liuir, minye, K. J{.; ittiimltih, 15. ]',.; breast, roi/or, vl. Iv. ; l,, Jervis's liay; wolliik , Tort JMaquario. Tlic number of words sulrnitted to comparison was twonty-twn. Menero Downs (IJiotsky), and Adelaide ((}. W. Earl).— Thirteen words in common, whereof two coincide. hand niovanj^an, M. D murra, Add. loufjuc talang, taling. Adelaide (G. W. Earl) and Gulf St. Vincent (Astrolab (!l. heard ear .... foot .... hair.... hand leg .... nose.... teeth nmtta, A molda, G. S. V. iri, iouro , tinna, tonna, yxika, ioiika, niurrah, nialla , irako, iorko, nulla, mudla, tial, ta. Gulf St. Vincent (Astrolabe) and King George's Sound (Nind and Astrolabe); fifty words in common. wood kalla, G. S. V kokol, K. G. S. mouth ta , taa, hair iouka, tchao, ncrk mannouolt, wolt, finger inalla, water kawo, tongue taloiu, foot tenna, sto7ic poure, mal , kc'pe, talen , tcl len, pore, laugh kanghin, kaoner. (2.) The vocabularies of distant points coincide; out of sixty words in common we have eight coincident. English. forehead . man Jkuvis'h I?ay. Gulf St. Vincent. liolo iouUo. mika meio. (IS rili; NK(ilUT<> l-AN(ilA(iK.S. 203 ni , Mt'iicro Knui.isii. Jkuvis's IIav. (iri.i" St. \'in( k.nt. mil/c awrtuliMiii aiumonlialn. tongue talcn taloin. hand luaraiiialc uialla. tiipplc ainy;uaun amiiia. blnrk inourak jxiuillolil. tiails boi't'uou pcrc. (:j.) Thn most isolated of the vocabularies, e. g. tlie Car- iciitarian, if compared witii the rcMuaininj,^ vocabulurit^s, tu- ("11 as a whole, lias certain Avords to be found in different and distant parts of the island. i;' CaKI'KN lAltlAN. mail iiiilla, Kn(ii,i ill. Cf/r mail iiiilla, L. (\ nose jlmrroo iiiorro, L. (!. The followinfj;- is a notice of certain words coincidin'g, thonuh taken from dialects far separatiul: heard yernka, Add. lips tand)and)a, Men. D tamando, fr. S. V. star ji"K') ditto tehiudai, K. (1. S. fttrehcail ullo, ditto i(»ullo, G. 8. V. ''»^"^'''' 1 K. G. S. nanga, ) bite paiandi, ditto badjoon, fire gaadla, ditto kaal, heart karlto, ditto koort, sun tindo, tooth , tia, edge ditto djaat, ditto dowal, ditto, ditto, ditto, ditto. ditto. mater kaiiAve, ditto kowAvin, stone pure, ditto boyo, ditto, ditto. In the way of grammatical inflection we find indications •if the same unity. We find also differences upon which we pliould be careful against laying too much stress. The in- flection of the number is an instance of the difference. In South Australian — linyara, a boy; linyarurla, two boys; li- nijar-anna , boys. In Western Australia — yuffo, a woman; tjago-iinm , women; (joulanr/, a child; (joolatig-gurruh, children {giiira, many); doorda, a dog; duorda-guodjal, two dogs; doorda boula, many dogs {boula, many). Here there is a difference where we generally find agreement, viz. in the iiitloctional (or qviasi-inflectional) expression of the numbers. The difference, however, is less real than apparent. The Australian is one of those languages (so valuable in general pliilology) where we find inflections in the act of forming, 204 ON rili; NKdUiro l,.VN(iLAiiKS. and tliiit from tin; ;i;i'^hilination not of affixcH, suffixes and jirctixcs, Imt of Avoids, In other terms, iiiHeeti(»ii is (,'V(i|- viu^' itself out of eompowition. Tiio true vifnv tli(;ii of dif- foreiit forms for tlio samo idea is not tli.'it the intleetious are unlike, but that the (juasi-inHectional ('ireumh)eutions ditVer from each other in dilferent re uubero..: naiinnurnu'k. Jtose niuidje uni}:;id iiuiij^ui ineoun. J car koidgl cu(n»gi-lia c'ueguina vaigui ouagui gonnroek. Lliotsky's Voeabulary stands more alone. With the V^oea- bulary of 1803 and Dentreeasteaux's Voeabulary, it lias hut three (Or two) eoineidenees : - — tongue, f/i/'nn Lh.; mcHC, \oc. of 1803: water, luf/una, Lh.; iki, Vov. 1803: drink, liif/aiia, Lh.; laina , Voc. 1803. With Allan (Cunningham's Voeabu- lary it has fourteen words in common and three coincident: — nose, ?nhi(:ran(/, Lh.; mcomi , A. ('. : tongue, mina, Lh.; mim, A. C. : lire, lopr, Lh.; lupv. A. (J. lirown and Cun- ningham coincide a little more than Cunningham and Lhotsky. It is perhaps safe to say, that for the {South of Van Die- men's Land the language, as represented b^, its vocabula- ries, is radically one. Van Dicmcn's Lund, North. — In Lhotsky's Vocabulary seven "words are marked W, four E, .'md one !S, as being pecu- liar to the western , eastern and southern parts of the island. One of the four words marked E is found in the Port D;d- ryinplc N'^ocabulary, being the only word common to the two, e. g, wood, tnnmanara, E.; moumra. Port Dalrymple. The coincidence of the North and South is as follows: — English. Port Daluymplk. Lhotsky. car tiboratie pitserata. eye elpina lepina. leg langna langana, fool. harvti gan licnen henen ingenana. posteriors wabrodc wabrede. ^■0111 J Prei f>N TMi; NKdUITO l..\N(ir\r mu^iil. slitnc It'iin parent' loiiic. Imtl/i iaiic raiian. iinnn rcgoulu rilia. About tliirtv-iiv(! words two. coimiion to Lliotsky and the N'ocabuliirios of IJrown and I)(!ntr('i'jisteiinx. From tlio tori'- i;oiii}^' obsorvutioiiH wo may conclude that tor the wlioh; ot" Van Diemen's l^and (as far as represented by the; Nocabii- hu'ies) th(! languag-e is radically out;. 8uch are the groups as s[)read over limitcnl areas and con- fiiu'd within natural boundaries. The affinity of speech be- tween difTcrent islands is another (piestion. Preliminary to this we must eliminate the Malay from the Nej;rito. The full knowledge that this has been done im- perfectly invalidates all that we have arrived at; so that, once for all, it may be stated, that what is assorted re- specting the amount of words common to two localities is asserted subject to the condition of their being true Negrito and not Malay. Andaman and Samang. — F(!W words in common; one coin- cident, and that borrowed in all probability^ from a third language. AV//' Guinea and Wahjioo. — By Waigioo is meant the \Vai- {,'ioo of Arago, and the IJndt^termined Vocabulary of Den- tvecastoaux. They have about forty words in common, and the following- are coincident: — ExcMsu. WAKiiDoV Xi:\v (JiinkaV hand cocani, I) ktnief. Ixibj sgiiani, A sueouar. cheek gangn foni, A gaiafoe. breast niansoii, A soussou. eyes tagueni, \) tadeni. eyelids inekaruei, A karucou. fifot courgnai, A ockourae, //tW. 206 ox TIIR NEOUirO LAXfilAflRS. Knomsii, WahiiooV Nkw Guinea? '?'''• clap, A ap, afor. Iiinr .sfiiioumcbouran, A .sonobralienc. knee capugi, A ono-poucr. ri'5. ear auris ovq. eat cdo sad-ico. fish piscis tx&v^. fool kaingo balan kckc pes ttovc. finger uiinango sori lima digitus dny.rv\o:, fire ignis nvf). great magnus ^tiyag. ON THK NKOKITO LANCU; AdKS. 207 ESOMSH. UtA\. Lf>I). hnir hiiiiil hull l)ooi bouri head oopanw ]»oukl()iik kiii'C .... 1'. 1'. AM) C. 15. Latin. Gkkkk. . crini.s ^Qti- , luaiui.s J^fM?- , jMucus X^^9^?- cajnit Ke(p(xXrj. mnllllt moon . iicrk . wisc . HO , . . , j tanKoulonkckciuli) ' ,. kairiffo-woko ^ . . J •jronu vow. ° f pougaigi ;" f».S (TTO,««. luna Ofktpnj. oolluiu xQttxtjkog. na.sus Qi'^. lum ov. ml napotiai'o tara rubor igv^Qog. run ciirro T()fj;a>. su(i(ir-caiie liiiifjur karioiigo kermoa lingua yAcoffcrnf. Ihiflli f(Mnur fujoog. leel/i (lens odovg. ( inalar ) , "? ivali'r { \ inaloniu acuta vowg. I MJiran ) ^ ^ yes.. , oro .10 inu). .vaixi^. Witli thirty-seven words in common, tlie two Negrito lan- guages have seventeen coincident; with thirty-seven words in common, the two classical languages have nine coinci- dent. The evidence, thorel'ore, of the affinity of the Pa- pua and New Ireland is stronger than of tiie Latin and Greek, as determined from identical data. New Irelaiul and Manicoh. — The Port-Fraslin and Carteret Bay Vocabularies being dealt with as one for New Ireland, and the three dialects being treated as one for IManicolo, we have, out of twenty-eight words in common, the following coineiding: — yes, io, P. P.; ?o, C. B. ; in, Manic: eye, mala, P.P.; malak, C. B.; mala, maleo, malaea, ]\[an., Mai.: banana, mnn, C. Ji.; puunha, oimra, oanro, Man., AJal.: canoe, koiian, C. 1^.; naoure, f/o/'a, koure, Manic, Mai.: tooth, nitiisnai , P. P. ; mv/i", 0. B. ; indje, Tancan: testes, piwn. P. P.; bona hiniinini, bona ini, Man.: beard, karn-bisack. C. P). {incani brsser, n.ih'.); oungoumie , vingoumie , ^Fan., Mah: breast, boruick.,C y>-'iher('nhenhajn, JVIan.; ear, patalignai, P. P.; prak-n, C B.; manhnlenhi. Manic; hair, n/hougc, 1).; anaoko, Man. Manicalo and jValltrollo. — Ki'j:;\\tQeu words in conunon, the following coincident: — Bread-fruit. balo(\ Man.; barabe, i\lall.: cocoa-nut, venourc, Man.; naroo, ]\lall.: eye, inalaco, i\Ian.; mitd/ig, ]\lall., Mat,: cay, lagnaiiii, Man.: la'Ungan, jMall., Mai.: ^^r(\, fficnouka, Man.; tnocro, Mall., MaL: head, batclta, Man.; 208 ON Tin: XIOdKITO T. ^NOlAfiKS. haaaine, IMall.: ho^-, hoi hoi, Man. 5 hrrooas, IVlall., MaL: m, tae ^ Man.; taep ,lS\ii\\.\ water, uiiine^ Man.; ergour ^ JMall.: drink, kanou , niinou , Man.; nuonc, MaW. MalticoUo and Tanna. — Sixteen words in common: — co- coa-nuts, naroo, Mall.; iiahooij, Tann.: drink, noaei', iMalL; iiooec, Tann., MaL: eye, maitang, JVlall.; imrnee inaivk , Tanii.. M(il.: Qiirs, ta/ingan, IMall.; feenevnguk, Tann., iStaL: bird, w;^- eroo, Mall.; manoo^ Tann., Mul.: lio<;', hrrooas, ^lall.; booija$^ Tann., Mai.: navel, nctnprlong , jVlall.; nnpccrainguk, Tann.: teeth, rci'hohn, warrenmk, ^Fall.; raihuk, Tann.; water, cn/oiir. Mall.; luimawarain , Tann.: woman, rahin, JNIall.; nuibraan, Tann., Mat. Tanna and MalticoUo (taken together) and Netv Caledimia. — Neither with Mallicollo or Tanna alone, nor with j\Jalli- collo and Tanna taken together, as compared with New Ca- ledonia, do we find more words coincident than the follow- ing: — Cocoa-nut, naroo, INT.; nahooy , T. ; neeoo, N. Cal., Mai.: drink, noaee , IVf. ; nooee , T. ; oondoo, N. Cal.: head, noogivanaivm , T. ; garmoin (Cook), vangne, (L. B.), N. Cal.: yams, oofe^ Tann.; oohc, N. Cal., Mai.: yes, eeo, Tann.; e/o, N. Cal.: no, taei)., Mall.; 7ida, N. Cal. Next in order comes the comparison between the Vocabu- laries of Van Diemen's Land and South Australia. Port Dalrytnple and King Georges Sound [Nind and Astrol.]: — Wound, harana, P. D. ; Ifareitk, N. : wood, moumbra, \\ D. ; pourn, N. : hair, kide, P. D.; kaaf, N. : thigh, deyagkL P. D.; tawal, N. : kangaroo, taramei., P. D.; taamour, N.: lips, mona , P. D. ; mele, K. G. S.: no, poidie, P. 1).; pMiali, poorl, K. G. S. : egg, komeka, P. D.; kierkee, K. G. S. : bono. pnale, P. D. ; nouU , K. G. S. (bone of bird used to suck up water) N.: skin, kidna, P. D.; kiao? K. G. S.: two kateboiievc. P. D.; kadjcn, K. G. S. (N.). Fiftj'-six words in common. Port Datnjmple and Giilf St. Vincent. — INEouth, mona,Y. D. ; tamonde, G. S. V. (a compound word, since taa is montli, in K. G. S.): drink, kihle. P. D. ; kaive, G. S. V.: arm, annw, P. D.; aondo (also shoulder), G. S. V.: hawk, gan hcncn henen, P. D.; nanno, G. S. V.: hunger, tigate, P. D.; lahion. G. S. v.: head, eloura: P. D. ; ioullo , G. S. V.: nose, mc- doner*, P. D., tnodla, G. S. V.: bird, iola, pallo, G. S. V.: stone, lenn parenne, P. 1). ; poure? G. S. V.: foot, dogtai, !'• D.; lenna, G. IS. V.: sun, teg our a** , P. D. ; tendo, G. S. \. Seventy words in common. Port Dalrijmple and Jervis's Bay. — Wound, harana, P. l^-; karanra, J. B. : tooth, iane, P. I).; ?m, J. B.: skin, kidmi- * Mula. ** Also Moon. o\ Tin; M:(iuiT() lanoiaciks. 209 r. D.; h(i{/ctno, J. Vu: foot, (hnjnii, P. D. ; lona"^-, J. B.: liead, chmii, 1*. I-).; A0//0, J. ]}. Fitty-f'om- words in ('(»iinnoii. What follows is a notice ot" some niiscellanoous coincidences be- twi'on tlio Van Dienien's I^and and tlio Australian, Isin.isn. Van Dikmkn's Land. Ai'.stkai.ia. w.s- cuongilia, IHO.'i j^uuduj-cli , Men. I). Ik'ujh tida,Lli dara, Men. 1). i^Umc... Ad. ( l)lU-0 , .\(1.M. I . /vopslv.(J. S. 1 loimpairnclM). hmtsl piiuMiana, Lli voyciic, ^Mcn. I). kidna, 1*. D makundo, Tcicludiuaii. in(>gva, Lh nanycii, ]\rcn. J). inella, Lh luoini, ^Icii. D. f>'H porvp, 1). (] hirrcf. IMi' bodoucvoucd, ]*. J) bad(h)ccn, (Jrcy. fkin run. lip luona, ]*. D taniciK* (iijiprr li/i) , ditto. koiuoka, ]*. D. inuka, I'f/r/, a/ii/lhi/if/ nn(/i kamc {inoiif/i.,,}. li [cru. ronya, I). C tcgoura, ]*. 1) kakirra, I'eichohuaii. , 1,1V I laudla, ditto. incdoiicr, r. 1) , ' ,, / moolya, Urcy. gan lu'Hcu ht'iKMi, ]*. D. garg-yro , ditto. toyate, P. J) taityo, Tcichohnan. pigiie, 1-*. D niengk, Grey. vena, 18;^j ycnuadah, I'. J. incgTa, 1835 karinarroo, ditto. niio, 1803 y«'i'o» ditto. inangludcua, rain nHMnuciiiooh)ng'. inoyhicka, Murray , P. 1). hado, ditto, hicka , Oariicntarian. 'Such is the siniihirity anionf>st the Noiirito hM\i;uati,es, as '^^kcn in tlieir m . iluij fur.. . Tjiiun', titlna, jeeua. f Generally toe-nail. 14 210 0\ Tlin NRfiRTTO LAXOrAi'iF.R. Mai. Land. But it is far from following- that, becauso lan^fiiafrrs will form groups when taken in geographical succossidn, they will also form groups when the sequence or succossidn shall be interrupted. Tested by anotlier method there is an affinity as follows : Enomsii. Manicolo. Nkw Gitinka. arms ino, uirnini, niaini iiiinaugo, L., Mai. belly tchan-hane, tchaono{ . » ' hntv ore aiimrc, Ut. , . , • ( m.akinn , 1j. ) drink canon { . . > I qnmcnno, A. ) nje mala, matco inaiiic, II,; Tiiatatonj^o, V,, Mni. SH?i ouloia jiniw, U. tongue inia, iiiiinoaeo inarc, Ut. . . ( mawiua, L. | ,. , woman vonnne, vmnivi \ . \ \ Mai. yes io aroa, IT., oro, L. . . ( kaiiik, kanauic, A.) ,, , ear taij-naiui, rai'TiOii'Tn < , , . ^,- Mai. ^ 7 rs o J tantougni, vv. ' (ish ano, guiono iono, A., Mai. nose n-holc nony, A. J ouara. A., Mai. ■( war, F. lecih ongno oualini, analini, W. shouhlcrs outaUui-buicn-liano ponpouui, IFaig. Engmsu. New Caledonia. Nkw Tukland. ant kinki akan, 1'. P. tooth inoiian insik, 0. B., Mai. birth manou mano, C. ]i., Mol. cheeks poanguo paring, 1). eyebrows poutchic-haiigliic poiili-matandi, 1'. V. fire ali, luopp bia. kokoign , 1). balankcko , C. P. knees bangucliglia pougaigi, ]*. J'. tongue coubniciglui , cuunican kcrmca. moon ndau kalan , P. P. tealk ouanciii inau. rain oda ous, D., Mai. nose mandcc nibousscni , V. P. sleep kiugo licim, 1^. black ... sun water ouiro foot bakationguc guiaui. niaugat naas, J). X.. 0\ THE NKCiKlTO I.ANf;i;A(iF,S. 211 r.xoT.isit. Nkw Cai.khonia. Ni;\v Ihklanh. imn'l padHH-bonri^'iic, painborjin ]»ont.i, 1*. J'., Mai ii'ii ir'rp n KxcLisii. Ni;\v Camouoxia. AfAXicoLo. U7r donuli.'i (Hculianc dicno. mr gucMiiug ra_^u('n<,'<). timiil ka})ai'('ick kapai. iii'dil bauguo hatclia. iimii mauoc iiiclc. III! nda taic. ( quionboiglia bona. '/ yabingiie boucnini. iniirr oo ouiro , Mai. deiio (bin (/rater), J)., Mai. ngot ignok, C li. Iralcs ,Ni:i,isii. fur /I'.v/i Nkw Calkdoxia, J). C Waigioo, I). C, &c. gnoning gnonani. ii icanno, Mai. lilt intp n aualinc', Undot('nnindod,l).(J. Notwitbstanding doubtful words certain, it sceins tliat tliero is evidence of the most unlike of the languages be- tween Waigioo and New Caledonia (inclusive) being not more unlike than the most dissimilar of the Indo-European tunnies. That this statement may be enlarged seems pro- bable by the following parallels: — />r/ porro , V. D. L. (^ t' / .,\ \ \ ifotiran, C. B. \ porolia [nails), do.) ^ I 1 • TT i» I ffan":ai»ouni , Jf atn. ''nrd kongmc, V. \). L l^ ir / * ' ( yenga , Mai. niouta, V, 1). L nianouk, 3[al. kaniucna, V. D. L ganibajjo, M'aifj. moul, Aiistr niatta, Pap. and Mai. hinl liiin 'II''- Mh. [iii'chead.. md iniiiil Iri'i' ... canan ianc yano ,r TV X igani, mouth, Wtiki., 1). ^' ^' ^' Mnsik, teeth, P. \\, Mai. ii'iir Sim.. skr (III'.., caberra, Port Jai'kson kabrani, IVauj. guno, V. ]). L. coon, yean. gui, V. D. L. kaibus, /V/jo. and Mai. 1^ 1 1 Australia nibouge, New Tr. ( roukai " ..,] ij ........../ ^Ynj^j^j.j^ij,^ niangat, N. C .. tcluudai ) . ■= ' koygo, V. IJ. L gaainong, N. C. 14* 212 OS riii: Ni:(!iUT(^ r,AN(ii;A.(., I..I1 moiifh niotigtii wjiiif^'uc aiul )ii()iuuigui;i,i arm Iiouana , j^'ouuii pinguc. s/inu/tli'rs 1 1 ' " ^i houlu'ij'lia. I ba-ny) ^ « /ire iiiiha aii, hi('j>|», nap, Mnl. j raiigalia/ ' rouya i (lead inata iiiackic. wo lUMuli uola. ears cxicgni-lia i»iiii iiigui'. ) |»('ii(puiijj;lia. ' [)aou wan<;'U('. fiiif/rrs bcguia hadoiilioif^'ha. ?iosr moiigiii inandoe, vaiidiiij^-. l)an*f;^^ Si"^ 5" a ■» »-"a "yo-o-a 5 ?-5.;?' c a a S 2f SL! © rt. .'^ *• *- a ? 3 *■ 5 ^ S o oo 2 o t -; f^ a 5 a- '^ <* o 'c5 =* =• ;i S a a '^ *«*. "^ -^ >1 :■ t z* 3:!^a-33= >i- i •^ p 2 -no J 3 3 5' - c .;■ c •; = i. 2 S ; 2 p : 2 a" 3 : 9r » TT S fB •D ?i » . » cr — . .- p (It pa ^.» ; ^ O TT ;s « < q re =■ o s o '^^rre ?r3 3 ?r?r ?^= = «~5'»^-S"X '15 I r'- ^ - ?; 3 i?' s ~. ~ so ^ ?r s o iK O 3 cr? 3 "? 2 * = s =^ ■O "3 93 V o p 2 n> »= ra — "^ x* "• 5^ - era C-T3 o ?r ■3 & o £ - ~' " '" J3 5= 2 ~ =. c = ■" = - 5- p y 3 -r 3 1 5_ 3 2 , 5 3 ■< -* a" l; r ? 3 3 'r. O 3 3 2 ■5 3 3 !->■ o ?r O «J 3 5' r 2 is 3' -1 \ 3 3_ 3 1* 3 3 J 3s : S3 c 3 2- 5 s a "> > c P3 a -S. c -^ 93 3 o rt> _ ^ = a ^ oq 7: 15 = s a a >j s;. a. -^ "i O- 3 3 a: «• • 95 - ?T' ?r r- 88 S5 r: •X S 3* 3 o £^ » 2 S NOTKfS. 211 NOTK J{. mi k)i|iiHni, A.; capiiuii , D. hiiliirh- .sciii and scniflokaouri , A.; tiaufjajioiii , 1). ////// sfjiiaiii, A.; iaiii, D. Lack koiiaiieteiii, A.; cateni, ]). chill f,''Hnil»ai>i , A.; capa])!, I). iliys inaiiHou, A.; son {liosaiii) , I). (•//fv ... jadjieniouri , A.; tagdini , I). /w/iT.v caiitoiilili, I). - furc kuiikaiit-ili , A. — iiddtllc koiianti-poitli), A. — riiif/ koiiaiiti-ripali , A. /////'' koiiantilniinki , A. fiiol koiirgnai. A.; caloaiii , D. Iiiiir stMioniiirlinuraii , A.; pi.i, 1). Inmil kuiik at'alcMii , A.; cocani , 1). Inrl konk abiouli, A. btee kuiik-Hpoki , A.; capi>n<;ui, 1). Irij konkaiifai. A.; ani^a t'uiui , 1). iiii^e suun , A.; saiiiiy, 1>. iiiiil.1 canibrt'ne, A.; cabione , 1). /re/// nualini, A.; analiiii , D. loe, firiuif koiianti-licl. A,] — , seroiid mid fourth konanti-hipali, A. — , /////'/ kouanti-|i()iilo , A. — , /////'• konaiiti-lmiiiki , A. ihiijh afToIiMii, A.; enfolnni, or anfoloni , I). S-2 3 5' S^ 3 s; w 3 2 a: 3 O a 3 g £ P I :? a" P O &- ^ ?^ 7. •< < -J 15 ; ' o • :^ ^ 5 ' ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA (1850). Aiulnmau — TIk^ Jndaman Language is inonosyllfibic, and al- liod to tlic Burmese, of the oj)pnHlte continent. Mcoaar &.c. — The statement tliat there are lUaeks in the Nico- li(ir Isldixls is inaccurate. The tribes furtlier i'rom tlie coast are the rudest. In tlie Tsicobar vocabulary of tlie Voyage; of tlie (Jab'ithea \Slccn /lil/e — Galalhca' s Rcisc omkrimj Jordcit) , the hnignage inost I'spPt'ially represented is that of the ishuid Terressa; tlie words iVom Xancovry being marked N^ aud those from (-ariecobar (J. N. Xo ditierence , beyond that of dialect, is recognized as existing ''•'tween them. At the same time it is, by no means, certain, that tvory form of speech belonging to the Archipcdago is known tn US. Sitinu/iy &.r. — The statenrent that these are the Orang IJdai is inaccurate. For further notice of the Samane; sec Newbold's Indian 21G O.N Till; NIKiltllo I, ANtirViiKS. An"hi|H'l)i;j;(»; n wnvk not known t<» uw when iny jiapor was writ- ten. Tlic ctlinulojry (if the ( )ran.;? Hcinia is fully illustrated in the .Foiirnal of the Jiuliaii Aiehijielaj^o. They ai all Malay. Smnalni. - 'This island gives us certain trihes ruder tliiiu others — not hiacker; at any rate no Xegritos. The same apidies to liontro; where there is plenty of harlia- risni hut nothinjj; Xe^-rito. The same to the Sulu .Vrehipelaj-'o. The Manillas. — SpecinieUH of four of the sft-called Ne;j;ritii Inn- {^uaj^'es are to he found in Steen JTille's N'oyage (»f the (Jalatlicn (V«d. in.); headed, (OUniirjiy, (-J) St. ^lij^iud: (iij St. .Ajatiicu and (4) !)uniagat. 'I'hey evidently Ixdonj^' to the same ;;rini|i as the 'I'agal. Formosa and T.itncho. — The eritieism that a])plies to Huriuii and th(! Sulu Archipcdago !i]»|dios here. For Timor, Ombay kc. sec the n(>xt paper. The lanjj;\ia},''e of the Arm islanders is not mentioned; indeed in I84H no sjK-eimens of their laui.';uaf:;e had heen i)nl)lished. Siiiii', however , a j^ood aecount of theei has heen given hy AVindsnr Earl. Their lauj-uage cnntains u'ueh in connnon with the Ian guages of the islands to the west of them, whilst in physical ap- pearance they approach the l'a[»u; o.-i, I'hey present, in sliovt, transitional characters - -,/o?//'««/ of Indian .Irchiprhigo, and Tin' Pa/nia Races. New Britain &c. — For Louisiadc forms of speech sec the tioxt paper hut one ; for those of Now Caledonia t^c. see the fourth. The Fijis. — The language of the Fijis is Polynesian. C'ocos Island. — The vocahulary of the island so-'ianied sconis to mc to ho. that of T"c >pia; and, as such, anything hut Negritd. In liraim's Australia wo tind specimens of five Tasnuumn forms of speech. The additions to the })hilology of Australia since 184;^ are too numerous to find ])lace in a notice like the jtrc- sent. The fundamental unity of all the languages of that conti- nent is, now, generally recognized. Of the Micronesian Islanders (natives of the Marianne and Cn- rolinc Archipelagos) some trihes are darker than others. They chiefly occui)y ^^*^ coral, as opposed to the volcanic, formations. The same is the case with the supposed Negritos of Polynesia. ON THE (;em:ral affinities OK 11 II; LAN(aA(iES OF rUE (XILVNIO JJLACKS. ArPKNDlX TO JIIKKSS VOYACnO OF IDI.S FLY. 1847. For i)liilologi('!il purposes it is convenient to arranfjje tlio BliK'ks of the Asiatic and Oceanic Islands under five divi- sions. I. The lihicks of the Andaman Ishands. — These are, com- paratively s])eaking, isohited in their geo.i;rapIiieal position; whilst tiie portion of the continent nearest to thein is inha- liitod hy races speaking- a monosyMabic language. II. The IMacks of the Malay area, — With the exception of Java, all the larger, and many of the smaller i\Ialay Is- lands, as well as the Peninsula of ^lalacca, are descril)ed as containing, in difftu'ent proportions, a j)oj)ulation which departs from the Malay type, which approaches that of the Nogro, which possesses a lower civilization, which generally inhabits the more inaccessible parts of the respective coun- tries, and which wears the appearance of being aboriginal tij the true Malay population. These tribes may bo called the lilacks of the INIalay area. III. The Papuan Blacks of New Guinea. — Under this head may be arranged the tribes of New Guinea, New Ireland, the Now Hebrides, Tanna, Erromango, Annatom, New Ca- ledonia , &c. IV. The Blacks of Australia. V. The Tasmanian Blacks or the Blacks of Van Diemen's Land. I. The Andaman Blacks will cot be considered in the present note. II. With respect to the languages of the Blacks of the Malay area, it may be stated unetpnvocally, that the dia- 2IS OS llli: (iKM'.UAl, Ari'lMIIKM Icits of cacli mikI (!V<'ry tribo lor wliicli ji vu(iil»iil;iry ii jctMi ('X!Viiiiii('(l , arc Mill A. Siu'li is tli(! case witli tlu; Saniaii;;', .Io(»roo and ,lo|. Vocabularies of tlio Peninsula of Maiaeca. Knliif Set! (Jruufiinr Indian ArcliijKda^o, Asiatic Uescarchcs, xii. 100, Ni'wIioM' Jliitisli Settlements in Malacca. 15. Siieli is tli(! case with ev(3ry vcniabtiiary that has Ikm i brought fiv»in Sumatra. 'I'Ik; iiaitictdar tiibe sufliciently dit forcrit from tin- Malay to speak a ditfcront language has yet to l»o lo und. C. Such is tlic case with the oi^ht vocabularies furnislioil by Mr. IJrooke i'roni I'orneo ; notwithstanding the fact tliat both the Dyaidis and the liiajuUs have Ijeen deserihed us tribes wihh'r and inor(( de^raued than the Malay: in otiur words, as tribe.s on tin; Negro side of the (huninant \ui\n\- lation. 1). Sucdi is the case with every vocabulary brou<;ht fnnii any of the Molucca, Key. Arm, or Timorian Islands wliat- soever; no matter how dark niay be the complexion, or hdw abnormal tln^ hair, of the natives who have supplied it. Fi. Such is the case with the so-called Arafura vocHl)uIa- ries of Dumont Durville from ('elel)es, and of Hoorda van Eysin;j,a from Ambt)yiKi and Ceram. F. Such is the case with the langua wiio sT)ea ik it. III. For New (luinea, and the islands Waigioo, andUuohc, I have found only ten short vocabularies, and these; only for tin? north-western districts. One of these, the (iuchf, of the voyage of the Astrolabe, although dealt with by Mr. Durville as Papuan, is Malay. The rest, without any ex- ception, have a sufficient ])ortion of jMalay words to preclude any argument in favour of their belonging to a fresh class or riir; i,AN(ir\«ii;M or riii: kcmami' iii,\|)iii(' IS tli(! (imv- tlio |)(t|mla- i accurately irly Spanisli ' the J {lack ut tlio iiiat- f^orot im;- ond Lnray, mil Islaiiils tliat, until o no proofs fcrt^nt from liysical ap- anrl CJucIk', tli(vs(! oulv \\v. (JucIm', ith l.y Mr. it any cx- o prcclmlc fresh class (if lin;;»ia;;('.s. < )n tlx- other imud, tlie commercial iiitercoursn iiclween the I'apuaiifs ami Miilayss prechuh'H any positives stati'inents u.s to the existence of ii true piiilolo^ical affinity. From Nf.'W (inineji, Avestward and sonthwjird, we iiave tor tJK! localities inhaliiled l»y the black tribes witii curly liair, tli»! lollowin;;' vncabninrie.s, 1. Ft»r New Ireland. A. (laimard'rt Carteret llarbtmr Vocabulary — Voya^^e do rAstrolab(!, lMiilolo;;ie, ii. W.S. B. Durville's i'ort Praslin Vocabulary. Ibid. U. l)alryuij)le'8, hh called, New (Jiuinea N'ocabulary, col- !(;t't(', ;^iven also by 1 )e Jlrosscs. 2. For VaniUoro — -(iainiards \'ocabulary in three dialects, ilu' Vanik<»ro, the Tanema, and the 'I'aneanou — \'oyaj;(! do lAstrcdalx' l'hilol();;ie, ii. Mil. 3. MallicoUo — Cook's \^)CJ.bMlary. 4. Tanna — Ditto. Also a few words nnirked (i. Benn((t, ill Marsdon's IMiscellaneous \\'(»rk.s. .'). Krronnin^o — a toAV words by JJenn(>t, in Marsden. (i. Annatom — Ditto. 7. New ('aledonia — A short Vocabulary in Cook. A lon- ger one in Dentrecasteaux and La Jlillardiere. All these lan^uaj^es, althou;;h nnitually nnintelli-^ible, <'x- liibit words connnon to one another, connnon t(j themselves and the Now (Juinoa, and connnon to themselves and the Malay. See Transactions of the Philolo<.^ical Society, vol. i. no."* '4. IV. The Blacks of Australia are ^-enerally se[)arated by stron;;' lines of dinnarcation from the I'lacks of New (Juinea, and from the IMalays. Kven on tln^ philolo;j,ical side of the question, ]\Iarsden has written as follows — *'\V(j have rarely mvX with any negrito lanj^ua^e in which many corrupt Po- lynesian words might not be detected. In thos*; ot New Holland or Australia, such a mixture is not found. Annmu;' tliein no foreign terms that c-onnect them with the languages even of other [tainia or negrito countries can bt; discovered; with regard to the physical (pialities of the natives it is nearly supin'tiuous to state, that they are negritos of the more decided class.'' — p. 71. In respect to this statement, 1 am not aware that any recent philologist has gone over the (hila as wo innv have, them , with sufficient care to enable him either to verify or to refute it. Nevertheless, the isolation of the Australian languages is a current doctrine. i " Tliis is till- prceoiliiig piiper. (IKV.)). 220 ON THE (JKN-KK.U, Ari'IMTfRS I believe tliis doctrine to be incorrect; and I am sure that, in many cases, it is founded on incorrect ])rinci[}les. Orannnaticai diftVrences are valued too liigb; glopsarial affinities too low. The relative value of the i;rannnati('nl and j-lossarial tests is not constant. It is different for dif- ferent languac;es. In 1844. 1 stated, at York, tliat from three true Mahiy localities, and in three true IMalay vocabularies, I had found Australian and Tasmanian {ind l^ipuan words, viz: — 1. In the Timboran dialect of the Sumbawan. 2. In the ]\rangerei dialect of Flores. 3. In the Ombayan of Ombay. 1. Arm = ilxtnina , Ombay; purcm', Fine Gorine dialect of Australia, 2, W\\vn\ = ouinc , Ombay; hingue , New Caledonia. .*). ^0!>o = imQU)ii, Ou'bay; nianimja, mandey , nutiulvinnc, NcAv Caledonia; w^v;//, \'an Diemen's Land, western dialect; 7nhii, jNlangcrei: mcoun , niHidtjc, tmiyui, Macquarie Harbour. 4, Head=7wor//r/, (hiibay; woav, (=:liair) Darnley Island; nioochi, (= hair) Massied; immnos, (= beard) Dandey Is- lands; t'fta mooc/ii, (:r=: beard) JMassied. 5, Knee -~ Icm-boiikit , Ombay; lunvkd, bouf/a/ij {~~ i'ovQ^n- ger) Darnloy Islands. (). Leg .:= i?>v//.Y/, Ombay; huraff-tu/fa , .Ihongworong dialect of the Australian. 7. Bosom c=r/;w/, Ombay; nnem, Darnley Island, 8. Thigh = //t'//«, Ombay; (inna-mook (:= foot) Witouro dialect of Australian. The root, tin, is very general through- out Australia in the sense of fool. 9. ^c\\y = li'-kap-atm, Ombay; coopoi , (= navel) Darnley Island. 10. )^ti\r» := fpi-berrc , Mangarei; bcrifir/, hirroug, Sydney. 1L Vii\x\(\.= (anaraga , Mangarei; iahUu, Timbora; Uimira, Sy ney. 12. Head =7V//<('', Mangarei; chow, King George's Sound. 13. ^tius = ktngkong , Tiniboro; chitiffg , King George's Sound, Australia. 14. Moon = mangring, Timbora; ?nc'uc, King George's Sound. 15. ^nxi = fngkong , Timbora; coing, Sydney. 16. Blood = /ivv«, Timbora; gnoorong, Cowagavy dialect of Australia. 17. Headr=/.vy/,o;Y', Timbora; gogorrah , Cowagary. 18. FU\\ = appi, jNIangarei; w7//>/, Darnley Island. Now as the tiiree dialects have all undoubted Malay atti- iiities, th liticationi V, Co venture «. Thd island; tuidly u ^. It y. It A fou exhibits Should will at the Tasi often be guage b stronger This in( mens ra The publishc syllnbic colUitiot 1. Bh dialect ( 2. No nese; />( 3. Fs York, lands; 4. H Ohines( •). C G, B 7, H Jooro ; b, F iiiatra. U. I fai, S' 10. houlou II. kihou rung , or THE LANdUACKS OF Till': OCKAMC lil.W'KS. 221 iiitics, tlie stateinciit of ^Marsilcn must be rccoivetl with qu.i- liticntions. \. Concerning;' the language of Van Diemon's l^and, 1 venture upung the t'oHowing' statements, the proofs wiiieh 1 hope, (!re long, to exhiltit /// twlcn^o. tt. The Language is fundamentally tiif; same for the whole island; although spoken in not less than four dialects mu- tually unintelligible. |3, It has aftinities with the Australian. y. It has afiiniti(>s with the Mew Caledonian. A fourth proposition concerning the Tasmanian language exhibits an impression, rather than a (hdibcratc; opinion. Should it, however, be contirmed by future rc'searches it will at once explain the points of physical contrast between the Tasmanian tribes and those of Australia that have so often been insisted on. It is this • — that the affinities of lan- ^aiago between the Tasmanian and the New Caledonian are stronger than those between the Australian and Tasmanian. This indicates that the stream of population for \'an Die- mens ran round Australia rather than across it. The following affinities occur between the vocabularies published in the present volume and the; J\Ialay and Mono- syllabic dialects 5 and they are the result of a very partial collation. 1. Blood =^ ;«^/wj , Darnley Island; f?iuhum, South Jooroo dialect of ]\[alacca; man, Anamitic of (!^ochin (,'hina. 2. Nose=yv<'t7, J)arnley Island; pccclii, Massied; />//<, Chi- nese; />/, Kong Chinese, 3. FsLCG=^ a/rap aap; ]\Iurray Islands; «'/>?< = (head) Cape York, Massi(Hl; oopoo ^^^^ (hend) Tahiti; ejwo, Sandwich Is- lands; aopo, Easter Island. 4. Hair = ;«oos, Darnley Island; mooche, Massied; maow, Chinese. T). Country -—//r/tY/, Darnley Island; Laha, Ternati. G. Black =/7or>//, Darnley Island; houli, Tongataboo. 7. Hand=:^^///, Darnley Islane; tatu/h, Madagascar; lo)aj, Jooro; lay, Anamitic. A current Malay root. 5. Vh\\f=irapi, Darnley Island; iha, Poggy Isles otf Su- matra. Also in other ]\Ialay dialects. I). Flame, lire = /yrtt', Darnley Island; api, Flores, or Knde; I'ai, Siamese; fj'oo. Kong Chinese. 10. \\ii\v^^yal, JNIassied ; ceal, Capo York; yal, PortLihou; liouluu, Tongataboo. 11. Teeth n=:: ^/^///^, i\[assied; dtt/iya, Cape York; (/any. Port Lihou; ilangela, Gunong-talu of (.'elebes; ivaluiny , Menadu; rmy , Anamitic. 222 ON Tin: OKXKiiAL Ai'iMM rrr.s of tiik i-.wrirAnKS &.v. The evidence upon which I rest my belief of the funda- mental unity of the three philological groups of the Malay, l*apua, and Australian languages, is, of the sort called ctnnulutivc ; and it is the only evidence that our present data will afford us. ]>elieving, however, in such a fundamental unity, the pro- blem to be solved by further researches on the vocabularies from either Torres Strait or the South of New (juinea, is the problem as to the particular quarter from which Is'cw Holland Avas peopled — whether from New Guinea, or from Timor. Such a problem is not beyond the reach of fiilttrc philologists. In the fifth volume of Dr. Frichards valuable work, I find that Mr. Norris has indicated points of likeness between the Australian dialects, and the Tumul languages of South- ern India. Such may be the case. If, however, the statements of those philologists who connect on one side the Tamul, and on the other the Malay, with the Monosyllabic languages, be correct, the two affinities are compatible. ADDP^NDA AND CORRIGENDA (1859). The error of presuming the ruder tribes to be Negrit(» is njjpa- rent in tlie notice of the Sumatra, and Borneo tribes. Tliey should have no place in a list of Negritos at all. The gist of the ])aper lies in the snggestions to break down (l) the lines of demarcation between the Australians, Tasmaniaiis, and l'a)tuans on one side, and the ]\Ialays i^c. on the other, aiul (*i) those between the ]\Ialay and I\b»nosyllabic tongues. 1IEMA11K8 ON THE Y()CAr>UEAlMES OK THK VOYAGE OF THE llATTLESXAKE. APPENDIX TO lAIACGlLLIVRAYS VOVACIK OF THE HMS RATTLESNAKE. 1852. In the Avay of comparative pliilology the most important part of the (Jrammar of the Australian languajivs is, gone- rally, the Pronoun. That of tho Kowraroga language Avill, therefore, be the first point investigated. In the tongues of the Indo-European class the personal pronouns are pre-eminently constant, /. i'., they agree in languages Avhich, in many other points, dillV'r. How tho- roughly the sound of m runs through the (Jlothic, Slavonic, and Iranian tongues as the sign of the pronoun of the first person singular, in the oblique cases; how regularly a mo- dification of /, .s', or tli , appears in such words as ///, 6v, thou, &c.! Now this rons/(/nri/ of the Pronoun exists in most langunges; but not in an e([ually palpable and manifest form. It is iiisguised in several ways. Sometimes, as in the Indo- FAU'opoan tongues, there is one root for the nominative and one for the oblique cases; sometimes the same form, as in the P'inlandic, runs through the whole declension; sometimes, as when we say ijou for /hnif in Knglish, one number is sub- stituted for another; and sometimes, as when tlif; (Jerinan says ,svt' for thou, a chang(; of the person is made as well. When languages are knoAvn in detail, these complications can be guarded against ; but where the tongue is but imper- fectly exhibited a special analysis becomes reijuisite. Generally, the first person is morc^ constant than the se- cond, and the second than the third; indeed, the third is frequently no true personal pronoun at all, but a demon- strative employed to express the person or thing spoken of as the agent or object to a verb. Now, as there are fre- quently more demonstratives than one which can be used 224 UK.MAKKS ON Till'. VOCAIULAUIKS in a personal sense, two Innguag'cs may be, in reality, very closely allii'd, though their personal pronouns of" the tliiril person differ. Thus the Latin cyo ^r=i Eyco '^ but the Latin hk and Hie by no means correspond in form with og, avxo'i, ami ix£ivog. This must prepare us for not expecting a greut r amount of resemblance between the Australian personal pro- nouns than really exists. licginning with the most, inconstant of the three pronouns, viz., that of the third person, we find in the Kowrar(^j,^i the following forms Singular, masculine — feminine Dual, common Plural, — 3. 71 u- (1 11=: he, him. na-(lu--shr , her. pale ::r7zihei/ l/vo , them two. tuHa^=:^t! ey , them. In the two first of these forms the du is no part of the root. but an affix, since the Gudang gives us the simpler forms tiue and na. Pale, the dual form, occurs in the Western Australian, the New South Wales, the South Austi'aliaii, and the Parnkalla as follows: boula^ Oulo-ara, puri-a, piiil- lanbi = ihey two. Singular Dual Plural mji-ihi •=■ thou , thee. ji(ji-pel= ye two, ymi ln>o. iiyi-tana=ye , you. Here the root is limited to the syllable ?i{/i, as shewn not less by the forms nyi-pel, and ngl-tana ^ than by the simple Gudang nyi^^^ihoti. Ny/, expressive of the second person , is common in Au- stralia: iiyt-nnee, nyi-nloa, ni-ruui, nyi-nte=^thou, thee, in the W. Australian, N. S. Wales, Parnkalla, and Encounter Bay dialects. Nyi-pel is probably thoii + pair. A priori this is a likely way of forming a dual. As to the reasons a posteriori tliey are not to be drawn wholly from the Kowrarega tongue it- self. Hero the word for two is i\ot pel but qvassur. But lot us look further. The root ;;-/, or a modification of it,= ttvo in the following dialects; as well as in the Parnkalla and others — pur-la itije, poolettc, par-kooloo, btill-a, in the Adelaide, Boraipar, Yak-kumban, and JMurrumbidge. That it may stand too for the dual personal pronoun is shown in the first of these tongues; since in the Adelaide language OF IIIK V(AA(iE OF Tin: ItATTI.KSXAKK. 225 jiurla==y(' two. Finally, its Jip])oarancc amongst tlio pro- nouns, anil its absence anionj^st the numerals, occurs in the Western Australian. The numenil ijvn is lairdina ; but the ilual pronoun is boala. The same plienomcnon would occur in the present Kn^^lish if two circumstances had taken place, viz., it" the Anglo-Saxon dual wi-l -— wv Urit liad been retain cil up to thu present time amongst the pronouns, and tlie word i>(t'u\ brace, or couji/c, had superseded fivo auiongst the niiDicrals. Lastly, the Western Australian and tlio Kowrarega so ilosoly agree in the use of the numeral (wo for the dual pro- noun, that each applies it in the same manner. In the t/i/rd pcrs^on it stands alone, so that in W. Australian boa/a, and in Kowrarega jia/a =z they two, just as if in English we said iniir or both, instead of they both {he jniir):, whilst in the se- cond person, the pronoun precedes it, and a compound is t'ornied-, just as if in English we translated the (Jreek 6(fm Ijy thou piiir or tliou both. Singular Dual riural 1. nga-tti^=I, me. all/ei=zu'e two, us two. arn=-wc, lis. Here the plural and dual are represented, not by a modifi- tation of the singular, but by a new word ; as ditferent from nga us nos is from eyo. The tu, of course, is non-radical, the (jiudang- form being nyai. .\ya, expressive of the iirst person, is as common as ;?///, equivalent to the second. Thus, nga-»y^/, nga-/w/, nga-/, iiga-yyt'-^ /, me, in the W. Australian, ^<. S. VV^ales, Parn- kiilla, and Encounter Bay dialects. Now, the difference between the first and second persons being expressed by different modifications (tiyii, fiyi ,) of the same root {}iy) ,, rather than by separate words, suggests the inquiry as to the original power of that rout. Jt has already been said that, in many languages, the pronoun of the thh'd person is, in origin, a demonstrative. In the Kow- rarega it seems as if even the basis of the first and second ^vas the root of the demonstrative also; since, by looking lower down in the list, we find that /-na^=this, ehe-na =^ thai, and iiga-cla {nga in (hidang) -- - ;i;//o. Ina and cJiemt also means here and tiiere , respectively. The dual form albei reappears in the Yak-kumban dialect of the River Darling where allewa=^we two. Arri~-us, is also the first syllabic in the Western Australian form ar- J5 22G UKMAKKS ON TIIH YOCAIU'LAUIIOS limjul ~-)Vc; or, ratlior it is ar-Ji)i{jiil in a simpler and less compounded I'orm. In a sliort specimen of i\Ir. J"]yre".s fnna the licad of the Great Australian JJi^ht, the form in a ap- pears in the sin[;ular number, f/JJa :- I nnd me. Tho rout iauft—^llwy, is not illustrated without j^oing as far as t!i Western Australian of Mr. Kyre. Here, however, W(» iind it in the compound -Nvord par-tamui :=nuinij. Its original powir is prohably ulhrrs] and it is most likely a widely ditl'u.scil Australian root. The j)ronouns in question are compound rather than simple: f. ('. instcjad of nga. -^^ tnc , and ngi -- tJiee, we have nua-m and mji-du. What is the import and explanation of X\mi It may safely be said, that th^ termination in the Australiiiu is not a termination like the Latin inci in (•(jo-mel , inasnnuli as this last is constant throughout the three persons {efiu- mt'1.1 lulc-incl , sc'-mi'/), whereas, the former vari(\s with tlic pronoun to Avhich it is appended ()if/a-lif ^ and >i(//-(lii). 1 hazard the conjecture that the two forms correspond with the adverbs here and (here] so that Hf/a-(u = I here, ami nf//-du--= /hnii there, and nu-dn =\\g tlu^re. In respect to the juxta-position of the simple forms {fif/'//\ tif/i, and )iw'\ of the CJudang with the compound ones (fif//i-(ii, )itji-s of Africa, and, in a still ;;Ti'{itcr def;'ree, in those of America. The I'xlenl (n which the unmcralion is curried is a matter of iiiDi'o importance. Possibly a numeration limited to the first tliroc!, four, or live numbers is the c/fcc/ o/' intidlectual in- t'rriority. It is certainly a cause that continues it. As a nioa.sure of cthnolof;ical affinity it is unim})ortant. In Ame- rica we have, within a limited ranoe of bm^uaj^es, vi<;esi- iiial systfMns like the Mexican, and systems linnted to the tliroo first units like the (Jaribb. The difference betwcsen a vi;;csiiiial and decimal s; stem arises j>imply froni the })rac- ticc of counting bv the finders and to(>s collectivelv , or the tinj;ers alone, bein<^ prevalent; whereas the decimal system as opposed to the quinary is rcferrible to the numeration being extended to both hands, instead of limited to one. Numerations not extending- as far as /ire are generally in- dependent of tin; fingers in loto. Then as to the names of particular numbers. Two nations may each take the nani(! lit" the number two from some natural dualism; but they may not take it from the same. For instance^ one American Indian may take it from a pair of skates, another from a pair of shoes. If so , the word for Iwo will differ in the two iaii<^uagcs, even when the names for skate and shoe agree. All this is supported by real facts, and is no hypothetical illustration; so that the inference from it is, that, in lan- fruages where a numeral syste7n is in the process of forma- tinn, diftcrencc in the names of the numbers is compara- tively unimportant. The extent to which the numerals ^ary, the extent to which they agree, and the extent to which this variation iwd agreement are anything but coincident with geographi- cal proximity or distance, may be seen in the following- table: — Knglisli Morcton Bay — Island I'ijcnchniilio l'inil)jikai-ajia Tori'utong- :i one two tlu-eo kainarah bulla mudyan karuAVo ])0()nlali uiadaii warat ng-argark 2 + 1 erat ng-argark d.). roka oryalk do. 15* 12.^ UKMAUKS (»\ I'llH VOfMUT-AUIKS Limhapyu iinu.uta la\vid]»orra '2 + ' KoAvraicgii waru|»uiie (luassur do. Giuljinj;- epianuiiia elahalii do. Dnnilcy l.slfinJ netut lies d... KatHcs Jiiiy loca (irira oroiigario JiJikc MiU',([uarie wakdl ludoara ugoro W\v\ Itivcr pe<'i' ])tdar ]>urla W('llinj;t()U uginigliai bula bula-iigniijj,' ,Ili(mg\v()rniig J'iiK't^oriiu' koiiDoil ka]) yuua (Jmircllcaii lua Kiii}^ ( I ('urge's Sound keyeu cuetrel murbcn Jvariiuli). inal bular cub'ba ]jaclilan, l^cgcut Lake iiyoonbi bulla bubtiiguiibi AV'ollondilly ]?iver ineduiig ])una Cidluerr >lll IMio Verb now requires notice. In languaoes in the saino Rtap;e of development with the Australian the usual analysis. as siiewn by the late I\lr. (Jarnett in his masterly papers ini the structure of the verb, is as follows: I. The root. 2. Tln' pause naive ])ronoun. 3. A particle of time — often originally one of place. A rough illustration of this is the statement that such a word as ilormivi = sleep — my — then (or there). To apply this doctrine to the Kowrarega with our present dtiltt, \- unsafe. Still, I am inclined (notwithstanding some diftieuUios to identify the pa of the Present tense with the hu in kai- bn^=^no)iK and the n of the preterite with the ?i of chc-nii - - there. The double forms of the Past tense (one in », and anotlicr in tn) are at present inexplicable. So are the double forms of the Imperative, viz. the one in r, and the one in e. It may, however, be remarked, that wherever the Imperative ends in e, the Preterite has the form in m; thus, p(d-e=^ dig, pid-ema = dug . The only exception is the anomalous form peneingodgi = dived. This prepares the future gramma- rian for a division of the Kowrarega Verbs into Conjuga- tions. The last class of words that supply the materials of com- ment are the Substantives. Herein , the lormation of tiie plural by th(! addition of le , probably occurs in several ot the Australian tongues. I infer this from many of those words which we find in the vocabularies of languages where- of tiie grannnar is unknown , and which are expressive ol naturally plural objects ending in //, la, or /. or Tin; vmvaoi; (»r riii: kaiti.ksnakio. 229 1. Star (st.ars) — piir-fc, pi-llc, pm-llc, in Pariikalla, Ai- ,i\v(in^'. and Yak-kuinl)an. 2. Firo (riauies) — lat-llu, ijnil-ht ^ in \V. Australian and I'anikalla. ;{. Head (hair) — Uur-Je , Kncountor Bay. Horc wo learn iimn tlio I'orins kar-{/a , iVom the Head of tlio (ilroat Anstra- li;m l)ij;lit, and 7na-kiir-Ui, t'roni Adolaido, tliat the / is t'or- litrn to the root. 4. Hands — marroiv-la in tlio IMolon^'lo dialect; and con- trasted with murra in the Adehiide. This, however, is merely a conjecture; a conjecture, how- ovor, Avliich has a practical bearing;'. It sugjj^ests caution in the coni))arison of vocabularies; since, by mistakin^^ an in- tli>xi(tn or an attix for a part of the root, we may overlook really existing; similarities. Father Anjello's very brief p;rannnatical sketch of the Lim- bakarajia language of Port Essington * exhibits, as far as It };ncs, precisely the same prinr/jt/cs as Mr. ]\lacffillivray's Kowrarcga; indeed, some of the details coincide. Thus, the Limbakarajia personal pronouns arc — /= nga-pi. We = nrpiri. Thou =)i()ir. IVc l/vu -- arguri. He, she, it = rjianat. Ye = uoie. They -- vgahno. Here the jii in ncja-pi is the pu in the Aiawong nt/n-ppo; \h\ (jinn m gi(in-(il being, probably, the in in the Kowrarega lna^=^lh(tt, this. Nyaimo, also, is expressly statcid to mean miimj as Avell n^.Uicij, a fact wliich confirms the view taken of kind. As for tiie tenses of the verbs, they are evidently no true tensps at all, but merely combinations of the verbal root, and an adverb of time. In Limbakarajia, however, the ad- verbial element precedes the verbal one. In Kowrar(>ga, however, the equivalent to this adverbial element (probai)ly a simple adverb modified in form so as to amalgamatii Avith its verb, and take the appearance of an inflexion) follows it — a difference of order, sequence, or position, upon whicdi some philologists will, ])erhaps, lay considerable stress. ( )n the contrary, however, languages exceedingly similar in either respects, may ditt'er in the order of the parts of a term; e. g. the German dialects, throughout, place the ar- ticle before the noun, and keep it separate: whereas the . 157 of Vol. I. 230 KKMAKKS ON Til!; V(»rAlll[,AUIK.S Scjvndiimviiin tongues not only inaki.' it follow, but incorjKi- rate it with tlin substantivo witli wliicli it a^rcos. Ilcni-c, a tcnii wliicli, if nioil(;llar(Ml with the j\[eso-(iothic, (lues the same. Still the chanj^e only affects certain intic^e- tional syllables, so that the original s being only partially (lisplnced, retains its place in the language, although it oc- curs in fewer words. In Austv.alian, where it is wanting at all, it is wanting in Into: and this is a reason for believing that its absence is referriblo to non-development rather than t(i displacement. For reasons too lengthy too exhibit, 1 bcdieve that this hatter view is nol applicable to Australian; the s, when wanting, being undeveloped. In either case, liowever, the plionctic differences between particular dialects are the measures of but slight differences. Now — with tliese ])r(diminary cautions against the overva- luation of a})parent differences — we may compare the new (htia tor the structure of the Kowrarega and Limbakarajia with the received opinions respecting the Australian grannnars in I jrenerai These refer them to the class of (({/(jliilinntc tongues, /. c. toni,aios Avhercin the inflections can be shewn to consist of separate words more or less incorporated or amalgamated with the roots which they modify. It may be said that this view is confirmed rather than impugned. Now, what applies to the Australian grammars applies also to Polynesian and the more highly-developed Malay languages, — such as the Tagala of the Philippines, for in- stance; and, if such being the case, no difference oi prin- ciple in respect to their structure separates the Australian from the languages of those two great classes. But the details, it may be said, differ undoubtedly; and this is what w^e ex- pect. Plural numbers, signs of tense, and other grannnati- cal elements, are evolved by means of the juxtaposition of miHar but not iflenlical elements, e. g. one plural may be formed by the affix signifying tnanij ; another, by the affix .^^ifrnifying tvitli or conjoinllij; one preterite may bo the root yVi« a word meaning then; another the root pins a word mean- ing there. Futures, too, may be equally evolved by the 2:\2 iii'.MAKKs O.N riii; v(»('.\iiri.AKii;« incorporation or jiixf.'iposition of tlio word nicniiinj? afh-r, uy tl.o word nioaniii;;' Iv-murroH'. All lliis makes tlic exact L-oin- cidcnee of the details of intic.'etion tlio exception rather tluiii the rul(!. This doctrin(! j;oos farther than th(! mere broakinji-down (d' the lines of (h'lnareation whitdi separate classes of laiiirui- •fcs like the Australian from classes of lan^^iiajj^es like tip ]\fahayo-l'olynesian. It shctws how hoth may be (n'olved fron monosyllabic tongues like the (^hineso or Siamese. The prcidf that su(di is really the case lies ii. the sinularity of indivi- dtial words, and consists in comparative tables. It is \m len{;thy for the present pa[)er, the chief object of which is to brin<; down tlio inferences from the undoubtedly {front superficial ditt'er(>nces between the lan{;uages of the parts in question to their proper h^vel. In respect to th(> lujcubtilarica, the extent to -Nvldcdi the niin- jysls which applies to the i;'rammar aj)plies to the vocables also may be seen in the followiuj;' instance. The word hum! ]iijen(dumbo and Limbapyu is bin/ally. There is also in caih lanju'uaji'e a second form — anhirt/ulk — \vh(>rein the iiu is nnn-radical. So, also, is the tilk; since we find that armiiH:^ iriff(imh-alk, >i1intilfh'r = niun(h/-alh\ and /}nf/eri!--monf/ alk. Tliis brings the root :; -hand to biry. Now this we can iind else- where by looking; for. In the Liverpool dialect, b/r-/l.=: /mud, and at Kinj^ George's Sound, peer = na/'/s. The com- monest root, r ^ ftaiid in the Australian dialects, is w-a, <: ;/. ^lorotou Hay murrah Corio fnr-nnf/f/nclok Karanla marra .riiougworong /'(ir-okg/idln (Ui-tnura Mununnhidje miir-ni/jan iiuira ]Moh)nglo mar-rowbt murra Head of Bight merrcr tn-murn I'arnkana marra Sydney i\Iudjc AVcdliugton Jiivcrpool All this (lifters from the Port Kssington terms. FJb;t()n urnn Bijoiudunibo yirkn Karar'a yerry l{('},a'nt\s Lake unran Sydney yaren Lake Mac- tviiruiig I'ecd Uivc/ ierai quario Mndj;c • yarai Kii;ilisli eye Jliong'worong mrr-ing-gna-la -Mdrcton Island mel l'ine<;'orine, ma Miii'cton Jiay mill (Jnurellean mer-egnen-a (iiidaug etneri--=i /A'- lioraipar mrr-ring y brow Jiake IHnd- mi'r Bijonolunibo iiierdc — eyelid niarsli H('jj;t'nt\s Lake mil Lake Shindy merr-rnng Karaula mil 3Iurrunihidjo mil Mudje mir Hij,'lit Head mail Corio mer-gnrl- ok K. ()Ieor<^e\s mial C.laek mer-fjiien -ok Sound L)autgart mer-gna-nCH ■ 234 IlKMAKKS ON TIIK VOCABULAKIES En},'liHli Instill Sydney yera IMorcton Island lii/u AVcllington irang ^forctftn Bay (hwr 3IununiI)idj(! yecran Lake ^fac- Una CJoold Island ecru qiiario English tongue Lake ]\[ac- Iftlan IMorcton Bay dulan ((uario Ecgcnt's T^ako tallrng Sydney dulan Karaula tulley Peed I^ivcr talc Goold Island lain K. (Jcorgo's lalicn Sound II'')? English ear ^rt)roton Bay hhina Kowrarega kotvra Karaula hinna Sydney kurc IVcI Ifiver hine Liverj)ool kurc Batliurst benang-arei Lake 31ac- ngurcong (Joold Island jiinna quano The Miriam Vocabulary belonf^s to a different class, viz. the Papuan. It is a dialect of language first made known to us through the Voyage of the Fly, as spoken in the is- lands Erroob, Maer, and Massied. Admitting this, we col- late it with the North Australian tongues, and that, for the sake of cotiirasi rather than cojnparison. Irlere, the philolo- gist, from the extent to which the Australian tongues differ from each other, notwithstanding their real affinity, is pre- pared to find greater differences between an Australian and a Papuan language than, at the first glance, exists. Lotus verify this by reference to some words which relate to the human body, and its parts. Enoi.isii. Nose Lips C/irrk Chin , Navel Eye Skin Vein Bone Sore Eunoon. pit MaSSIED. KoWUAKEOA. (il'DANO. piehi anka jaw haag ihu kopor ihu kupor kupor dana egur kerer lid bada kircr piti baga ibu kupar dana kerur rid a bada angka baga ebu kopurrn dana equora kerur OF THK VOYAGE Ol' TIIK UATTLESNAKE. 235 Kl HI "I'J- arci la class, viz. ade known 1 in the is- lis, we col- lat, for the the pliilolo- igues diffor ity, is pre- (ralian and sts. Let us ilate to the Few Australian vocabularies are thus similar — a fact which may bo said to prove too much; since it may lead to jnlVrence that tiio so-called Papuan tongue of Torres Strait is really Australian. Nevertheless, although I do not abso- hitely deny that such is the case, the evidence of the whole body of ethnological facts — c. f/. those connected with the moral, intellectual, and physical conformation of the two populations — is against it. And so is the philology itself, if we go further. The Erroob pronouns arc. Mc = ha Mine = fi(( ra you = ma your = ma ra his = cla all of which are un-Australian. Are we then to say that all the Avords of the table just jjivon are borrowed from the Australian by the Papuans, or I'kc versa? No. Some belong to the common source of the two tongues , pit r= nose being, probably, such a word; whilst (ithers are the result of subse(pient intercourse. Still, it cannot absolutely be said that the Erroob or Mi- riam tongue is not Australian also, or vice versil. Still less, is it absolutely certain that the former is not transitional be- tween the New Guinea language and the Australian. I be- lieve, however, that it is not so. The doubts as to the philological position of the Miriam are by no means diminished by reference to the nearest un- equivocally Papuan vocabulary, viz. that of Redscar 15ay. Here the difference exceeds rather than falls short of our ex[iectations. The most important of the few words which coincide are EUIIOOB. hcrem mil =■ lips eba = penis pagas -^ upper arm English. Redscar 15av. Jfeail quara Moufh mao Testielcs abu S/iouhkr jxiga On the other hand, the Redscar Bay Avord for throat, hato, coincides with the Australian harla of the Gudang of Ga))o York. Again, a complication is introduced by the word biiiii-mata = eychrow. Hero mnta-eyo, and, consequently, huiii=hi'o\v. This root re-appears in the Erroob; but there it means the ei/chall , as shewn by the following words from Jukes' Vocabulary. Eye Eyebrow irkeep irherp moos — - eye-hair 236 KF.MAKKS ()\ Tin: VOCAIULAUIKS Ejie ball Eyelid pom poni-pow = cyehnll-hair Probably the truer meaning of the Ilcdscar ]iay word is eyeball . No inference is safer than that which brings the popula- tion of the Louisiade Archipelago, so far, at least, as it i.s represented by the Vocabularies of I^rierly Island and Du- chateau Island, frojn the eastern coast of New Guinea. What points beyond were j)copled from Louisiade is another question. For the islands between New Indand and New Caledonia our data arc lamentably scanty; the list consisting of — 1. A short vocabulary from the Solomon Isles. 2. Short ones from ]\Iallicollo. 3. The same from Tanna. 4. Shorter ones still from Erromanga and 5. Annatom. 6. Cook's New Caledonian Vocabulary. 7. La Jiillardiere's ditto. The collation of these with the Louisiade has led me to a fact which I little expected. As far as the very scanty data go, they supply the closest resemblance to the Loui- siade dialects, from the two New Caledonian vocabularies. Now New Caledonia was noticed in the Appendix to the Voyage of the Fly (vol. ii. p. ;U8) as apparently having clo- ser philological affinities with Van Diemen's Land, than that country had with Australia; an apparent fact which induced me to write as follows : "A proposition concerning the Tas- manian language exhibits an impression , rather than a de- liberate opinion. Should it, however, be confirmed by fu- ture researches, it will at once explain the points of phy- sical contrast between the Tasmanian tribes and those of Australia that have so often been insisted on. It is this — that the affinities of language bet /een the Tasmanian and the New Caledonian are .stronger than those between the Australian and Tasmanian. Tliis indicates that the stream of population for \^an Diemen's Land ran round Australia, rather than across it." Be this as it may, the I'emark, with our present scant*' materials, is, at best, but a suggestion — a suggestion, however, whii'h would account for the phy- sical appearance of the Tasmanian being more New Cale- donian than Australian. The chief point of resemblance between the Louisiade and the New Caledonian is taken from the numerals. In each system there is a prefix , and in each that prefix begins OF THE VOYAGE OP THE KATTLESNAKE. 237 Avitli a labral letter — indeed the wa of New Caledonia and the pahi of Louisiade seein to be the same roots. 1. paiho-tia CiKik's Now (/alodonla wa-gceaing oua-nait 3. Hriorly Island C.ok's Now V, Lii liillardiore's do. Bi'iprly Island paihc-tiian Cook's Now Calodouia wa-tocn La JJillardioro's do. oua-tgiiion liricrly Island ]).'ii]io-liina Cnok's Now (Jalodonia wa-iinini La Jiiliardioro's do. oua-nnahn 7. Uricrly Island palio-pik Clink's Ni'w (Jalodonia wa unini-noo La Billardioro's do. oua-naim-dou 9. UriiTly Island pailio-siwo Clinks Now (Jalodonia wa-nnini-haook La liillardiore's dp. oua-naini-bait 2. palii-wo wa-roo oua-dou pailio-pak Ava-nd»aook oua-tl)ait 6. pailio-won wa- iinini-goook ou-naini-guik 8. pailio-wan wa-unini-gain ou-naini-guein 10. paiho-awata wa-imoon-aiuk ona-donn-hic Tlie Redsear Bay numerals are equally instructive. They take two forms: one with, one without, the prefi: in un\ as recorded by Mr. Macgillivray. Tiiis system of prefix is not peculiar. The Tanna and Mallioollo numerals of Cook are — lO.NCiT.ISH. Tanna. Mam.icom.o Ono r-oodoo tsookace 'i^vo ka-roo e-ry Throe k a -liar o-roi Four kai-jdiar o-hats Five k-rooruni o-roouni Six nia-r-oodoo tsookaooe SoV(Ml n»a-k-roo gooy Eight nia-ka-har hoo-roy Nine nia-kai-phar good-hats Ton nia-k-rcerum seuearu PI I 238 KEMAUKS ON TIIK VOCAUULAUIES Ilore, althouf^li tlio formations are not exactly regular, tlio prefixion of an initial syllable is evident. So is the qninarv character of the numeration. The preiix itself, however, in the Tanna and Mallicollo is no labial, as in the Louisiado and New Caledonian, but either A or a vowel. The next fact connected with the Louisiade vocabularies is one of greater interest. Most of the names of the dit- ferent parts of the body end in da. In the list in qufstion they were marked in italics ; so that the proportion they hoar to the words not so ending was easily seen. Now it is only the words belonging to this class that thus terminate. Else- where the ending da is no commoner than any other. What does this mean? If we look to such words as inatu- da=:= f^yes, sopa-da --- lips, ma/ca-da = teeth, and some other naturally plural names, we should infer that it was a sii,n, of timnber. That this, however, is not the case is shewn by the equivalents to tonrjue, none, and other sintjle mcnihers where the affix is equally common. What then is its import? The A?7icrican tongues help us here. English Head Eye Ear Nose Tongue Hair Hand Foot Enomsii Head Eye Ear Nose T(tngue Hand Foot MnAVA na-guilo ni-gccoge iia-pagat(> ni-onigo no-giu'ligi na-uiodi ni-baagadi no-gonagi MOXA (1)* nu-ciuti nu-chi nu-cioca nn-siri nu-ncno nu-borc ni-bope AllIl'ONI ne-iiialat na-toele MoKoisr ni-cote ne-otiguic ua-pakoni na-ccuta na-poguona MoxA (2) nu-chuti MoxA (3) un-chiuti nu-ki nu-.sn*i nu-iione nu-bonpo nu-nene nu-borc ni-bope Now in these, and in numerous other American tongues, the prefix is the possessive pronoun; in other Avords, there is a great number of American languages where the caprccity for abstracting the thing possessed from the possessor is so slight as to make it almost impossible to disconnect the noun from its pronoun. I believe, then, the affixes in question * These are three cliftereut dialecta. English. Fnol Li'g Thujh Ml/ yrri- Eiirs yitse Enm Hnir Pure Mnlllh Tccl/t Tmiuc Ann Fist Head Hero the light, nf nor yet EXflMHII. Hair Hand FlKll Head Eije yiisp Ttiiujiip Teeth Ear Here nation k OF THE V(>YA(iK OV TIIK KATTI.K.SXAKK. 239 have a possessive power ; and am not aware that possessive ailjuncts thus incorporfited have been recognised in any of the languages for tnesu parts; indeed, they are generally considered as American characteristics. How far does their presence extend? In the New Cale- donian vocabulary of La Billardiere we find it. The names of the parts of the body all take an affix, which no other class of words does. This is ffhn^ ffi'ffi, or (/hai , or other similar combination of ff with a vow( . In \'an Diemen's Land, an important locality, we find the following series of words, which are submitted to the judgment of tlu^ reader. Fnol Leg Thiilh Mhj yrck Ears yiise Ki/rs Hiiir Fare Mniilh IWlh Ttmyiic Arm FisI Head Wkstehn Tasmaniax. Inla pooa = piya =^ posteriors, lirnmer I. tula :=: turi =rr kuoc , Jiruincr I. cawara-ny (Ionia lowli-na nio-na pullatonla = matara-piilnpnlura == eyelashes , liriorly I. l)aroata ])alani-na manrahlo ca-iiia yannalople = yinge-da, lirierly I. tnlla-na alree reaunema-na pulboa-ny Hero the termination 7hi appears elsewhere, as in ?f)ematia = light, naba(/ee-}ia = sun -^ but by no means so fre(pumtly, nor yet with such an approach to regularity. ExdMSII, CincuLAR Head lluir parba Hand rabal-ga Flint rabiic-ka Head o\vuc-ka Ei/r niamoric-ca yose rowari-ga Tinigtie inamana — mi men Teeth cawna Ear cowanrig-ga Here however, it must not be concealed that the termi- nation ka, or ga, occurs in other words, such as tenal-ga 240 KE.MAUKS ON THK VOCAHULAUIKS = laugli, tar-ga ^= cry, teiri-ga = walk, lamunika = see. Tlieso, however, arc verbs; and it is possible (indeed pro- bable) that the k or g is the same as in the precedinj^' .sub- stantives, just as the m in su-m and ii-iiL is the m in nwm. ftw, and i^ii. Still, this will not apply throughout; c. y. tli'- words like lalli-ga = kangaroo, para-ka = flower, and others. EnHLISH. EaSTKKN TA.SMANIAN. Eye Icpe-na Ear pelvcrata Elbow rowoUa Foot langa-na Fist trcAv Head pathe-na-naddi Hair cetha-na Hand anama-na = ncnia-da, liriuner I. Knee nannabona-na Ley lathana-nia Teeth yan-na = yinge-da, Brierly I. Tongue me-ua = inimo-na, liruiner 1. Chin canip-na Neck Icpcra Breast wagley Here, the number of other words ending in na is very considerable; so considerable that, if it were not for the cumulative evidence derived from other quarters, it would be doubtful whether the na could legitimately be considered as a possessive affix at all. It may, however, be so even in the present instance. To these Ave may add two lists from the Lobo and Utanata dialects of the south-western coast of New Guinea. Enolisii Utanata Loiio Arms too nima-ngo Back nrimi ru.suko-ngo Heard iiiiuoovo Ticlly iuiamv kainboro-iigo Breast- female Ttreast-male auw 1 paioty) giugo-ugo Chech- awamu wafiwirio-ngo Ears ianic Eyebrows Eyes uiatata-ngo-waru mame matatoto-ngo Fingers Foot uinia-nga-sori niouw kai-iigo Hands too-maro iiiuia-ngo-uta OF THE VOVAGE 01' Till". KAT TI.ESNAKE. 2U Hair Head A'nrc Month Nose Neck Tongue Thigh Teeth Toes Finally, we have the long, and evidently compound forms of the Corio, Colack, and other Australian dialects; long and cvidontly compound forms which no hypothesis so readily txpiains as that of the possessive adjunct; a phenomenon which future investigation may shew to be equally Oceanic and American. oeirio inoiKi-ufi^-fnni oopiunv inono-ngo or iripu kiii-iigo-woko irie orio-ugo birimboc sikaio-ngo eiiui gara-iig mare karlo-ngo ai willaiiiiiia titi riwoto-ngo nisora MOTES AND ADDENDA. The vocabularies of the Rattlesnake arc (l) Australian, (2) Papuan. The former were for the parts about Capo York, t. e. the North- crraost part of Aiistralia , and also the part nearest the Papuan area. The Kowrarega was the form of speech best illustrated. The Papuan vocabularies were for the Louisiade Archipelago ; wholly new as data for a very important and interesting area. The following paper, connected with the remarks on the in- cnrporation of the possessive pronoun with certain substantives, though on an Asiatic language may find place here. 16 i -v. ! * ON A ZAZA AOCABIHAIIY. UKAD BKFOUE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY'. MAY Tin: -I'MiU. The followinj.? vocubulary is one taken by Dr. H. Saml- with from Ji Kurd of the Zaza tribe, one of the rudest of the whole Kurd family, and one for which we liavc no ))lii- lologieal spceiincns. l!]X(iI,ISU. Za/.a. hCHtl svYV-min. ri/rs tcliiui-(v«m. fi/ehro/i'S \mv\n'-min. nose zinj('-?Hm. moustache siniiU'-H»//<. heard ardi,sh('-/H//j. liUK/iie zoan('-HJ?«. Icelh dildoiu''-?/)//*. ears '^wsXxv-min. ftnijers inronoun of the first person = t/uj = ?neus -- f'fiob', i^c; so that sere-;/i/>/ = caput-wtv/w (or ffwi), and pie-;/. son. siii-iiiioii , tills. linniiti , mother. I'm;. Tan siii-iii'in/ii' , that. I'Irmrlitlliiri , man. ',■ !h-ii araiiitii , j;o»i(l. (ill in cs 11 , thinjj. f ./. . k iril llri'f. k> ll' lafjrnuhuki , bad. <•», yes. lire . kari (inii , no. .,-•. , liii (? SI til 11 van , ono. nitrdnij, eat. 'CI. ka-Hi . Jil. kali: (In rii, two. /iiiinii/iii/ii, (h'ink. ,,■,,• . k- 1:1 / ;. . k.i-rii Irsfil , throo. iildisr , Hoe. inniilu-nil , four. fiiniinl . eyes. Mr. A sii/iii-riiiij, live. Irhrliinlo/i , iinj^er. ill.' y,ai sikiii , six. IVdl'lllil'llllKJ , nose. wjiicb it sii/iii-riiiinaro, seven. ti'lanijiiiil , ear. Ulh ]■ sii/iii-riinlrsal , oi<;ht. himjiunl , hair. liiolo SI snkii-rimcndari(t , nine. /ii/i()ini' , name. -liiii/ in know , II 1 Since these vocabularies were laid before tlie Society, a ".Journal of a ('ruise among tlie Islands of the Western Pii- cifie," by Capt. .1. E. Erskine, R. N., has been published. This shows tlie sources of the preceding lists; since the bishop I of New Zealand accompanied the expedition, and succeeded in taking back with him, on his return, some youths fori the purposes of education. The class to which these vocabularies belong has never been, sufficiently for the purposes of publication, reduced to writing, nor is any member of it known to scholars in general, in respect to its grammatical structure. This, how- ever, will probably not be the case much longer, since Capt. Erskine has placcil the materials for the study of the Anei- 1 turn (Annatom) language in the hands of Mr. Norriss, wl is prepared for its investigation. Neither has the class been I wholly neglected. A granunar of the Tanna (an allied lan- guage) was drawn up by Mr. Heath, but it has not been published, and is probably lost. Dr. Pritchard, who had seen extracts from it, writes , that it contained a (riinil il^ and ,^) Ll,l,M'()l,I,(t we. tli.«y. toil. God. sj)irit. father. son. mother. iiinn. thing. ycH. no. oat. drink. HOC. oves. finger. nose. ear. hair. name. ! tlie Society, a lie AVcstorn Pa- been published, since the bisiiop , and succoedt'd onie voutlis for donp; lias never cation , reduced ti to scholars in ire. This , ho^v• g-er, since Capt. dy of the Auei- r. Norriss, who s the class been I (an allied Ian- it has not been [ihard, Avho had lined a /rimil »> .\Mt KiiiuiMAxrto I a\<;ia nioditied as to ^ive the appearance ut an iuHeetion. The following tables exhibit ihe numerals of certain other I«!iui(ls in the nei;;hb(»urIi(»o(l. They aic t.'iken from (Japtain Krskiiic's work, in which reference is made tt) a "Descrip- tion of the Islands in the Western Pacific Ocean, by A. Clieyne." This has not been examined by the pr(\seiit writer. Tana. I'm . . . k I ML . . ki liai. . ko 1.. . . ki li iiiii III! (•') . . k.i-iti lO kaliin VI k" 1.. CO ka-rli iiin' Foxr l.l'SI . lO'll . lu. . . lima . OHM. . litil . . v:li II . iva . . laiiLja XA' Isr.i; ot- . I'l.NKS. 1^:a . 1 1. . . .VII , . . Vf I I . . I . , t;i-lilic . Ilol.'l , . IIO-llll . IMI-llt'li. Illlll , iio-lu'ii , In , I'l-.A. I ilii . |>rirli:i , , I kilii . . . Hill k . , llllllllllllll lii-;iilii . Ill I. Inlll lit , liiiiii Irilii iiii. Vi:\fn;\. Iii'In . . . , III' Ink. . lil-kllllM . lO'llnrk. n.'-yrii |>ii liils Mill |i:i Illlll liiiii wi'l . . |iai ai . niiii-w "Ink |i:ii''iiMi riiiii-\vr\ I'll |p:il •m'li niiii |ii>liil |i;ir lull >iu. ilr k.in. lima . li'- lu'iiiirli' |Miii iluk |ia-iiii Hat. u». TiiiT. |ini' II . . rlias. |i:ir inn , lil-i'li>, ii.'li' nin lillll'i-lf. ji.ll liii . rk-cli'. . lilii. . rlili Ifiiicn. . liiiMi '.; riiicii. . kiiiicntji'mrn . -ko liiii'iiuii. . Iiio ijPl'. Mr. Abraham's IMallicolo re})resents the same lau^'uage with i1h' y.allicolo vocabulary of ('aptain CouU's Voyages, with wliiel' it })rotty closidy agrees. llLs Mrromang'o is men; i)(!culi;ir. S7////==: six r:= the jMal- liiolo siiLdi, which is, itscdf, nearly the .v/7,y//= one. The -rinij in suku-r/////, too, is the .Mallicolo rimn. This wo know, from the analogies of almost ail the languages of I'lilynesia and the Indian Archipelago, to bo the word lima ^IhiikI. Ibmce e-rtma (Malliculo), Itand, and suku-;vV/<7 iKiToniango) ^= (y/;<' /aaid. The raf in menda-zv// is the IMal- licolo -hals in v-ImiIs, the ^lalay i\\u-pa( =/'our. Dn-m is the Mallicolo c.-ffj , there l)eing in each case a prefixed syllable. The analysis of Icsal and sat/araii is less dear. Neither is it certain how nyaraodleii . =. (en. The other numerals are compounds. This, perhaps, is sufficient to show that the dirt'erence between the numerals of tlie Mallicolo and Krro- manji'o is a difference of a very superficial kind. So it is with the Tana, Fotuna, and the first Uea specimens. We must always remember that the first syllable is generally a non- radical prefix. In the Tana of the preceding table, the words for (), 7, S 0, and 10, seem to be merely the words for 1 , 2, ){, 4, and 5 repeated, and something of the same kind appears in the first Ilea. Perhaps the representation may be imperfect. At any rate the Tanna of (Jook's Voyage runs — Or Errouau. The Nuia or rnimor iimner.ils ure the .saino. 248 ON THK PERSONAL I'KOXOUXH AND NLMK.KALS &C. Eno. Tanna. Eno. Tanna. one . r-eedee. three ka-har. two . ka-roo. four. kai-phar. five . k-reerum. eight. ma-ka-har. six . mrt-r-ecdeo. nine . mrt-kal-pliar. seven »irt-ka-roo. ten. . //m-k-reerum Tlie same appears in the Balad of New Caledonia. Now Cooks New Caledonian runs — New Caledonian. Eno. New Caledonian. wfl-geeaing. six. . wa-nnim-geeek. Ex a. o7ie . two . jva-roo. three tva-teen. four. w«-mbaeek five . wa-nnim. seven wa-nnira-noo. eight, rvn nnini-gain. nine . wrt-nniin-baeek. ten . . wa-iinim-aiuk. The Yengen and Lifu vocabularies are not so different but that the lu and kun of the one = the luk and yen of tlu- other, as well as the lo and kiuu of the second Uea, and the roo and gen of the Balad. The importance of these non-radical syllables in tho nu- merals has been indicated by the present writer in tho ap- pendix to Mr. RI'Gillivray's 'Voyage of the Rattlesnake' There we find several well-selected specimens of the langua- ges of the Louisiade archipelago. The fact of certain affi- nities between these and the New Caledonian is there indi- cated. Each has its prefix. In each the prefix is a labial. English. Two. Louisiade patVie-tuan. New Caledonia wa-teeu &c. Now the Tana and Mallicolo tongues have a prefix also, but this is not a labical. It is rather a vowel or k (guttural or palatal). Here lies a diflF(!rence — a difference of detail. Yet tho same change can now be shown to be within the pale of the New Caledonian itself, as may be seen by com- paring par-roo and par-gcn {pah-gen?) with A6'-luk and /j6?-yen. Ihe change from r to / creates no difficulty. In one of the Tana vocabularies one -= li-ti , in another ^-eedee. These points have been gone into for the sake of guard- ing against such exaggeration of the differences between the languages of the j)arts in question as the apparent differen- ces in the numerals have a tendency to engender. A M E R I C A. (NORTH). ON THE LANGUAGES OF THE OREGON TElllUTORY. IIKAD BEFORE THE ETHNOLOGICAL SOCIETY ON THE IlTII DECEMBEU 1844. The languages dealt with arc those that lie between Rus- sian America and New California. It is only, however, such as are spoken on the sea-coast and on the American frontier that are fairly known to us. Concerning some of the latter, such as the Blackfoot, the notices are deferred. Liltle, in the present state of our knowledge, can be attempted beyond the mere verification of vocabularies. In his list, however, of these, the writer has attempted to be exhaustive. It is convenient o enumerate these vocabularies separately and to proceed from North to South. Qiieen Charlotte s Island. — Tiie two chief vocabularies are Mr Tohnie's and Messrs Sturgin and Bryant's, in the Jour- nal of the Geographical Society and the Archa?oh)gia Ame- ricana respectively. They represent different dialects. Enolish. Sturgin & Hkyaxt. Haidahok, Tolmik Man kcosct kleilhat.sta Woman kna, ana tsata Canoe cloo kloo Tobacco qall quil IVitcr hi .tie hinitle Sun tzue shaudlain HI ;> 250 ON TItF. LANCilACiKS OF THK ORROON TFUIUTORY. KnOLISH. jSTrHGIN & JJkVANT. HaLDAHOF , TOLMIE. Moon kulm kliough Bain tull tull Snow tull hatter (111 an w Dog liali hootch Bear tunn tann T. caj^en teca Thou tinkyah tungha With these, the few words in the Mithridates coincide MlTlIRIDATES. TOI.MIE. One sounchou squansiing stung klughunnil 71 wo Three stonk sloonis Chhnmi'injau. — IMr Tolmie's vocabulary — Journal of Oeo- grnphieal Society. ^>poken between 53** 30' and 55" 30' JN . \j, Billcchnola. — Mr Tolmies vocabulary; ihid. Spoken on the Salmon River. Friendly Village. — In Mackenzie's Travels , we find a few words from a tribe on the Salmon River. Their locality is called by Mackenzie the Friendly Village. By the aid of Mr Tolmie's vocabularies, we can now place this hitherto unfixed dialect. It belongs to the Billechoola tongue. Knomsh. Fkiendly Village. Billechoola. Salmon ziniilk shimilk Bog watts watz House zlaachle shmooV Butk-tnat zemnez Cedar -hark -lilunkc I tzumnii Beaver conloun coulouu Slone dichts quilstolomick Water ulkan kullah Mat gistcom stuchom Bonnet ilcaette kayeeto Filz-Hngh Sound. — For these parts we possess only the numerals, They coincide most with the Haeltzuk, a lan- guage that will next be noticed. The termination in slum is common to the Fitz-Hugh Sound and the Blackfoot nu- merals. English, (wo. F. Sound, malscum Haeltzuk , malook. ON Tin: LAN(iu.\ni:.s of thk oukoon tkuiutouy. 251 English , F. Sound, Haeltzuk, three. utascum. yootook. English , /'. Sound, Haeltzuk, Billechooln , four. nioozcum. moak. nioash. English , /'. Sound, Haeltzuk , Billechoola , five. thokaesciim skeowk. tzeiuch. English, F. Sound, Haeltzuk, six. kitliscum. katlowk. English , F. Sound, Haeltzuk , seven. atloopooskum raalthlowsk. English , F. Sound, Haeltzuk, ten. highioo. .aikas. llaellznk. — Mr TolmiGs vocabulary. Spoken from 50" 30' to 53" 30' N. L. — Journal of Geograph. Soc. Quadra and Vancouver's Island — Noolka Sound. — For those parts we have several vocabularies. 1. The Numerals. — From Dixon — Miihridates, iii., 2, 115. 2. King Geo e's Sound. — The Numerals, Mith., iii., 2, llf). 3. Mozimi's MS. J'ocabulanj. — See 3/ith., iii,, 2. 4. Captain Cook's Vocahidary. — This is comparatively co- pious. It represents the same language with the three pre- ceding. 5. The Tloaquatch vocabulary of Mr Tolmie. Jonrn. of (kog. Soc. —This certainly represents, as is truly stated by Dr. Scouler, the same language as the Nootka-Sound voca- bulary of Cook. English. Cook's Nootka. Tolmik's Tlaoquatcu. Ski/ naas Mountain noohchai House niahtai Paddle oowhalibie Canoe shapats Water chaiik Go cho naase uotcheh maas oowhapic tshapjtits tcliaak tclia-alche 252 ON THK LANGUAUES OF THE OUECiON TEUUITOUY, I Knomsh. Cook's Nootka. Tolmie's Tlaoquatcu. Run kuinmiitchchut kumitkok Bow moostatte moastatit Arrow tscehatte tzeliatite Knife kotyok tzokquaeek Man tanass tanais 6. Straits of Fnca. — A short vocabulary taken duririf^ tlio voya;j:(3 of tlio Siilil y Mcxicana — Arcliccol. Amer., ii.^ 300. Is not this INIozino'sV 7. The Wakash vocabuhiry of Jewitt. — Archceol. Amer., ii. ;?06. English. Water Ski/ Stars Moon Sun Ear FrcA. ihaac tchaak tacuihamach naase uliusac taastass ilajudshashitle hopnlh dagiua tlopil Pipi Tlaoquatch. Wakash, chahak sieyah tartoosc oophelth ooplietlh parpee h'awHcheu. — Spoken at the entrance of Trading? River opposite Vancouver's Island. Mr Tolmie's vocabulary. — See Journal of Geograph. Societ. Noosdalum. — Spoken in Hood's Channel. — Ibid. The Atna of Mackenzie. — This we may now place. It re- sembles the Noosdalum, Avith dialectal differences. Noosdalum. sohwioken • slieoakatso skyauw skncha kah spilchun lilkaa halaitan schomotim ytsh tziniaan In Baer's Statisdsche mid Ethnographische Nachrichien i'lher die Bussischen Besitznngcn an dcr Nordwestkiisie von Amcriku, we iind a second vocabulary named Atna. This is spoken on the Copper River in Russian America, and represents a different languaoe from the Atna of Mackenzie. Both, how- ever, belong to the same* group. The plausible mode of English. Atnah. Man scuynlouch Woman smosledgonsk Beaver schugli Dog scacah Water shaweliquoih Plains spilela Here tldaelych Iron souconniang Bow isquoinah Arrow squaili This is inaccurate — See following papers. ON THK LANfiUAtJES OF THE OKEUOX TEKIUTOKY. 253 JkcoI. Amer., accounting for this coincidence, is to suppose that two tribes named themselves fncri, which throughout the Athnbascar lanffuages is expressed by the root t-n, as dinii/f, /enni, tiHiin, &.C. Squallycnnish. — Spoken at Puget's Sound. J\[r Tohnie in T. a. S. C/wnoo/i. — For tiie important hmguages of tlic Chenook or Fhitliead Indians on the river Columbia, we have the fullovving (la fa: 1. Franchere's vocabulary; Arc/ueol. Americana, u., 379. 2. Parker's vocabulary; communicated in M. S., by A. Gallatin to I)r Prichard. 3. Cathlascou of Tolmie, J. G. S. 4. Chenook of Tolmie, ibkf. Of these vocabularies the Chenook of Parker and Fran- chcre coincide closely. Parker's Chenook, compared with the two vocabularies of Tolmie , agrees most with the Cath- lascou. Kalapooiah. — This tribe is placed by Parker on the Mul- toinah river. According to Tolmie, their language is spo- ken on the Wallamat Plains. 1. Tolmie's vocabulary. J. C S. 2. Parker's vocabulary. M. S. from Gallatin to Dr Prichard. The two vocabularies represent one and the same language. Okanagan. — Spoken on Fraser's liiver. Mr Tolmie's vo- cabulary. The Okanagan vocabulary enables us to fix the following one : The Salish. — This is an anonymous vocabulary from Du- ponceau's collection. Arclioiolog. Americ, ii, 306. It is evi- dently closely akin to the Okanagan. English. Salisii. Okanagan. Man ckeltJlniaiu^ IVoiHClH ^ukulthliineiloocb Canoe 'tleagh althleim Stars. ko'kasinh jhooos Rain steepais tepais Snow araaikut raakoot Water saioolkh sauwulh Mountain aitzumkumniok atzhnuiok Leer atsooleea Roebuck klatzecnim Bear c'.summaitshui skummachist Wolf n'tsseetsan nutzetzim One neo uuchs Two essel uskul 254 I i •'i h ^ f)N THE LAN(JU.\(IE8 OF THE OKEdON TEUIUTOKY Knolish. Sai-ish. Okanagan. Three tsailliis kaalthlcis Four inos inoas Five tseel koheil Seven scespil sheespil Ten opan opnniot h'likctat. Spoken between Fort Nez Perce's, Mount liai- nier, and the Columbia Falls. 1. Mr Tolmie's vocabulary, 2. Mr Parker's vocabulary JNI. S. from Gallatin to Dr Prichard. These represent allied dialects of the same language. Shahapfa?!, Nez Perce s. — It is truly stated by (iallatin that the Shahaptan and Kliketat languages are allied. 1. Mr Tolmie's vocabulary. 2. Mr Parker's vocabulary M. 8. from Gallatin to Or Prichard. JamkaUic. Spoken near the sources of the Wallamat, Mr Tolmie's vocabulary. Umpqua. — On the river so called. Mr Tolmie's voca- bulary. This is the most southern point for vhich we possess Ore- gon vocabularies. Four more vocabularies complete the enumeration of our data for the parts in question. 1 . Shoshonie or Snake Indians. — The first is a southern itr central one, the Shoshonie or Snake vocabulary, collected by Say, and representing a language south of that of the ^ez Perces. Archa^ol. Americ. , ii. 306. 2. Sussee. — The Sussee of Umfreville, is either spoken within the Oregon Territory, or within the districts imme- diately to the north of it. 3. The Nagail — Sec Mackenzie's Travels. 4. The Tacidli — See Archoiol. Americ, ii. 305. Such are the vocabularies for the Oregon Territory of North America. In number they amount to forty-one. Deal- ing with speech as the instrument of intercourse, it is highly probable that these vocabularies may represent as many as nineteen different languages, that is, modes of speech, mu- tually unintelligible. Dealt with, however, ethnologically, their number is evidently capable of being reduced. In the present state of our knowledge, it is convenient to leave the Shoshonie language* unplaced. All that we * Sinco tliis 8tateiiicnt waH road, the author has heen enal)l«Ml, tliroiiijli the nieaus of a C'uinaiichu vocabulary, with which he was favoured by Mr ON THE hANCilAtiKS OF Till: OUKUON TKUKITOKV, 255 llatin to Dr L southern or y, collected that of liic inologicaliy, tblt'd, tliioiiiili vvourcd by Mr possess of it is the vocabulary noticed above. It consists of only twenty-four words. Their affinities (such as thoy are) are miscellaneous English , beaver. Shoshonie , hanish. C/icnook , eena. If nidi ih , tzing CalliUisrou , kanook. English, salmon. S/tdshndk' , augi. lluidak , swaggan. English, horse. Shoshonie, bunko. liliickfout , pinncchoniotnr. pennakoinet. teoman, English, Shoshonie , wcpee. Souriquois , meboujnu. Penohseol , m'phenim. Micmnc, epit. Echemin , apet. Pima, uha. Calapooiiih , ai)omcik. English , friend. Shoshonie , hauls. Vhclimarhti , keta. Onondago , ottie. English , ?rater. Shoshonie , pa. New Sweden, l.ij. Abjonkin , ne-pi, passhn. English, good. Shoshonie , saut. Sh a ha plan , tautz. Pima , tiuot. Chocia , chito — great. Crow , esah — great. bassats — mani/. Bolljit'it., to (lt;tenniiit', that tlu'so two Idnfyimp^t's aio ullii-il. (Tliis was written in 1815. Since, tlum, tiic I'vidonce that tiio Shoslioni and Cu- ■iianeh belong to the same family has become conclnsive.j 256 ON THK I-ANOl'A(JK.S OF TIIK OUKOON TKIUIITOKY. f ! .' % English, go. Slioshonie , nunieraro Kunntchen , nnmilthla English , come. Shoshunie , kcomak. Nez Pcrces, come. Englisii , awl. Slioshonie , weeu. Ahnenin , bay. English , no. S/ios/ionie, kayhee. Ahnenin , chien. Pulowulami , cho. Ojihhenuiy , kaw. Ollaiva, kaween. Old Algonkin, kah. Chelimacha , kahie. m '\ It is also advisable to deal cautiously with the Susseo lan- guage. Uinfreville's vocabulary is short, and consistinj; almost exclusively of the names of articles of commerce. Lists of this sort are of little value in ethnography. Still. upon the whole, it confirms the current opinion as to the place of the Sussee language, viz. that it is* Athabascan. At any rate, it has certain miscellaneous affinities. liOi English, Sussee, eye. senonwoh. Kenay, Taculli, snaga. onow. Chipewyan , nackhay. English, Sussee, five. coo. Chipewyan , coun. English , Sussee , kettle. usaw. Taculli, osa. English , . Sussee , axe. chilthe. Taculli, chachil. * The evidence of this being the case has siuce become conclusive. 1859. ON TIIK LAN(ilIAOr,S OK TIIK OUKdON TICKKITOUV. 2: J/ e conclusive. — Enj^li.sli, laiife. Sussrr, inai'Hli. Illinois, iTiaricsa. Minitari, inatsc. Knglisli, s/inrs. Sitssrr , siscau. Tacitlli, ki.scot. Knglisli, (Hif. Siissi't', uttogar. Kskiiiw , attowsoak. adaitsuk. adoajak. atainek. English , Ihri'C. Snssee , taiiky. Komi, tolu'like. Taculli, toy. Chiprtri/an, taghy. English, full/: Sussce , tachoy. A'cnai , t(!nki. Tacnlti, tingkay. Chipeivyan , dengky. English, seven. Sussee, checheta. Mohaivk, chahtahk. Onomlayn , tschoatak. Seneca, jawdock. Oneida, tziadak. Nolloivay , ohatay. English , ten. Sussee, cuncescnunneo. Chipewyan , canothna. Laying tlieso two languages aside, and reserving the Black- font for future inquiries, the other vocabularies arc refcr- liblc to two recognized groups. 'V\w Nagail and Taculli are what (iallatin calls Athabasrun, All tlio* rest are Avhat Pri- cliard calls Nootka-CoJumhicm. Respecting the former class, tlie ovidence is unequivocal, and the fact generally admitted, llospocting the latter, the statement requires consideration. At first glance, Mr Tolmie's vocabularies differ materially * The Uniqua has since been shewn to be the Athabaskan — 1859. 17 258 ON Tiir. i,.\N(iiA(iKs (»r Tin; (tui:t fundamental words, characteristic of all the American laii- _ifua<>^e; reco<;'nisin<^, also, as ;i rule of criticism, that in tlio same class of ton<;ues tho evidence of the numerals is unim- portant in the determination of di/f'crcHrcn , and coiiiparin;: the sixteen Oregon vocabularies of INlr Tolmio with each other, wo may satisfy ourselves as to tho radical unity of the <:r(iuii. To these lists, and to tho accompanying paper of Dr. 8roii- lor, reference is accordingly made. The value of these groiijis (the Athaba-^can and the Kootka-Columbian) is a ditfcront and a more difficult question. The DKUvimum differeiKc 1m'- tween any two known languages of the Athabascan gi(Mi|i is that between English and German. The ma.i/miim ditlVi- (mce between the most unlike languages of the >Joutka-('o- lumbian group is that between the modern Greek and Por- tuguese, /. c. the most distant tongues of the classical stotk of tho Indo-Kuropean tribe, llonce, the terms in ((ue.-tioii aro equivalent to the more familiar terms , Gothic, Ccllic, S/n- rotiic , &c. All this, however, is illustration, rather tli.in absolute arrangement; yet it serves to give definitude to the current opinions u})on the subject. To tho current views, however, the writer takes exception. lie considers that tho groups in question have too high a val.U': and that they are only equivalent to the primary subdivisions o{ slucks like the Gothic, Celtic, and Classical, rather than to the stocks themselves. Still less can they have a )iif;;lior and more exaggerated value, and be dealt Avith as equiva- lent 1o groups like the Imhi-Eutopean. Hence, tho differences between the Athabascan langua}rri< of the Oregon and the Nootka-Columbian languages of the Oregon, are tho differences between the J-,atln and Greek, the Welsh and Gaelic, the German and Icelandic, rather than those between the Gorman and Russian , the Latin ami Persian, the Greek and Lithuanic, &c. In determining tho higher and more comprehensive class. we must take in a third group of languages. These are those of Russian America. 'J'hey have generally been referred tn two groups of uncertain value, viz. the Kolooch and the ON TiiK i-.\N<;rA(ii:H ok 'iiii; ouiMioN 'iKuurrouY. 2r)9 jfinitudc to tli F.skimo; tlic fonncr, for llio part iil)ont Sitca, (tr Korfolk .Niiiiid, tlui Iiittritisii As.'ocintion at York, and founded uiu)n the comparison ol" tli(! Athabascan voi-abularies of MacKen/ie and I)obl)s, on till' one side, with the NV^estern Kskinio ones, on the other. And the K(»Ionch lan^uas Man Spark Wind Sitca. kaah itanna katclst kakeck aaka kaliaka chakU^yh hcoklya keolliclia Cauiack. kryya taidia koudat clnskoohka nanoak Idukha sliook cliatalalii kyaock Now, by taking in the Eskimo of the Aleutian Islands, this list might be doubled; and by dealing with the Kenay as Eskimo , it might be trebled. Again, by attempting to fix the points whereat the Eskimo languagn ceases, and the Koloocli tongue begins, w(! nniy ;;('t further evidence that the difference between them is ex- aggerated; since the languages passed by gradual transitions into each other. What follows, moreover, is cumulative evidence towards tlio same conclusion. Over and above the vocabularies collected by IMr Tolmie tliat have already been dealt with , there is a seventcMmth, viz. the Tinufhans. This is stated in l)r Scouler"s accompa- nying paper to be the most northern dialect with which th(! Hudson's J]ay traders come in contact. It is also stated to bo Sitcan ; and that truly. Knoi.isii. TrNOIIAAS. Sitca. Sca-nllrr yonelitz yontch Tiivcr-nllcr coostali kooshta Bear liooctch lioots Whale Woman yioagh shewat yaaga shavvot 17* ,^l, ' j 200 ON Tin: i,AN(iirA(n;.s or tiik ouk«h»\ ti:uimt(mN TIIK l,\N«ll'\tll„S ui- IIIK nUrfioN TKUIMTortY, 201 Kiif^lisli, river. Thnii/u«itr/i, ' Honk. ( 'iiilitirh' , nliiook -— st'a. Kni^lisli, mill. I'uhipDitiuh , tochtochn. ('adi)irK . kciliih. Itnnahishkds i-hi'tak. F.nj^lisli, siiiid. IlllHltlll , il k.'iik. (hmnhislihn , I'huohnk. EngliHli, moiniloin. h'lihrlat, [laniifitcct Cudiuclv , poonhokanlic. Eiif^lish, lioHsr. Klilii'tiit, nccdh. S/inhapliiu , ciiccdh. dttiUitcli , nail. Eu-lish. son;/. Cook's Nnolkii, ooiiook. no/Hil'is/i/ca , oiiiioohailar — sintj English, fJO. ('oitk's Nooika, chn. (tonalds/tkd , icha. Enj;lisli, i'huir(\ rill. ( 'ook's Noolkft, Isook. Cadiack , chaggidzn. Oonalashka , tooliitda. English, crow. Cook's Noofka, kaonnc. Cadiuck , ktilnhak. English, firr. Cook's yonlka, cencck. Cadinck , knok. Oonalas/iku , keynak. English , .skidl. Cook's Ntiiilkd, koornctz. Oo)i(d(ts/tkd , kauihek. English , leclh. Cook.s Nooika, cheecliootsh. Cadkick , hoodeit. 262 ON Tin: I.ANUUAfil'.S OK TMK OREOON TKKKITOKY. \r^ Enjijlisli , middle finger CiKik's Ntmllca, taeeai. Ciidiuvk , teokha. Knglish , htnv much. IfairHztu'/t , kinshook. Kdnnlclicn , qnien. NiKistlitlunt , (juicn. Onnalds/tku, kfinnahen. Cadiack , kouhchocn. English , mat. Chennuk , swussak. Sh(ihii/}fnn, tooko. Oumdashka , sootok. Englisli , bow. OkuiKujiin , tsnk([nonnk. OoiKdas/iku , saoheck. English, house. Sqind/f/uiiiish, aalall. Oomddshkn , oolon. English , iron. Sqiudbjamisli , kuninuttin. Cadiack , konilyahook. English, sea-oiler. Billccltiuda, ([unncc. Oonalashka , cheenatok. Englisli, hear. Haidali , tan. Oonalashka , tanhak. To this list a previous sttitoniont applies more especially. I'y treatiuj^^ the Siteu and Kenay vocaoularles as Eskimo, the nunilxjr of coincidences niij;ht have been doubled. JJesides this, it must be renunnbered that, in Tolmic's vo- cabularies , no terms expressive of the different ])arts nt human body are f^iven; and that several names of the cdiii nioncst objects are wanting-, c. //. fire, «N:c. iseither have the vocabularies of Wrangell for the varit'il dialects of Russian America been niad(i use of. As the lists, however, stand, tlu^ author considers that in' has shewn reason for believing- that the Atiiabascan, tlic Kolooch, the Nootka-Columbian, and the Cadiack proups ai-i' subordinate members of one large and important class— the Eskimo; a fact which, coinciding with all his other inquiries NOTHS. 263 in AiDcrican P^tlinolojry , lircaks down, fuitlicr than 1ms liitliorto boon dono, the broad and trfnchant lin(! of domar- (iition between the circunipohir and tlie other Indians of the Western Continent. NO T K 8. X(nK I. Ill ,1 vnliiablo jiapf'i' On tlio Trilns inli.iliiUiiLr llio N. \V. Cojist of AiiM'r'ua ritatl a low wooks aftcrwanls hy I >r. .1. ScKiilcr tln> t'ollovviji;;' talilfs slii'wed — 1. Tlic fact that the Nulka forms of s|n'('cli were to Ix; foiui ,.,... Tlalniwicli, . . Clalmuiah ('»iin! 'i"cliooi|iia , Sacko SImr Misclicnias, . . Misi-luMnas ll'liiil lire ijitu ihtiiuff i\koots-ka-niainoU , I'lkta-manniiok 11' lull live i/iiii stii/iiiij'.' An kaak-wawa, I'.kta-wawa V Lrl mr sec .... Nannanitcli . . Nannanitcli Sun Oin'tli, . . . Ootlach Shf Sicya, .... Say a t'riiif ( 'llamas. . . . Camas To sell MakoU, . . . MakoU liHtlrrslmiil .... Commatax, . . . Commatax b. I.MIl.lSII. \hin />'".'/ Il'iiman lilrl llifr (mi Fiilhvr Miitlwi- tricml SnAllAI'I'AN. >iama Maswar Aiat ritcn Swapna Miahs I'isli.l I'iUa Likstiwa Wai <..\\\ AI.I.A. Kl.lKI. 1 A Wilisli AVins 'I'aliiiiifsl lint Aswan 'I'ilalii Aiat 'I'uliaiiat J'itiniks Asliam Asliam Islit Miaiiasli I'sllit I'sllit J'tslia I'tsha llliai Ill.ai 264 Knomhii. Fire n 'titrr ll'nnil Sliiiic (iroiinil Sun Moon Si/irs Ctomis Hfiin Suom Ivr Horse Doij Jiiill'ulu Male Hlk h'niKilr Hlk (ivi'ii llcnv liliick Hear House (inn liodij Head Arm Ei/es Sose I'lfllS Moiilk Teeth Hands Feet Leys Morasscns fiood Bad Hot told Far Near Hijili l,ow While lUavk Red Here There U 'here Y U hen 'f Ifhaff H 'hi/ 'f irhof IVhirh-f H(hw noieh ? So vvirli Ilo/v I'ar't So far* N(»TKS. 8llAIIAI'TAN. Wai.i.awai.i.a. Kl.IKKTAT. AlH Sliiksli Sinks Tkiish 'I'shirsh 'rshaush llutsiii Sliika« Slnknas risliwji I'sliwa I'sliwa Wat.sjisli Titsliam 'Pitshani WisliiiMitiiksl All An Ailhai Ailhai. Witsciii llaslii Hash) Spalikt I'aslist Wiikit Ssliliauit Tohtoha Makii J'..i Maka Tahfisk Taliaiik Toll Shi k am Kiisi Kiisi Miikaiiikaii Kiisi Kiisi Kiisi Kiisi KnkiiHi MuHnnissin Musinnssin NVawakia Wawakia Wiiiat Tasliip Tasliipka Winat I'ahas Wapaiitle Saka .)aka Analmi Suit Suit Suit 'riiniini 'I'aiiipas Tuili>as Silaks W'aiiiHtksliasli lluslnis Tilpi I'alka Atiiii Kainkas Sliilliu Atsliasli Atsliash Natliim Natiinii Nosiiu Matsaia Mat.siu Ilim Em Am Tit Tit SpHlms Spai) Alia Aliwa Waha Waha Waiiisli Taiua IlcapUat Shkam Shkam Tahr Skeh Sho<'ali Kapwhish Mil la Tshailwit Sakas Sahwaili Salnvi'ali Ken is Kasat T(!\vislia K;isiit Waiat Wiat Wiat Keiiitam THiwas Tsa Tasliti llwaiam Hvvcanii Ahat Hill i to Niti Nailiaili Koik Olash SuiiulisinmU Tshiiniik Tsiinuk Sopilp Siitslia Siitsa Kiiia Tshna Stshiuak Kuna Kuna Skoiu! ^liniiV MiiiaV Mam :\IaiiaV Mun? Mun? .MishV Misli .•» Mishy iSlaiiainaV Maui y Jshi? Skin? Skin? MaV MamV MasV Milh? Milh? Kala Kulk Skulk Miwail? Maal? Kcwail Kwal Ks« MSH.I Ihiv lonijl Tn l"iiij 1 nix Tim 1 }'i)ii Ik she, i ire ye Then 1 Tn h> SI'f >r; sin/ ■/'-» talk In walk Tu read Tn nil Tn drink Tn slcf/t Tn )V(d() sin/ 'I'll talk 'I'll iriilli 'To rend Tn ml 'I'll ilviiik 'I'll sli'i-j) Tn iviikc 'Tu lui'e Tn lake Tn know 'I'll I'lirijet 'I'll i]ivc To seize Tu lie cold 'I'll III- sick Tn limit 'Tn lie Tn steal SlIAHAr'TAN. MahfveV KollHO Ki Joh Sii Siii Ipi Nim Iina Kiiiii Kiislia lliikcsli.'i llcisli.i Tsi'ksii ^\'|■ll;lsa \\';is;islij| ^\'i|>islla MaUusliji I'iiiimiU.sliM Waksii W.itiini.sliii I'iUllsJl J^iikiiasa 'ritoliishii Iiiishn Iiipislia Iswaiisa Koinaisa Tiikiiliksa ilisliaini.slia I'akwuslia WAt.r.AWAI.LA. Maalli Kwalk 'I'slii Kwa Sii Siii Ipiii Naiiia Kiia l')iiia Wiiiasha ilokslia Nil Siiiiwasa Wiiiashash W.Kaslia Kwatasliak ^latsliMsliask riiiiislia 'I'alisliisask 'J'kcsliask A)ialasliask Aslialviiasliash Slakshasli Nisliaiiiasli Sliiit.sliash Swcasliasli I'ainsliasli Salaithas I'sliislikshash I'akwashash Kl.IKKTAT. Tslii Skwa Silk .Siiik I'iiik N'cinak Iiiiak I'aiiiak Wiuasha Nil Siiiawasa Wasaslia Talisliaslia Tkc'hsha ShiikiiaHlia Wauapslia Iswaiska I'aiiislia Nistowasa Tshiska rakwanha iNoTK '2. of IviiMsian America, ic Tliis, aloiif^- with tlip paper on tlie J",tlniolM.,..... ^....^... ,. was tlu' (li!volopiiu!ut of a coiiimunu'atiim iaiil hcl'orc the. Mfctiiif> of tin liriti.-sa Assuciatioii for tlu- AihaucciiH'iit of Sciciici! at ^'ork in tlm liifvimi.s S('|)tomI)('r, tn tlic ofVcct that tlu^ "liiii' of dcinaic'ation drawn "lu'twoen the llskinio and tlio Indian races of America was far too "liroad and trencliant"; wlierein it was stated. — I. 'i'hat tlie true aflinities of the I'iiipewvan weri; witii tlie Katliak, I'liiilashka, Kenay and Sitka forms of speech. ■-'. Tliat tlie Fji'aU'nts ( r;,n-ilyachiniitsi of IfesanolV;, althoiip;h s<'pa- ratcd from tlie ueiirijoiirinji; I'iskim.'t on^'ues so as to caiisi; the appearance iif n iliscontinnity in the Kskieio area could, when we, dealt with tlu! K.iiliak, I'nalaslika, Kenay, and Sitka vocahiilaries as the represen- tatives of a sliijj;'le lan;i'iia<)'e he shown to he Ivskimo. — •i. Tliat affinities of a more u'cneral kind were to In? found even I'ui'tlier southward". 1. ."). That the Atna of Mackenzie was the Xoo-^daliiiii, and the Friendly Villajrc vocabulary the liillecdioola , of .Mr Tolmie. I'J'rinisiirtidiis (if the Sect inns p. 78. — On I lie Sintlltera Ijitnils (if the Kskiinn lacc in Anicvicd. •tmm ON TlIK ETIIN()(iUAIMIV OK UDSSIAN AMERICA. i:i:.\i> r.KFOJIK TIIU K'rilNOlJKJKJAL SOCIETY l!)Tii ri:i!i;r.\i{V IH40. Tho p!\j)rr siil)mitto(l to the Society is upon the Ktlino- f'Tiiphy of liUssiiin AuiericJi. l^'or ii variety of reaisonis, the tribes in these })Mi'ts are of paraiiioiiut importance. Inhabit- ing' the inf»st north-western extremity of America on the coast of 15ehrinp,"s Straits, they are divided from Asia onlv by tliat cliannel, ? » that of all the nations of the Kew \\\n-\A they are most in contact with those of tho Old, This cii- cunistance alone puts them ])rominxtremity of J'riiu'c of Wales Island, the territory in question consists of a stri]) of sea-coast, and islands, with the I>ritish possessions of New Norfolk and New Hanover at tin; ba(dv ; whilst from INIount St Flias ncn-thward, as far as the Arctic Sea, tin' line of division is ima^iinary, coincidin onir It can sc;'''cely be expected, that a frontier so detiT- niiiied can coincid(^ with any iniportant divisions, either in ])hysical or ethnographical g(!ography. Still the area in (pics- tion is a convenient one. Considering tlu^ remote situation of these extensive an 1 inhospitable tracts, the knowledu*. we p(»ssess of th(!iii is creditable to the government of Russia. From tho time ot Behring downward, tho coasts have been accurately dcs- ON TIIK KTIIXOGHAIMIY i)V KUSiSIAN AMKUIf'V. 2G7 cribed; whilst the coninmnications of tlic officials of the Russian American Company exhibit far more than an average amount of intolligenco. 1' or such ])ortions of the present paper as arc not purely philological, the author has drawn upon liaer's SKilis/fschc mid EUniOf/raphische Niichrichli'n , tM:c. ( )f a Kus- i\i\\\ settlement in Mew ('alifornia, although American, no notice is taken. On the other lumd , a nation inhabiting the extreme promontory of Asia (the T^huktshi) are, for reasons that will make themselves apparent, dealt with as American. On the southern extremity of liussian America, the native tribes are known to their neighbours of Mew (Jaledonla, the Oregon country, and to the Iludson's Bay ( 'ompany, under the names of Colooches, Tunghaases, Atnas, ( ■oltshanies, llfjalcntses, Konagis, (^adiacks, Tchugatches, and Kenays. For the north, and the shores of the Arctic Sea, they are dealt with (and that truly) as members of th(! great Ksrpiimaux family. Further investigation multijilies the names of these tribos, so that we hear of Inkalitt's, Inkulukhlaites, Kiyataij;- iiiutis, Agolegmutes, Pashtolegmutis, Magmutis , &.c. &.Q. To tlics(! divisions may be added th(! different varieties of the natives of the Aleutian islands, in the classification of these munerous tribes, it is considered that nuich remains to bo (lone. For the tribes on the shore of the Northern < )cean , and for the parts innnediately south of I'l'liring's Straits, the g(i- ncral character, both ])liysical and moral, seems to be JOs- (|uiiuaux. The enormous line of coast over which this na- tion is extended has long been known, Tho language and iiiainiers of (Jreenland have been known to us since the times of the earliest Punish missionaries; so that details, both jihysical and moral, of no savages are better und'^-rstood than tli(»se of the (JrcKinlanders. With this knowlcMlge, it is easy to trace tlu^ extension of tlu^ race. The shores of Hudson's iiay are inhabit(Ml by the same stock. So also is the coast of Labrador. The tlire(! forms (jf speech art; l)Ut diahtcts iif one !;\ni;uag(!: a fact that has long been known. Hence llio l''.s(|uiiiiaux and (ireenlanders have long l)een recognised as identical. From Hudson's i^ay, northward and westward, tlio whole lin(^ of seaeoast, as far as jNIackenzie's liiver, is Ks(|nimaux ; and that with but little variety of type; either in l)liy'.ical conlormation , manners, or language. The in- torpret(!r to Ca])tain Franklin was an Ksijiiimaux from Hud- son's Iiay, yet he had no difliculty in uiulerstanding the dia- loots west of I\laekenzi(('s River, l.'{7" \\ . Long. (See Ar- th(C(il(i{jira Amcrit'iinii, ii. 11.) Three deorees westward, how- over, a change in the Fscpiimaux characteristics takes place; 208 UN riii; i.riiNofiK.M'MY or urssivx amkimca. ¥l ar altlioMf^li tlic iiiliabit.'ints of the miartors in (jiicstioii \)\ n,, iiu.'iiiis toasi! to Ijt! Ksquiuiaux. Tlie tribes alrcfady noticed may Ix; called tlu; Eastern, tlios(! about to be mentioned tlui Western K.S(juimaux. 'riie dividing; lino i.s tix(id by ('a|)tniu Franivlin at NO" W. Ion;;-. Tlio tribes on each side of this lin(! have ril /'irsl a (jremt (li/'/Unllii in iintlvrsi.iinehring's Straits, and the parts about Cook's Inlet. For the first, th(> mark(!t extends from ley Cape to the Promon- tory of Aiiaska, and has for its stations the islands of Pxdir- ing s Straits. The second district comprises the Aleutian islands, (yadiai-k, and the line of the sea-coast as far south as (^ueen (-harlotte's Island. Now, whatever may be the anu)unt of liussian civilization, in determining some of tiie characteristics of the Western Esquimaux, it is certain that the tribes of that race now inhabiting Asia, wc^rc occupants of their present localities, anterior to the liussian Conqiie.-t of Kamshatka. A second deviation from the Escpiiniaux ty])C, wo timl in ih(.' island ('adiacdc, and the coast of the continent opposite. The early liussian discoverers speak of a continual wartan; between 0])posing tribcis of the same stocdi; whilst another tribe, the Inkalite, is said to uphidd itself bravely against ON TIIK KTIIMXIKAI'MV OK urSSIAN AMKIJCA. 200 tho more numerous nation of tlie Kuskokwinis. As a general rule, warfare, except as a defence aj^aitist tribes of a dif- t'erciit race, is as fonii^n to the typical Ks(|uiniaux of Green- liiiiil as to tlie Laplander of Europe. Measured by another test, and that of the psyc]iolof;ical sort (viz., the capacity for reli«;ious instruction), the Western Ks(juiniaux coincides with the Ksijuiniaux of < Irccnland. \\ ith the exception, perhaps, of the ^«e;4ro, the race, in r Kscjuiniaux tribes* as it agrees with th divisions aro not only indubitably Ksfpiiiiiaiix, but have also been recognised as such. Those that follow Mr(! generally referred to another etliiio- logical group. In the parts about Cooks Inlet (Bay of Ke- nay) and Mount St Klias, a second race is said to make its appearance, and this is generally separated from the Es- (piimaux by a broad line of demarcation. It is called th*' Kolooch race or family, and i.s generally placed in contrast with the Esquimaux. Isolated tribes akin to the Kidooclics. and worthy of special notice, are the following: — 1. The Uyalijaclnmisli or IJgalentses, consisting of about ^)8 fannlies. — They change their localities with the season, and are Kolooch in manners and conformation. Liviiii: around IMount St. Elias they are frontier tribes to the T.shu- gatshes. 2. The A'cnai/s, inhabiting the coast of Cook's Inlet, MM families strong. — Historically, they assort that their origin is from the hills of the interior, from whence they descen- ded coastward. Their mythological and ultimate origin i> from the ffii'cn, connected Avitb which they have a complex cosmogony. I^escent from the raven, or descent from the flof/ , is considered, for these tribes wo are speaking of, as an instnunpnt in ethnological criticism. Like the Ugalentsos. they arc in contact Avith Tshugatsh I^s(juimaux. 3. The Ainiilis. dwelling on the Cop])er Kiver, 00 faniilios strong, hunters of rein-deer, and workers in iron as well ON 'llli; r.rilNn<;UAl'IIV oi' IMSSIAN A.MKUKA. 271 {')() fainilit'S as c()i)})or. — Tlioy toiiu'idc \viili tlic tvpicnl Kolootlios in liiuiiiii^" tlicir (U'iul, in ascriljin;^ tli(f ori^^iu of tlicir race; to the niirn , and in most otlior particulars. 'I'licso tliroo tril)08 arc unccjuiNocally connci'tcd closflv with f'fic'li other, and with the other nieniherK of tiiosition (if the undetermined tribes, and the relations of the l"!s(|ui- iiiaux and the Kolooeh j^roups to each other, 'i'hese i)ro- bleiiis seem capable of being- scdved by means of the evi- dence of languages. Previ(»us, however, to the enumeration of our data upon this point, it nnist be (djserNcd, that mem- liors of a /////•// etiniographical division, in all probability, toriM part of the native population of Kussian America. From the Lake Athabasca, as a centre, to the Atlantic on one; hand, and to the Pacific on the other, languages of this fjrnup are spoken; so that the Athabascan area in its ex- tension from east to west, is second only to iIk; Kscjuimaux. Now both the Kolooeh and Ksquimaux Languages have; fun- damental affinities with the Athabascan, and vice versa ; whilst It is generally the case in Ethnology, that two languages ladically C(tnnccted with a third, are also i-ndically connected with each other. With this premise, we may enumerate! in iletail, our data in the way of philology. This method will introduce new names and new localities, since we have oi'ten vocabularies where we have nothing else besides. 1. Beechey'a Kstjuimavx. — The most northern sp(>cimen of tho western Ksquimaux. Spoken in Kotzebu(!\s Sound. 2. Tho Aglimut vocid)ulary of the Altas Mtlinographi((ue. •'•. The J^s((uimaux of tho Island of St Lawrence. — //////. 4. The Asiatic Esquiniaux of the Tshuktshi of Tshuktshi- Noss. Klaproth's Asia Polyglotta. 272 ON iiiK i'.TiiNO(;u.\rnv or kissian AMKiiirA. r>. Tlio Asiatic K«qiiiinaux ol" tlm Tsliuktslii of tlie iiioiitli of tlio riv(M* Anadyr. — Ihitl. {'). 'V\\(i FiS(|uiiiio of Morton Sound. — Cook's Voyagos. 7. TIk! Kuskokwiiiior vot'al)ulary of IJaer's Ji( itrilj^i;. 8. A vocabulary (»f tho Island of Nuniwock in tlio Atlas Ktlino^raj)liiquo, is une(|uivoc'ally Ksqjiiuio, So also uro tin- dialects of tlic Peninsula of Aliaska. Ilavini;; seen, liowivcr, no vocabulary, I am unablo to states whether they most rc- sembl(! those of the Ah'Utian Islands, (a prolonj^ation of its v;ebtern (extremity), or of those ()f the Island Cadiack on its south-eastern side. At any rate, the languages akin to tin' (Jadiack, and t!ie lan;;ua^es of the Aleutian grouj), foim separate divisions of sub-dialects. He^inninj;' with the Aleu- tian class, we have the foUowinj; nuit(!rials: — 1). Unalashkan vocabularies by Usiansky, Wran;,'ell, iJc- sanofV, and otli(;rs. 10. The Andreanowsky Isles. — Ivubeck's voeubulary. — See Mithridatcs. There is external evidence that the language for the whole Aleutian group is radically one, the ditbirences, how(!Vcr, being, as diab^ctal difteren(;e8, remarkable. The natives ot' Atchu and IJnalashka have difticulty in understanding eacli other. — ]\Iithridates. 11. Cadiack vocabularies by Kesanoff, Lisiansky, and Wrangell. 12. Tshugatshi vocabularies by Kesanoff and Wrangell. i;{. The Lord's J'rayer in Jakutat, by Jiaranoff. — Mithri- datcs. Notwithstanding the statement that only 19 words out of 1100 are connnon to the Unalashkan and Cadjak, the affi- nity of these languages to each other, and their undouhteil place in the Escpiiinaux class, has long been recognised. il. The Tnhuluklaitics. — This tribe is akin to the Magiiiuit and the Inkalaite. We possess a few words of the language. which are sufficient to prove that although its definit(! jiIjui' is undetermined, it has miscellaneous affinities to the Atiia, Kenay, and Esquimaux. IT). The Ugalyachmutsi of the Mithridatcs. H). The Ugalents of Wrangell. — See Jiaer's lieitrligc These two vocabularies represent the same language. Tin' Ugalyachmutsi, although left by Kesanoff as an isolatiid lan- guage, is unequivocally stated by Kaer to be Kolooch. li;* contrast with the Esquimaux of the Tshugatshes, has al\vay> been insisted on. 17. Kenay vocabularies by Davidoff, Kesanoff, Lisian.sky. and Wrangell; also an anonymous one from a native. C«iil- ON TMK DTII.NOIIUAI'IIV (»!' Ill MMIAN AMKIircA. 273 of tlu; lUdlltli for tlu' wliolc latin, in tlu' Aiciiii-ulo^ia Aiuericanu, goes so fur as lo sc- [laiato the Ivonay oven from tlio K(»Iooili hin^imj^'o. IS. Tiic Atiia of \\'raii<;('|i. — Sec Jiacr's Jicitriif:;e. Now, aMotlior Auiorii'an lan;;ua{^('. .sjioki'ii soiuf.' ImiulnMl iiiilnH south of tlio Copper liivtr, of which wo find a vocabulary in Sir Alexander j\lai'keiizie'.s Travels, is called .Itiiti. It lias no diroi't afHiiity with the present toiij;ue. A hypothe- tiral solution of this coincidence lii-s in the fact, that in the Athabascan lan^ua;;es tlu; root )l-/i, or /-u = man. That the Ivcn.'iy call thenisolvcs T/ia/, or Tiitd/ut = men , is sp(!cially >tati'(l by J'aer, p. lOo. I'J. The Koltshan) vocabulary of Wran;;oll. — See I3a(!r's JSoitriige. The tablcis of th(,' work in {^ucstioi^shew the lan- ;,'iia^(! to be undoubted Kolooch. "ill. The Sitca vocabularies - numerous. Cook's Norl'olk Sound; the Sitca of Lisi.uisky; the Sitca of Davidotf (sec; Arclncolo^ia Americana); tli>! Sitca of Wran{;,-ell. According; tii Captain Hryant, it is spoken from M. hit. oU" to 5" S. by twenty tribtis. The number of individuals who speak it es, however, I icckouecl by Mr (Jreen, an American missionary, at G.jOO — see Archa;oIoj;ia Americana. The standard Kolooch is that of Sitca or Norfolk Sound. 21. The Tunghaase of Uv Tolmie. Of this, the nmst >()Uthern dialect of liussian America, wa find a short voca- bulary in the Transactions of the Royal (5eoj^raphical Society. It is truly stated to be closely allied to the Sitca. That there an; no more than two i^roups required for the classification of the above-mentioned h'ui<^uaf;(!S, and that these are the Escpiimaux and the Kolooch, seems evident. That these groups ar(i of no high value may be shewn. ]t is undoubtedly true, that if we only compare isolated voca- bularies with each other wo shall find little but points of contrast. And we find less than might be expected even when we compare groups of vocabularies. 1. The tables of Baer, exhil)iting three languages for the Esquimaux and live for the Kolooeh group, give scarcely halt" a dozen words common to the two. 2. The table of Lisiunsky, with the Unalashkan and Cadi- uck on the one side, and the Kenay and Sitca on the other, presents but little more. 3. The earliest language with which the Ugalyatmutsi was compared were Esquinniux, and the contrast was insisted upon from the first. It is only when we apply what may be called the iitilirccl method that the true value of the Esquimaux group becomes recognised. 18 IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I 1.25 1^ ■so *■ I. •UUU 1.8 u iiiin.6 6" V] A^S :»./ ^^^ >^ ^;y Hiotographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. MS80 (716) 872-4503 274 ox Tin: KTIINOCKAI'IIV OV ursSIAN AMKUIOA. 1. Each lias ai'finities witli the Atluibascau tongues, and perhaps equal affinities. 2. Each has affinities with the Oregon languages, and each perhaps equally. 3. Each has definite affinities with the languages of New California, and each perhaps equal ones. 4. Each has miscellaneous affinities with all the other tono'ues both of North and South America. These facts that connect the Esquimaux languages witli those spoken to the south of them involve, as may be easily seen , a theory of much higlujr importance than the jxjsition of groups like the Kolooch. They arc taken along Avith thr geographical •position of the Esquimaux race in respect to Asia, and point to the parts in (piestion as the stai'ting-points for the population of the New World. Upon this latter 1 can only say at present, that I find Esquimaux Avords in the folloAving languages : — 1. The Ivoriack. 2. The Kamskadalo. 3. The Aino of the Curulian Isles. In respect to this last group, it is remarkable that whilst 1 only find two Avords (the names for /lousc and ci/c) common to the Western Es- quimaux vocabularies of Lisiansky and the Aino ones of Langgsdorf, 1 find betAveen the latter and the Eastern Es- quimaux of Parry a considerable number. 4. The Corean. 5. The Jajianesc. This is in the Avay of direct evidence. The Oregon and Ko- looch languages have shnilar and equal affinities; Aviiilst tlir Asiatic languages enumerated have themselves affinities in the Old AVorld knoAvn and recognised. From Avhat has been laid before the Society, it may he seen of how g-rcat importance it is to determine, whether the languages of Russian America pass into each other gradually, or arc divided by trenchant lines of demarcation. ii' MlSCELLANEOl S (ONTIMIU TIONS TO THE ETllN()(illAPJlV OF NORTH AUVAUVX. ISKAl) liEFOllE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, jANrAuv '24, 1845. The present state of American Etlmograpliy is the excuse for the miscellaneous character of the following notices. What leiiiiiins just now to be done consists chiefly in the addition of details to an outline already made out. Such communi- cations, however, are mainly intended to serve as isolated points of evidence towards the two following statements : — 1. That no American language has an isolated position iviien compared with the other tongues en masse, rather than witli the languages of any particular class. 2. That the affinity between the languages of the Ncav World, as determined by their vocabularies , is not less real tlian that inferred from the analogies of their grammatical ilnicliire. Jlodifications of the current doctrines , as to the value of (ortain philological groups and classifications, are involved in tlie positions given above. Tlic Sitca and Kenay Languages. — That these languages are Esquimaux may be seen by reference to the compara- tive vocabularies in Lisiansky's Voyages and Baer's Stati- stische und Ethnographische iNachrichten, &c. The Ugalyachmutsi. — In the work last quoted this language is shown to be akin to the Kenay. It is termed Ugalenz, and is spoken in Russian America, near Mount St. Elias. It has hitherto been too much disconnected from the Esqui- maux group. The Chipewyan and Nagail. — That these were Esquimaux was stated by the author in the Ethnological subectiijn of 18* 270 MIS', .l,l,ANi:ot S (•((NTUllU riONS TO Tin; KTI1N()(;1!AI'IIV tho British Association at York. TJio TaculII is also Es-I quimanx. The Sussee, in the present state of our knowlcdfol is best left without any absohite place. It has several mis- cellaneous affinities. Tiie hearinj^ of tiiese notices is to nxn-ge the groujis call- ed AUiabuscan and Koloodi in the JOsquiniaux. It has been connnunicated to the Ethnological Societv. tliatl a majority of the languages of Oregon and New Carcdonial are akin to each other and to the Esquimaux ; a stateinoiitl applying to about forty-live vocabularies, amongst wliich} are the three following, hitherto considered as isolated: — 1. The Fricndij VilUifie vocabulanj of M((ckcnzk'. 8ee Tra-i vels. — This is a dialect of the Uillechoola. 2. The Alna of Mackenzie. — This is a dialect of the Noos- daluni. 3. Tlie Salish of Uuiwnccau. See Arclucologia Americana. — This is the Okamigan of Mr Tolmie. Sec Journal ofi Geographical Society. The Ahnenin. — In this language, as well as in two otiioisj hereafter to be noticed (the JMackfoot and Crow), 1 have] had, through the courtesy of Dr. Prichard, an opportunity of using valuable vocabularies of Gallatin's, collected byj Mr Mackenzie, an agent for the American fur -company on the Yellow-stone river; by whom also Avcre drawn up the shorter vocabularies, in Mv. Catlin's work on the Ame-j rican Indians, of the Mandan, Kiccareo and other languages The table also of the Natchez language is chiefly dnnviij from the comparative catalogues of Mr. Gallatin. That tlici MS. vocabulary of the Ahnenin represents the language ofi the Fall ludians of Umfreville, and one different from tliat] of the true Minetares (with which it has been confounded) may be seen from the following comparison. English. FallLnuian of Umfuevili.e. Ahnenin. JMinetaue. eye nunnecsoou araytliya ishtali. knife M'artli wahata luatzcc. pipe pechouon cinpssah cekeepcc. tobacco cheesouon kitclitawan owpai. dog liudther ahttah inatshuga. fire usittor beerais. bow bart beerahhali. arro/r utcee cotan. one karci lemoisso. li/!o neeee uethiyan noopah. three narce iiainee. four nean yahuayau topab. :thn()(ii:ai'iiv or XOUTII AMCItlf'A. 277 -Milli is .also E:<-i f onr knoAvledrrf.j lias several iiiis-j the groiij)s call- X. ical Society, tliatj I New Caredoniaj lux ; a statenuMitl amongst wliiciij as isolated : — ;enzk'. See Tra-j ect of the Nuoj,- oi;'ia Americana.! See Journal ofi as in two others [ Crow), 1 havej , an opportunity 's, collected by I an fur -company were drawn upj )rk on the Amc-i other languages, is chietly drawn j llatin. That the the language (if ferent from that] 5en confounded),! I. |[sr,r.isi[. Fall-Txiuan of r.Mi'UEVii-i.K. Aiinkxin. Mi.\i:tauk. y( yautune cheehoh. )/ uoteartuco acamai. ./iffl no.sartiice chappo. ;')<;/(/ nar.s\vartnco iiopujjpoo. 01/' anharbotwartuce nowa.ssappai. (.)( mettartucG nctassa ))ocraga. The Ahncnin language, without being at present referable in any recognized group, has numerous miscellaneous affi- liities. English .iltm'iiin ad. sister. Ahnenin walinatta. English wife. Mohawk walipatckii. JltiKiiin otha. Onondagos walietlio. Kenny ssi(')(). Oneida wahetka. English ivater. English good. Ahnenin nitsa. Ahnenin etah. QiKippu nih. Caddo lialiut — h(unl- Uc/io tsach. some. English snn. English wr, //)///('. Ahnenin esis. Ahnenin, nistow. Altjonkin kesis. Blackfoot nisto — /. ( 'hocUnv liashe. English Ahnenin he nay Ohihkasuw husha. yo.i. jMus/iUtjc hahsie. ah nan. nan. English f^ock. English to-daif. Ahnenin hannike. Ahnenin Mohawk Onondagos 1 • IVinchafjo Dacota Yanclon eenee. eeang. eeyong. Avananaki. kuhhwantoh. neucke. Mohaivk oonoyah. English to-morrow. Onundago onaja. Ahnenin nacali. Tchuklchi nnako. English wood. unniok. Ahnenin bess. Choctujv onaha. Passamaquoddy a pass — tree. English Abenaki abassi — tree. many. Ahnenin ukaka. English I)ear. Mohawk awfjuayakix). Ahnenin wussa. Seneca kawkuagu. (jiiappa Osage Oniahaw wassail. English drink. "vvasaiiba. wassabai. . ihnenin Osage nahbin. nebuatoh. English dog. English sleep. Ahnenin ahttah. Ahnenin I nuckcnots. liudther. Abenaki nekasi. Sheshatapoosh attung. Mohawk yihkootos. agotawi. Abenaki attie. Onondagos Tiiscarora tcheer Seneca wanuhgoteli. Nalloway cheer. English two. English elk. Ahnenin neccc. Ahnenin wussea. Vassamaquoddy ncs. lIN'OdlfAI'llV or NDirni a.mkkica. 279 wanuhgoteli. .t'li'iKi/ii \l(IIIS(tc/lUSl'US Siirriif/auscis }litliirl(ir/,fii(tt Old .ll(/(in/iin OjihheiiHiy Knixtcimux Enj^lish liluclcfwt iVcnomeni English Jilackfoot Miami Suck and Fux English liluckfoot Esquimaux English Blackfool Ojihbeivai/ Knislemiux Shcs/uitapoush Massachusetls Mcnomcni English Blackfool Wyandot Muhairk Onondago Seneca Ihieyda Nolloivai/ English Blackfool Knistenaux Ojibbcway Ollatva Miami Massnchusclts Narragansets Skaivnoc Sack and Fox Menomeni head. (ito([unin. ()(>sti([U.'ui. stonkoan. oostcgwon. istogwcn. ustctiuoin. nose . okissis. oochecush. neck. uhkokin. kwaikiincli. nekwaikanoh. Jiand. okittakis. iyutocka. tikkiek— /i/<^f/i'. leg. ohcat. okat. miskate. necscatc-h. inuhkout. oakauut. feel. oaksakah. ochshcetau. oochsheeta. ochsita. oochslipcta. ochshcecht. seoke — toes. bone. ohkinnah. oskann. okun. okunnuin. kanih. uskon. wuskan. ochcunne. okanoh. okunmn. English Blackfool h'nislc/iaii.r Ojibbea'ai/ English lilackfool MoUairk Seneca Nolloway English /iUtckftiot 3lo/iicun Shaienoe English Blackfotd Osage English Blackfool Knistenaux Ojibbcway (^tlatra Sheshalapoiish Micmuc Abenaki Massachusetts Narragansets Mohican Delaware Miami Shawnoe Sack and Fox Menomcni English Blackfool Knistenaux Ojibbcway Sheshatapoosh English Blackfool Mohican kettle. csko. askick. akkcek. shoes. atsakin. (»htM([uah. auhtoyuawo- hya. otawgwa";. bread. ksaquoiiats. tauij^iuuili. ta({iianah. spring. motoc. paton. summer. napoos. ncipin. noo.bin. nipin. nij)in. noopun. nipk. nipi'no. nopun. neepun. nopoon. nipcn. nipccnuch. nopeneh. ueeponweh. noeaypeenay- waywah. hail. sahco. sasagun. sasaigau. shashaygan. fire. esteu. stauw. IS IN<»(ii! Vl'IIV hfjlile. otiko. askick. nkkcok. .shoes. fitsakin. (tlita([uali. aulitnyuawo- liya. otawgwag. bread. ksaqtiouats. taiU|Uiuih. taf|uunali. spring. inotoc. })aton. summer. napoos. ncpin. noobin. nipin. ni})in. ncopun. nipk. nipeiK'. nopun. iieepun. nopoon. nipcu. nipocnuoli. nepeneli. ueeponweh. neeaypeenay- w ay wall. hail. sahco. sasagun. sasaigan. shashaygan. fire. esteu. stauw. Ol' NOKllI A.MKUK'A. Kii;;lisli llldchfool I'hikliiisaw .IWicapu Hiij^lish l)l(tc/i'f(l0l I'.itijuimaux Tclmklchi English Ill(ir/c/o(it k'liislenaux iijibhi'way iillH/ra iihl Alqonkin Hiiglish illitc/ifont Kimtenaux iljihbcway Shii/vfwe English Blitckfoul Upsaroka Kimtenaux Ojibbeway Old Algonkin Piissamaquoddy Abenaki Mohiean Delaware Miami Menomcni English Blackfool Xolloway English Blackfoot 'ijibbeway n'uler. ohhkcah. iiekah. ak. ice. sacoocoittah. sikk(H). tsliikuta. earlh. ksahcoom. askce. ahkec. aki. ackoy. ackwin. lake. oniah sckamc. sakiogun. sahgiegun. inskaque. island. mane. luinnc — tmter. ininneteekah — lake. ininnopeshu — island. ministick. ininnis. minis, muniqu. men ah an. mnauhan. menokhtey. menatey. menahanweh. meonayish. roek , stone. ohcootoke. ohlioutahk. tree. masetis. metik. Old Algonkin S/ieshnla/joush Massaehasetts English Ji lack fool Miami Qudppa English [ildckfoot iVassaehusells Narragansels Mohican Miami Sack and Fox Mcnomeni English niackfoot Esquimaux English. Blackfool Esquimaux Knislenaux OjilihcuHiy Old Algonkin Massachusetts Narragansels Miami English Bh '-foot A ,i.^huselts Naruyansets English Blackfoot Taculli Kenay Cherokee Salish English Blackfool Mcnomeni 281 motiih. mistookooali. uiehtug. grass. mahtoovaas(!. mctahkotuck. niontih. leaf. soyapoko. wunnopog. wunncpog. v'unnopok. metshipakwa. tatapacoan. ahneepeeoaku- nah. beaver. kakestako. keeyoeak. volf. niahcooya. amaok. myegnn. mieengnn. an. mayg maliingan. muckquoshin. muckquashin. muhkwaiauch. bird. pakesa. psukses. peasis. oh was. ogaze. kqiiasa. oowatse. ooseli. goose. emahkiya. mckawk. 4^-- ■ 2S2 .Mis(i;i,i,A.\i:(U s cox'iiMrit TioNs lo iiii; irniMHii! vpiiv / ' I I Kn;^li.sli partridge. h'nistenaiix nitli.i. Klarhfonl kfitokin. ncya. Ndiilini/ie kittoawndip- OJihbe/ray noen , nin. (pia. Old Algoukin nir. Kiigli.sh red. Sheshalapuiis/t node. lilarlcfool uinhisonuni. .Micmac nil. MassacliuscUs inisquCii. Illinois niia. Ahnenin nistow. English yellow. niackfool • ilitaliko. English I III tit. Esquimaux tooiigook. h'lackfoot cluisto. tslutngak. /vnisleuuux kitha. Knislcnaux asawwow. Ojibbenuty kcon , kill. OJihbe/my ozawa. Old Algoukin kir. . Micmac kil. (ijawa. oozao. Old Alfjoukin Illinois kira. Sack and Fox ossawah. English this, that. Mcnomcni oasliahwecyah. Blackfoot kanaklia. iMiglisli great. Upsaroka kiiina. h'lackfool olimohcoo. Nanticokc youkanna. Micmac iiu'chkilk. English to day. Mdhhum makauk. Blackfoot anookchusi- English small. quoix. Black foot enahcootse. Knistcnaux anoutcli. Upsaroka ecat. Onondago neuchke. English strong. miskappe. niascawa. English yesterday. Blackfoot Knistcuaux Blackfool Dacota mahtonc. tanneohali. Ojibbeway machecawa. English drink. Old Algoukin masshkawa. Blackfool soinate. Natilicokc miskiu. Upsaroka smiinmik. English HHirm. English speak. lUackfoot kazetotzu. BUukfool apooyatz. Knislcnaux klcliatai. Upsaroka bidow. kisopayo. English sing. OJibbewat/ kezhoyah. Blackfool anihkit. Ottawa kesliautta. Knistcnaux nocuninioou Old Algonkin akisliattey. Ojibbeway nugainoo. Passumaquoddy kesipctai. Sheshatapoosh nekahmoo. Massachusetts knssntan. Illinois nacamoliok. Narragansels kssetauwou. Menomeni neokanmco- English 1. noon. Blackfoot nisto. English sleep. Chipcwyan nc. Blackfool okat. ■■: 'i. llMMil! M'liv OF Xoltrit AMKUM'A. 2S3 n(>en , nui. iiocummoun. .)lii/iftirfc iliioiiildfjo Si'HCca yilikoiitos. agotawi. wanuligotoh. l'iii}j;lisli lUiivkfonl Ahcmiki kill. (Miikkc. noniiko. The niackfoot nuiiiorals, as ^ivon by I\Ifickonzi(! iuid llm- tVcvillu, slightly dilFiir. The tcM'iiiIiiation in -lun runs tlirougli the numerals (»t" Fit/.-lIu;^h Sound, an < )rog()r. langun;^o. K.vdi.isii. lU.ACKFOOT or rMi'iti;\ ii.i.i;. lU.AcKivior oi." Ma( KKN/.li:. FlT/-lIl(lll SiHXD. um tokcscum sa niiiiscMun. two nartokoscuin Hiilitoka inalscutii three nohokoscinii nalihuka uta.scuiii. jhur nes\v(Mmi nasowe inoozcuin. five ncsittwi nositto tliikaosciun. six nay nnwwc kitli.sc.nin. seven kitsic akitseciuii atldopooscum. eight narnoswouni nalmis.sowo nialkiiaskuni. nine picksee pakoso iiauooskim. ten kcepoy kppo liighio. 2. nokty, Tuscarorri ; tikneo, Seneca; tcghia, Onehhi ; do- kaneo, NoUoway; tcd^ini, Olio. W. noft'lioli, Mohican; naldia, Pclatvare. .'). nthsysta, Mohawk; satton, tjnappa; satta, Osage ^ Oitia- hitiv; sata, (llOt; salitslia, Minrlare. 7. tzauks, k'((nulchen, Xoosdalum 10. kippio, Chimmesyan. The Cro/v and Mandan LangiiaycA. — Of the important lan- guage of the Upsarokas or Crows the Arclucologia Ameri- cana contains only thirty words. Of the JNlandan Ave have, in the same work, nothing beyond the names often chiefs. Ill (jallatin's classification these tribes are dealt with as sub- divisions of th(! Minetare nation. Now the MinGiare are of till! Sioux or Dacota family. Between the Mandan vocabulary of Mr. Catlin and the Crow vocabulary of Gallatin's j\[SS. there are the following words in common. The affinity seems less close than it is gener- ally stated to be: still the two languages appear to be Sioux. This latter point may be seen in the second table. ICNen!40 iiinkkoiipah — ////// riirr passalmli alicsii. (liijl llillMIDlll inaiipali. nii/ht cstof^r oclie. tltir/c Imnipiilicriskali i'.Iiil>piisli('ka. li(fh( tMluyliusli thicsho. iromuH iiiolia luoyakatto. irifc innofHO mnah. child sooklioiiialia hakkntto. 1 girl Hookmclia moyakattc. boif sodknumolik .sliakkatto. head pan inarsliaa. legs doka luichoope. ei/cs ostumn iiicislita. motilfi ea ea. nose palino bujipa. fitcc estah esH. cars nakolia uppa. hand oiika buKcliic. fingers cinkalia buschic!. fool slico buscbe. hair hahlioc inasbeab. canoe monaiiko mabesbe. fish poll booab. bear inahto dulipitsa. wolf haratta cbata. dog raones waroota biska. buffalo ptemday bisba. elk oraepah citcbcricazzsc. deer malimanacoo oblia. beaver warrappa biruppe. shoe hoompali booinpe. bow warraenoopali bistubecab. arroii) inahlia aluiailz. pipe ehudka ompsa. tobacco niannaslia bopa. good shusliu itsicka. bad k'liecush kiibbeek. hot dsasosli abre. cold shineehush bootsbere. 1 nie be. thou ne de. he e na. me noo bero. they eonali inibab. ^H OF NOKTII AMIMIK.'A. 2h:, Knumhm. Mam'AN. Cunw. 1 iiinlihiuinaii ainutcat. 2 noinp.'ih U'lomcat. 3 iifuiifiry nanKMiacat. 4 tolilui HJiopocat. 5 kiikhoo chihhocat. 6 kciiiiih ahcamacaf. 7 koopah sappoah. 8 tiitucka nii(Miipa[i('. 9 tiiahpa ahiniitfap[)o. ID pcrug pcrakiik. English Cod. (Jiiappa schohjinka. }l(m(ltifi iiialili()pp(!nota. (Hill chocchingai. If'iiirhiif/fi maliahhah. fhnn/iafv shingasliiiiga Vinrldir majihopa. English hi'dd. Aliinnlcm inaniton. Mdiidiin ' ])an. English A7/«. Ddcola 2)ah. Mdiuldii mcnahka. Vanctun • pah. fhiuihaiv inoencajai. (Juappa pahhih. Ciolilo inauoh — litjlit. OmahaM pah. English star. English arms. .Viiiidun h'kaka. MdluldH arda. {Umppa mihcacheh. Mincldtc arrough. Olio peckahhai. Pawnee heeoeru. Omaliuw Miiwlare meecaai. eekah. English Mduddii kg. doka. English day. Quappa jaccah. MumlMi haiupaheriskali. (Isagc sagaugli. ff'iiicbago hannip. English haiiKipcehah. anipa. aungpa. hompaye. eyes. Dacota Mandan estnme. Yunclon Thicota ishta. iisage y'linclon Qudppa ishtali. • 1 , Dllo liangwai. inschta. Omuhaiv oinbah. Olio 4-0. ishta. MincUire mahpnih. English moul/i. English ivumun. Mandan ea. Mundan nieha. iSioux passim oa. Yanclon weeah. English }uise. Omu/taw waoo. Mandan paliOD. yinclare meeyai. Sioux passim pall. h)W(iy mega. English face. English child. Mandan ostah. Manclan sookhoniaha. Dacola cetai. I \l »L 2»0 MISCliL LANE()i;.S COXTllIU UTION.S TO THK KTiiNoou.vruv Yimclon . oetai. English bou,'. Mhielurc etah. Mandan warraenoopiili English ears. Minelare boeiahliali. Mandan nakoha. Titsearora awraw. Wincbarjo nahchalnvah- English arrotr. hah. Mandan ini Siuiix English }landan or NOUTII AMKKlt'A. one. Minclare mahhannah. Muskoge minche. moeachchcc. English 31 an da Ji two. Minelare nompah. nompa, noopa. nowah. English Mandan Minelare three. namary. namee. English Mandan Seneca four. Mohawk tohha. topah , tuah. English Mandan five. Mine tare kakhoo. 287 uhechoh. chahgkie. six. keniali. acamai. seven. koopali. chappo. eight. tatucka. tikkeugh. sohtayhhko. ten. perng. poragas. The Riccaree Latu/iiage. — In Balbi and in the Mithridates, the Riccaree is stated to Le a dialect of the Pawnee; but no words are given of it: hence the evidence is inconclusive. Again, the term Paw^nee is equivocal. There are tribes call- ed Pawnees on the river Platte, and tribes called Pawnees on the Red river of Texas. Of the last nation we have no vocabulary; they appear however to be different from the first, and are Pawnees falschj so called. Of the Riccaree we have but one vocabulary (Catlin's North American Indians, vol. ii.); it has the following words com- mon with the irue Pawnee list of Say in the Arclneologia Americana, vol. ii. English. Paw NEK. RiCAUKE. God thonwahat tewaroohteli. devil tsaheekshkakooiaiwah kakewaroohteh sim shakoroo shakoona. fire tateetoo tekieeht. moon pa wetah. stars opeeroet sac a. rain tatsooroo tassou. snow toosha tahliau. day shakoorooeeshairct shacona. night eeraishnaitec eenahgt. light shusheegat shakoouali. dark eeraishuaite tekatist.it. hot toueetstoo towarist. cold taipeechee teepse. 288 .MISCELLAXKOUS CJONTIUIUTTIONS TO TIIi: KTlINOCiKAPIIV English, Pawxke. KU'AREK. Kiiglisl yes nawa neecoola. Hicciire tio kakce kaka. Citddo bear koorooksh keahya. 1, t\ /nfi 1 ■ LI ■ dog botv ashakish teeragish hohtcli. nache. niiglisi RicairCi arrow loekslioo ncccho. bi/innK hul akkaroo acare. )l(issac/ woman tsapat sapat. boy pecshkee wcenatcl). Eiiglisl girl tchoraksh soonahtch. llircarci child peevon peia. JlliicajH head pakshu pahgh. Uclirz cars atkaroo tickokito. }l(ihairL eyes keereekoo checreecoo. iiiieida hair oshu palii. English hand ikslieeroe tolionara. likcarri fingers haspeet parick. Maize foot ashoo ahgh. ynlchcz canoe lakohoroo lahkeehoon. I'dte river kattoosh sahonnee. English I ta nanto. 1 askoo asco. Riccaret 2 peetkoo pitco. Unondag 3 touweet tow wit. hiway 4 shkeetish tcheetisli. I'ljalenz 1 ■ 5 sheeooksh tchcetislioo. licixiy 6 sheekshabish tcheetislipis. English 7 peetkoosheeshabish totchapis. | Ricraree H touweetshabish tochapiswon. .iltacapa 9 looksheereewa totchapisnahhenowon. 10 looksheercc ■ nahen. English 20 petouoo wetah. Riccaree 30 luksheerpcwctouoo sahwee. | ilnndan 100 sheekookshtaroo shontan. Sioux The specia 1 affinities of the Riccaree are not very docidoil, English It is {inythinp; rather than an I isolated language , and will. Riccaree probably, bo definitely placed -when we obtain vocabularies yotlo/ray of the Indian languages of Texas. | Esqiiiinai English evil spirit. Caddo sako. Winebag fiHCida Riccuree kakewaroohteh. Salish skokoleel. Catntvba yahwerejeh. Delatvare gishukh. English Mohican kcsogh. Riccaree English sun. Esquimaux sukkonuk. Siuux Riccaree shakoona. Tchuktchi shekenak. ^lussach. tNOdUAPilY OF N(tK'l'H A.MI'.lllCA. 289 )t very docidoil. iafj;e , and will. lin vocabularies Kiiglisli Hiiriirc'C I'ttihlo Kugliwh Ku'carce Eniiiiiiiiaiix iliisnac/iiisells Eiiglisli Kiraurc .llliirapa Uchrz ]h>hawk fliickla English likcan'C Miizc Natchez Icltc English iiiwndagos hway l'(julc?iz lieiiay English Ricraree AUacapa English Riccarce }kndan Smuv English Riccarce yoltonuiy Ksqidinaiix Wmhar/o "ncida English Riccarce >iiuux ^liissachusells stars. saca. tsokas. niyhl. euaght. ooiiooak. nnjuk. nukon. dark tckatistat. togg — iiigltt. toowa — iiighl. tcwhgarlars. tetincalas. snow. tahhaii. towat. kowa. stahae. fire. tekieeht. yotecka. tako. takgak. taze. cold. teepye. tsainps. bad kah. k'hccush. sheecha. hoy. wecnatch. aqueianha. einyook. eeneek — son, yungh. head. hair. pahgh, pahi. pall, pan. puhkuk. Choctaw Chiccdsav^ English Riccarce Tiiscaroru Esqiiimau.r English Riccarce Choclaiv Chiccasaw English Riccarce Maiidan Tiiscarora English Riccarec Seneca Tchuklchi English Riccarce Sioux English Riccarce Choctaw Chiccasaw English Riccarce Mohawk Onondago Oneida Tiiscitrura English Riccarce TaculU Salish English Riccarce Adaize English Riccarce Chelimacha eobuk. skoboch. eye. cheerecco. ookawroli. (M'lTuka. foot. aligh. iya. oaya. arms. arrai. aril a. orungjai. Iicar. koahya. yucwy. kainga. shoes. hoochc hongha. arrow . neecho. oski noki. nucka. hut. acar" 3. canuchsha. ganschsajc. kaunonghsau. yaukuhniigh. canoe. lahkeehoon. allachee. 'tlea'yh. yes. neccoola. cola. JW. kaka. kahie. 19 {'I 2*.M) MISt'KIiLAM;i ikhtoloh.tll. Euglish Ilesh. Kiiglisli nose. Nalcliez wiiitso. ynlr/irz shaniats. Ahjonkin wioss. lliuislrrn zani. Euglish ilccr. English moitlh Nalehez tza. yulchi'z hoche. JJ'inelnifin tcha. I'ncimc/ii chi. Quajipa tah. )l(ii/a chi. Mnskofje itzo. «/ Caddo dah. English ioolh yulclirz int. Engli.sh ha//'alo. I'ii'iipdoidh tinti. Nidehev wastaaeni. }kxic.an tontli — Up. tenita. Urhe wctcacnvuone- I'ura kah. English moon. English fish. O Sdlrhez kwasii). Natchez hcnn. Si. Anlfinio tatsoopai. (.'hiiiniiest/an hono kustauio- Knir lichen quassia — slurs. quassia — stars. aue —salmon. yitnsdaluni A'likelal Shahaplan t kin a at. tkinnat. English star. Mohair k keynnk. kenyuck. kunjnon. yiilrhez tookul. Seneca St. Jnhiniit tatchhuaailh. Oneida I'lllllldSClilt tiikycha na- Noltoirai/ kaintu. i'nihlo l)ucha. Yanclon hohung. tbokas. D English yuldit'z I'ima 'MlhlKSCou Euglish irhile. river. wol. vo — ■ lake. caialh. Nalchc . Shahaplan Allacapa Old Angonkin hahap, hipi. cohl). wabi. English hill. Delaware wajio. opeo. y'ltc/irz kwoyakoopscl. Shawnoc Si Juan Capis- kahui. Iratio English black. h' like tat keh. Natchez tsokoko]!. hficota khyaykah. haiaca. Narragansels suckcsu. yi::u'ton Long Island shiokayo. English maize. English had. yalclicz hokko. Natchez wattak.s. ■Maize ocasuck. Mohawk wahhatekuh. 19* 202 Mis(ji:i,i,A.\i:i»is coNi'uiisri'ioNs to 'I'lii; kthnociuai'iiv Onondaga wahotlio. Chimmesyan waigh — puddle Oneida walictka. daddo haugh. English cold. English sky. Natchez tzitakopana. Natchez nasookta. Kliliclat tsoisah. Chimmesijan sucliah. Shahaplan tsoisah. Tlaoijualch naaso. English Natchez hot. Avaliiloohio. Muskoge Choctaw snotah. shntik. Muskoge hahiye. English sun. Allacupa alliu. Natchez wall. English Natchez tukehah. Noosddlum S'lUtdlijainish kokweli. thlokwalil. • 1 Adaize hicatuck. PdConchi (|Uih. Chelimacha uticheca. Yancton oouee. English Natchez thou. English night. ukkehah. Natchez toowa. K like la I yiike. Chetimacha timan. Attacapa tcgg. English arm. Natchez ish. English summer. 1 • t Dacota ishto. Natchez ameluka. awmilk. Yancton isto. Billechoola English winter. English blood. Natchez kwishitslicta- Natchez itsh. kop. Choctaiv issish. Mohawk J koosilkliuliling- Chikkasaiv issish. glieli. English totvn. Oneida koashlakkc. Natchez wait. Tuscarora. koosehlica. Pairnce kwat. Nottoivay goshera. English house, English thunder. Natchez hahit. Natchez pooloopooloo- liinluh. Dacota tea. Yancton teepee. Chimmesyan killapilleip. Quappa tih. English snoiv. Osage tiah. Natchez kowa. Omahaw tee. Billechoola kai. Minetat-e attee. English sea. Natchez kootsliel. English friend. St. Diego Choctaiv khasilk.. Natchez ketanesuh— Miy. okhuttali. ' Chetimacha keta. English bear. English boat. Natchez tsokolip. Natchez kwagtolt. Uche ptsaka. INDCiUAl'IIV M-aigli — piidiJlr, liaugli. sill/. uasooklu. sudiali. naaso. sootali. shntik. sun. wall. kokweli. tUlokwahl. ([uili. oouoc. night. toowa. tinum. summer. ameliika. a win ilk. ivinler. kwisliitslicta- kop. koosilkhulilnig- glieli. koaslilakkc. koosehlica. gosliera. thunder. pooloopooloo- lunluli. killapilleip. snow. kowa. kai. sea. kootsliol. khasilk., okliuttah. ' hear. tsokolip. ptsaka. or Noirni a.miikha. 2o:{ Engli.sli yatchrz Effjiiimaux Knglisli yalrliez IVhre Tiiscarora English .\alrlte: }lus/{oije The Uchc, ii. p. 30^. snaliC. woUali. inalligooak. bird. sliankolt. p.senna. tsluMin. eal. kiin])()sko. hmnhiiiiclia. English Natchez Sliahaptun Knglish Nalrhez Chnrtaw English Natchez Adaizc. run. kwalnoskook. willnikit. hill. appawo. ulilx". iralk. naktik. cnacnnt. Adaizc. &v. — So(> Arciueologi.'i Americana, vol. For tliL'so lan;j,na;^('s, tables similar to those of the Matc'liez Jiave been drawn np, which indicate similar af- tinities. The same can bo done for the (Jhctimacha and Attacapa. yew Cali/'ornhin Latif/uagcs. — Tlu! dialects of this district t'tirin no cxcej)tion to the statements as to the unity of the Anicrican languages. In the Journal of the (Jeographical Siiiiety (part 2. vol. ii.) w^e find seven vocabularies for these parts, lietw'cen the language of the diocesi^ of San .Juan Ciipistrano and that of San Gabriel, the affinity is palpable, and traces of a regular letter change are exhibited, viz. from / to r; IvNOMSII. S v\ .Il'AN CaI'ISTUANO. San (]■• NolMIl AMI'.UICA. 2\):> way wvn^uar^n posso ssos tho nu'o s(»un(l of the Kiiirlisli ///. With tho work in question 1 was favoured liy Mr. (Jatlin. Now it is only noeijssary to pick out from tliis litthj work the words selected by Balbi in his Atlas Ethno liiillZtt iliiKihn/i) Wmelarc Sioux nmaltaiv Hii;:lisli liiiriii/ Siou.v U'iii('b(i(j(t mil) k'unzti Miui'la re UllUt/llt/V lis mjr low i-lish ">J Siintx Willi mil, llmahdiv bwji Us. nje English i)ir< Siinix fl'iucbatju head. uuutlm, nalisso. nnso. nntu. IllhSC. pa. piiso. pall. ))('S(>. pall, pall, anali. pall — ]iali — miiulli. head, head. ei. iiiiitslianpaii itsl pp itiali. eliaugh. hand. nawiv. naji le. ualipon. naue. uonihc. iu» ml fert. the. silia. si. ta. (Utu h'linza (hnahniv Minclore OsfKje Eii;;lis!i luivaij (Hli, Sioux himzd Mi /I el a re isn Engl huvdij Sioux Winebaijo nilo Iviiuza Oinahaiv Mine tare English lo/raij Sinux iriiiebatjo Olio Oinuhaw Osage Eiiglihh lo/rai/ Sioux Wincbufjo Olio Omakaw Mitielarc Osage SI. sill, si. itsi. see, longue th nvtiiic rczc tsl til u'dzlii. •('(■zali. ('Vsi. leelh. lie lull. el. ii. lire. pjcclia;. jx'ta. jiytslii, (cdc. 1 i)0(ie 1"U^ 111. nuiler lie. num. ninali, uili. ni. ni. mini. neali. 200 Misci:i,r,.VNi:<>rs conikiiutionh to tiik irniNotii! ai-iiv Fjiij^lish one. Konza sahtah. lo/miij oyungka'. Omahaw satta. Olio ' yonkc. Osage sattali. Sioux Avonc'lnnv. ouonui'lia(»u. English six. fo/rai/ shaija*. Kii-lisli Itvo. Siitu.c shakpc. lotvdij nowju. Wincbago koliui. Siottx nopa. Olio shacinc. nonpa. A'onaz sha|>p(!h. Winchayo nopi. (hnahaiv sliappc. Olio noiio. Osage shappah. fionzn n()nM)a1i. Mitirtttre i no(ii)ali. English seven. OSIKJC 1 nonibaugh. loivay shahina. nilo shaluMuo. Eiiglisli l/irrr. MiiK'larc tshappn. lowoj/ WincbiKjo Olio tauyc. taluii. tana. English lowaij righl. kra-rapanc Olio kra-ralxMic English four. (hna/ta/r jM'rahini. lowaij towiv. English nine. Sioux tojiah. lo/rag ksangkic. Winehago tsliopi. Olio shankc. Olio tona. Konza sliankkoli. Konza tolipali. Oma/iaw shonka. Omuhaw tt>])a. (tsaqc shankali. Minelarc topah. \j Osage toliali. English ten. lowaij kiffpana. English five. Wincbago kherapiui. loUHUJ thata. Olio krohonoh. Sioux zapta. Konza kor(>l)rali. IVincbago satscli. Omahaw krchora. Olio sata. Osage krabrah. AVitli the book in question Ccass's vocabulary coincides. Hamilton and luvixE. Cass. fire pajcluT, pedge. nuiler ne ni. one oyungkfe. iengki Oro noAva; noe. lliree tanye tahni. four towae toe. INn«il! ApilV l>V MMITII AMIIKICA. 297 II AMI 1. TON AM) IllVlNK. Cass. five tliatii Hatiiliiif:;. aix hllMf^il? slijiiij^wc. si^i'On sliillililil Nlinliiiion}^ cujlit kr:i'ra'i)jiii(! kr('li('l)iii. nine ksjui^^'kii- .shanj^^c. ten knvpaiui! krebuali. ON A siioirr vocAiuiLAKv oi- riii: LOICIIKI \ LAN(U'A(ii:. 15V .]. A. ISIilS'l'KIJ. liKAIi nKFOUK TIIK IMIILOLOdlCAI. SOCIKTV, JAM A1!V -.'.'.Til |M:,(>. Tills notice, b(.'in;>/. ON THE LAXCa AGES OF NEW CAIJFORNIA. I! I-; A 1) BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, MAY i;Vrn \!^b:^. The languages of t]i(> south-western districts of the Ore- gon territory arc conveniently studied in the admirable vo- lume upon the Philology of the United States Exjiloriug Expec'ition J by ]\Ir Hale. Herein we find that the frontier between that territory and California is most probably formed by the Saintskla, Umkwa, and Lutuami languages, the Saint- skla being spoken on the si^'i-coast, the ILnkwa lyin;;- to the east of it, and the Lutuami east of the Umkwa. All tliree, in the present state of our knowledge, belong to ditferent philological divisions. It is unnecessary to add, that each tongue covers but a small geographical area. The Paduca area extends in a south-eastern direction in such a manner as to lap round the greater part of Calihirnia and New Mexico, to enclose both of those arr>as, and to prolong itself into Texas ; and that so far southwards as almost to reach the Oulf of Mexico. Hence , except at the south and the north-west, the Californian languages (ami indeed the Kew IMoxican as Avell) are cut off and isolated from the other tongues of America by means of this remar- kable extension of the Paducas. The Paduca tongues dip into each of these countries as well as lap round them. It is convenient to begin with a, Paduca language. The ll'ihitxiiit is, perhaps, an Oregon rather than a Cali- fornian language; though at the same time it is probably coiii- nion to the two countries. It can be shown to be Paduca by its vocabulary in Mr. Hale's work, tlie Shoshoni being the language to which it comes nearest; indeed ^Ir. Galla- tin calls the Wihinast the Western Shoshoni. Due east of th(! Wihinast come the Bonak Indians, currently belie^e(l to be Paduca, but still requiring the evidence of a vocabu- lary to prove them so. ^ r \ ON Tin; LAXCilAOKS OF NKW t'AI.n'(HtXlA. 301 The true Shoslioni succeed; and tlicse are, prol)a])ly, Ore- ann rather than Californian. At any rate, their haiiguao-c fidls within tlie study of the former country. But the Uta Lake is truly a part of the great Californian basin, and the Uta language is known to us from a vocabulary, and known to be Paduca: Enclisii. sun miio?i CoMANcnf taliarp. uiahtots mush. L TA tap .. sl(ir nuiihlantz t/iarcli. mail toooiipayah tooavislichoe. 7viimitn iiaijali wyajico. hull ahpats t [III- /it'ad . ooanu'kpcc / uialniiats wvai)eochoe tut.- fitreliead muttock paa[i III. ace eye fiose LooeJi) k SllOO ove uacluel putty mahvctah moopee. mouth tiinp. leelh . teppa. tf»u": tahueo. tongue alioh alia! liO. chill ear lanuoc k(|U('Il nnik. 11 aliavk. lair suooli neclc... arm .... hand.... breast foot .... kf»lph nooir iiia.ssecr V'^y parpee. toyock. mowa. mowa, toko. nai up n iiliai kalivah telicy h horse serpent tocweroc uohecr ir. dog ahrcots shardce cat luoosah fire coon food .. water 00 r f ah koona. r laiiar. The Uta being thus shown to be Paduca , tlie ovidcnco in favour of other tribes in their nei"hbourhood beinu' Paduca al so IS imp roved. Thus — ■■ K'liixirt.s of tlu' Sucrotaiy of War, witli !vecoiiii;iis.><;uu'o.s of route iioiii !>)in Antonio to El I'nso. Wa.slilni;-ton-, ISaO. (Appendix 15.) t From {I Xtmni \'oi'.iibtiliiry, by li. S. Neighbour; .Selioolcraft'.s lli.'j- tory, &c., Pt. ii. 302 ox Tin: LANdUAdlOS Ol- M:\V CAMI'iUIMA. Tho D jggers arc gonenilly placed in the same catojjorv with the Jjoiuiks, and soniotimes con.sidered as Bonaks uiidur another name. The Sann)iches, lying south of the Uta, are similarly con- sidered Uta. Special vocabularies, however, are wanting;. The Uta carry us from the circumference of the groat basin to an angle formed by the Avestern watershed of the Riu (Jrande and the rivers Colorado and Gila; and the langua;;(! that comes next is that of the Navahos. Ot" these, tlu; ,Jo- corillas of Kew Mexico are a branch. We hav(; vocabu- laries of each of these dialects tabulated with that of tlic Uta and collected by the same inquirer. Mr. Hale, in the "Philology" of the United States Ex- ])loring Expedition, showed that the Tlatskanai and Uiukwa were outlying languages of the great Athabaskan family. It has since been shown by Professor Turner that certain Apatch languages are in the same interesting and important class, of which Apatch languages the Kavaho and Jecorilla are two. Now follows a population which has stinmlated the atten- tion and excited the wonder of ethnologiists — the 3Ioqni. The Moqui are they who, occupants of some of the more favoured })arts of the country between the Gila and Colorado, have so oi'Um been contrasted with the ruder tribes around them ^ — the Navaho and Uta in particular. TheiMoqui, ton, are they whose ethnological relations have been looked for in the direction of Mexico and the semi-civilized Indians of Central America. Large towns, regular streets, stone build- ings, white skins, and European beards have all been at- tributed to these mysterious Moqui. They seem , however, to be simply Indians whose civilization is that of the l^^cbIo Indians of New Mexico. The same table that gives us the Uta and Navaho vocabularies, gives us a Moqui one also. In this, about eight Avords in tAventy-one are Uta. Languages allied to the Uta, the Navaho, and the Moqui. may or may not till up nine-tenths of what an Indian Avould call the Doab, or a Portuguese the Entre Rios, /, c. the parts between the tAvo rivers Gila and Colorado. Groat as has been the activity of the American surveyors, the ex- ploration is still incomplete. This makes it convenient to pass at once to the head of the Gulf of Calil'ornia. A fresh language noAV presents itself, spoken at the head of the pe- ninsula (or Acte) of '>/d California. The vocabulary that has longest represented this tongue is that of the Mission of Saint Diego on the Pacific; but the language itself, ex- (»N Tin: i-an(;i;a(w;.s oi- m;\v (auiuuma. ;}(i;j same catpf;orv i Bonaks under ti'iiiUid across tlio licad of the ^kic, reaches tlio mouth of the Colorado, and is prolonged, to some distance at least, beyond the junction of the Gila. Of the Dicguno language — for such seems to bo the Spanish name for it — Dr. Coulter has given one vocabulary, and Lieut. \\nii])])le (U. S. A.) another. The tirst is to be fiiund in the Journal of the Geographical Society, the second is the second part of Hchoolcraft's "History, chamec anipuchuch - guelichcuiapo. ISacuiuch- pambo- cuohlich-cuiatpo-hainat. Kapuija. A /h/rd Ijranch, however, of this division, constituted by !\ language called the Cuchan, of which a specijnen is given by Lieut. Whipple {r/'de siip/wt), is still nearer to the latter of those two forms of speech. There can be but little doubt that a combination of sounds expressed by the letters /"/// in the Dieguno tongue, re[)re- sents the sound of the ^Mexican //; a sound of Aviiich the (listiibution has long drawn the attention of investigators. Cnnmion in the languages of iMexican, connnon in th(^ lan- i:'iiages of the northern parts of Oregon, sought for amongst the languages of Siberia, it here appears — whatever may bo its value as a characteristic — as Californian. The names of the Indians whose language is represented by the specimens just given are not ascertained with absolut(^ ex- actitude. Mofras mentions the Yumas and Amaqua(|uas. The ]\lission of San Luis Jic;/ tie Francia (to be distin- guished from that of San Luis Ol>/spo) comes next as we proceed noi'thwards. Between 3.'>'/V' '^^^'^ ol", a new language makes its ap- lif^arance. This is represented by four vocabularies, two of which take the designation from the name of the tribe, and two from the Mission in which it is spoken. Thus , the Netela language of the United States Exploring Expedition is the same as the San Juan Capistrano of Dr. Coulter, 304 ON Tin: riANCIlAOlOS OV XKW CALiroUNlA. and tho San Gabriel of Dr. Coulter the same as tin; Kii of tlie United States Exploring Expedition. Tiie exact relation of these two languao-es to each other is somewhat uncertain. They arc certainly langua<;os of tho same group, if not dialects of the same language. In the case of r and /, a regular letter-change exists between them. Thus Dr. Coulters tables give us Knolihii. .San (iAisuiKL. moon muavr nntler paara San JiAN Cai'istuano. .... inioil. pal. curlh . salt hot.. salt uugurr ungkhur ekliel. engel. ore khalck. whilst in the United States Exploring Expedition we liml — English. Ki,r. Netkla. 7)10011 inoar inoil. slur suot suol. water bar pal. bcai' huiuar huuot. Of these forms of speech the San Gabriel or Kij is the moiv northern; the San Juan Capistrano or ISetela being tho near- est to the Dieguno localities. The difference between the two groups is pretty palpable. The San Gabriel and San Juan numerals of Mofras represent the Xetela-Kij language. It is remarked in Gallatin's paper that there were certain coincidences between the Netela and the Shoshoni. There is no doubt as to the existence of a certain amount of like- ness between the two languages. Jujubit, Caqullas, and Sibapot arc the names of San Ga- briel tribes mentioned by Mofras. The Paternoster of the three last-named missions are as follows : — Languc de la Mission dc San (iabriti. — Y Yonac y yogin tucu pugnaisa sujucoy motuanian masarmi magin tucupra malmano muisme milleosar y ya tucupar jiman bxi y yonr masaxmi mitema coy aboxmi y yo niamainatar momqjaich milli y yakma abonac y yo no y yo ocaihuc coy jaxmea main itan momosaich coy jama juexme huememes aich. Amen. Jesus. Langue dc la Mission dc San Juan Capistrano. — Ghana ech tupana ave onench, otune a cuachin, chame om reino, libi yb chosonec esna tupana cham nechetepe, micate toni chii chaom, pepsum y^ cai caychamc y i julngcalme cai cell. Depupnn opco chame ciium oyote. Amen. Jesus. Langue de la Mission de San Luiz Rcy de Francia. — Cham ON TlIK J..\X(lL'A;l h<'g ga y vi an qui ga topauga. Cliam na cliolanc mini clia pan ])itu mag ma jan pohi cala cai qui clia me liolloto gai torn cliaiua o l^iii cliag' cay ne clic cal me tus so Hi olo cainu! alia linnc ilianio chain cho sivo. Amen. Jesus. The following is the Paternoster of the ]\tission of San Fernando. It is taken (Vom JMofras: — Y yorac yona taray tucuj)uma sagduci'i motoanian majarmi inoin main mom't mui^^mi miojor y iaetucu})ar. Pan yyogin :;iiiiiarnerin majarmi mi fema coy('> dgorna yio mannirimy iiiii, yiarnia ogonug y yon.-i, y yo ocaynen coijarmea main ytomo mojay coiyama huermi. Parima. The jMission of San Fernando lies between that of San fiabriel and Santa IJarbara. Santa P>arl)ara's channel (be- twcHii 34" and 34'/2" ^^- 1^0 runs between the mainland and some small islands. From these parts we have two voca- Itularies, Pevely's and Dr. Coulter's. Tlie former is known to ni( mly through the IMithridates, and has only thrc(! words t. .at can be compared with the other: — tion we lind IS the nioiT ExGMsii. l>KVi:i,v's. Cni:i/ri;i!'M. one paca jtaka. two cxco shkd/a*. t/ircc luapja ///c/sckh. The Mission of Santa Ines lies between that of Santa ]\i\v- bara and that of San Luis Obispo, in 35V;( N. L.; which inst su})plies a vocabulary, one of Dr. Coulter's: — KNOi.iriii. Sa\ FjI is ()iiisi'C). Santa Uauhaua. fiuilcr to oh. stone tkcup kluMip. i/trcc niislia masckli. bo/v takha akha. sail topu tipi. This is the amount of likericss between the two forms of spooch — greater than that between the Ketcla and Dieguno, but less than that between the Netela and Kij. Dr. Couh(!r gives us a vocabulary for the jMis&ion of San Antonio, and the United States Fxploring Expedition one from San Miguel, the latter being very short: 1'm;i.isii. San Mi kuj!,-su ka-kislio. three thihnhi kla])'li;\i. /'our kcsa kisha. fiw (ddrato ultraoh. six palate ]»!Uii(d. serc?i t('])a tc'h. eifjhl sratcl .sliaanel. fii/ie tedi-tnii) tota-tsoi. ieti tiupa tsoeli. It is safe to say that these two vocabularies represent one and the same language. About tifty miles to the north-west of St. Miguel lies La Soledad, for which we have a short vocabulary of Mr. Hale's : — IOmii.isii. La Sijt.i.dad. head tsop. hair Wdrtikh. ears utsho. tiose us (oos, Custano). ei/es hiiu (^liiu, Tahtliiij. mouth hai. The word nthu, which alone denotes dawjhler, makes the power of the syllable ku doubtful. Kcvertheless, it is pro- bably non-radical. In ni-k/-n«sh, as opposed to ni-k^Mi(/, we have an apparent aceonnuodation {iimluul) 5 a phenomenon not Avholly strange to the American form of speech. Is this the only language of these ])arts ? rroba))ly not. The numerals of langua; IMofras, and the diflercic Hale is as follows: — KXOLISII. La Soi.KUAi). mail nnio. woman sliurisluue. father ui-ka-pa. mo'her ni-ka-na. son lu-ki-uish. (laughter iii-ka from this Mission are given hy between them and those of J\lr. ON Tin; I-AN(UA(ii;s of XKW (Ar.lKftUMA. 307 k-inn, Si. liti/i/i.j 1!xi:msii. Mofras Soi,. IIai.k's Sol, oDf ciiknlii liiinitna. l/i'it oultos titslic. l/irrr ka)>j»(\s knii-klia. fniir oulti'ziiii iitj'^- /iiw lialiizoii piUMiasli. liali-skakciii iiiiiiiukslia. kapka-iuai udukslia. oulton-iiiai taitciiii. ])akk(' watsd. taia-cliakt inatsoso. si.v sci'rn cifjlil . nine .., ten .. 3 represent one Miguel lif's La There is sonic affinity, but it is not so close as one in an- (itlior quarter; /. c. one with the Achastli and Ruslon. Between !}()" and 37" N. L. lies the town ot" JMontcrey. For this neighbourhood we have the Ruslon east , and tlu^ Ksleii Avest, the latter being called also Eccleniaehs. ]iour- fi;oing and Do La ]\lanon are the authorities for the scanty vitcabularies of these two forms of speech, to which is ad- ded one of the Achastli. The Achastli, the Ruslen, and the Soledad of Mofras seem to represent one and the same hmguage. The converse, however, does not hold good, i. c. the Soledad of Hale is )iot the Eslenes of ]»ourgoing and tlie Ecelemachs of De La Manon. This gives us four lan- guages for these parts : — \. The one represented by the San Miguel and San An- tonio vocabulary. 2. The one ropresented by the Soledad of Hale. 3. The one represented by the Soledad of ^Mofras, th.e Achastli of De La Manon , and the Ruslen of Jjourgoing. 4. The one represented by the Eslen of Bourgoing and the Kcclcmaehs of De La jManon, and also by a vocabulary yet to be noticed, viz. that of the INIission of Carmel of Mofras. F.xiii.isn. Caumki,. Kst.kn. Sulkoad (nf Miifvas). IJt si,i:.\. line pek pck Ilciikala eujala. \n'n ouUiaJ ulliaj Iloultcs ultis. ////•('(; koulep juU'p Ikajipcs kajipcs. liiur kamakouw jauiajus //re peuiakala peniajala >/.(■ jiegualanai ]ii'gnatanoi >'■/('« kulukul.iuai julajualanci "'///(/ kouuaik'pla jidcp jnalanei nine kakouslauai janiajas jualanci '('/( tomoila tomoila >ultiziiii ultizim. haliizdu hali-izu. lialisliakoiu linlishakcni. ka]»kaniai kajikainai-sliakciii. Dulloniiiai ultuinai shakciii. pakko pac'ke. tanic'liakt tamcliait. 20 ^- 308 ON iiii; i,A\(;r.\(;i;s ok nkw "AMFoknia. Wc now approacli the parts of California which are l)ost known — the Bay of San Kraneisco in 38" N. L. For those parts the jNlission of Doh>ros givos us the names of th(j fol- lowing populations: — 1. Ahwastos. 2. Olhones ((Jostanos or Ooastmen). 3. Altahinos. 4. Komonans. 5. Tuloinos. For the same parts we iiave vocabularies of four lanjiiia- gos which are almost certainly mutually unintclligililo. Two are from Baer's BeHrdfje; they were collected duriiif;' the time of the Russian settlement at lloss. One represents the language of certain Indians called Olumcntkc, tlie other that of certain Indians called k'hwakhlamaiju. The other two are from the second part of Schoolcraft. ()ne is headed Cos- tano -- the language of the Indians of the coast; the otiicr Cushna. The language represented by the Cushna vocabu- lary can be traced as far inland as the Lower Sacramiciitd. Here we find the Bush?///^/// (or Pujuni), the HoQiimiii, the YsiBunini, the Yulcautnni, the Kemshaw, the Kiski, the link, and the Yukae tribes, whose languages, or dialects, are represented by three short vocabularies, collected by ]\Ir. Dana, viz. the Pujuni, tiio Sekumnc, and the Tsamak. The following extract shows the extent to which these three forms of speech agree and differ; — j I ENdiaSH. i'lMLNI, SkKI MNK. TsAMAK. man ('uue niailik inailik. kele iiiniduniouai cti woman kele kele kule. child — dauf/hter — — head t(,'ut(;,ul tsnl t(,mlt(;Axl. hair oi one oi. car ono bono ovro. eye wat^a il liil. nusc honka suina moulh molo sim neck tokotok kui kiilut. arm ma wall kalut. hand tc^apai nia tamsult or taintt;ut. fingers tt^ikiknp biti tcikikup; letj pai podo foot kat/q» pai toe ta^> biti house he ho bow olumni arrow huia shoes sobnu beads hawut. bimpi. pai. ON THK I,AN(!r.\firS or m;\v cat.ifokma. 309 unintelligible. loUectetl (lurina: One represents ntkc, the other The otlier two is headed Co.s- !oast; the other Cuvshna voeabu- sr Sacraniientd. le Hociimiii, the K.NdMSH. d-'l fiiii ihii/ iii(jlil lin' Pt liihi okn UNI. SkKI MNK. TsAMAK. oko oko cki 1'" (;a sa en . //'((//'/• moiiii,ino]i mop inoiiii. riirr l('»k(>l('»k iimiiidi umnti. fllllil' o (» In'c 'P'h ili'cr . Iiinl fish . H'S tea wi tsa . Hint! knt . tsit . knt. I a la sitlmcm niai mai immi' ipml... M .. uld .. lll'W .. siiwrl link siiur .... Iiiislrii lano Aveiine huk. t(;o(,' maldik liawil .S11( liik niii tshel oho . . icAva n'cwa iru ilk. lye wiye SIVVH liilk .. siiKj .. (knee line .. Iiro .. ihrce finir.. I'l ■— - \vi\viua eiinn tsol ... )aio. ti AVikte teene p en si inpni. pell el .sa])ni tsi ... five ninstic niank SIX tini, o n tapni (sir) sen tnii , a 1 lensi no 'I /it mnc . len . ])etsliei tajiai matsluiin mntsnin {sir) str. sic. (V) CO > J tsliap aiiaka k;- a( Ink On the Kassima River, a tributary of the Sacramiento^ about eighty miles from its mouth lives a tribe whose lan- guage is ealled the Talatui , and is represented by a voea- bulary of Mr. Dana's. It belongs, as Gallatin has suggested, to the same class with the language of San Raphael, as gi- ven in a vocabulary of Mr. Hale's : — ;n() UN Till-; i,A\(ii'.\(;i:s i»i' M'.w cm, ii'. sun /// ///. (Idfl hi uiim III. uiijlil \v,\-n'il u'iih\y\\\i\. lire wihr wv/M'. HHtlcr hik kiik. sialic snwM IniMtii. bird Iniic, ti kakalis. house koilji. ki)il(ii/it. one ke/iiiie keiiai. l/ro of/It \\.n oZH. three leli-ko Inhi-kn. four oi(;ii-ko Aviag. five kassa-ko kcnckus. ,s'/.r tcnu'bo patirak. seven kauikuk (V) sic sciolawi. eiijht kauiiula avhsuvm. nine ooi uinarask. ten ckuyo kitKliisli. North of San Francisco, at least aloni (II' \r;\v c w,ri". saliiioN laonok. r/iiti kcutikut. fiiielii'dil tei. loiifc kelekeh'. iron keh'keh'. i/ni/x' iiyulii. rus/i tso. rill ha, has. sri' wihi. go !iMr;i. (Slight as is this- ])rcponderaneo of affinity with the .Jakoii, it is not to be ignored altogether. Tlut dis])h»eeincnt8 be- tween the two areas liavo boon eonsiderabh^ and though the names of as many as five intermediate tribes are known, wo liavo no specimens of their lanf^uages. These tribes are — 1. The Kaus, between the rivers Undcwa and (Jlamet, and conse(|uently not far from the !i<>ad-waters of tiic Sacra- miento. 2. ;}. The Tsalel and Killiwashat, (m tiie IJnd^wa. I. The yaintskh^ between these and the .lakon , the .lakon hcing between the TIatskanai and Undiwa. Now as tliese last are Athabaskan, there nnist have; been displacement. But there are further i)roofs. North of the isolated and apparQutly intrusive Tlatskjuiai^ lie the Nsie- tsliawas — is(dated and apparently intrusive also; since they belong to the great Atna stock of Frazer's Kiver. The Jakon, then, and th(! Indians of the Upper Sacra- iniento may belong to the same stock — a sto( k wdiich will be continuous in its area in case intermediate tribes 312 ON Tin; i,\Nt;i \fiKs or w.w <'\i.inM!MA. provo rciVrablo to it, imd inti rniptod in it.s nron it r\ d,, not. At any rate, tlin dirrclhrn ot" tlu! .lakons i.s important. Tho following; PatcrnostirH iVoni MofVas, rcf'cralilc to tin' part.H about San l"'i'anciHi'o, r('(|uiro fixini;-. 'I'li"y can [iru- l)al)ly 1)0 (listril)Ut('(l anionj;' tlic lani;ua;;('.s ascrilx'il fd tli;it district — not, liowovcr, i»y the picscnt writer: — l.iitHjve (U' la Mistiioii dc Simla Clara, — Appa niacn'nc nio saura saraaliti^a clccpulinicni inira^at, sacan niacn'iio nicn.-araali assucvy nouinan ourun niacari jjircca nuiiia hun earaalii^u poliiiiia uiaalo- qnon alapa, (piiaonicho opto; pa(piinini^ng (piicpK; fccnot upalacs ImataliiU' itiniisshup fancclie alapa. IJIaniuliu ilalni- lalisalmc. Picsiyu,:;- ('(picpi^ i^iiisucutaniyu;;' U(piiya;fiiinniii, cancchoquique quisaj;in .sueutanaii,isM-k;ilii;i (|iic(|naoliM. nine scoitnii) tclii oiiasM-iiiMlia iiiaJMl-oiviii. Irn tduyiiiili' (luikiiiiiiMlia (jucjiMnaJai. ADDENDUM. — (Oct. 14, 1853.) a inacono ma- Siiico tlio previous paper was read, ''Observations on some "f tlic Indian dialects of Mortliern (California, by (J. (Jibbs," liave appeared in the Jird Part of Selioolcraft (published nilaries, wliieh iwo <;'ivon in a tabulati.'d form, lv'.:!j {vMc pp. 4-i<)-4ir)). The vocal) lire for the following* t\vclv(! languajj;es: — I. Tcliokoyom. 2. (>opch. 3. Kulanapo. 4. Yukai. !>. t'lioweshak. (3. Batenidakaiec. 7. Weeyot. S. Wisliok. !i. Weitspek. 10. lioopah. ll.Taldowah. 12, Khnek. J5osid(;s wliieli tliree others have boon collected, but do not appear in print, viz.: — 1. The Watsa-he-wa,* spoken by one of the bands of the Shfisti family. 2. The Howtoteoh. H. The Nabittse. Of these the Tehokoyem = the Chomuf/em of the .'^acra- !iiii'iito. and the Joii/doi/smc or San Raphael of Mofras; also '•allatins San Raphael, and (more or less) the Tala'tui. The Copeh is somethino- (thouf^h less) like the short Up- pf'i' Sacramiento specimen of th(^ precedin;^^ paper. The Yukai is, perhaps, less like the Pujuni, Sekume, and IVaniak vocabularies than the Copeh is to the Upper Sa- naniiento. Still, it probably belonfrs to the same class, ^iiu'c it will be seen that the Huk and Yukai languages are incnil)ers of the group that ]\[r. Dana's lists represent. The 314 ON iHi: L.vN(ii;A(ii;s or .\i;\v ('ami'ounia. KiilaiiJipo lias a (tloar prcpondoraneo of afHuitit^s ^vitll the Vuka(\ Tlio ( ■liovvesliak and Batcmdakaico arc allied. So aro — Tlic \V(M>yot and tlio Wisliok; in each ot" wliicli the sound oxpressed by //' occnrs. Those alon^' with the Woitspck take m as the possessive prefix to the parts ot" the huinaii body , and have other points of similarity. K.N(;i.isii. httir fool Wkkvot. Wishosk. pali'tl ])M]itM. wcllih'tl wehlihl. The Iloopali is more interesting;" than any. The riaiuos of the parts of the human body, when compared with the Navaho and Jecorilla, are as follows: — I'.NtiMsn. Tdoi'aii. Xavaiio. .Ii;i(iI!ii.i.a. head okhch Imt-se it-so. fon'hcdil hot.sintah liut-tah ])in-nay. fitcc liauiiith liuii-no eye Iiuanali liunuali jtiiidah. nosi', liiintclm Imtcliin Avitrlicss. teclh liowwa Iiowgo cglio. ttmfjue sastlia liotso czalito. car luttdieweli Initfliah wickyali. hair tscwok liotso itsc. fiec/c hoscwatl Imckipioss wickcost. arm hoithlani Imtcon Avitsc. hand liollah hnllali Avislali. Hero the initial combination of h and some other letter is (after the manner of so many American tongues) the pos- sessive pronoun — alike in both the Navaho and Iloopah: many of the roots being also alike. Now the Navaho ami .Jecorilla aro Athabaskan, and the Iloopah is probably Atlia- bask an also. The Tahlewah and Ehnek are but little like each othc, and little like any other language. Although not connected with the languages of Califoniia. there is a specimen in the volume before us of a form nt speech which has been already noticed in these Transaction?, and which is by no means clearly defined. In the 'iMli Number, a vocabulary of the Ahnenin language is shown to be the same as that of the Fall- Iiiilians of IJmfreville. in Gallatin this Jhiicn/n vocabulary is quoted as Ariipulio, I'l' Atsaia. Now it is specially stated that these Arapahn o\ NIA. ON TlIK I.ANdl'ACK.S <)!' m;\V C.M.llOKNlA. 315 nitics wh\\ tlio icd. So iiro — .•liicli the sound I tlio Weitsjick S of tllC llUllKUl ly. The rinincs ipared vvitli the ,yi;((il!ll.l.A. . it-so. . i»in-ii;ty. ]»lU(lilll. AviU'hcss. cg'ho. ozahto. Avu'kyiili. itsc. wic'kcost. Avitso. wi.shih, no other letter is onguos) the pus- 10 and Iloopali: the Navaho nml s probably Atlm- like eaeh <»tlii'/. ves of Califoniiii. us of a form "t cse Transactions. d. In tiie 2sth naj>'e is shown \'> f IJnifreville. li'l as Anijnili'i. "I'l these Ar(/p(ili'> >"' .tIs/iKi Indians are tliose who are also (though inconveniently ,ir ('rron(M)usly) ealhid the (Jros I'di/rcs, the J>'/f/ /U'//fcs and the Minilaves of the Prairie — all names for the Indians about the Falls of the Saskaehewan, and consequently of Indians i'ar north. Ihxt this was only one of the poj)nlations namiid Arapaho. Other Arapahos are found on the head-Avaters of the Platte and Arkansas. Who were thes(>V (Jallatin connected them at once with those of the Saskaehewan — but it is doubt- ful whether he went on better grounds than the name. A vocabulary was wanted. The volume in question suppli(.'S one — collected by Viv. ,1, S. Smith. It shows that the two Arapahos are really iiuMubers of one and the same class — in language as well as in name. Uj)on the name itself more light recjuires to be thrown. In an alphabetical list of Indian p<»])uhitions in th(^ same volume with the vocabulary, from Avhich we learn that the MOW specimen is one of the soufhiTii (and not the norllarn) Arapaho, it is stated that the Avord means '^//ricAcd" or ''IdHnot'ff." In what language V Perhaps in that of the Ara- jialio themselves; ix'rhap? in that of the Sioux — since it i;> a population of the Sionx class which is in contact with I'lilh the Ara])ahos. Again — if the name be native, which of the two divisions uses it? the northern or the southern V or bothV If both use it, how comes the synonym AhneninV How, too, conies the form Ats/iia'^ Is it a typographical error? The present writer used the same j\IS. with Gallatin and found the name to be Alniiniin. To throw the two Arapahos into one and the same class is only one step in our classiiication. C'an they be rtderred to any Avider aitd more general division? A Shyenni; voca- liularv is to be found in the same table; and Schoolcraft ivmarks that the two languages are allied. So they are. Xiiw r(\asons have been given for placing the Shyenne in tlio great xMgonkin class (Pliiloln;/. Trans., iiiul Trtnis'jcf/aiis 'if llic American FJlnmloijical Suca-///, vol. ii, j). cxi.). There are similar affinities with the J>/ac/,/'oo/. Now, in tlio 'pa])er of these; Transaeti(jns already referred to, it is stilted that the affinities of the P)hickfoot "are mise(dlaneous; more, however, Avith the Algonkin tongues than Avitli tl-os(i "t any recognized group*." (iallatin takes the same vicAv Traitsacliniis af American EthnuL Soc. vol. ii. p. cxiii.). ' Nu. -.'s. vol. ii. J.. :n. .Ian. >[, IMo. 316 ON THK li.WGUAGR.S OF XF.W rALTFORNTA. This gives as recent additions to tlie class in question, tlio ]31ackfoot — the Shyenne — the Arapaho. The southern Arapaho are immigrants, rather than indi- yeiKV , in their present localities. So are the Shyennes, \\\\\\ whom they are conterminous. The original locality of the southern Arapahos was on the Saskachewan; that of the Shyennes on the Red Kivcr, Plence, the affinity between their tongues represents an af- finity arising out of their relations anterior to their migra- tion southward. -^ ] ox CEHTATN ADDITIONS TO THE ETIl- XOGRAnilCAL PHILOLOGY OF CENTIIAL VMEIIICA, WITH 11E.AIAIIKS UPON IIIE SO-CALLED ASTEK ( ONUUEST OF MEXICO. KKAD BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY. May 12, I8o4. In Central America we have two points for wliieh our philological data iiave lately received additions, viz. the parts about the Lake Nicaragua and the Isthmus of Darien. For the parts about the Lake of Nicaragua, the chief aiUhority is Mr. Squier; a writer with whom we differ in certain points, but, nevertheless, a writer Avho has given us both materials and results of great value. The languages ;\)i'csented, for the first time, by his vocabularies are four in number, of which three are wholly new, whilst one gives I us a phenomenon scarcely less important than an absolutely frosh form of speech; viz. the proof of the occurrence of a known language in a new, though not unsuspected, locality. To these i'our a fifth may be added; but, as that is one already illustrated by the researches of Henderson, Cotheal [and others, it does not come under the category of new matc- I'ial. This language is that of the Indians o/' the Mosquito coasl. — Respecting these Mr. Squier Uommits himself to the doctrine that they are more or less ICarib. They maybe this in physiognomy. They may also lie so in respect to their civilization, or want of civilization ; [and perhaps this is all that is meant, the words of our author being, that "upon the low alluvions, and amongst the dense (lank forests of the Atlantic coast, there exist a few scanty, hvandcring tribes, maintaining a precarious existence by ;ji8 ON CKIIIAIN AI>l>rri(lN,S TO Till; i;'l'II.\n(i;:Al'IlI(AI, 1,- liunting- and fishinii,', willi little or no ar^rlculturo, destitute of civil organization, witli a debased religion, and generallv corresponding with the (Jaribs ot" the islands, to whom tlicV sustain close al'tinities. A portion of thciir descendants, still further debased by tlu; introduction of negro blood, may still 1)0 found in the wretched ]\Ioscos or ]Mos(]uitos. The few .ind scattered JMeJchoras, on the river St. ,Iuan, are certainlv of Carib stock, and it is more than probalde tiiat the sann,' is true of the Wcolwas, liamas, Toacas, and Poyas, and also of the other tribes on the Atlantic coast, furtlu-r to the sontli- ward, towards (Jhiriqui Lagoon, and collectively denoiiiiuatid Bravos." — Central America and Mearatjua , ii. pp. liOS-:!!)',). Nevertheless, as has becMi already stated, the language is other than Carib. It is other than (^arib, whether Ave hmk to the Moskito or the AVoaiil)." In a note we learn that "tliir- teen leagues from the Culf of Nicoya, ()>'iedo speaks [of a village called Carabizi, whei'c the same language was spoken as at Chiriqui," iVic. Of the Melchora we have no specimens. For each ami every tribe, extant or extinct, of the Indians about the Chiri- qui Lagoon we want them also. The known vocabularies, Jiowever, for the parts nearest that locality arc other than Carib. Let us, howevfu", loid-L further, and we shall timl good reasons for believing that certain populations of the parts in question are called, by the Spaniards of their neighho.ii- liood, (Jaribs, much in the same way that they, along witli nin(>-tenths of the other aborigines of America, are called Inr/ians by us. ''The region of (Jhantales, " Avrites ]\Ir. S(|uiei'. "was visited by my friend Mv. .lulius Froisbel, in the suniind' of this year (IS5I). He penetrated to the head-Avaters et the Rio Mico, Escondido, or Blue-fields, where he found the I jmg'ua |area. s IMr. S([uiev, , in the sunnini] le head- waters ol lerc he found tlioj Indians to be agrioulturah'sts, partially civilized, and gener- ally speaking tiie Spanish language. Tlioy are called Caribs 1)V their Spanish neighbours/' &f. But their language, of which Mr. Froebel collected a vocabulary, published by IMr. Squier, is, like the rest, o//ter (him Curib. It may, then, safely bo said, that the Carib character of the IMoskito Indians, Otc. wants confirmation. Tiicurctyua. A real addition to our knowledge is su})})lied by M. Squier concerning the Nicaraguans. The statement oi' Ovicdo as to the tribes between the Lake of Nicaragua and the Pacific, along with the occupants of the islands in the lake itself, beinj' Mexican rather than indigmious, he confirms, lie may be said to prove it; since he brings specimens of the language (^Mijuiran, as he calls it), which is as truly Mexican as the language of Sydney or New York is I^ngiish. The Mexican Inca language of the Peruvian lj('i;ins, and extends as far south as the frontier of Chili. So much for the extreme points ; between which the whole intermediate space is very nearly a icrra incoy/iila. In Honduras, according to Colonel Galindo, the Indians are ex- tinct; and as no specimen of their language has been preserved from the time of their existence as a people, that state is a blank in [)hiloIogy. iSo also are San Salvador, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica; in all "f which there are native Indians, but native Indians who speak I Spanish. Whether this implies the absolute extinction of the native tongue is uncertain: it is only certain that no specimens I "fit are known. The Indian of the Moskito coast /s known; and that through Wh vocabularies and grannnars. It is a remarkably unaffiliated liiuguage — more so than any one that I have ever compared. I Still, it has a few miscellaneous affinities; just enough to save it fmm absolute isolation. "When we remember that the dialects with pvliich it was conterminous are lost, this is not remarkable. Pro- 21* 321 NOTi: ri'ON A I'AIMMt (»!•' TIIK IIONOIUAI'.M', CAI'TVIN bably it represents a liirgo class, f. r. that whieh comprised the languages of Central America not allied to the Maya, and the langnages of New Grenada. Hetween the IMoskito conntry and Quito there are only twd vocabularies in the JMithridates, neither of which extends far be- yond the numerals. One is that of the dialects of Veragua called Darien, and collected by Wafer; the other the numerals of the famous Muysca language of the plateau of Santa Vv. do Uogota. With these exceptions, the whcdo philology of New Grenada is unknown, although the old missionaries counted the mutually un- intelligible tongues by the dozen or score. More than one modern author — the present writer amongst others — has gone so far as to state that all the Indian langua'ges of New Grenada are extinct. Such is not the case. The following vocabulary, which in any other part of the world would bo a scanty one, is for the jjaits in question of more than average value. It is one with which 1 have been kindly favoured by Dr. Cullen , and which represents the language of the Cholo Indians inhabiting part of the Isthmus of I Darien, east of the river Chuquanaqua, which is watered by tlio river Paya and its branches in and about lat. S^ 15' N., and long. 77" 20' W. : — II English. ClIOLO. Exfii.i.sir. Cnoi.o. Water paylo Leon, i.e. large Fire itiboor tiger mama pooroo Sun pcsca Kiver i/iO ]\Ioon hcdecho Kiver Tuyra Ingtinioma Tree pavhru Large man mock) mi dcuslni Leaves chlluha Ijittle man tnndihid zaclic House (the An iguana ipoga Man mochlna Lizard hurhe Woman fviiena Snake lama Child wOrdocM Turkey, wild zdmo Thunder pa Parrot cane Canoe, or\ Guacharaca bird bullecbuUcp Chingo j Jiaboilrootiia Guaca bird pavnra Tiger, ?>.jaguai hnCima Lazimba loosce The tide is rising lobiroooor The tide is falling erUnido Where are you goii ig aviomja Whence do you come zamubima zebuloo Let us go ivouda Let us go bathe wondo citide The extent to which they diflfer from the languages of Veue-I zuela and Colombia may be seen from the following t.iblos of tliel < It m !■: CAl'TMX cli comprisod the e Maya, and the lorc arc only two ;li extends fur ho- of Veraj^ua calleil le numerals of the ita Vv. do Bogdta. New Grenada is 1 the mutually uu- D than one modern las gone so far as lenada are extinct, lary, Avliicli in any is for the parts in with which I have icli represents the of the Isthnuis of j is watered hy the i" 15' N., and long. I'lTXKov .-s (>.\ Tin; rni.Mi s oi" i'.v.nama. 325 CnoLO. ge vmima pooruo iho togtirooma muchhifi ilC'as'Liii | mochhm zaclic ipoga hurhe tamCi zdnio carre ircl bullccbuUce pavoru loosec words common to Dr. Cnllcn's list, and the equally short ones of the languages of the Orinoco: — English vHilcr English moon Cliolo piijflo Cholo hnfnlto (^uichua unit (^Juichua (ptilla Oinagua uni ( )inagua yase Salivi t'liguu Arawak callchcc Maypuro xicru Yarura goppc Ottomaca in Betoi loom Bet(.i (x'uiUi I\Iaypurc I'ht'jdpi Yanira iiri Salivi vcxio Darien (liilah Darion nie Caril) Umna Zanmea kclukhi English fire English III (in Cholo tuhonr (Jholo mohiua (^)uichua 71 hi a (Quichua ccari Omagua lain runa Salivi cgusta Salivi cocco Maypuro calli JMaypuro cajunachini Ottomaca niin mo Botoi fnlui Ottomaca finder a Yarura corule Yatura pume Carib onalo Muysca muysca chit English sun Carib oquiri Cholo pcsca Quichua inli English v'oman Oinagua hunrassi Cholo wuena Salivi numcscchccoco Quichua Jtuarmi Maypure chie Maypuro linioki Betoi ico-iimasoi Yarura ibi Yarura do din Muysca sua Betoi ro Carib vciou Ottomaca ondua cbidoo NOTE. Kxfoptions to tlic st;it(Miu;iit fuiiccniinp: tlio New (I'rciiacL'i, the Sau „ ^ 'ulvjutor, and the Moskito lang-iiao-os will be found in tlie Notes upon anguagos ot \ euc-« ,|,g j,,,^^ paper. uwinj; tables of theH ON TIIK LAN(a A(ii:s i)V NOKTIIKUN, WKSTKKN, AM) CIATKAL AMEKICA. KKAI) MAY [)V\\. |H:)G. Tlic jtrcfii'iit piijx'i" Is a supjilcnu'iit to two wcll-kiKtwu cmi- Irihutioiis to America pliilolit^y hy tin; late A. ( lallatiii. The first was |)ul)lisli(Ml in tli(! second volmiio of the Ai'clia'()l(»j:i;i Americana, and ^ives a systematic vi(!W of tlie lMii;;iia,L;"s spoken within the; //ten boundaries of the; llniti'd States; thr.sc beinj^' till! Ivivcr Sabine and the Itocky Mountains, Texas boin^- tlien Mexican, and, a /'(iilinri , New jM(!xieo and Cali- fornia; Oregon, also, being' connnon property between tlic Americans and ourselves. The second is a commentary, in the second vohime of the Transactions of tlie American Ktli- noh^gical Society, uiton thhih>h)gi(al (htlti collected by j\lr. Hale, during the United States V.\- l)loring Kxpedition, to which ho acted as oflicial and pro- fessional ])liilologue; (»uly, however, so iar as they applinl to the American parts of Oregon. Tlio groups of this latter pa})er — the paper of the Transactions as o])posed to tliiit of the Archa'ologia — so far as they are separate from tlio:>c of the former, are — 1. 'I'he Kituiiaha. 2. Th.' TsihailiSelish. 3. The Sahaptiu. 4. The ^Vaiilatpn. 5. Tlie Tsiuuk or CMunook. 6. The Kalapuya. 7. The Jakon. H. The Lutuaiiii. *). Tlie Shasti. 10. The J'alaik. 11. The Slioshdiii or Snake hi diaiis. To which add the Arraj)aho, a language of Kansas, con- cerning which infornuition had been obtained since |S2^, the date of the first paper. Of course, some of these I'a- niilies extended beyond the frontiers of the United States, so that any notice of tliem as American carried with it f S(i ON TIIK LANOt A(IK ol' NOHTltKUN, Wn.STKSN, SiC. :i27 )iniii:nN, KAL W('ll-Ull(»WU cnll- A. (lalhitin. TIh; tlu! Arc'li;rol(ii;i;i of tlio laii;4tui;;"s ted States; tlusc IdUiitains, Tcxii;* il(>xi('() and ('nil orty between tln' coninientarv , in Anieriean Ktli- not only thes** two now dis- tinct families, but also the CataAvba, ^^'^occoon , Cherok(!e, I'JKK'tah , and (j)erhaps) Caddo groups, — perhaps also the I'awni and its ally the Jiiccaree. ill. The Aloonkin (iuoui'. — The present form of this iiiTOUj) differs from that which ajijx'ars in the Archa-ologia Ainoricana, by exhibiting larger dimensions. Nothing that was then placed Avithin has since been subtracted from it; indeed, sul)tractions from any class of (Jallatin's making arc well-nigh impossible. In respect to additions, tin; case stands differently. Addition of no slight imp(»rtarcc have been made to the Alfi'onkin group. The earliest was that of — T/ic Bcihuck. — The ]>ethuck is the native language of Newfoundland. In 184(;, tlie collation of a liethuck voca- hiilury enabled nic to state that the language of the extinct, tir doubtfully extant, aborigines of that island was akin to those of the ordinary American Indians rather than to the Kskimo ; further investigation showing that , of the ordinary Aniei'ican languages, it Avas Algonkin rather than aught else. A sample of the evidence of this is to be found in the tullowing table; a table formed, not upon the collation of the whole ]\IS. , but only upon the more important words contained in it. of Kansas, c('ii- ned since; I S2^. onie of thes(! ia- le United States, arricd with it so Hmjlish , sen. lii'tliuek , inntjcraguis. • 'rec, rf/uasis. l'jil)l»('way , niiKjivisis — - ncgtvis =niy son. Ottawa, kwis. Mieinac, utKjuccc. l'assaina(pio(ldy , ti'/itis. Narvagansetts , 7iummuchkse myson. MV 328 ON TIIR LANGUAGES OF NORTIIKRX, WESTKRN, Delaware, f/uissau = his son. Miami, akfi'issima. , iingivissak. Sliawnoo, koissn. Hack & Fox nrc/c/vrssa. Mcnomoni , nr/a'i'sh. Etif/Ush, girl. Botlnick, woasccsli. ih'QO, Sf/itaisis. ()j ibl ) cway , eliwaizais. Ottawa , fifjiirsois. 01(1 Al;^'(>nklii, irkwrssrn. Slicsliatapoo.sli , st/iKts/iis/i. J^assamaquoddy, /x'lsi/iiasis. Narraj^-ansotts , Sfjiiaiiesc. Moutauf^, squasses. Sack & Fox, skfvcssah. Cro, rtw«mc— cliild. Hliosliatapoosli , aivash = child. English , mouth. Bctluick , mamwlthun. Nanticoke , meltoon, Massachusetts , mulloon. Narragan setts , wulloon. I'onobscot, madoon. Acadcan, melon. JVlicmac, toon. Abenaki, ootoon. English, nose, liethuck, ghccn. Miami, kcoxuine. English , teeth, Bethuck, horhofha. ]\Iicmac, nccbcel. Abenaki , ncebcet. English, hand. ]ietlnu'k , niaemed. Micmac, paelcrn. Abenaki , mpaleen. English, ear. Bethuck, moolchiman. iMicinac , maoloowccn. Abenaki , noolawce. English , smoke, liethuck, hassdik. Abenaki , ellooduke. English , oil. Bethuck, cmrt. j^ricmac, memage. Abenaki, pcmmce. English, sun. Bethuck, knisc. (^ree, ttc. , kisis. Abenaki, kcsus. Mohican , kesogh. Delaware, gishukh. Illinois , kisijnil. Shawnoe , kvsalhwn. Sack & Fox , kejcssoah. jMenouieni, kngsho. Passamaquoddy , kisos = moon. Abenaki, kistts =: moon. Illinois, /t/67>=:rnoon. Cree, kcsccow = day. Ojibbcway, kijik=dfiy and light. Ottawa, kijik = ditto. Abenaki , kiscoukon = ditto. Delaware, gicshku = ditto. Illinois , kisik -~ ditto. Shawnoe, krrshqiia = ditto. Sack & Fox , kccshckch - - ditto. English , fire. Bethuck , hooheeshtuvl. Cre(^, csquilti , scmilag. Ojibl)eway, ishkodtu, sknolar. OttaAva , ashkotc. Old Algonkin, sknotag. Sheshatajtoosh , schooluy. Passamacjuoddy , skcel. Abenaki, skoulai. Massachusetts , squitfn. Narragansetts, squllu. wm AND CI:NTII.M, A.MKIUCA. 329 English, spoak. Bctlmck, icroothack. Taculli , yulluck. Oroo , alhemcta/ccoHSC. Wyandot, alahca. Kiiijlish , wliito. Bethuck, tvobee. Croc, iVdbisca. — , wapishkawo. ( )jil)bo,way" , wawhishkflw. - — , nuuvbizzc. Old Algonkin, wahi. Sho8hatap(»o.sli , wahpou. Micinac, ouabcg, wabcck. Mountaineer, ivnpsiou. Passamaquoddy , ivapiijo. Abenaki, wanbighcnoiir. , waubegun. Massac'lnisetts , wompi. Xarragansetts , ?vompcsu. Mohican, jvaupaacek. Montaug , 7vampayo. Delaware, tvape, wapsu^ tvnpsit. English, hatchet. English, yes. ]?ethnck , yeitlhun. Cree, aUhah. Passaniaqnoddy , nctek. English , no. liethtu'k, nrwin. f'ree, namaw. Ojil)l)eway , kuwine. OttaAva, kuuwccn. Xanticoke, wauppnuiju. Miami , tvapckinggek. Shawnoe, opce. Sack & Fox, wapesknynh. Mcnomeni, waubish kccwah. English , hlack. Bothuck, mundzcy. ( ljil)l)eAvay , mukkmhiiwa. Ottawa, mackalch. Xarragansetts , mowcsu. Massachusetts, mooi. English, house. Botlinck, mceootik. Xarragansetts , ivctu. English , shoe, Bethuck, tnosen. Abenaki , mkcssen. English , snow, Bethuck , kaasiissabnnky Cree, sasagun = hail. Ojihheway , saisaigan. 'Sheshatapoosh , shashuygnn. The Shyenne. — A second addition of tlie Algonkin class was that of the Shvcnno language — a language suspected to be Algonkin at tlie publication of the Archteologia Ame- liethnck , (Uhootianycn, 'racnlli, thynlc. English, knife. Bethuck , ccwnecn. Micniac, uagan. English, had. Bethuck, muddy. Cree, mynlnn. Ojil)heway , monadud. , mudji. Ottawa, mntchc. M i cinac , tnntonalkr. INrassachusetts , nudchc. Narragansetts , vudchil. jVFohican , niafrhit. Montatig , mnllateuyah. Montaug, muttadecaco. Delaware , vuikhHlsii. Nantieoke, mallik. Sack & Fox, moichic. , nintchnlhic. i. ( 330 ON Tin: LANGUAGES OF NOllTIlKUN, WKSTKUN, rieann. In a treaty made between the United States and the Shyenne Indians in 1825, the names of the cliiefs avIio signed were Sioux, or significant in tlie Sioux language. It was not unreasonable to consider this a primd-facie evidence of" the Sliycnne tongue itself being Sioux. Nevertheless, there were some decided statements in the Avay of external evidence in another direction. There was the special evi- dence of a gentleman well-acquainted with the fact, that the names of the treaty, so significant in the Sioux language, were only translations from the proper Shyenne, there lia- ving been no Shyenne interpreter at the drawing-up of the document. What then was tlu* true Shyenne? A vocabu- lary of Lieut. Abert's settled this. The numerals of this were published earlier than the other words, and on those the present writer remarked that they were Algonkin (Ue- port of the IJritish Association for the Advancement of Sei- ence, 1817, — Transactions of the Sections, p. 123). l^.Iean- while, the full vocabulary, which was in the hands of Gal- latin, and collated by him, gave the contemplated result: — "Out of forty-seven Shyenne words for which we have equivalents in other languages, there are thirteen which are indubitably Algonkin, and twenty-five which have affinities more or less remote with some of the languages of tliat family." (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, vol. ii. p. cxi. 1848.) Tlic Black fool. — In the same volume (p. cxiii), and by the same author, we find a table showing the Blackfoot to be Algonkin; a fact that nuist now be generally recognized, having been confirmed by later dula. The probability of this affinity was surmised in a })aper in the 2Sth Number of the Proceedings of the present Society. The Arrapaho. — This is the name of a tribe in Kansas; occupant of a district in immediate contact with the Shyenne country. liut the Shyennes are no Ind'Kjenw to Kansas. Neither are the Arrapahos. The so-called Fall Indians, of whoso language we have long had a very short trader's vocabulary in Umfrcviile, are named from their occupancy which is on the Falls of the Saskatshewan. The Nehethew? , or Cr^es, of their neighbourhood call them so; so that it is a Crec term of Avhicli the English is a translation. Another name (English also) is Blrj-belUj , in French Gros-vcntre. This has g-iven rise to some confusion. Gros-ventre is a name also given to tho Minetari of the Yellow-stone River; whence the name Minetari itself has, most improperly, been appHed m % AND CKNTKAL AMKUICA. 331 ribc in Kansas; 'itli the Shvcnnc (tliouj^li not, perhaps, very often or by good autliorities) to the Fall Indians. The Minetari Gros-ventres belong to the Sioux family. Not so the Gros-vcnlrcs of the Falls. Adolung remarked that some of their Avords had an afiinity with the Algonkin, or as he called it, (>hippe\vay-l)ehnvare, family, e. g. the naincs for lobacco, arrow, four , and ten. TImfreville's vocabulary was too sliort for anything but the most general puri)oscs and the most cautious of sugges- tions. It was, however, for a long time the only one known. The next to it, in the order of time, was one in MS., be- longing to Gallatin, but which was seen by Dr. Prichard luid collated by the present writer, his remarks upon it being jndjlished in the lo-lth Numbm* of the Proceedings of this Society. They were simply to the effect that the language had certain miscellaneous affinities. An Arrapaho vocabu- lary in Schoolcraft tells us something more than this; viz. not only that it is, decidedly, the same language as the Fall Indian of Umfreville, but that it has definite and })re- ponderating affinities with the Shvcmne, and, through it, with the ijreat Alconkin class in general. Kn (il.I.SlI. Al!l!Al'AM(t. Siivdn'm:. scdln nil tlinsl » nijitakc. lowjuc uatliuu vctuuno. Utolh vcathtah vcisikc. (ward /if 111(1.. hi 00(1.. vascsanun mcatsa. nia hclict un hart.'^ ma malic halio anita anlikali heart hattali cstali. smew mouth (jirl .... hnnbaiul son ncttcc niartlic i.ssalia xsjv. iiasli nail. naah iiali. (laiiijhter uaiitiilinnli iialitcli. oni' . t/ro . three. ciias.sa iiiik(\ ucis iH'gulh. lias nalic. four ycanc nave five yorthuii noauo si.v nitalilcr nalisato. seren nisortor .. nalisortor '////. c//, tunc nis(»t(). lui()t( na siautali soto. ten mahtalitah nialitot* t 332 ON Tiiic i,.\x(iUAor:s of xoutiikkx, wkstrun, KNoniKir. man father, my ... mother, my... husttund, my son., my daughter, my brother^ my sister^ my Indian eV(' movlh tongue tooth beard back hand foot bone heart l)lood sinew flesh shin tofvn door sun star day autumn wind fire water ICC mountain hot he that (in) who no eat drin/c .... kill AnHAPAIIO. OtHKU At.dONKIN LANO['A(ii;H. onauotah onalnnoow, Mcnom. &.c. nasonnali uosaw, Miami. nanali nokeah , Menom. na.sh nail, Shyenne. naali nali , Shyenne. nWiMilhah, Shawnee. nalitsihnali nctawnah, Miami. nasisthsah ncsa'w.sali , Miami. naccalitaiali noko.sliayinauk, Menom. ouonitali ah waiiilinkai , Delaware. iiii.slii.shi maisliknyshaik, Menom. notti may tone , Bknom. natliun wilaiio, Delaware. vcathtali \\\ pit, Dehmarc. va.scsanon -witoualii, Delaware. norkorbali pawkaAvmoma, Miami. macliotun olatslii, Shawnee. nautliaxiitali ozit, Delaware. haluiiinah oliknniio, Menom. battali iiiaytali, Mennm. balic mainliki, Menom. auita olitali, Mcnom. wonnunyali wpcnsama, Miami. tahyatch xai.s, Delaware. haitan otainahc, Delaware. tichunwa kAvawntamo, Miami. nislii-ish knyshoh , Mcnom. ahthah allangwli, Delaware. ishi kishko, Delaware. tahuni talikoxko, Delaware. assissi kaisltxiug, Delaware. islisliitta islikotawi , Menom. niitch \\i\.\)0 , Miami. ■walilm mainqnom , 7l/r;i:o;«. alilii ■svahclilwi , Shawnee. liastah ksita , Shawnee. enun cnaw, Miami. waynanh, Menom. liinnah aynaili, Menom. unnahah v\\\\n\\wi\y , Mcnom. chinnani Vnww, Menom. mcnnisi mitisliin , Menom. bannjui niayiiaau, Mcnom. nauaiut os/i-nainliiiay , Menom. AND CKNTUAL AMKUICA. 333 Filzhuyh Sound forma in -skum. — 'I'lierc is still a possible addition to the Algjonkin j^roup; though it is probable that it cannot bo added to it without raising- the value of the class. The exact value and interpretation of the following fact has yet to be made out. 1 lay it, however, before the reader. The language for the parts about Fitzhugh Sound seems to belong to a class which will appear in the !;ady ninated Tsihaili- itsnish (or Caur ilAlcno) Piskwaiis, NusdMlnni, Kawitclicn, Skwali. ("liechiii, Kowelits, and Ksietshawus I'orms of .sjx'ccji. In ivgard to the Atna I have a statement of my own to correct, or at any rate to modify. In a paper, read before ilio Kthnologieal Society, on the Iianguag(\s of the ( h'cgon Territory (Dec. II, I Nil), 1 |>ronoiuiced that an Atna voca- liulary found in Maeken/ii(!'s Travels, though diffe'rent from the Atna of the (.\»p})er liiver, helonged to the same group. The {/ri'iip, howiiver, to which the Atna of tin; Copper Uiver liidongs is the Athabaskan. The Tsihaili-Sclish languages reach the sea in the parts to the south ot tlic mouth of Frazcr's l{iv(;r, ?'. c. the parts (i|ij)()sito Vancouver's Island; perhaj)S they touch it further til the north also; perhaps, too, some of tlie Takulli forms ut' the speech further north still reach the sea. The current >tatement8, however, arc to the eii'cct, that to the south of tlio parts opposite Sitka, and to the north of the parts oppo- site Vancouver's Island, the two families in (jucstion ar(! separated from the Pacific by a narrow strip of separate language — separate and jjut imperfectly known. These are, beginning from the north — Vn. The Haidah (iuoup of Lanoiacji-.s. — Spoken by the Skittegats, ^lassetts, Kumshalias, and Kyganic; of (^ueen Charlotte's Islands and the Prince of Wales Archipelago. Its iireu lies immediately to that of the south of the so-called Kolush languages. VIII. The Chemmesyan.— Spoken along the sea-coast and islands of north latitude 55*^. IX. The Billechula. — Spoken at the mouth of Salmon River; a language to which I have shown, elsewhere, that ;i vocabulary from IMackenzie's Travels of the dialect spoken at Friendly Village was referable. X. The IIailtSA. — The Hailtsa contains the dialects of the sea-coast between llawkesbury Island and Broughton's Archipelago, also those of the northern ])art of Vancouver's Island. In Gallatin, the Chemmesyan, Billechula, and Hailtsa are nil thrown in a group called j\<(as. The Billechula numerals are, certainly , the same as the Hailtsa; the remainder of the vocabulary being unlike, though not altogether destitute of coincidences. The (Jhemmesyan is more outlying still. I do not, however, in thus separating these three languages, absolutely deny the validity of the iVaas family. I only imagine that if it really contain languages so different as the (Chemmesyan and Hailtsa, it may also certein the Hai- ilah and other groups , c. g. the one that conies next , or — 22* 310 ON rilli I(«« = Lutnami lar-itri, Vi\\\\\k=^umte>r-Usru. Qii. ilsi--=ilKi'tt. Jn I'alaik, Son ~ -- i/ini-i/sti , /hintj/ilrr =^ liiiiiiiii-ilsn. Ill (III -z \'i\hi\k loh. Ill liUtuoini / z=^ Lutuanii /iVy/.v, Sliasti /mr. id/- /A =^ Lutuanii /tiirln , I'alaik hrla , Sliasti Uinth. This is tin; second time we have had a Shasti /• i'ov a I'alaik / — Isuuro r=: (sul. Pear - - lokunks Lutnanii , loldioa , Palaik. W/v; = Lutuanii lohi/i, Sliasti lararakli. /^r: Lutuanii no. (^u. is this the n in ti-(is=.hc(ul and n-ap = for which latter word tlu^ Shasti is ap-ka '{ ncmkkals. Enomsii. Shasti. Pat.aik. one tshiamu uinis. iwn lioka kaki. Neither arc there wanting affinities to the Saliaptin and Uayus languages, allied to each other. Thus — Inr = mumuish Lutuanii = ku mumuats Palaik = mnlsnui Saliap- tin. tsdck Shasti := luksli (Jayiis. hulk ~~= s hum Lutuanii = shum-kaksh Vnyn^ = him Saliajitin. Tongue = pa?vus lAitunmi = pan'ish Saliaptin --^>Mi7< Cay lis. Toolh= tut Lutuanii = HI Salnqitin. Flint = akwcs Shasti = akhua Saliaptin. Blood = (chad I'alaik -- kikel Saliaptin. Fire = loloks Lutuanii = ihiksha Sahajitin. 'he -= nalshik Lutuanii = naks Saliaptin = na (^ayus. Tivo = lapit Lutuanii = lapit Saliaptin = Ivplin Cay lis. I)' 1 I, ' ' ' \ ■ b Ii42 ON TlIK K-AN(ii;A)f I\oss. The particular tribe of which we have a vocabulary called th niselves Khniikhlamaiju. 344 OS riiio ii.\N(irAn kalazlia luclali. ahtr kamoi uiyalilioli. fire oklio k lioli. water aka k'liali. one ku klialilili. Itvo kon kots. three .sul)o honioka. four iiiiira dol. fiM tyslia Iclimali. A'/.i' lara tsadi. Tlio following shows tho difference between the Weitspok and Kiilfinapo; one belonging to the northern, the other tu the southern division of their respectiv^c groups. Knoi,I81I. Wkitsi-kk. Krr.AXAi'o. man jtagchk kaali. woman wintsuk dali. ttoy hohksh kaliwih. qirl ■\vai inuksli daldiats. head tcjruoh h<(ir ear eije nose kaiyali. .... l(']»taitl nuisnh. .... spc'hguh .sln'niah. .... iiiylih ni. .... iiK'tpf lahaldx). mouth iiiihlntl katsedoh. toNf/ue iii('li[>rh hal. teeth iiu'rpctl yaoli. beard mchpcrcli kat.sutsu. arm. iiiclislioli' tsiiali. hand t.soAvush Iilyyali. foot uict.skti kaliinali. Idood liapp'l hahlaik. AXn CKNTUAI, AMinilCA. :m5 KnUMSH. WkITSI'KK. Kri.ANAPO. sun WHiioushloh lali, moon kc'tuownhr luMah. star J^ugcts uiyalinli. day Winop diiliiiuil. dark kctiitski ])otil>. /ire mots k'lioli. water pjiha k'liah. / nok hall. thoH kelil ina. one spiuckoli k'liahlili. hvo miohr kots. Ihrce iiaksa liomcka. four tMhhnnuo, dol. five inalirotnin lolimali. six hohtclio tsadi.. seven tcliowiirr kulahots. eig/it k'holiwuli k<»ko(l()lil. nine kcrr liadarolslmm. ten wcrt'hlolnverli liadonitlck. In tliG Kulannpo language yacal ma napo = all. (he r/'lk's. Here fiapo = Aapa , the name of one of the counties to the north of the Bay of San Francisco and to the south of Clear Lake. We may now turn to the drainage of the Sacramento and the parts south of the Shasti area. Hero we shall tind three vocabularies, >f which the chief is called — VI. Tp.\z C "EH. — How far this will eventually turn out to be a convenient name for the group (or how far th ) group itself will be real) , is uncertain. A vocabulary in Gallatin from the Upper Sacramento, and one from Mag Readings (in the soutli of Shasti county) in Schoolcraft, belciig to tlie group. Mag Readings is on the upper third of the Sacramento — there or thereabouts. KxoLisn. CopEii. M. H. Indian. U. Rack. man pohtlnk winnokc mmnn niuhltoh dokko^ hend huhk pok hair tiili tomi tomoi. ojc sah dmti tumnt. W)sc kiunik tsouo. nmilh kohl kal. '('(•//* siih .shi kurd chehsaki klictclicki :{46 ON Tin; i,.\\(;uA The sixth band \f that o, Hawhaw, residing further i Aplaches (? Apaches), under •le mountains. EN'fil.lHII. hcttii hiiir ear Tlfil.lM.Nh. hownali .... o.sok (olko TAr,ATII. tikot. nninii. alok. eye Inintch wilai nose ni'to uk (V). month ahwi'ik huho (?). sky Mutslia -witc^uk. 318 ON Tin; LAxouAOf:s of noutiieux, wk«tkun, ENdi-isii. TtTdT.irMXK. Tai,ati:i. sun lioainhali lil. (lai/ liomaah liiuiim. 7mjhl koAVwillfvh kawil. darkness posiattah Iinnaba. fire wukali wiko. tvalcr klkali kik. slotic loAVwak sawa. As far west as the sea-coast languages of the Moqiielumuc group arc spoken. Thus — A short vocabulary of the San llafacl is IMoquelumno. So are the Sonoma dialects, as represented by the Tsho- koycm vocabulary and the Chocouyeni and Yonkiousnic Pa- ternosters. So is the Olamcntke of Kostromitonov in Baer's Beitrli^o. So much for the forms of speech to the north of the Gulf of San Francisco. On the south the philology is somewliiit more obscure. The Paternosters for the Mission de Sanln Clara and the Vallec de Ins Tularcs of Mofras seem to belorii,^ to the same language. Then there is, in the same author, one of the Lanffue Giiiloco de la Mission de San Francisco. These I make Moquelumne provisio tally. 1 also make a pro- visional division for a vocabulary called — IX. The Costano. — The tribes under the supervision of the Mission of Dolores were live in number; the Ahwastcs, the Olhones, or Costanos of the coast, the Romonans, the Tulomos, and the Altatmos. The vocabulary of which tli« following is an extract was taken from Pedro Alcantara, who was a boy when the Mission was founded , A. D. 1 77G. He was of the Romonan tribe. Enomsii. Costano. Tshokoyem. man inihou tai-t'i'Sf. ivoman vatichma kulch-r.v.vr'. hoy • shfnfsmuk yokoli {smalt) girl katra koyah. head \i\v inoloh. ear tnorus alilohk. ei/e roliin shut. nase lis huk. mouth wovpor lM])) Boy ■= shinishmuk , Cost. ~— enshinsh , Kuslcn. (?) Girl = katra , Cost. = kaana , Kuslcn. Lest these last three coincidences seem far-fetched, it should be remembered that the phonesis in these languages is very difficult, and that the Kuslen orthograjjhy is Spanish, the Costano being English. Add to this, there is every ap- pearance, in the San Miguel and other vocabularies, of the r being something more than the r in brand, &c. every ap- pearance of its being some guttural or palatal, which may, uy a variation of orthography, be spelt by /. Finally, I remark that the -ma in the Costano ralich-tna ^:J 350 (IN iiii; i,.\N(ir.\(ir:s m- noktiikkn , wkstkux, = woman ^ is, jiiobably, the -t/ir In tlio Solodad muc (=;//,//,, and shurish-mc {= woffian), and tlio am/, {aiik) oHIk! I'uslcn nnif/uij-amk (z-t/tati) and latrayam-ank (= woman)] (V) /a(rv some bands on the ^[ercede Uiver, under a chief nanuil Nuella. They are said to be the remnants of three distinct bands each, with its own distinct language. KNCil.ISH. ('OCONOO.NS. TlLAUK. head oto utno. hair tolus cells. car took took. nase thedick tuiieck. mnulh siiiniiiiick sheiiiinak. lotigue taleotch talkat. Inolh talec talee. sun suyou <»op. moon ottaum taahmoinna. slar tchictas saliel. (lay hial talioh *. fire sttttol ossel. fvaler illeck illiok. XI. TiiK Salinas Group. — This is a name which I nro- poso for a group of considerable compass; and oiu) wliicli contains more than one mutually unintelligible form of spcecli. It is taken from the river Salinas, the drainage of which lies in the counties of Monterey and San Luis Obispo. Tho southern boundary of Santa Cruz lies but a little to tlie north of its mouth. The Gioloco may possibly belong to this group, notwith- standing its reference tc the IMission of San Francisco. The alia, and mu(- (in ;««//-ryocuse), may = the ahatj and i-tnil-u (a'Av/) of the Eslen. The Kuslen has already been mentioned, and that in res- pect to its relations to the Costano. It belongs to this group. So does the Soledad of Mo/'ras; which, though it ditlters from that of Hale in the last half of the numerals, seenis to represent the same language. * 8amc word as ltu'ch=lig/tl in Cocoiioons; in I'ima lai. .\NI» ya amctchc lianmlyay. ainina nyatcli I'lrc talii aawoli house ivuler buntik aha haaclic kha. / aliaii nyat nyah. he ycutah hahritzk one yuinako win saiulck hiiia. two kuak havick haveka hawiic. Ilin'c Vi'ik hamuk liaiuoka haimik. fnur kiik chapop chaiiipapa cha|Mi|). five puitay scrap sarap snap. San Diego lies in H2V2" north latitude, a point at wliieli the philology diverges — in one direction into Old Califor- nia, in another into Sonora. I first follow it in the diroc lion of Old California. San Diego, as has just been stated, lies in 327-2" '^^''t'' latitude. Now it is stated in the Mithridates that the most northern of the Proper Old Californian tongues, the Covliimi, is spoken as far north as 33". If so, the Dieguno may be Did Californian as well as New; which I think it is; belie- ving, at the same time, that CoclUml and I'uchan arc the same words. Again, in the following Paternoster the word for sky = ammui in the Cuchan vocabulary. CociiiMi OF San Xavier. father sky Pennayn inakcnamba yaa ambayujui niiya mo ; name men confess and Uwc alt Buhu mombojua tamma gkoiucnda hi nogodono domuojiiog gkajini ; and sky earl/i Pennayula bogodouo gkajini, gui hi ambayujup maba yaa keauietc favour di'ciiinyi mo puogin; \NI» CDMUAl. AMKUK A. ;{j3 sky ciirlh had in hliliula inujim uiubayup mo ilcduliijiia, uiiu't C- nii j;u'ilii{;iii hi jjagknjiin; this dttji ilan Tainiula yaa iUo tcjiu'g (juilugiiuiiii ])oiiiijir.li r tiinii ilm yniuio I'lH'gin , ml man evil liiiilii tainiii.i yaa <;aiuliuo;j:jiila ko|iiijiii ainbiii) ijiia itcmiayala (Icdamlugujua, ginlugni i»a{^kajiiii ; mtl allhuuiili ami Giiilil yaa tagainiM>;^-la hiii amltiiiyijiia hi doniiio }iuliii('/nsii \(iiliforni('n (Mannheim, 1772; in the jMithridatis, I77:h, tho aiionynious author of whi(di was u Jesuit missionary in the liiiiddlo ])arts of tho Peninsula, the lauj;ua<^(.':i of (.)ld Cali- 1 lornia were — 1. The Waikiir , spoken in several dialeits. 2. The IJshili. 3. The Laijinnon 4. The Cochinii, north, and 5. The Pcricu, at tlie southern extr(;mity of the ])eninsula. H. A probably new form of speech used by some tribes visited by Linck. This is what wi; learn from what we call the Ma'm- lioini account; tlie way in which the author expresses him- self beinp^ not exactly in tli(> form Just exhiltited , but to tlie f'tfect that, besides the Walkur with its dialei'ts, there were live others. The Waikur Proper, the langua purposes. On tin' other iiand, the lltshiti is es[)(!(ially nuMitioncMl as a separati- lan^uaj^e. Adcdunji^ makes it a form of tiio Waikur; as he docs tin! Layamon, and also the ('(»ra and Aripo. Tlion there eonujs a population called //v/. probably the I'icos or Ficos of Ha^ert, another authority for these parts. Ar' these, tho sixth popidation of the MannlnMrn account, tln' unknown tribes visited by Linck V 1 think uot. Tiny art' mentioned in another j)art of the book as liinnn. To tho names already mentioned 1. Ika, W. Utshipuje, '1. L'tshi, 1. Atselume, add '). Paurus, S). Mitsheriku-tamais, (). Teakwas, 10. Mitshcriku-t(!arus 7. T(!enoujibebos , 11. jNIitsheriku-ruanajercs, 8. Angukwares, and you have a list of the tribes with which a missionary for those parts of California where the Waikur languages prevaihid, came in contact. Altogether they gave no more than some r)00 individuals, so miserably scanty was the po- pulation. The occupancies of these lay chiefly within tho Cochiini area, which I'oached as far south as the parts about Loretto in 2(i" north latitude; tho Loretto langiuige being tho La- yamon. This at least is the inference from the very short table of tho Mithridatcs, which, however little it may toll us in other respects, at least informs us that the San Xavicr, San Borgia, and Loretto forms of speech were nearer akin to each other than to the Waikur. Enolish. St. XAvii;ii. S. liouciA. Louktto. sky juiibiiynjult aiulicink ('(irlh aiiict ainate-giiaiig fire usi ussi man taimiia taiaa tannna ti. fal/ii'r kiikka iliani kcuiubi son uisaliam tsliaiiu. AVaikik. tercreka-datciiili.n. (lateiiiha. .\M» CKMUM, AMi:i:ir.v. :j.")5 Tlio HJiort comiiositums of llcrvas (;;ivcMi in tlio ^(itliri- ilatcs) hIiow tlic sMiiic. TilK W'aikih. - Tliis is the l!in;;ua;,f(' of wluit I liavo ,all<>(l tlio Miiiiiiliciiii ac'coniit, namely tli(> aiionynioiis work if a .losuit niissionaiy of tli-itu-iMe ti tscliii liihc/i dill' ircnti'u I J' III mill: iiiu gracia-ri aciiiiK' cure tekorekadatenibi t^ili iif'iii ijniliii o fliiss hiilii'ii ti'i nini irir i/rhni/nir KnI 11 til I; cin Jcltarrakeiiii ti V jaiip (bit einiia //;• (» iliiss (/I'/inrsiimrn wrrili'ti I\li'iisrlirti allr lii'i'r inr i(^ ei jebarrnker<' aeiia kt'-a; ////■ tji'/inrsiiini'ii drnln'n si'i/tiil , ^ipccun imsi'r tit. 1 Sjti'is kepe II lis Ken ji'lti' le jatii] airsrr KriL uiitairi litij : ite kuitseliarake lei tseliio kepeeiiii ataeaniara mis vi'rzi'lic ilii und iinsi'r /{< nSi'S , lae knitscliarrakero cute tscliio eavapo atukiara keperiijake il'W ri'rzi hni uur iiii'h die lit tUt'S litis f/llltl, ;ite tikakaiiiba tei tseliie m hi'lfc cuvuniora dii mid: eate )/'((, lli'ti iiwrdeti Nii'lil n'ir lie rltras ilnkiara; hoses , i'po knkunja pe atacara tseliio. Amen. '()(.V hi'schulzi' von linseii iitid. Atiu'ti. Waiki-k. 'reka-(biteinlia. \M eiiil)a. Ei 'I'utau ( ;ate Pete inu. Tuc.-iva The compound Ivhvtcha-dalvmhi = brtil hiiid —-= shy ■■ - licm'cii. To this very poriphrastie Paternctstrr wo may add tho lowing fragments of the W'aikur conjugation: — anmk virore ego liido, III liidis. ille liidil. lilts liidiimis. I'lts ludilis. iUi liidiitil. 2a* 350 (tN Tin: I.ANCl'Aor.S or wk.stkkx, xoutiikkn, 1? juiuikiririkori = < Be Ei Tntau ( "iitc; J'ct(' 1 iicava Amukiriino = Ainukiri tci := lude. Aimikiri tu = ludile. Bo-ii Ei-ri Tutiluri Ciit('-ri Tucavii-ri ego lust. In Itisisti. tile lusif. nos litsimiis. vos Ittsislis. illi luseruiil. litderc. •ainxikiririkiirikarii = / wish I hud not plaifrd. Thou dr. Ife dr. ff'e ixr. Ye dy,'. They dt'. Of the Pcrk'ii spoken at tlie south extremity of the pcnln- suhi, 1 know no specimens. We now turn to that part of the Yuma area which lies ah)iig the course of the Gila, and more especially the parts alonj.;' the Cocoinaricopa villages, of wliicli one porti(»n ot' th(; occupants speak a language belonging to the Yuma, the other one belonging to the Pima class. This latter leads us to the languages of the northern pro- vinces of Mexico — !S0N(3RA AND SiNALOA. For these two provinces, the languages for which we have specimens fall into live divisions : — j. The Tima. 2. The Hia(/ui. 3. The TunAii. 4. The Tauahumaka. 5. The Coka. That the Pima group contains the Pima Proper, the Opata. and the Eudeve, may be seen from the j\[ithridates. Tliat the language of the Papagos, or Papago-cotam , is also I'iiiia, rests upon good external evidence. Whether the speech of the Ciris, and poi)ulation of the island of Tiburon and tlic parts op[)osite, be also Pima, is at present uncertain; thoujili not likely to be so long, inasmuch as I believe that Mr. J»artlett, the IJoundary ('onnnissioner, is about to puhlisli samples, not only of this, but of the other languages of SoHora. West of the Pima lies the Tarahiimara . and south of it the lliacpii, succeeded by the Tubav and Cora of ISinaloa. ANH fKNTWAT. AMF.ltlf'A. 3: lad not plai/rd. ;ty of the pcnin- \ \e northern pro- whieh we liavo )per, the Opnta. Tlie following Patornosters of these four languages may Ibc compared with the Opata dialect of the Pima. The words that, by appearing in more than one of them, command inir attention and suggest the likelihood of a closer relation- ship than is indicated in the ^Nlithridates, or* elsewhere, are I in italics. Opata. Titmo mas /f*/7?«'acacliigiia raramc: .tmii tcguiv santo a; Imo reino tamr iiiacto; Ilinadeia iguati tcri'pa atiia togniacaeliivrri; IChiama tamo guacD v(mi tu/nn luiir; Guataino noavcre lamo cai naiihnii aca api tamo ucavcre /owoopagiia; (ilia cai lanii' taotitiKhiro ; I'ai naidoni cliignadu — • Apita cacliia. lIlACiUI. iVom-achai /fjv'-capo calccamc; Che-clievasu yoyorvva ; Itou piopsana cm yaoiahua; y.m hdrrpo in buyaj)o t/n/iun amaiitc (Irvrrapn'fj vocnpo (inniia hciui; Machuvoi/ow-bnareu yciu ilnm -,\mivti-ilo)n : Esoc alulutiria ca-aljitou-anccau itcpo soc alulutiria cliciii ihnn vol I prim; Cai/om butia Imonacuclii cativiri botaua ; Aimn iVom-yerotua. TuuAR. //r-canar /rgrmuicarichna catcmat: Imif ^'j^muarac inilituraba toocliiqualac ; Imit hucgmica carinlto bacacliinassil'aguin ; Iniil avamunarir cchu nauagualac iiiio cuigan aiiio uacliic /ryuuio- carichori ; Jlc cokuatarit, essemor taniguarit , iabbo ;/»/Vaai; //(' tataeoli ikiri atzoiiuia ikirirain ilr liacachin cfilc ktiof^iiia iiaTo- gua cantem; Caisa He nosnm bacatatacoli ; Hacachin ackiro muetzc rac iti\ m Tauaiit.ma.ia. Tdiiii lumo, niamu regn'i guaini j^atiki; Taini noiiu'rnjo mu regiia; Telimoa rckijona; '■' 'I'his convoys jui iii.'ifhM(ii,Mti' iiDliuii. ItiiscliiiiiuiM Itas (liinwii tlir ('iir.i ■iml 'J'lirfiliiiniarii icdniicctrcl liy Adclimi;) iiitu tlu^ saiin; riass with llii; ri'peguana and Viui'ic, ii'in-fseiitod liy tin; Culiia. — .SVf .V'>^' i I'Srv.li. 3oS ON Tin; i,AN(ii .\| tlin (Juazfivo a partieular dialect is n-'vuKul as the Ahouio. Add also the Zoe and Huitcolo, probably tho same as the lluitc. "^riiat some of these «inrepresent(!d fin-ms of speech beloii!; to the same class with the Pima, Iliacpii, ^c. , is nearly certain. IIow many, however, do so is another question; it may be that all are in the same i)r(.'dicament: it n:av ln' only a tew. Tho languag'os of IMkciioacan. These are - I. TllK I'lUINDA. 2. TiiK Tauasca. W. Tiik ( )r()Mi. Tli(! last will be considerecl at oni"(>, and dismiss(;d. IMorc has been written on tlu; Otomi than any otln r lan;^ua<;(' ctf these parts; tlu; propter IMexican not excepted. It was oli- '•. I''(>r ;i iinticf i)t' Miilliivinfin soc Ididwi};. wlio nicntiuiis an Aiic aii'l I'ictiiiiiMry. 1 liiivc seen iio s|i('fiiiH'ii-i of it. ( IH,")',)]. iSIKUN A\r> rilMK.M. VMKKir.V. 359 i!ipu liatsclilhc IP- ■ fcrved by Naxera that it was vionoAijIluhic rather tlian ])(>Uj- ijnlht'lic , as so many of th(! Aiucrii-aii hiiiali(ia; ujeve ihic lln-dm/j uatiiuui titaxiuia- labaclireaca tvxin lists of diahicts; no- Xix ximo, I opia, Ilervas, or elsn- ;peeeh of Soimra HI , the '^Pacasca. word as Acaxoc, as lliaqui. (•! as the AlioiiK'. une as the lluitc. if speech beluiii,' iSic. , is nearly ♦ her question; it iient: it n:av lie lismiss(!d. IMorc h( r lan^^ua^c i»t" ed. It was olt- itiuiis ail .liic aii'l llOs ic lan;iua'!'es ot kSia , c/i /nassc las several words yllab ill common. I'ut the second (jualili(is our intV'renccs, by >liowinj;' that tlx; ]\[aya , a lan^;ua<;(! more distant from (Jhina than the Otonu , and, by means inordinately monosyllabic in its structure, has, there or thereal)(»uts, as many. The third t'orbids any separation vi' tlu! Otomi from the other lani;ua- ^os of America, by showing- that it has the ordinary amount (if miscellaneous affinities. In respect to the Cliinese, Sn-., the real (piestion is not whether it has .vo //nin// a/'/i/it//rs trilh Ihc Ofmiti , but whether it has more iiffiiiilica nilh lite (Honti Ihan trilh llic Maya or inn/ iilJtcr Aiucricttn himjuaiir ; a mattitr which we nmst not in- v('sti;;,atc without remendierini;- that .sov/r (litrerem-e in fa- vour of the Otomi is to be expected, inasmuch as two lan- guages with short or mono syllabic^ words will, from tin; very lact of the shortness ami simplicity of their constituent ehs- monis, hav(! more words alike than two jiolysyllabie forms of speech. The fact, however, which most afTects the place of the Otomi language is the monosyllabic diaracter of other Anu;- ricau languages, c. y. the Athabaskan and tlu; Attacapa. As these are lik(dy to be the subject of some future in- vi'stigation, I lay the Otomi, for the ])r«'sent, out of consi- deration; lindting myscH to the expression of an oj)inion, to the effect that its philological affiniti(>s are not very different from what its geograi)hical position suggests. Of tlu!* IMrinda and Tarasca w(! have; grannnars, or rather jrrammatical sketches; abstracts of which, by (iallatin, may he found in his Notes on the Semi-civilized Naticms of Mexico, \'ucatan, a!id Central America, in the first volume ' Milv of tlic I'aiasca iM.V.ti, 300 o.\ Tiir, hANtii'.\(i!;s (»r NditiiiKKN, \vKSTi;i;\, of tlio Transactions of tlio American Kthnological Society. j Tlio Ibllowin",^ are from tluj ^lithridates. PiRINDA PaTKUNOSTER. Cabutumtaki ke cxjoclinri pininto; Nil)otoachatii tucatlii nitnliutcallu ; rantoki liacacovi nituljutea pinintc ; rarojnki nirilioiita manicatii ninnjami proiiininto ; lioturiinogai (laimimcc tuitacovi cliii ; Exf^oinundicovi botiiiicliocliii, kicatii pracaVovi kuecntunnmdijo lioturicliocliijo; NiantPxocliicliovi rumkuecntuvi inmvocliocliii ; ]\lorij)achltovi ciiincnziinn togni. Tucatii. Tauasca Patkkn'osteu. Tata ucliavori tukirc liacaliini avamlarn; Santo arikevo tnclievoti hacangurikua; Wctzin anilarcnoni tuchcvcti ireclicckiia; Ukuarcvo tuclicvcti wckua iskin; avandaro , na luunengnca istu uiiuMifj^avc ixu exclicrcndn. Ifuchacvcri curiiida linn|^anaii |)akua iiitzciitzini yam; Santzin wcpovachoras liuchaovcri liatzingaknarcta, izki luudiaiiac wopocacuvaiiita lir.ca Imcliavcri liat/ini^akiiaocliani ; Ca liastzin t(>rulitazoina teruniguta pcrakua liiiubo. Iscvongtia. It now becomes convenient to turn to the parts to tlie oast of California, viz. Utah and New Mexico. In IJtali tlio philology is simple, all its forms of speech being 1. Athabaskan; 2. Parluca; or :{. Pueblo. 1. '['he Navalio, aloniz,- M'itli the J'^'corilh-i of New Mexico, the Hoopali of California, and Apatch of California, Nuw Mexico and Sonora, is Atha(piskaM. Knglish, Xavaiio. Apakii. initn tennai ailcc. woman estsonnoe ectzan. ht'fnf (nil/) //»t/,o('tsiu srrzrr. hair {inij) IiiiX/a'v .sws^a. face (my) hinuwo .stvceuoc. ear (my) A»tjah AWtza. eye (my) //Miniah slccda. nose (my) A/'tchili .vcftzce AND rKNIItM, AMKUirV. 'M\ o. [scvongiia. arts to the oast of speech being Knolisic. N'AVAiin. ArMcif, mouth Out/) hiiZAiu *7/('/'(la. tiintiiii' f/iit/) //»/tso s/trrdi\rr tmtthlmi/) hnr'^o s/iri'<^u. sky sun .. 7)1(1(01 slar . CCViwl Ml onoi sk«M'iii)U. 7 c'liitk klaihoniii cImiku. s(mh Sims. I'hcen-f/fj (M'ska. ttif/hl khii-yo da. liff/it Imasc'cii-r/ff skci' rtiifi itahcltinh naiinsteo. sfidir /mil irr yas zalis. iicclo Iicj'loah. k(tnh wOll. nail. n'dli'r tniili t sliifii' tsai /cy/.ay one l/ro tlalice talisc iia (h rcr hk tanli. ('(' iia tail. Ilk. The Utah with its allied dialects is I'adnca, /. r. a mem- ber of the class to which the Shoshoni, Wihinast, and Cu- manch laiif^uages belon^^ .'{. The Moqui is one of the languages of TiiK PuKHLd Indians of Nkw Mkxico. The comparative! civilization of the PuebKt Indians has always attracted the attention of the ethnoIogisL Until late- ly, however, he had but a minimum amount of trustworthy information concerning either their habits or thr-ir language He has now a fair ann)unt of st west, and, of the two Colorado Pueblos, the most western is that (d' The Moqui. — The Momii vocabulary Avas ])rocured by Lieut. Simpson from a >.lo(|ui Indian who happened to be; at (Jhelly. Tlir Zuni country lies in ^^f)" m)rth latitude, to the south and east of the Moqui, and is probably divided by tlu; Sierra lie '■^uni from The .Iromu, or Lufjunit , tlu; most southern of the Pueblos of the IJiit (irand(!. Mortli of the Aeonni area lies that of The Jvmcz, on the San Josef. 362 ON riii; i.AN»!rA(iKS or noutiikkx, \vi;sti:i;n, i Tlic two that still stand over lie on the main strcjiui of the Hio (jiando itself. Thoy are — The Tcsuquc; and The Taos or Picuri. — The northern boundaries of the To- siujue seem to be the southern ones of Tftos. Connect those Pueblos with the town of Taos, and the Tesuque with Santa Fe, and the ordinary maps j^ive us the geo{,^raphy. The philo^)gical affinities of the I'ueblo hmpua^es scarcely coincide with the f^cographical relations. The Moqui lies far west. Laying this tlien out of the question , the thrcM- that, in their «-utward signs, most strike the eye in tabl(\s, as agreeing with each other, are the Laguna, th(! .Jemoz, and the Tesuque. The other two that thus outwardly agree are the Taos and the /uni, — two that are not in the mot-t immediate geographical juxtaposition. What is meant by the "outward signs that most strike the eye on tables"? This is shown in the following tables: — KNCil.ISll. Zl M. TlCSI (^IK. head oshoqui/z/icr j)tit. hair Xxynhwec jio. ear lali jo//// /vee. niuai. The following are some of the most patent miscellaneouti affinities: — Knylish, sun. Tcsu(jue, /loh. .lenioz, pnh. EiujUsh, niottn. T('su(|ue , poni/e. .Fenu'/ , pdhtth. 'J'aos, pun/Hih. ^lixpii, muj/tih. Kiujlish , uiai\. Tt'suqiic, S(ii/eu. .Icnicz , liihhitiieiKth. Ku;i/ish , wi'iuan. T('su(|uc . her. Ziuii, nearr. K/ujlish , wife. T('.sii(|ue , tHirrso. .Iciiii'Z, neohnj/. K/ujlish, hoy. T('su(|U(' , ti/iiie. .Iciiicz , (tiiniih. /'Juf/h'sh , fore head. 'i"('sn((ue , sieeartih. JiMgiMia , en/ihuj/. /'Jiitj/ish , f'ai'c. 'l'('siu(U(', e/iiiiif/. I.apmin , ho/rah. /•Jii/lish , eye. T('sn([U(' , I half. .1 cuii'z , Sdi'ch. AN'r» ri:xriiAT, amkuha. 303 lain strcr.in of •ios of the T(!- Connect tlic^o ue with Santa apliy. iia^os scarcely jc Moqni lies ion , the throe oyo in tabh\s, a, tli(! .Joniez, twardiy agree )t in the most \i most strike ling tables: — miscclh\neou« Untjlis/i , leotli. Tt'siKjiic , wuiih. Taos , iniii'n-n(ihrn/iiii/. M<>((ui , iniHift -— iinMith. Enalish, cliiii. Tt'su(|no, slinUhitk. TiiDs , c/iii/lniii/iai. Hm/lis/i, hiuid. KtKjIish , 'iiiia \( IIUIS. Km 1 1 is I I . . ..til. Xavalio . III'. .Iceorilla , iiuji. 'ri'sut|U»' , null. Hiiijlisli , man. Navaim , li'nnnij. .Tecnrilla, iiiilinj. 'I'esiKpi • , siii/i'n. .1 enit'z , (i/liliiini'iiitli. luii/lisli . iimnlli. Navaliti , lin-zzni/. .IceniillM , li>t-::i/. 'l\'S[[\^\\i' , slin. Of these the first two mav be borrowed. In Ka NZ \.S the languages are Jni/ittlm, and Slii/cnnr, .'dready noticeil and CnmancU , which is Paduca Tlic I'tiih IS mus ah. 3(11 ON llli: I.ANdlAdKH OK Noll'IIIKUN, WKSTKKX , For tlio Kihuinj wo want spociiiuMia. In Nkhhaska tlicy arc S/ini.r, already noticed, and I'a/rni, allied tu the hiccarcc. Kanzas leads us to Tkxas. It is convenient in a notiee of the lan^nafjes of the Stat(! of T(!xas to Itear in mind its early, as well as its present relations U> tli(; United States. In a eountry where the spread of the |K)j)ulation from the other portions of the Union has hecn so rapid , and where the oeeupaney is so complete*, we are j)repared to expect but a small proportion of ahori«;ine.s. And such, upon tlie whole, is the case. The displacement of the Indian tribes of Texas has been <;reat. Even, how- ever, when ]\Iexican, Texas was not in the category of tlic older and more orij;inal portions of INIexico. It was not brought under the rnjlmv of the missionaries, as wc may see l>y turninj; to that portion of the Mithri(hites which treats (»f the parts west of the ]\rississii»pi. The references jiero arc to Dupratz, to I^ewis and ('larue, to (Charlevoix, to French and Kne:lish writers rather than to the great au- thority for the other parts of S[)anish America — llervas. And the information is less i)recisc and com])letc. All tliis is because Texas in the earlier part of its history was, in respect to its exploration and description, a part of Louisiana, (and, as such, French) rather than a part of Mexico, and (as such) Spanish. The notices of Texas, in the IVIithridates, taken alouj,' with our subscfjuent ihda, are to tho ett'ect that («) the Cafhlo, (h) the Adaizc or Afhtlii, (c) the Alhihiiiui ^ and (rf) the ChoMdk ar(> the prevailing laneuages; to whicdi may he added a few others of minor importaiu'e. The details as to the distribution of the subordinate forms of speech over these four leading languages are as follows: — a. The Nandakoes, Na1)ada{dies, Alich (or Eyish), and Ini or Tacdii are expressly stated to be VmUht; and, as it is from the name of the last of these that the word Texas is derived, w(! have satisfactory J'vidence that ^nme mend)ers, at least, of the Caddo family arc Ivuhj (tnti orif/imilhj Texiaii. b. The ^'atassi, Katcdiitoches, Jthiizc (or Aihii/c) , Nacog- doches, and K(^yes, belong to the Caddo confederacy, but without speaking the Caddo language. ('. The ( -araneouas, the Alhicdinis, the Apelusas, the Mayes speak dialects of the same language. ri;uN', ANlt t 1",\ lit AI, WIMlli A. ;{(;.') (I. Tlio Tunicas speak the sumo lan{»ua<:;c as the Cluictahs. ■| Conccniiii"^ tlic i>liilolo;;y ot" tlio Waslias, tlio JUmUcs, tin; alliod tu tli(; I Aco8SC»aw.s, aiul tli<: (/auccs, no statuinuiits are mudo. It is obvious that the iut'to'ination supplied hy the Mithri- tliites is measured by the extent ot' our knowledge ot tho lour languages to Avhii-ii it rei'er.s. Ot" these, tiu! (JhoUtah, whieh Adelung ealls tho ^fobilian, is the only on(! i'or whieh the Mithridates itself suppliers, or could supply, ^p(,'eiln(;ns ; the other three bein<;- unrepresen- ted by any sample whatcfver. Hence, to say that the Tachi was Oadilo, that the Vatassi was Adalii, or that tho Caran- coua was Attacapa, was to give an instance, in the way of I'Xplanation, of the ohsciirum per o/jsciirtus. Since; the publi- cation of the ^Mithridates , how(;v(!i-, we have g(»t samples of fdl three — (Jaddo, Adahi, and ^Vltacapa — so that our stan- dards of coinj)arison are imj)rov(!d. lluy are to be found in a tabulated form, and in a form convenient for collation ;uul comparis«»n in both of . It was not s, as we may iridates which riie references to (Charlevoix, tho great an- •ica — llervas. leto. All this i story Avas, in t of Ijouisiana, f j\rcxico, and taken along ; that («) the ',v//u/, and {<1) vhich may ho ordinate forms as follows: — • Eyish), anil 'o; and, as it e word Texas iiiiiiw UKnnbers, /itidlhj Texian. ddf/c) , Nacog- ifederacy, but as , the Mayes * "On tlic Lanjruajjfcs of tlio Urro'Dii 'I'rrritorv." \\y \{. (J. I,!itii;im. .M. 1». Kciid bfforc the Htliiiulo^'ical Socictv, l")i-c. l«ll. — .Vo/f. :uu> »i> ON I III: i.\N<;i Afif.s ur NoiMiii'.KN, ui;sii;ux, tlio (!nniancli<'8 nrn divided into tlircc! hcctionH: (1) tlic Cu niUMfli or .)(!t}in, (2) tlu; Liiiiipiinuk, and ('{) tlic 'rniiili,!, and a list of no leas than thirty-Hvc (ttlici* trilios i'oil(»\vs tliis ilivision, .soiik! ot" tlicHo Ix'in^- said to Im? wliolly extinct, sonic ])artially s(»; sonn; to bo more or less ( 'unnimdi , s'lmc to bo otli(!r than ( 'unianch. Tho tendency of the Mitiirid.ites is to «'iv(! jironiineiice tn tlio (.'addo, Attacapa, ami Adahi ton;;uos, and to incline; the investi^'ator, wh(Mi de;ilin<;- with the; other tornis oi' speech, to aak how far they art; eonnectod with ono of tliest! three. Tiie tendency of the writcjvs hist-nann^l is to «;iv(! i»roniineiice to the C'Unianch, an»l to su^-^est tho ((uestion: How far is this for that) form ot speeeli Cuinaneh or othor than Cii- nianeliV Working with tho Mitliridatos, tin; MS. of Mr. Ilolhiert, and Mv. Kennedy's volunu! on Texas before nie, I tind that tho list of Texian Indians whiidi these authorities justitied ip.o in })nblishin<; in IMS, contained (I) (Joshattas, (2) To- wiaehs, Towakenos, Toweeas, and. Wacos, (I{) J.ipans or Sipans, (I) Alieho or Kyish, (5) Ac(»s8esaws; ((]) Navaosos, (1) Mayes, (S) Cancos, (*)) 'r»nicahiias, (M>) Tuhuktukis, (II) Unata(|ua8 or Anadarcos, (12) Mascovic^, (KJ) Tawanis or lonis, (14) Wic'o, V Waco, (15) Avoyelles, (16) Washilns, (17) Ketchi, (IS) Xaraniones, (H)) (yaicaehos, (2i\) liidias, (21) Caddo, (22) Attacapa, (23) Adahi; besides the (.'ar.in- kahuas (of which tho (Ndvos arc made a branch) classcMl with tho Attacapa, and not including certain Oherokces, (Uu)ctalis, (Miikkasahs, and Sioux. A ll'tisfiilii v(»cabulary, which will bo referred to in the .secpiol, concludes the list of Texian langu{i;i;es known by specimens. At present, then, tho chief (luestion respecting tho j)hilo- logy of Texas is one of distribution. (Jiven as centres to certain groups 1. Tho Choctah, 2. The Caddo, ;j. The Adahi, 4. The Attakapa, 5. Tho Cumanch, and 0. The Washita languages, liow do we arrange the tribcis just enumerated? Two works help us hero: — 1. A letter from the Kx-jjresident linrnelt to Schoolcraft on tho Indians of Texas. Date 1847. 2. A Statistical Notice of the same by Jesse Stem. Datt; IS.')!. Stems statistics run thus: — A\l< (KNIKAI, .\Mi:iMi A. ;i(;7 Tkiiiks. Ni MIIKII-*, 'riiwiicarros \■^\ W.icus ll4(-J!Ki Kfti'irics ;is\ ra.M.is Kih Amlairns 'JO-J 47(1 luiii 1 1.0 'I'tnikawnyn II,')2 Wicliltas |(K) l/ipaiis 500 Coiiiam-licH -JOjlMM) u:iviu^ us sovcrni <>t' tlu; uhuioh that have already appcarcil; ;:ivin^ .also j^roat j)rouiinoiu'C to tlio (Juniiiiifhcs nimicrally at least. Ill Mr. Hiinutt's Lottfu* the torni Cut/dn is proniiiu'iit ; hut \vlietli(!r it deiiot(! tlinl'adilo /iitit/iint/r, or iiuM'oly tli(! Caddo iiiiifetU'nilion , is uncertain. Neither can I tind from tht; con- text whether the statements respecting;' the Indians of the Caddo connexion (for this is what wo must call it at present) are made on the personal authority of the writer, or whether they an! taken, eitlu :• directly or indirectly, fr(»m tim Mithridates. The tm'in that liurnett uses is sfac/,' , his statenn-nt hein";; that the Waco, the Tawacani, the Towiash, the Aynic, the San Pedro Indians, the Nabaducho, and the Nacodocheets ari! all both Texian in origin and Caddo in st(»c/,\ His oth(!r tribes are — • 1. The k'elchi: a small tribe on Trinity liivcr, hated by tiio Cunnmchcs as sorcerers, and, perhaps, the same as — 2. The llilchi, once a distinct tribe, now assimilated with their neighbours. \\. The Tonkatvays , a separate tribe, of wliicli, however, the distinctive characters are not stated. Whatever may bo the exact details of the languages, dia- lects, and subdialccts of Texas, the general outline is simple. The Choctali forms of speech are anything but native. They arc of foreign origin and recent introduction. So arc certain Sioux and other dialects spoken within the Tex- ian area. The Cumanch is in the same predicament; though not, perhaps, so decidedly. It belongs to the Paduca class, and its affinities are with the Shoshoni and Wihinast of (Jregon. The Caddo Proper is said to be intrusive, having been introduced so late as 1819 from the parts between the great Kaft and the Natchitoches or Rod liiver. 1 hold, however, that some Caddo forms of speech must be indigenous. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I Ui |2.8 | 50 "^ |56 |3^ 2.5 2.2 1.8 1:25 1.4 1.6 -^ 6" — ► V] <^ c'l V] /W .'^..'V y »^' / oj. /A Hiotographic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. M580 (716) 872-4503 C/jt 3G8 ON TJIK I.AN(iL'Aie whistc chorcho. two hit rnitcli. ^hrce dowoli daub. fotir peawoh dawqiiats. five dissickka csquats. six dunkkoe kolia.ss. seven bissickka Iccopits. eight dowsiekka kootope. nine powcsiekka shcrchekeeite. ten biuuali skedorash. . To AdaJii lias already been noticed as being a conij)aia- tively isolated language, but, nevertheless, a language with numerous miscellaneous affinities. The Allacapa is one of the pauro-syllabio languages of America, by which I mean languages that, if not monosyl- labic after the fashion of the langviages of south-eastern Asia, liave the appearance of being so. They form a remarkable class, but it is doubtful whether they form a natural one, /. e. whether they are more closely connected with each other in the other elements of philological affinity than the>y are with the tongues not so characterized. They deserve, however, what cannot be given in the present paper, a special consideration. For the north-eastern districts of Mexico, New ]jeon, Ta- maulipas, &c., i. e. for the ports between the Rio Grando and Tampico, no language is known to us by specimens. It is only known that the Cumanch dips deeply into Mexico. So does the Apatsh. A tribe, lately mentioned, that oftheLipans, is, perhaps^ Apatsh. ]iurnett states that they agree with the JMescaierD and ISeratics of the parts about the Paso del Norte. For these, however, we still want vocabularies iis nominibits. Be the Lipan affinities what they may, it is clear that both the Cumanch and Apatsh languages belong to a class foreign to a groat part of the areas over which they are spread — foreign, and (as such) intrusive — -intrusive, and (as such) developed at the expense of some native language. AM) CKNTKAI, A.MKKICA. ;i()0 ing a com para That tlwi oricrdc dciu Nuhmc Tacollalihuacahiianli o ini niaocxot; komme dcin (rrich 'f) Ni([niiniuauin o inintacacchi gvthnn wcrdc dcin Willc Tacliolahuaula o niin pahnat w'lC wie hn Himmel Cliolci ix cacnitict clialchix nac tiayau ; nnsc7' Brut , O qn'in chouhcau lacalliya unti (lib hcuie ni(pxilaixriuiuh yauolmo ; wts vergib nnsre Si'inde (Jaquilaniatzaucaniuh qnintacallltcan Cros eome The the bo chief liin the tropicsj states of Ziical s they are tlu Alon<;- with tlir I's of Chilinhuaj belongs to tlifij ^uage ju.st cmi] , Pirinda, antj d IMexican Pioj ic present pajjoil eo and (Central obscurity, claiii^ wliich are ofhcif >f Pluastecapaiii -rates, or iiolp#| the ]\[ava Pro- the foHowing is! ho Mithridates. iirl AM) OKXTiiAi- a.mkkica: 371 n'ic 7vir ^'cri/rhrn Chouloi o (|nitnan laiiiiit/ancaniyauh unsrin Schuhlvjt'ni o ([iiintalac allaiiiyan ; Vnd nir/il uns lasse (*a ala (piilamactaxtoyanh ihimil jvir slchen in Virsiif/iiitif/ Nali yojauli naca liydgiii (jelhan wcrde Chontacliolaoalmanla. The same from Jfcrraa. Kintaccan u natiayau hiiill; 'racotUall hnacaliuanla o min paxca maocxot ('ainill oiiiintagchi , 'I'acliolaca liuanla ixcagnitiot ot skiniau chon cliolacaii ocuatiayan ; Alyauohuo nikila ixkni ki lacali cliaocaii ; Kllainatjcancaiiian kintacagllitcan Kintalacatlaninn ochoiikinau iclaniatzan — Caiiiau kintalacatlanian ; Nikilainapotaxtoii ala nicliyohiu lacotlanacatalit uikilaiuapotexto laniatzou lacacoltaua. Cliontacholacahuaida. Cross the watershed from Vera Paz to Oaxaca, and you tome to tlie area of Thk Mixteca. — In the ordinary maps, Tepezcolula, on the boundaries of Oaxaca and Puebhi, is the locality for its chief dialect, of wliich there are several. Mixteca Paternoster. Dzutundoo, zo dzicani audilmi; Naca cuupihuando sasaniuo : Xakisi santoniisini; Nacalmi nuunailmi salia yoculuii inini dzalmatnalia yocuhui an- dihiii ; Dzitandoo yiitnaa tasiiu.slnd^ liiutni; Dzandooui cuachisindo dzaguatnalia yodzaiidoondoondi liindo suhani sindoo; Iluasi kiliui iTaliani nucuctandndzondo kuaclii; Talmi fialiani ndihiudo saliariavvhuaka dzahua; Nacuhui. 24* 372 ON I'in; i-ANGUAUi'S HI' xouriiKits , westicux, Tii(! ]\Iixtoe{i succeods tlio Mcxiciin I'ropnr, itself liciun- other thiin Mexican, just as the Totonuc-a sueeedcd the llnn- steea, wluch Avas IMaya, the Totonaca being other than ]\raya. ^Fho ]Mixteca is tlie Lani;-uap,e of Northern , Tlie Zapotkca tliat of youtliern, Oaxaca. Hervas writes, tliat the Zapoteea, Mazateca, ChinMntcci, and Mixe were allied. The IMixe locality is the distrid around Tehuantepec. South of the areas of the three languages just enumerated comes the main division of the Maya — the Maya of Gua- temala and Yucatan, as opposed to the Iluasteca of the parts about Tampico. This, however, we i^sxss oyer s/ cat pcdc, lur Honduras and San Salvador. Limiting ourselves to the distric+s that undenia>,ly belon- to those two States, v^c have samples of four dialects of The Lenca language; these being from the four Pueblos of Guajiquiro, Opatoro, Intibuca, and Sirmlaton, those o!' the last being shorter and less complete than the others. They are quite recent, and are to be found only in tlio Spanish edition of ]\Ir. Squier's Notes on Central America. The English is without them. l^NfiLISlI. man ?ro»i<(tt.... 1)0)/ head .... ear Cf/C GUAJIQI'IRO. Ol'ATORO. InTIBUCA. taho amaslic. move napii. toco tohoro guagua hua. yang yau sainj^ sarinda caga.si. yaiigaga. saring. nose nnpse napsoh noptoii. tnouth ingh aniheingh ingori. tontjuc nafol navel na])el. teeth uagha noas nigh. neck ainpsli aiupsliala cange. arm keuiu koiiiu kcning. /i/ujers lascl gualalasel foot gaiigi (piagi guaskarinj blood uahug wnh quch. su/i gasi ga.shi gashi. star siri siri fire uga 'ua y'^g'i' ?raler guass nasli guash. stone ca cah tupan. tree ill Hi ill. TKIIX, r, itself bcint, ceded the Hua- ng other tliaii •a, (^liinantcci is tlio distriil list enumerated Maya of Gu;i- ;ea of tlic parts r si ceo pcde, for AMI CKNTKAI, AMIWUCA. IvSdI.ISll. rilAJIQIlUO. Ol'AlOKO. I.NTIIit (A. line ita ita itaska. Inut iiaa three lagna ^ finir aria jire sailic sailie .v/.r Imic hue iterea linis-ca eight tcef-ca — -— nine kaiapa ..... ten isis i.ssi.s 373 As Mr. Sfjuier is the sole autliority for the Leiiea of Sau Salvador and Honduras, so he is for leniak-ly belom r dialeets of s ic four Pueblo.s laton, those of lan the others. id only in the cntral America. ^A. >-a. 3' mug*. NlCARAGTA. Limiting ourselves to the undoubtedly Nicaraguan area, and taking no note of the IMexican I'roper of nun-e than one interesting IMexican settlement, the three forms of spceeh for which Ave have specimens are — 1. The Ciioukte(!a; 2. The I^aguaxda; and ;}. The Wulava, of the Chontal district. And now we pass to the Debateable Ground. The lan- Igiuige of The ]\[oskito Country dvos us a fourth form of speech; at least (1 think) as dif- ferent from the Choretega, Nagranda, Wuhva and Lenca, as they are from each other. This is — The WahvNA of the Indians of the coast, and, jirobably, 1 of several allied tribes inland. Of the Waikna, Wulwa, Nagranda, and Choretcga, sam- ples may be found either in Squier's Nicaragua, or vol. iii. of the Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. E.NOLISl'l. Nag KAN DA. CrOKETEGA. man rail pa ?raho. 7voma?i rapa-ku n-ahseyomo hoij sai-ka ?j-asonio. git'l sai-kee ?/-aheyinn. child chichi n-aneyanie. father mother.... ana £joo-ha. autu goo -mo. husband a'mbin 'mholmc. if !• 374 ON Tin; i.AN(ii:A(ii;s or \(iin"iini!N, wkstkkn, *'11U p-ntc. EN(iI,ISll. NaCMIANKA. C'lli>lli;TK(iA. x'ifc ii'gnyu //iiino. AW MiH'ul //-.•isoiucyaino, . / cdi /<"'> tn'mi lucTiilir. face fnrclicad giiltu t'«/' i»>ui iip.liino. n/f «<'tu iialit:>. ""•''■i' ta'co imiii<^o(). mouth (lalinu nniisii. lo/Hjue (luliu g-roulic. tooth Kciim ualio. fcol imku jTvalu). •''■/'7/ clclmialu nckniic. *■»'* J»lit.'a iminlm. s((ir ucu iiuotc. /'>'• Hliku ualiu. w"/'"/' t'oia iiiinhu. stone I thou he )ve lioc'lio.l-u ye liocliel-a they icaiux ... this ca-la t'Sf'O. Hugo. ('S(>UU ic-u salin. ic-a suinu.shcta. ic-a semolimu. For the Waikna tliere are other materials. The Wuhva specimens are few. Hence it may be doubtful whether the real difference between it and the AVaikna be so great as the following table suggests. English. Wulwa. Waikxa. nifin all Avaikiut. woman y-all mairou. sfin pan-ni-ma lupia-waikua. daughter pan- co-ma lupia-mairen. head tnnni lot. eye miuik-taka iiakro. fiose inagni-tak kainka. mouth dinibas bila. hlood anassca tain. <'ll duwawa semohuiu. AM) (KNTItAI, A.Mi;i;l( A. yTf) Kn(ii,isii. Wri.wA. Waikna. driitlc luiiliuia bo-pviiiia. run (l!i;;'aliiu Ixt-tiipu. l('(ti) iiiiisi;;-a bo-ora. ( aivu iia-va. f/O \ • ^ ( I'.-u — aiiiij nM;j,aiau ]ia-cO(»n(lanm. sU'L'i) ami pa-yacu]^)t'. Costa Rica. Tlio following- is from a vocabulary of Dr. Kail Sclicrzors (if the languages of the Blanco, J'ulicnle, and Tulnmcnca In- dians of Costa lliea, occupants of the parts between the Uivcr Zent and the Doea del Toro. We may call* it a spe- cimen of The TalajMENCA. — It seems to be, there or tlicrealjouts, as different from the preceding languages as they are from each other. ExdLlHlI. Tai-amkn'ca. Uiv .v/z-kukc. [ijc .VM-wnakctt'i. ;/(/,s7' A'/<-t.slnik(»t<). wuMlh A'«-'kuwu. \m(juc <'.v-kuptu. Umh iv<-ka. heard srt-karku luezili. neck -joint? tzin. (um A'rt-fra. hand sa-frd-lzin-avk. fmijer /'ra-\v\v\i;\. nail sa-krasku. mn kanlme. maim tulu. KN'(iM«lI. 'I'ai.ajikxca. shir hcwnc. jirc tshuko. walrr ditzita. one c-tanui. iHH) ho-lrn>n. l/in'c iiiag'iia-/('«'(/. four skv.-lCH'n. five ni-lmra. aix ai-wo-sliC-Xv. seven .s7-«v/-wora. ei(jlil A/-//'o-niagnan nine si-wo-skc-lciva ten srt-H'at-ka. The same volume of the Transaeiions of the Amori^ !.> Ethnological Society that supplies us with IMr. Squiers vi, cabularies for Nicaragua supplies us with Dr. Secman's for Veuagua. Those being for The Bayano; The Savaneuic; and The Cholo. The Cholo is the same as Dr. CuUen's Yule, and also the same as Cunacuna and Darien of Balbi and the Mithridatcs. .'{70 ON I'lii; i..\N(iir \(ii;s (»r nhiitiiiokn, wkhtkiix KN(iI, ('r.\A( I NA. mil' (lucnsu-cuii I ».\i;ii.N. I'nlljuilf^n. /// inuiti;ili, I'Dtir |ifi(|ii('-cn;i jtMkc-cni.'ili. five iitalc ctcirali. si.v ucr-ciiii iinlricali. ,S7'/VV/ CUJ^lc COnj^ctlilh. ciijlil V!m-ii_i;uii ])!nik(ipiili. itinc j)a(|U('-liMguc' ]iak('kopali. ti'H auilx'gui aiiivcgo. It is also tlio same ns sonic short specimens ot" the ^li- thridites; where milcr = (lulali. mi 10 f I ~- nil. fiitlwr ■= tautah. mollicr c^ iiauiiah. brother =: nipali, sislcr =: iiinah. tn'fr (/roma/ij =: poonah. The Cliolo leads us into South America, where for the; present, we leave it. ADDENDA. I Avill now add two notes , wliich may [lossihly save some fu- ture investigator an unremunorative search. First, concoriiing a language called Mocorosi. — In .fiilg, this is made a language of Mexico. It is really the Moxa of Houth Ame- rica under an altered name. English. 1 thou he this that that yon she m?/ Ihi/ his o?ie two three iMOKOKOSI. nuti piti ema maca maena maro esu nuyee l>iy(>« mayee eto. api. mopo jMoxa. nuti. piti. ema. maca. maena. maro. esu. nuyee. piyee. mayee. eto. api. mopo. KHTKllX AN1» CKNI'liAl, AMKIMCA. 377 III. h. all. mens of the ]\Ii- - vupnli. linnh. \an) =p()on<'ili. I, wliorc for the \i\y save some fu- — In Jiilg, this is xa of Soixth Aiiie- This is from nn iiir ij rdrtihii/nrin dc Ui Iji'iiijidi Mam/nsi , mm- pitcstit jior iin padrr de In compKm.i dr Jrsxs missiotirrn dc la Pnt- rinc'uis dr los 31i>.viis dcdirudo a hi Sercnissinui Rri/na d>' Ids .tnt/i'lrs sirmprc Finjrn Maria y Valrona dc cstas Misnianrs; en Madrid, aim (Ir 169<). A J/im.'i edition A.n. 1701 diffors from this in (imittinj;- the name Mii/ciirosi, iind heinpj dedicated to a dilVereiit patron. In other resjiects the two works a;,ree vrrhalim il lUmilim. Secondly, in respect to a languaj^e called Tiinuucuana — J''or this we have a Calrc/iisma y f.rniurn para las que cnmxilgan t\v kiapia CaslcUana y Timur/uana , jxir d Padrf /->. Francisra Parrja ; and ;/ Padre dc la Provincia de Santa Elena dc la Florida, »tc. Maico, 1627. Also, the following numerals in Balhi, perhaps, taken from the ahovc : — TiMUACLANA. napikichama. EXOLISH. TlMUACl'ANA. Enoli one minccotamano. six ifvo nauchamima. seven three naliapumina. eight four nacheketamiina. nine fire namaruama. napikinalinma. napekechetama. natumama. 1 ! ADDKXDA AND ( OUIJKiKNDA (1859). P. 'i.Vi. '-As' fiol litis Miizinit'sr' — No. I'^nr a I'lirtlicr imtlrc sec //. ;WH. P. :J,")H. " /uiii'if/ii'ii mill 'I'luiniiiiilrliy Tlic Kawiclicii is ucju'cr li> tlic Niisdjiliiiii , S([iiMllyaiiiisli , and ( 'atlilasciMi than it is to the 'riaoquatfli. This may he s- cm in Uusciniwinii ji. iW). At tiic same time it is iiiorc^ 'IUao((iiatcli than l?nscliuiann ni.ikcs it. P. 'J.V.). — " 77/^' .ll/iii/itisi'iin litiii/iiiiiji's lire iiiiilinih/rilli/ J:'s/('tw(MMi the uotir.e t'ontaincd in j). 2!)!) anr, to think that Ksliimu is the best name for it. J fence, expressions like "tlie Atiiabrtscan languages are, undoubtedly, Eskinu) — and the Koloocii languages are equally Eskimo with tlu^ Athabascan" nnist bo read in the sense of th(^ author as ex])ressed in jt.iiVo — "that the line of (UMnarcaticni betw(M'n the Eskimo and the Indian races of America was for too broad and trenchant." Whether cei'tain forms of sjieech were not connected with the Eskimo I'roper — the Eskinu) in the limited and specific meaning of the term- — -is another ([uestion. The Ugalents was so treated. The, Kcnay — until the publication of Sir T. Jtichard.son's Lon- clieux specimens — Avas made both too Eskimo and too Kolooch. On the other hand, hoAvever, both the, Eskinn) and the Koluch were divisions of the same order. The actual value of the term A'olooch is even noAV uncertain. P. 276. — " The AJuienin efcy - A reference to the Avord Auka- I'AuoES in JiUdwig's l?i])liotheca Olottica (both in the body of the Avork and the Addenda) suggests a doubt as to the accuracy of the form Ahiienin. Should it not bo Atsina'f Turner remarks that "there is no evidence that Dr. Latham I ;i .\hiii'.Ni)\ \\i» it)i!i;i(.i;Mi.\. :{7<) (iilliilcil " MiU'k('ii/,ic's vtn'alm'.Mry wliirli , ■•i.^ I'.ir .is tin- tf\t IN I )A I'lirtlicr iidlifc ' Ka\vic|icii is ilascoii than it 'liiiianii |). (i^ij, iiami makes it. hlcill;/ Kslniiio.'' \\i\\n'Y wliich ycjirs. 'riicic Avliicli I'ollows. wliic'li I altcr- cr (;f a ^•cncric 'roper, Itut tlic 'in a iiKnlilicd ever, to tliiiik cto(l -witli tlic ccilk meaiiiiij;' ViXH so treated, (ird.son's Lon- i ton Kolooi'Ii. (I the Kohu'li 10 of the term n word AisiiA- e l)ody of the t;cnracy of the t Dr. Latham f liUdwi;;- ^locs, is true eiioui II nnuimeii h. I had, I inwever, vu'ii nn'i' \au\ wi; I'Mitor tliat I liad done su. As 'riinier knew nnthinj;' of lliis is remark \vas a |iro|icr one 'I'l i(> nmiu i|UeHtion, liowever, touches the form of the word. Is .tliin.in or .llsiuii ii;;iit':' 1 can not make out the later history of the MS. In my own |iart, I eoijied, collated, .•mil returned it; and I ima;;'ine th.at it still lie amon;;st either I'riihaid's or ( liilliitin's |ia|»ers. I liiive the transcript hefore me .at this moment; which runs thus. "'I'he vocjdiularies of the llhudvfeet, of the Crows or Ipsarokas," "and of the (Irosventre, IJapid, or F;dl Indians who call tliemscd " "ves iMiiienin ; liy I). M. J\Ii\eii/,ie of the St Louis Americ.in I'urr' ■(' Hut' om|i. 1 Iiey appear to iiejonj;' to three distinct lamilies. "the ( 'row sspe.ak .a dialect (dearly l)elon!j,in^' to the s.anu' lan_i:,u;i};-e.' "as that of the sedentary .AlinitJires and .M;indiiiis, which is Sioux,' i;.\(ii,isii. II.V aid Anifiitan .Issiiiclntin hitir Iilunkcl hraiidif hulls ' Imtlous hcrrics hlotxl , hull hii/l'iilo vow hiijfulo hear bail lUttckfiiot Indian JUdoiI Indian vomh vord cup roal calf. clii'at (.'riiir Indiini roiiiini/ , I am iloji deer drink ear-rinys ears eyes elk eai fixj/ friend, my tf«» AllNKMN. liaiKir^c. I),iy. lia.sScWHV. iittiiioiio. w.'ilitaiiiyo. iii;li!itiyo, kiiiutlyo. kiitcliciimtclio. hulikcatta. Iiiii. barts. nicaii. utaium. wussa. w.ahnattliji. wahtanetas. cnwweiiiiie. clifittiya. alitliauatz. nil ah. beethiiitini. wo. clialiliawclo. owweiiin. Icitowats. alittali. iiosik. iialibin. iyand. ctali. araithya. wu.ssea. alibeetse. iiahatta. betiecbe. kutclieuin. IC.Mil.lSM. ynud (iros Venires Indian i/irl {i/unny) (/(td. (snu ) tjniny (/ am) — {n'/iereare y"u) ahiyou. salt ekiiiwa. siif/ar naliattobin. sleep iiiickc'oote. strike tow wo nail. sun csis. still he owwahtatz. tobacco kic-iitaliwan. teeth c'tcliit. ihiyh netcto. to-day waiiaki. to-7)wrrow nacali. take it ctanali. verinillio/i iiohatto iiovcn. 7tnderstand,doyou.'... alinetaii. ■ — , I do 7iot liacliinetoii. 7vood bess. As the MS. was written with unusual clearness and distinctness I have no doubt as to Ahncnin liavinf.^' been the word. That ]*richard read it so is evident; for the foregoing explanatioa lias made it clear that he and I are independent witnessess. If crria-, then, exists it his in the ]\I8. TheBlackfoot and CroAv (which having also tran nibod, I have by me) are as folloAvs : — English. Klackfkkt. Cuow. suTi nawtuas little old fool sakalibooatta. spirit cishtom had spirit appanahhe. 7iiau {vir) nayslietai)pc ... bettse. Indian do absarroka*. 7iooronpmca. head otoquoin marshun, * Or i'psaroka, name of nation. r- Addexua and Co;irj(ir,Ni)A. 38 1 AlINKN x. liHiiiiiko. iiotzsnii. tOVfUl. nnnalilio, cstaii. iiatcliu. kiadali. ni.sa. naliattonuclic, etlia. iialia. iiiissa. aim an. alia. itatali. kanmitz. kayliatz, tahto. riayyo. nethiy -1. yaliiiayaii. iiekitukiyaii. rotassa. lid distill ctncs.s '■ word. That xplaiiatiou lias ssess. If error, n-ibcd, I have ee c/illd. Enolish. /ttiir — o/' animal face I'urehead ear I'll*' ' vuse , muutit lo)i(jii.e , teelli hearii neck ufin Iiand IKlil hodjj heliy lefi ILLC •••■•••••*al lues , hune heart hlaoil town chief warrior , war-party ... friend , house kettle i arrow , how hatchet knife canoe shoes bread pipe tobacco skij sun moon star W Iinil /tic iiuilcr ir( ciirlli rivrr lake island vdllci/ Iiill.'. viounlnin alone copper ij-oii scti tree /uirk yrass mnizc oak pine wo'id firc-H'ooil leaf meat heaver elk (leer hullhii/falo cowhtifj'idu Ini/falo herd of buffaloes Ijeai- tlHjlf dofj squirrel rabliit | hare ( fox snake bird W/ l/oose piyeon partridge tiirkei/ dnck fish n'tiite black lU.ACKKKKT. Crow. cliristccoom thalieslic. snatnli liannuh. olipootali bi.ih. salieo makkoopali. estcn bidali. olihkeali minne. saeoocootali boroohke. ksnlieoom anima. neekkittiz ahesii. omahsekaine 7/«'/weetoekali. nianc /«i'/»wej)eslin. kiiieldme abracliukt!. natooin niahpo. mastake aliinaliabbc. ohcootokc mi. * olitaqiiinnalveskin ommattisbc. nakesbiii omatte. motohkin minneotskisliali. masetis bahcoo. ohtokeskissase eslte. nialitoyaso beka. eskatah liohhartzhee. cabpokesa daclipitseesmone^y. palitoke bartclie. inasetis money. i^ama.se soyapoko moneyabpe. akesequoiu arookka. kakestakc beruppe. poonabkab eitchericazzso. ahnakkas obba. estumeek skain bislia. onalio keiyo diilipitsa. mabcooya cbata. cmittab biska. omabcookabte islitadaze — rabbit. abtetah islita. olitabtooya cbeesuptodalilta. patrakesoma eanhassa. pakcsa dickkappc. oiiwas eikkicn. cmahkiya mena. pisitistsa maXnpiluse. katokin cbitcbkekab. dickkekskocko. siakcs mebbaka. mamca l)ooah. ksiksenum chose. sikksenum sbnpitkat. ■'" bee yellow. ADDKNDA AND OnitUIfiRXHA. •ICO ii !§ 1 EnOMSTI, JjLAfKKKKT. CnOW. red molicsenuin hi.slickal.. blue comoiiii sbiuikat. ypllini' olitiiliko shirekat. jjvedl oliiTiohcoo esjili. mnall enjiheootse ccdl. sh'oiifj miskappc bassats. oil/ nahpe carraliarra. f/ooi/ aliHc itsicka. IhiiI. pahcaps kubhoek. hmidsomc nialitsoapse osissa. ?////// palicapse eisbknbbeek. nlive sakatappo itcliasa. dead aadrie carraslie. cold stooyah hootsbcrc. warm kasetotzn alire. / Tii.sto be'. llinii cliristo firniii ) T fiiul tll.Mf t hp iipfiiiitv l>o I affinities Ix'- , very limlttid hief. uncnrskiski. (Ilia, [ay. atii. •.aitdcli. jreat. I I HI I. iki. iigle. wiiii'/iiili. ire/i. lick. Jtiike/ii/ii. iakiisc. ar. nuiiff. ciiorc. oiijiircr. liiwiiiski, ■hluonilz. unt. Isi. hid. ly ri}i;ht hand. ^iktitcsixi/iioi/cni. iiii'iveeiiUliiliK/iioli- otWPOll [the Louclionx and tlio Koniiy lanj-'naj^'cs is given liy l^ricliard, \']w, at tlio Kani(> time, separates both from the Athaliaskan, "Mr. [UaUatin says that the similarity of lanj4uaj;('s amongst all these" [i.e. the Athaha.skan) "tribes is -wcdl-e.stahlished. Tiie Loiicheux" "are excepted. This language does not apjiear to liav(! any" "distinctly marked affinities except with that of the Kenay." — \Vol. V. />. 377. I believe that Dr. Pricliard's informant on tliis point was the Isame as my own i. c. Mr. Isbister. Hcoiiler also suggests the same rebitionship. Tliit IJnschmann has arrived at the results of his .illiahasliisrhe iSjiriic/i.'ifinniii through n series of independent researches 1 readily !li(dieve. Whether, after taking so little trouble to know what had tiicen done by bis predecessors, he is right is saying so nnich linut bis ilisciirt'rir.s is anotlun' ((uestion. That the J'inaleno is in the same category with tlie Navalio is jslicAvn by Turner, who gives a vocabulary of the dialect. English. Navah( I'lNAr.KNi iiiiDi husttkin payyahuah. iVDiiuin cstsainii ctsumii. head bctsi Ituir tclilit setzczil. car tshar sitzchai-. I'lie ninuar tshindar, iiose nitclu chinch hand feet . sun,.., shilattaete chicon. t'ki sitzkay, (lacos yalieyo. mitnn 'tsadi .v/«/' olchcec. /ire. 'tcl ion iviilcr 'tl in lilt klish Htonc tseek ilRdiifsaycd. ailsonsatyon to. tlia. tshaier. V. Till' Kilinidha Iiuhjikkjc. — The Kitunaha, Kiitani , or I'ootanie vocabulary of J\Ir. Hall was obtained from a Cree Jiulian, and is not to be dejiended on. This being th(> case it is (inrtunate that it not the only specimen of the language. There ^ an earlier one of Mr. Uowse's , jtuldished in the Transactions I' the ]*hilological Society. It is as follows. 25 ;jb(; ai)I>i:ni».v ani» cokijicknda. I t it J'Ls'fir.isii. KriAM. our hook caiii. /ii'i) ass. //ircc callc sail. fiiiir liiid sail. //()(' yua CO. fii.v ill lie mc sail. seven wliist taw lali. eii//i/ waw ali sali iiiiii' ky .yiii kit to. fen !ive to vow. (in Intliun all (inols mail kin iiic. II man te te calt. a iriimiiii balle key. (I shiic catii lend. a ijun tall vow. /,,.. (!ali mill. Ihfiu liii coo, III'. iiin CO is. nu' (Ihiiii ami I] ... call mill nah lali. t/iis fia/iai! ill iiai all quels mail kin iiic. t/iiil liul'uni CO .'ill quels niali kill nic. thi'sc fni/ians wai nai all quels ii'iali kin nic nin tic. ii'(' ah CO CO nool;. how much'. cacksah? il is cold weiither kis caw tit late, a lent ah caw slaii cci liokc, '«.'/ tent i;;ih all kit lali. thif lent all kit lah nis. /'/•>• tent ah kit lah is. our (thy and mil) cah ah kit lah 't'"' nam. l/cs ah ah. no waw. men te to calt nin tic. iVDinrn hallo key niii tic. ijirl {in her teens) nah oh tit. jjirls (/// their teen.s) nah oh tit nin tic. 1)01/ stalt. Iioi/s stalt nin tie. little hiijj stalt nah naii. child ciili mo. children call mo nin tie. I'(ilher(^hi/ the sons) eah ilc doo. father {liy the daiiyhters) call sous. mother call mah. lirotlicr, eldest call tat. brother, younyst {^hy brothers) ... cats zah. brother , yonnyesl {by .sisters) call zc ah. sister, eldest cats sous. sister., younfjest ... cah nah nah. uncle cath ah. aunt call tilt tilt. yrand/'aihei cah papa. yrandmothei call do do. thy husband in claw kiii iiali | mi/ wife call tilt iiali lU". tin/ wife tilt nah iiio i:is. son can nah hot lay | * or ah calt. dauijhter cass win. come here clan nah. (jo awiiy cloon no. take care ill kilt wo in. get out of the way you vaw. come in tie cath ah inin. yo Old sclah nah ah miii- stop niae kack. ADIU'.MiA AM) ('(ll!l!l(ii;NI>A. :{S7 you vaw. tic c'lUli nil iiiin. sulah n.ali all niiii. mac kaek. KNfJi.isii. KriAM. run sill naek kin. sliiirlji ah Ills call ziii. miscili) o i>cr tin. herjijiir/i/ coku cu iiiat^ kali kail. I i/iiw lioiie silt all muli tic sis iiey. llioii t/ives( kill iiali mail tic zcy. Iir (jivcs Hclali mali tii^ zcy. lit' i/ave call mall tie cates. I hea/ lioiic call slali ten. t/ioii /iviilcsl kin call slali Icat. lie Iwa/s .. ki.s kilt cone slali Icat. j/ire vie all mali tic kit sous. Ill' (javc me iiali niali tie kit sa|) po ney. I liwe i/Dii lionc sdali kilt iicy. //(.' loves sclali kilt. ih i/oii liiDe me'.'' ... kin sclali slap ? / /i/de //oil hone call sclali kilt nev. llion halesl kin call sclali kilt. he hales call sclali kilt. I speak lioiKis all noy. tlioii sjieakesl kins uli. he speaks kat(is ah. we speak hones ah iiali slab. i/uii speak talk o tea loat. ihei/ speak seals ah. I steal hone i he no. I sleep hone come ney 11 cy. ivc sleep hone come ney nail lah ney. Idle hones alt hi]) pe ney. Ihon flicsl kins alt hip. we flic hone ah o co iioak nail sl;ili ney. (live me lo eat he shoe. cat he ken. nil/ ()nn call tah vow. //'// ijH'i tall vow nis. his f/nii tall vow is. K.NOi.isn. lari/e river ... small river er( ■k lanje laki small lak( rapiil , sliiials... ell a II II el ivitiiil or trees veil pine eedar poplar iispiii /'•'■'■ iee vlidrriiiil ashes kellle mat teat Iieail . ei/es . nose , iiioiilh . chin . cheeks hair .. Iioily ., arms ,. letjs ,, belli/ ., haek .. side ... ears ... ail i ma Is horse ... iiiouiilaiu roeki/ vioinitaiii .vn«H'// mountain road or track .. ac CO vo ele it. ac {!(> vo ele it nook key. ac cc vo clc it ac clo. ac que inah nam. stallion mare ... hull ... com calf. tif/er , hears of all kinds lilack or Inomn hears , KllTANI. catli le man me took, hall cai Iv. nis c.'i'i tooK. will caw ac co co nook, ac CO CO nook iiah nah. ah call hop ele it. wheat taw hoj) ele il. ah coke you coo nook . hall cath .slaw o weak, ail kits siali in. he mos. heats /.e iiatt . ac clo mack, ac CO CO zle m.'ick. ah kin lie co co. ah CO wheat ah kits call kilt, ah CO (jiic nic CO. yoats sivimc. tah lalt ah kit lah nam. ac d.'ini. ac cack Icat. ac conn a(' cait ii^ mall, ac. call iiK^ /.in no (•!uk. ac que ma malt, ac coke que slam. ac CO no cack. ac solat. ac sack, ac CO womh. ac cove call sla.ck. ac kin no cack . ac co]<(! CO what, yah mo. kilt calt law ah shin. cass CO. sto/^galt. noel seek, sloiikc copo. ah kill CO malt, s'vic. caj) po tie. nip po 00. 25* ;}ss AI»l)i;\l).V AM) CnitKHiKNDA. EN(ir.l.SU. Kl TANf. yrhile hear kit mIjuv o slaw. 77'/// ///•(■;• Meats siijip pioco. rrti (Ifir kilt caw sloy. moose (leer Miiap pe co. nmolveieen ats pd. wolf cHck ki I. heaver ■... sin iiali. oiler all cow uli alt mhilc in mw yah. iiifirtin iiae siu-k. )iiusi/iNis/i an CO. small (jreji plain wolf skin koots. Iiirds to coots cnli min nail. blue jiiii CO quis kay. KxriMsir, KriA.Nt. crow coke kin. raven null nali k(^y. sua lies (^rattle- snake) wilt Ic malt. f/arter siialie all co new slam. roots (cai/iass) ... liaj) pe.y. /////(■/• rool nail cam me slioii. loliaiTo root mass mass. sweet potatoes all wliis sea. vioose herrij ac co mo. slrawherrji ac (;o co. /;///(' C0U8C. pipe stem ac coot lali. Uite all coot talt. tdhaecu yac kct. jlesli all coot lack, VI. Thi' Altui group. — The. mimorous vocalmlaiics tliat rcjirc- sent tlio (liiilccts iuul ,sul)-(lial»H'ts of this larg'O class arc the f'dlldwiu;;' — ^Vtna Proper or Sliuslnvaj) , Knllclsjiclin (I'cinl (rorcillcs) , Spokau, Kcttlof'all dialects of the Selisli; Okaiiagaii; Skitsiiisli ((Jonir »r alene) ; IMskwaus; Nnsdaluiii; Squallyainisii ; Kawiclieii; Catlilascou; Clieeliooli; 'rslliaili; Kwaiutl; Kweiiai- Avitl ; Kowelitz; NsietsliaAvus or Killiinmk. To this, the present writer adds the J}ille(diula. XI, The (|uery as the likidihood of the Htraits of I'lica voca- liulary having- been IMozino's finds place here. The two arc dilVerent : though both may have; been collected by ^lozino. Each is to lie found in IJuschinann , Avho, exaggerating the isolation of Wakash, Nntka, and Tlaoijnatch forms of siteecli, se]»arates them too decidedly. Out of nineteen words compared nine are not only alike but admitted by him to Ixi so. The nuirr/iiiltt. — This lies intermediate to the Hailtsa and Atiia gronjis; being (apparently) more akin to the latter than the i'ormer. ( )f the, Atna dialects, it .seems most to ajiproach the ]*iskwaus, T/ir Chiiiah.'- The Chinuk of which the Watlala of Hale is vari(!ty is more like tlie Msietashawus or Killamuk than aught else. The k'ulopinfft. — The harshness of the Kala]iuya is an inference from its ortiiogra])hy. It is said, however, to be .soft and flowing ?. /'. more like the Sahaptin anil iShoshoni in sound than the Chinuk, and Atna. The Jahitn, — This has affinities with the Ohinuk on one side, and the Lutuami on the other; i.e. it is more like these two languages than any other. The likeness, however, is of tlic slightest. I. AI>l)l;.MiA AM) ('(»l;UI(ii:M>A. ;{s<) Ki'tani. •oki' kill, mil iiiili key. vllt le malt, ill CO new slum, lap pc.y. lali cam me sliou, nass mass. ill wliis s(.'a. u: CO mo. IC (!0 CO. :;oii8C. ic coot lali. xh coot talt. yna kct. nil coot lack. lios that rojirc class ai'd tlic >lsp('hn (l*(Mi(l sli; Okaiiagaii; SqiiJillyiunisli ; aiutl ; Kwciiai- is, the present of l''nca voea- Tlie two arc 'd liy ^lozino. aj^-geratiu};' the rms of six'eeli, onls compared so. liltsa and Atiia atter tlian tlie approach the !ila of Hale is udc than aui;'ht is an inference oft and flowing lan tho-Chiniik, k on one side, like those two ivcr, is of the f t lVriS(i;i,i,\M;ois Ai'i'iM rii's. I'.iifiHsli man, .lakoii I,iilt.. Siilisli n/tnll-tiinc/i/ii), Skitsuisli s/iiii/t ciiiiilJi. I'iscous ,\/iii///iwi/ii miiltiilli'. Slialiaiitiii iniiKils. Kiii/lis/i inotlK.T. .lakon fk/ilit. Chinook ik/i/iiiiiiid. F.i)i/lis/i husband. •Jakon Nonsi/. Cliikaili riiicis. ('owclitz sk/i(»i, Killaiiiiick vlsnun. limpqua skltnti. ~ do i-hanga. Eiii\lish wii'c. .Fiikidi sinlkhliilis. ( 'ayiiso iiitkhlkdid. ^I(dele toii/jitk/ildi. The Siilidjtliti. — The Saluiptin, Shoshoni and laitiianii gronjis lire more closely connected than the text makes them. Tin' Sliiishimi (Padura) (jruup. — The liest general name for this I'hiss is, in the mind of the prc^sent Avriter, I'adnca; a name Avhicli W was jiroposed hy him soon after his notitication of the aftinity lietween the Shoshoni and the Conianch, in a.d. 1845. Until then, I the two languages stood alone; /. c. there, was no class at all. The I AA'ihinast was shewn to Ix; akin to the Shoshoni liy Mr. Hale; tlu; AVihinast vocahulary having heen collected hy that indefatigalile jiliilolognc during the United States Exploring Uxj)edition. In (Jallatin's Keport this aftinity is put forward with due jiro- ininonce; the AVihinast being sjioken of as the Western Slio- slioni. lii '50 the Report of the Secretary at War on the route from San Antonio to El Paso sup])lied an Utah vocaludary; which the paper of May '53 shews to he I'aduca. \\\ the Report upon the Indian '^I'rihes i^c. of '55, we find the C'hemehuevi, or the language of one (A' t\w, Pdh-utti/i hands " i'or the lirst time made public. It agrees" (Avrites Professor Turner) "with Simjison's Utah and Hale's East Shoshoni." (^arvalho (I quote from liuschmann) gives the numerals of the I'iede (Pa-uta) of the jMuddy River. They are nearly those of the Chemehuevi. :]!Mi Ai»iii:\i»A AM» «(»Ki!n;r.M».v. I'.Mii.isii. ru;i>i;. (itlf NuiiS /irii wu'i'iioiu'. //lice |ii<>()iiu. /'iiiir Wdl.sooins;. /irr .slidoiiiin. .v/,t' iiuvi. ,s'(7'(^/ iiiivikavali fii//i/ iijimici'tsoo'iii. iiiiic sIniokootspeiikLTiiii. /(■/I tulll!)llUu'ilI. l'\n- the Calmillo sec IicIoav. Is llic KioAN.iy I'adm-ay Tlic only kiiitwu KiiCi' of Iniuj iiilt'rciiiii/iiiuiic has L;i\t'ii iis lif tli.it nlllM' .Mis- siiiii ill wliicli lie liscil or tliat nl' tin- true Calniillu disfiicl is im- tM'i't!iiii. 'riiinci' treats it as ('aliiiilln; at tlic same tiiiif liii rc- iimrks, anil slicws, that '.t is iiiorc akin tn the San l^iiis |{cy iliah. t than t(t any nthrr. IWit it is also akin to the ( "hi'iiiciirvi, which witli it is lalmlatcd ; 11 l;u't wliicli I'avonrs tin- views of llah' res|M'('tin,L;' its San ('aiii- strano al'linities rather than those of liiisehniaiin llah- niakinj^' tiieni radm-a. A vocalnihiry, liowever, of the unrei'iaiineil CahiiiMo tiilies — the trihes of tiie. mountains as o|ipose(l to the, missions is still wanted. l'.N(il,ISII. IIMMI iiii;vi. (\\min.i.o. nmn ., ivDiiinn heiul liuir tuwat/, . m:irii(|ii;i Ililil.'llH'S. iiiUil. iiiut.'ici)\v!i iiivuliika. t()i'|ii|) li/iiii ".'/'' Co iiaiicaijii ik 1' iici itsli IillolU iiaiiDcKa, napiisli. iiiiivi iK'inn. iniiiitli tir.ipuiiu )iet. una. lunijiio Hijo lixith towwa lUMIIIII. iielaaia. Iiiiml inasiwaiiiin neinnlicniosli. iiaiTi|iJUi. nei iiifinpj'aii neta. l-iiil.' font hniin Iilood ski/ tnii|) tiKinasIiaiiica. sun moon stitr /''•'' ii'iilcr one tal)Mput/. taunt. iiK'Jitr'ifopit/'. Miciiyil. ))llt.Slll (Mill ... pall.... sliuisli In'ii waii . nam. rce ll< four ])an •licl •ut. Nlipll. niewi. lejiai. att'lni iiiewitc'lm. l\vL' iiiaiiu iiHirKMiuadiiiiii. >iix iiabai (|naihiiiiisii|ili SCVl'H !f//ll inoqnist iia 1 U-li IWIp I' qiiaiiiiHiiiwi. quaiiiiiiiiipa. (inaiiiiiiiiiwii'Im. ten masiin iioiiiaeliuiiu P. 353. Now comes tlie correction of a statement in ji. 3>i3 — " ///6' IdinjtKifjc of S(i)i Luis El lie;/ ivliicli is Yuind. is snr- iccrtfrd hi/ UkiI nf Suit Luis Ohis/io, irltidt is IJapistrdnn." — Tliis is an inaccuracy; .M|)|iarently from inaihcrsion. A reference to the Paternosters of j)/>. MH 305 shews that the. San Luis licy , and the Sau Juan Capi.strauo form.s of speech are chisi ly allied. :{<)•> AI»I»I;Mi\ ami t (tl!l!Mii;NI) a. l\I('aii\\ liilc, llif Sjiii I'diiamlit ii|»|Mi>iulir,s tlii; fSiiii (iiiliricl, /. r. the Ki/.li. Sec iilso 'riinitT, /<. 77 where tlie iiaiiie hi'c/ii seeiiis, wonl for wdi'd, to be /u:/t. 'I'lie 71/://, liowever is a .SVhshe(1oclie /iiniil ifalcliu sitlil (inn isiiil /hot iinilapilap imotslislijiatslapyali liamilyali K^ liluot/ iiiawlnit... a\vliiit ski/ atiiaiiga... atnnini swi nyatz nyntsh nyatz moon hiillya Inithlya luilhiHli slur Iiannisc ... khipwataie liuininashish Imtshar /ire awa aawo ahiiuh. ii'fiiei- alia alia aha / iiyati; nyat nyat inyatz. l/ioii inaiitz iiiantz niantz. /le pepa habiiisk pu one sottn sin Jiiiii two Iiavika liavik liawuk (h'ce lianioko... liamuk haimik four pinepapa. cliapop cliapop five serapa ... serap scrap sice siiita huinlnik seven vika jiatlikaie eifjfit mnka cliipliuk 7iiiie pai hniniiiamiik ten arapa saiihuk AI»l»i;\l»A AMI CMUltKiMNriA. :(*.ia W.' I t'ilVC Calit Di'iiia with till' iriiiiii'k that in I.U.I \\\ii s Lit cia- '//' soi'iiis, wiinl (Jahriit fiinii nl' \(', (»r .Mi)|i;ivi I anil slii'wii III iiil"('ri'('il. tn 1m' (JordMAM'nl'A. ipntalii;. HiiicIiHyHixliutMli tiicc of the Aiiii'iicaii Ali(iri;^iiial l,aii;;iia;;t'.s Mr. |5artlrtt'.s vuca- liularics lor ( 'alilninia lir.ir tlic rnlJuwiiiL;' tillrs. 1. |)ii'j;iiuii ur Ctiiiii'^ I'i, •J. Kcclii, '.S. San Luis ( Hiispo, 4. iriiaiia .'). Tcliaiiia (). (Jttlu/ ) IVuiii tlic iliaiiiam! of tiic Hfi'iainciit, 7. Noana H. I )ij;'j;('r.s il. 1 )i;;-j;i'fH of Napa X'allcy. 10. .Makaw of l'|»[»('r Califnrnia. S('^^ ('alifnrtn'uiis. Tlicrc is also a I'Iros vocaliulary for tlii^ parts almiit Ml I'aso: also a notic't! (uudcr tju^ woidj that the Mi rtd.NivS liiiliaus Kpcak !i (HiiU'ft of the Solcdail. Old Cdlifin'iiiii. — Ah a jjoucral rule, translations of tlio I'ati-r Kostcr show ditVcrciu'c rather than liki'iics.s: in other words, as a j;eneral rule, rude lanj;ua;;es ai'o more alike than then Pater Nosters make them, 'j'lie reasons for this lie in the altstract nature of many of the ideas which it is necessary to (>.\press; hut for the expression wheri'of tli(^ mor(! harliarons fornus of speech are in- sufficient. This creates the necessity for circundocntions and other ex- |tedients. In no part of tlu^ world is this more manif"st than in Old California; a district for Avhich our tlxln are' of the scan- tiest. I think, liow(>ver, that they are suflicient to shew that the. Northern forms of speech, at least, are Yuma. KNCfMsu. O. Calii-iihnian. Vr>fA. {Iiuino) tam:i e|)ats viiin (iiumo III nil [V iintiitnn UHllll wiKttu .seeiiyjick. vvfikiie siinax Iiuat^in 8oen. child wlianii ]iai!pit. wakim fullter ihaiTi lotlmiociil. kakka niqiiioclio. ketieda nilc. kanainbH viotlivr iiada tile. aon uisailiain ... .,... liomaio. sister kenassa amyiick. head agopj)! estar. e//e aribikfi ayon. toiujue inahela ipiiili/(i — Mohave. hand ...., nagaiia sitli'l 301 ADUKNDA AM) COKKKlKNDA. l'',N(!I.I.Sll. N. ('Al.lKi)lf.NIAN. Vl.MA. fiiiit .•i^nii)';'.|i/i littiMH^lyay. .s7i'// (imlii ^ (iiiimai/ti — Mithavc, ctiiilt iinicl omul — Cwlinii. (iminfirdir — Mo/iiivl'. it'dtcr Icdiiiil alid — Oirf/iiiio, tt/i/ia — Mdliiivc. I'lif .'.si Iioiise — CuiuiiiuricojHi. SHU ibv) ayaXr, tlujl ibo ii()ii);isii|). moon ji'oiiinia liiillya. ^aiieliinujeic The Pima (jruu/t. — ( )ii(' of ^[r. IJiirtlctt's >'oe;i1)ul.iru'.s is ut' tlic Ojiiit.i tunu of spccfli. (Lud/riij.) Tcqidnui, according to the. sainci authority Is another naiiic for the .same hnigiiayc: in which there; \r a vocahnhiry l>y Xatal JiOUihar(h»; Mc^xico. 1702, as well as an Arte tie la Lcikjuh Trqiiiinu, vidijiirmciilc llammla Opaln. A Vocahnlario dc las Lcinjuas Pima, Einlrrc , // Sen's is said, Ijy 1)(^ tSoHza, to liave heen written hy Fr. Adanio Ciilo a Jesuit missionary in (-alifornia. — Ditto — v. J'i.ma. Ivvceptioiis, which the ])resent Avriter overlooked, are taken in the ]\Iithri(hites to the .statement that tlu' Ojjata and Kudevc Pater-iiosters represent the ]'ima Proper. They aj.'jree with a third lan_:;'uaj:,e from the Pinm country --hut this is not, neces- sarily, the I'ima. Hence, what applies to the Pimerian may or may not apj)ly to the Pima Proper. N(!vertheless, the Pima l)eloufi,s to the same class — heinsi', apparently, more esjtecially akin to the Tarahumara. 1 have only l)efore me the following Tarahumara words (/. e. the specimens in the Jlithridates) through which the comparison can be maih'. They give, however, thus much in way of likeness and dif- ferenco. Enomhu. jiKin woman wife ci/e .... tillf/Ui- hair . find 'I'AliAHlMAUA. I'lMA. rolioju orter. tohoju clieiMirt. ...! hutli. imiki <)(! Olive. Iiahri. upi oo-if. mouk. oiipcwc. head inonlu imsiUi teuila lu^iii'ii. (juitsliila moll. ptiiiitk. tala tot.'iylit //»■(' iiaiUi talii. nun lii'u'n liiha, tdsili. AI)I»I:NI).\ AM) CUiaiKiHNDA. 395 l^NdLISIl. 'rAKAIir.MAIJA. I'uiA. iiiuuii inallsdcii mitltsii. iiKissar. 1 11«|10 illlflU. liuo (judca voUii. (H'li kmik. iirii'S Is of tlic iuiotlicr uMiiic ilary Ity X;it:il mjua Trqniina, Sen's is said, > Ciilo a Jesuit [, arc. taken in . and Kudev(! aj,';ree witii a, is not, necoH- mcrian may or class — beinir, a. I have only e specimens in can be made, uess and dif- linscliiiiann connects the Pima with the 'l\'|»ei>uana. Another complication. — In 'I'nrner's Extract from a AIS. acconnt of the Indians of tlu; Xo.tlu'rn J'rovinces of New Sjiaiu J lind that < )pa (OpataV) is another name for the (!ocomarico|>as irluisc liititjtuKjc, is llittl (if llic Yuma. 'JMiis is trnc enouj^'h — hnt is the Opata more Vnma than the text (which connects it with the llia- (|iii A:c.) makes itV The /'iin(( , Iluiqui, Tuhtir, Tuniliuuinni , (t/iil Cora as a class.— An exception to the text is indicated l)y the footnote of l>aj;'e 3bl. 'I'he ,Mitliridates connects th(> ('ora anil 'l^irahnmara with tlu^ Astek and with each otlier. The Astek elements of tlu; lliaipii, as indicated l>y iJihas are especially alluded to. So are the Tara- hiunara aflinities of the ()])ata. All this is doin|^' as nnich in the ay of classification as is done hy the present author — as much M or more As much, or more, too is done by liuschmann; who out of the Cora, 'J'aralnunara, 'repeguana and Cahita (the latter a re])re- sentation of the section to which the Yaqui helonj^'s) makes his Soiaira Class — Sotwrisclicr S])rachslamin. As a somewhat abnormal nuMuber of this he admits the I'ima. Of the (iuazave there is a M8. Aiie by 1*. Fernando Villa- r m )ane That the dala foi the Tepeguana are better than the text fikes them has already been suggested, liuschmanu has used materials unknown to tlu^ present writer. 8ee Ludwig in voc. TcpcguaiK Piriiula and Tarasca. The stateiiu'ut that there is a I'irinda graunnar is inaccurate. There is one of the Tarasca; to which the ri^ader is referred. \\\\[ this is not all. Under the title IMkin'da in Ludwig we lind that l)e Souza says of Fr. Juan Ih-vvo, the- .-uithor of a grammar of the Lengua Tarasca " fnc tnacslro perilissiniu ilc la lengua Piiinda Itaniada Tarasca." '.rids makes the two languages nuich nu)re alike than the present paper makes them. The present paju-r, however, rests on the I'ater-nosters. How inconclusive they are has already been indicated. [P The foUoAving table , the result of a very linuted collation gives some ndscellaneous al'linities for the ( )tomi. 396 ADDKNDA AM> COKRIOKNDA. Kiiy'isli mail. Otomi niiniifhe. I\Iay;v iS:c nmic. Padiica wennh, Hnulish woman. Otomi daii.vii. Maya aluu=^wife. Knfjlisfi woman. (Jtoini W.SM. TalatuJ essce, Eiujlish liand. Otomi i/c. Talatui iku. Englinh foot. Otomi qua. Maya&c oc. English blood. Otomi '/fii. Maya iSic kik. KiijiUsh liair. Otomi si. S. Miguel te asa-klio Enf/lisfi ear. Otomi fjii. S, Miguel tenl-klii-lo. English tooth. Otomi tsi. Attacapa ods. English head. Otomi na. Sekumne o>io:=^httir. Englisli fire. Otomi t'Jhi. Pnjune ciu English moon. Otomi tzonn. Kenay ssin:=^star, English stone. Otomi do. Curaanch tuovicpee. English winter. Otomi tzaa. Cumanch visa inte. S. Gabriel ... otso. English H.sli. Otomi hua. Mayi< &c Cfiy. English bird. Otomi ttzinlzg. Maya &c Ichitch. English egg. Otomi 7nado. Poconchi molo. English lake. Otomi mohc. Pima vo. English •''ua. Otomi miinthe. U. Sac.&c. ... muni = water. English son. Otomi tsi. ti. halsi. iso. Natchez tsitsce=: child. English meat. Otomi nhihuni. ngoe= flesh. Mexican 7iaca(l = (lcs/i. English eat. Otomi tsfi. Talatui tsaniak. Engli.'.h good. Otomi nianho. Sekumne wenne. English rabbit. Otomi qlnta. lluasteca cog. English snake. Otomi qqcna. Maya can. English yes. Otomi ha. Cumanch jtaa. English three. Otomi hiu. Mexican yeg . lluasteca okh. ADDENDA AND COItllHlKNDA. :u)7 The other two arc as follows. The Olomi with the lawjiuxjes Etujlish nican. Otoini nnnijche. Kuanchua ... nan. Canton nam. Tonkin nam. EiiylLsli woman. Otomi nitsu. nsic. Kuanchua ... niu. Canton niu. Tonkin nu. English son. Otonii htitni. iso. Kuanchua ... dsu. Cantnn ilzi. Mian sa. Maplu pos.ia. Play ripo.'io. naptillur. Passuko posufio. FmjUsIi hand. Otonii ye. Siuanlo Ue. (Jochiii Cliina «« : -arm. Knglish foot. Otomi ijua. Pey 'ha=^lc, hliKjUsh foot. Maya tine, nc, Cliuancliiia... kio. ('anton koii. Moitay r/io. Emjiis/i sun. Maya /./". ('olann koni. Moan knufi. Teiya knwcm. TeiliMig k/ni(jwi. ]'ey kanjjuan. Etiijlisli Maya (JhuaiH liii.i... Kiujlish Maya Mean Miairma EtujUsh ... Maya Miamma English Maya Maplu Pa.ssuko .... Kuglisli Maya Tonkin Englisli . Maya . Tonkin. Plav .... English . Maya.... Tonkin. Ei)(/lis/i ... Maya Tonkin... English Maya , Pev ..., moon. .'/'"'• star. rk. kic. kgi. water. ha. ga. rain. vhaac. Ichdlvhnny. Iftlcliu. small. vwhcn. moil . oat. Iiauiil. an. aiig. bird, chcchilrli. (cfiini. li.sh Ctl. kn. {jreat, no/t. via. The Aeoina. — Two vocabnlario.s fvoin a tvibo from tlio I'uclilo of »Saii l)oiniiif;;o, calling tlH'in.scIvo.s Kiwonii, and a third of the Cocliitciui dial(>ct, collected iiy Wlii|»pi(', are compared, hy Turner, with the Acoma , of which they are dialects. TnriKM' proj>ose.s the names Keves for the group. IJusclimann, writiii;;" ADDIONDA .\NI> COUltHI KXDA. aun 110. r rti niassf. II. er. •c. ic/taiiy. at. m. ■Itilch. iit Prom tlio, riioblo fl a tliivd of tlio coinimrod , Ity nlccts. 'runuM luniiim, writing iiftor liim , says, "I namo this form of spoocli Ourra' — '• icli iwniic (lies Idiom Qucrd." Tlio notice of the "outward sii^iis" is not so clear as it should be. It means that two of tlie lanj^iinges, the Tatts and Zuui, nui into polysyllabic forms — probably (indeed almost certainly) from composition or iuHexion; whereas the 'resu([ue (which is placed in rnnlrnst with the Zuui) has almost a mono- syllabic appearance. This ph(Miomenon a])i)ears elsewhere; r. y. in the Attacajia, as comjiared with the tony'ues of its neighltour- ]u)od. Upon the whole, the Zuni seems to be nn)st aberrant of the grouj) — saving the l\lo(|ui, which has decided I'adnca affnii- ties. They are all, however, nmtnally unintelligible; though the ditt'erences between them may easily be over-valued. Enomsh. A(;nM.V. 7ii/in lialitratsc woHiaii culm /mil' lialitratiii .. he(/>l luislikaiiie /'are liowawinni ei/c lioonainc... nose ouisuine ... moulh onicaiii Cociuni.Mi:. KiwiiMi. liaclitlio liatslitlio. c'nyoni ciiyauwi. hatro. naslilie. skeoowa. sliaaiia. wiesliiii. chiaca. loiiyue watchlmntni uatsliin. one .. two .. three four five .. six .. seven eii. iHiiua. isk i/lit nine ten .. kiioiiii 'tiiomi. i tsliabi. cliaiii kiatiH kiana. tama.. ., taonia. cliistli. iisa , niaiuuiia maicliana. c'ocoiiiisiiia. COCIllMslli niaeco niaioco. 'tkatz calitz. Texas. —p. 101. 'Ini and Tachi are expressly stated to be (!addo, &c. as it is from the name of the; last that the word Tents IS (lerive( U^( — The name T'(/u (other than native) of the po])ulation which calls itself Kiwomi. Word for Avord, this may (or may not) be 'Vnos. It is only necessary to remendter the com])lication here indicated. The exact tribes which gav(^ the name to Texas has yet to be determin(Hl. The mishitn. Allied to one another the Kechis and Wacos (lluecos) are, also, allied to tlie Witslnta. — Src Turnc>\ p. 68. Kx(iLlSl[. Mftn woman ... KlCIIAI. lIl'K* cainqiiaiioquts tixlukitz. I'lu'ijnoike falilicii (juitatso. it.seii.so . i.tskicstacat. i.slilio.steatz. itscot id'coli 400 ADDKNDA AM) OOUItlUKN'DA. Knolisu. KlCIlAI, HlECO eftr atikoruso (jnideeco ort / ei/e kidik. nose. clmscuriU) tisk. inoulh ... liukiniiik alicok. tunyue ... liiil.tok liotz. tooth jithueslio alitk. luind iclifshene ishk'ti. fool usinic OS. fire yeconieto kiokoli hat/ water kitsali. o)ie firishco chcos two {ihoslio wit/ lliree taliwitlico tow. I'our kitlinucote tah(iuit/,. /'we xs'toweo ishquitz. ]via*ct. Tliey are, however, but iiji])erfectly known. In Gallatin's first paper — the paper of the Archaiologla Ameri- cana — there is a Caddo vocabulary and a Pawni vocabulary ; and all that be said of tliem is that they are a little more like each other, than they arc to the renmining specimens. When the paper under notice was published the liiccaree was wholly unknown. But the Uiccaree, wlien known, was sliewn to be more PaAvni than aught else. This made the l^awni a kind of nucleus for a class. IP Somewhat Liter the Caddo confederacy in Texas took pro- minence, and the Caddo became a nucleus also. The true explanation of this lies in tlie highly probably fact tnat both the Caddo and I'aAvni are nunnbers of one and the same class. At the same tinu', I am ([uite prej)ared to find that tlie Witsliita (thongli compared with the Caddo by myself) is more ]iarticularly I'aAvni. IMiat the nearest congeners of the Caddf) and ]'; \v;ji class were the members of the Irocpiois, Woccoon, Chorokce, and AUDKXDA AX1» COlUlHiKNUA. 401 II tlio present n the stvengtli to be Cndtlo, group is suj;- tnble (p. 70), and l^auiiis, •greater tluiu however, but ob)gla Auieri- i vocabulary ; tUe more like us. lliccaroo was Avas sliewu to wni a kind of xas took pro- probably fact and tlie sauu> Hud tliat tlie 's(df) is more 1 r. vvui class urokce, aud Chocta grou]) I believed at an early period of luy investigations; at a time (so to say) IxI'ore the Jiiccarees, aud the Califor- niau pf»pulatious were invented. If this doctrine wore trtie, the Caddo (Pawui) affinities Avould run eastwards. 'IMiey may do this, and run westwards also. That they run eastwards I still b(dieve. But 1 have also secMi (Jaddo and I'awui affinities in California, 'j'lie (?addo nunu'ral one = vliistc ; in Secumne aud Cushna ivihic , wiktcm. Again the (Jaddo and Kichie for fviilrr ■ ~ ko/io, kioksli. ^leanwhile kik is a true Mo<|U(duniue form. This I get from a most cursory inspection; or rather from memory. Upon the principle that truth comes out of error more easily than confusion I give the folloAving notice of the distribution or Avant of distribution of th(^ numerous Texian tribes. 1. *Coshattas — Unknown. 2. Towiach — Tawni (V). 3. Lipan — Athabaskan (V). 4. *Alish, or Eyish — Caddo (V). 5. *Acossesaw — UnknoAvn. 6. Navaosos - NaA'ahosC?). 7. *Mayes — Attacapa (V). 8. *Cances — UnknoAvu. 9. Toncahuas — Are these the TonkaAvays , amounting, accord- ing to Stem, to 1152 souls V If so , a specimen of their language shotild be obtained. Again — arc they the 'i^mcardsV Are they the Tunicas? If so, they may speak Choctah. 10. Tuhuktukis — xVre these the Topofkis, amounting to 200 soixlsV If so a specimen of their language, lUt uominr , is attain- able. 11. Unatac[uasi or Andarcos — They ann)iint, according to Stem, to 202 souls. No vocabulary, co nomine, knoAvn. Capable of being obtained. 12. Mascovie — UnknoAvn. 13. LiAvani or loni — Caddo? Amount to 113 souls. Speci- men of language, eo nomine, capable of being ol)tained. 14. AVaco — - AVico? — PaAvni. 15. *Avoyelle — UnknoAvn. 16. 17. AVashit'i — Kicho — Pawni. ]H. *Xaramene — UnknoAvn. 19. *Caicache — UnknoAVU. 20. *Iiidias — UnknoAvn. 21. Caddo — Caddo. 22. Attacapa — Attacapa. 23. Adahi — Adahi. 24. Cok(; — Carackahua. Carankahua — Attacapa (?). 2G 402 AIj1>I:M^V A\I» COKltKiF.NDA. 26. Towacano — Niiiiil»rrin{i; 141 nouIs. Is tliis Towiach? •27. Hitclii - Kiel. i (y). •iH. *N'i\ii(hik(). < '19. *NMba(lacli('s. i ("add.. (V) M). •''Vata.ssi. ai. *>iaf('liitoclios, H2. *Naco<;(l(icli('s.^ Adalii (?) \ \VA. Kcycs. 'I'liesc last may bolong' as luucli to Louisiana as to 'I'cxas — as, iiulccd , may some of tlic others. 'JMiose marked * arc apj)areutly extinct. At any rate, they are not found in any et' the recent notices. Finally, jMr lUirnett mentions the San J*edro Indians. The previous list sheAvs that the olditeration of tlu^ ori};inal trihes of Texas has been very j;reat. It shews us this at the first view. lUit a little reflection tells us something more. Like Kaii/.as and Nebraska, Texas seems to have scarcely any languages that is peculiar to itself; in this respect standing in strong contrast to Calil'ornia. The Caddo b(dongs to the frontier. The Pawni forms of speech occur elsewhere. The Adahi is ])ro- baly as much the property of Louisiana as of Texas. The Cu- manch, ( -liocta &c. are decidedly i'.itrusive. The nearest ajipn acli to a true I exian torm ot sjieccli is the Attaca}>a. der it is isolated. The Adahi, is has, at least the foUowing affinities. No won- Kiifjlisli iii.'iii. Adnlii Iitnisiiu). Otto w(i/is/i(u'(/ne. Oiioiulafi^o ... ciscliinulv. Abenaki s('eininhc=^vir. ,, iii('Ji(in1)e:=ilioino. EiKjIis/i wmnati. Ax /mu/oki/i. Ilinois irkoc. i\'atiticok(! ... arf/uti/tii/i/c. ] )ela\varc okliqiicli. Algoiikin &c st/naii'. 'i'acMilli vluicii. E))(jlislt j;ii'l. Atlalii (pinativinlurk. Cliilvkasaw .. lake. Clioutali villii Ink. Caddo Imtluilcsseh. < )neida cniildZdi. Jlicniai.' epidek. Eiu/Hsli child. Adalii fnl/a/ieni/iq. ,, liiUnluivhi'=-lio]/. Om.'iliJiw sliiiigii .v/nn/j//. Otto clifechinjid. Qtiappa slirljfinkii. K)HjUsh father. Adalii kriranick. Clietimaclia. . kinct/liic. Cliikkasaw ... unki/. Olioetali nuiikke. Eiiij!is/i mother. Adalii (inutnir. Caddo chncli. iSiou.x enah, cchong. ADDKNDA AND f'OKUKiKN'MA. 403 i) TowiacliV I as to 'I'cxas — >o iiiarkcd * arc found ill any of 1 of tlio ori^iiiMl IS tliis at the iirst avo scarcely any ipcct staudiiij;- in ;'s to the frontier, ho, Adalii is |»ro- IVxas. Tlio Cii- ncarost ajipro- ica]»;i. No woii- Tuflcnror.'i out. WyHndot anclteh. Kenny tiuiui. lOskinio (iiiiaiiKt. Eiijjlisli Inisband. Adalii hascliinu.* Cli(.'timac'l.;i hic/ic/i/isr. Wincl»ii<;<> I'fkuiKili. Tfunilli fici. Tcliiiktclii idka. Kngllsit wife. Adfilii i/uo(/ieki>i(ik. ,, i(/i/ai. Minetaro eijiut/fjai. Winobafj^o ceneek. Uiuiida .'/""/7. Kiifjii.sh brother. Adahi f/nsiug. .Salish asinltali Ottawa sdi/in ---elder. Ojibbeway usi/ (dciiia. Knyliah liead. Adahi locliitke. Caddo da(hunke(t^=: face. ,, dokimdsa. E>i(/lis/i hair. Adalii calaluck. (Jhippewyan .... lliicijali. Kenay sziajo. Miami kcclitii/efi=^f(icc. Knijlish face. Adahi tniiiatk, Chctimach;i kanekcln. Attaeapa iune. Eskimo keniuk. English ear, Adahi cahil. (.'horokee (jide. Passamaquoddy chiilksee. Englixli nose. Adahi irccoocuf. Moiitaug cochiji/. IMicmac uchichun. Eiifflish beard. Adalii lasoral. Attaeapa taesh = hnir. NacIiL'/. ptsitmniji'—^ hair. (Mictiinachi cliutlie. Enijlish arm. Adalii ivalnd. Taciilli old. Chippcwyaii ... Imr. Enfjlisn nails. Addlii sic/csa/tiiscfi. Catawba C( ks///jcctih= hinid. Natchez isjtehse- ■hanil. KiKjIinh belly. Adahi noei/ovk. Wincbago.... in chahlndi I'lskimo ueii/iik. Enijlish lef,'. Adahi /ihosiick — - lei/. Chetimach;! siinknudie- ^ fed. ,, saiikiilii'- tues. t, sun =- leg. Osajro siiijuugli. Vaiuton hitu. Otto ]ii,i). Pawnee iishoiiz =find. Sionx sec, sech(di=^ do. Nottoway . . sftseeke^ ■ do. Dacota seeliuknsa^~tucs. Nottoway seckc =^ do. English mouth. Adahi waeatchoUik. Chetimaeha iha. Attaeapa kail. Caddo ibinchwatehu. Natchez heclie. ]\[oliawk wuclisacarlunt. Seneca wuchsagidud. Sack and Fox .. wektonch. Mohican otouii. English tongue. Adahi Icnttunl. Chetimaeha httcne. Uche coolinc(di. (■hoctah issoonlush. Kni.stetianx olni/enee. Ojibbeway utinnani. Ottawa tcnunian. 2G* 401 ADDliNUA AM) <'(>i;KIi ii:\f»A. i, ■ \ ■ I'liijilish li.'iiid. Adalii srciil. , _ sickstipusra-r.utii/s, f'lioi'tali .s/iii/ifi(i~-/iis itriu. CliilikasHw nhiililidli-tlit. .Miisk();,''e y(ik})ir. lilt. KiMiHv skoiia. At.tacdiui iiish(i(jji-=lii)(icvs. ( Mnaliaw s/it/(/iii. Osa^c nIukjiiIi. Mdliawk sliiikc. Yaiicton sltiil;irjlis/i foet. Adalii iKirtiL Micmac uliknat. Miami kata/t. TuLMilli ura. (Jliippowvaii ... cit/i. Iliiiois /lickn/ild^^h'i/, Delaware ivikliudt^^do. Massacliiisetis inulikoul-^^du. Ojibbeway ok(ti=\ A\i' ('<>i!im<;i:nii v. I Of) hreiid. 1 1 /< /ill pin. lnivlieiKil rlii'iiii. sky. f/anici,'. /dniii/iqji:. siinimer. wri't.smk . wdiUw. iiro. iitniij. niiko. iijiiitrk. fkiink. unntik. uioiinltiiii. tuldlil. c/tclt. stoiio, rod. cksckfi . ficcceko. o/ik. mtiize. ocnsiick. Iiokko. (lay. vesUirli. nillult. nilluvk. iiillok. iiutumn. huslnlncclsHck. Iius/Unlape. ImHtilloinnna. husinla:^:^ winter. bird'. iras/uiiiy. Iiiislie. nnslikamon. wiskilullii. 'i'oose. nickkuicktt. iNipic/ic. nicuk. nickak. knt/k. iici'uke. Kiii/!i\/i (liiclc. Adfilii nlnnk. lixkiiiio ciri/rk. E»fjlis/i lisli. Adniii tiesiif. Cherokee atsidili. Ettijlisli tree. Adnlii... liuKiik. Drtcota Isc/k/iij. lliuois tiiiiiKtiw. Miiiini l(iHiinvh:^^iiacota hiijin'dshUi. Y'auctoii ii'iishlui. KiiiiHsli 1. Adalii nnssicnn. Cherokee nnski. Kni/lis/i kill. Adiilii i/i)cick. Caddo i/iikni/. Catawlia ccknuii/. /un/lis/i two. Adalii nds.s. Aly^oiikiii, vS:c. ... nis, ncss , nccs. Mcxico-C.itiitcnuthi, — 'V\u' details of tlio lMnxin) iiind (fuatcmabi tliat aro iicitluM- ^Icxieaii Proper (Astek) or ^faya are difliiult. Availliifj; myself of the inforiiiatioii afVordcMJ liy my friend }\v. Squier, and the hililioyrapliieal leaniiii}^ of Ludwi}^-, U .".Hi inclined to believe 1. That all the following forms of speech are ^laya ; viz. IChiajia, 'JV.endal (Oeldal) , (Miorti, Mam, I'ocoman (I'oconchi), I'opulnca, (Quiche, Kachiqnel , /ntnj^il (Vutukil), Iluastera. 2. 'J'hat the Zoqne, Utlateca, and Lacondona may or may not |lio iMaya, 3. That the Totanaca; and 4. The Mixteca arc other than Maya. 5. That, if the statement of llervas he correct, the Zajioteca, Itlic Mazateca, the (/hinansteca, and the .Mixe are in the same, Itatej^ory. The Tlapancka according to llmnholdt is a peculiar hmguage. I — Liulwig in voc. I have done, lunvevci', little or nothing, in the way of first hand I Work with the languages to the South of Sinaloa and the West <|f Texas. I therefore leave them — leave them with a reference to LudAvig's valuable 13ibliotheca Glottica, for a correction of my statement respecting the non-existence of any Indian forms of speech in New Grencada. The notices under v. v. An'DAQUIes, I I 400 .\IM»I;M>.\ AM> ( i»|;UHii;M»A. (JocuNitKts, ('•.Ki:i:(ii'A.ii;8, (Ji A(.>ri;s, In(;a\<»s, will slicw lliat tlii> is I'mt tVoiu lit'iiiy,' tlic cMSf. 'I'll P • rt'sciit piipcr liiis "uiir over so l"M> Imt-m ;i |)oi'tii)ii III' Noitli Aiiicrii'ii tliiit it is a jiity imt ti» ;;•(» ovci' tlu' rcniMiiidi'r. Tlic ('tliiiol(ij;;y (if the ('iinjulii, iiiiil the I'.ritisli |i(»ss('ssioiis akin to ( 'aiiada iMintaiiis little wliicli is iici'lu'r I'iskiniK (ir .\li:nii|f the Sioux idass the Uritish possessions shew a saiii]de. Thr lied l\iver district is Assiiudioiii ; the Assinehojn.s heiiij^' Sioux. So are a f'-w other liritish trilies. I' poll the Avliole, however, live well -known families ;;i\-c lis that Indoii!;' to Uritish ^Vinerica to tli(( lOast of the I luckv Moiintains. As th(^ jiresent jiaper is less upon the ^\l;;oiikiii, Sioux and like classes than upon the ilistriluition of iaiiyiiai^cs over the ditVereiit areas of North America this is as iiiucli as iici'd he said upon the suliject. For the Northern two-thirds of the I'nited States, KksI itf Ihr Mississ//tj)i,' {\\(' same rule applies. The Siken-up hy Algonkin encroachments, or whether tlic Iroquois &c. have been pi'ojected into the Alj-'onkin area fvoiii the, South, or, whethen t'ire vrrsa, the Tuscaroras are to bo consi-| deved as offsets from the iecimens. In the way of external evidence 1 go no further than the Mithridates, and the Arclneologla. With the exception of the AVoccons th(> Catawha and a few words from the Tinniacana, the Mithridates, gives no s]»ecinH'ns — save and except those of the ('hoctah, ('h(>rokees, and ('hikkasah. These two last it looks upon as the representative languages and calls them ;1/o/y///rt// from Mohile. Hence, the (juestion which was (ther(; or tlicvcB put in 'I'exas is, iniitnlis iniiliini/is, put in Florida. What languages le C^atawha, audj e IMississijipi. paralhd, and tlic| md Louisiana, rahle. The pint I added) the Sioux are jNIohilianV What other than Alohiliau V The Woccons are: either only or chieHy known througli a work (if Jjawson's. 'I'hey were conterminous with the Algonkin I'amti- coughs (intrusive?), and the ( "herokees. 'i'he (^'itaAvha lay to tlu^ south of the Woccon. Their congeners are said to he 1. The Watarce : 40S ADDENDA AND ('((KRIOKNDA. 2. The Eono — C'oinjjavP this name with the Texian Iiii; 3. 'J'hc fMiowiih, or Chowan; 4. ^riio ('on^-aree; a. "^rhe Nachee — Compare witli Natchez; word for word ; G. The Vamassee ; 7. The (!o(>sah — Compare (word for Avord) Coosada, and Co.shatta. In the Sonth lay the Tinuiacana — of which a few words heyond the numerals arc given. In West Fhirida and Alabama, the evidence (I still follow tlio Mithridates) of Dr. Pratz scarcely coincides witli that of the ac- count of Alvaz Nunez de Vaca. 'I'his runs thus. In the island of Malhado were spoken languages of 1. The Caoques; 2. The' Han. On the coast — 3. The Choruico — Cherokee? 4. The Doguenes. Q. The IMendica. 6. The Quevenes. 7. The JMariames. H. The Gualciones. 9. The Yguaces. 10. The Atayos — AdahiV This seems to liave been a native name — ^^ die sick Alaijos ?ietincH." 11. The Acubadaos. 12. The (jjuitoles. 13. The Avavares — Avoyelles? 14. I'he Muliacone. 15. The Cutalchiche. 16. The Susola. 17. The Como. 18. The (!amole. Of migrants from the East to the West side of the Mississippi, the Mithridates gives — 1. The Pacana, conterminous with the Attacapas. 2. The Pascagula. 3. The Biluxi. 4. The Appalache. The Tacnsa are stated to be a branch of the Natchez. The Caouitas are, perhaps, word for word the Conchattas; also the Coosa, Coosada, Coshatta. The Stincards are, Avord for word, the Tancards = Tiincas^= Tunic. 'S. Dr. Hibley gives us Chclimarha as a name; along with speci- ADUKNDA ANI> (DKUKiKXDA. 400 iiKMis of tlic Chctiinaelia, Uclie, Natclicz, Atlalii, and Attacnpa as laiij^nagTs. Coosada, and e been a native rds = Tuficas=^ ong with speci- Word for word, Che It mar ha seems to Chrcimcca ; Apitdusu, Jpalach; Bilu.vi (pcu-liaps the same); Pascagoula ^ MuscoguUje. How, however, did Chiehimcca get so far westwards':* We are scarcely, in the condition to specnhate nmch con- cerning details of the kind. It is snfticient to repeat the notice that the native hmgnages of the parts in question are in a frag mentary condition; the llchc being the chief representative of them. Whether it were Savaficnc*, or not, is uncertain. It is, certainly, uof SliaAvanno, or Shawno, /. e. Algonkin, On the con- trary it is, as is to be expected, from the encroachments and dis- placements of its neighbourhood a very isolatetl language — not, however without miscellaneous affinities — inter alia the followinff. English sky. Uclie haipoiing. Cliiccasaw ... uhhah. Catawba wahpeeh. Eiifjliith d iiy . I'clie iickkah. Attiicajia ((7^/. Cherokee ikah. Mnskoje hi!iia(jU)/=:^- light. Clierokee eguh^^do. Catawba heakuh=^(lu. Delaware ... n>akheii = il(). Narrag^ wequid-:::^du. Mapach do = rlo. English summer. llche wailce. Adaize weelsuck. English winter. I'che wishluh. Natchez kwishitseUtkop. Cliiecasaw ... huslolah. ISeneca ovshut. I'jiglish wind. Uche ahwiinuh. Caddo houeto. Muskoje holulleye. English raiu. Uche chanh. Clietimaclia.. kni/a. Attacapa caucau. C.'id'lo rnwiohe. English river. Uclie Uiuh. Salish saiiitk. Catawba eesauh. English tree. Uche ijiih. Caddo iiako. Attacape k'/gg- Catawba jiup. Quappa gon. KsquimaTix... keiyu = wni)d. Yaiicton chfi = ivood. Catawba gag = oak. English leaf. Uche gahsuh. Muskoghe ... iltohise = hair of tree = itta tree. Cliiecasaw ... hoshsha. Cheetah itte hishe. English deer. Uche wagnng. Adalii wukhine. Cherokee ahiehih. English bear. Uche ptsaka. Natchez Isukuhp. English bird. Uche psenna. Caddo hinviit. Tiiscar tcheenuh. Ilinois pineusen. * More languages than one arc thus named. See p. 375 for a Savaneric in Veragua. 410 ai>i»i;m»a and roijiuciKNiiA. Ottjiwa heniuiiscwiiy. Ojihliwji piunisi. Enfj'isli ti-li. I'elie pol^fiixi. C'iuUlr) hiilla. ilirietari hou. Sucli oiir skctfli of tlio. details. Tlicy f^ivc lis www affinities than the, current statements concerninj;' the (jlossarial dirt'erences between tlie languages ttf tlio New World suj^'j^est. It is also he added that tlioy scarcely conlirni the equally common doctrine rcspectinj^" their (jruwmnlical likeness. iJoing this, they encourage criticism, and invite research. 'J'here is a considerable amount of nftinity: but it is often of that miscellaneous character which battles rather than promotes dassihcation. 'l'her(^ is a considerable amount of aflinity ; but it does not, always, shew its(df on the surface. I will give an instance. One of the iirst series of words to Avhicli philologu«\s wdio ha\e only vocabularies to deal -with have recourse, contains the numerals ; which are, in many cases, the first of words that the philological collector makes it his business to bring honu' with him from rude iMumtries. So generally is this case that it may safely be said that if we are without the inunerals of a language we are, in nine cases out of ten, without any sample at all of it. Their value as sam])les for philological pm-poses has been noticed in more than one paper of the present writer's her(i and elsewhere^; their value in the way of materials for a history of Arithmetic being evident — evidently high. V>\\t the ordinary way in which the comparisons are made be- tween the numerals gives us, very often, little or notliing hut broad ditt'erences and strong contrasts. Take for instance the following tabhis. English. Eskimo. Ai.ki'iian. Kamskahai.k. one atjinu'U nttakon kcnnnis. livo nialgok iiUuk nittium. three piiiajut kjinkini tslmsliqiiat, I'oiie istainat Iliitsliin tsliaslicha. five tatliinat sshang kooiiidas. No wonder that the tongues thus represented seem unlike. Hut let us go farther — in the first place reniendjering that, in most cases, it is only as far as /?iv' that the ruder languages have distinct nunu>rals ; in other Avords that from six onwards they count upon the same principle as W do after ten, i. c. they join together some two, »n' more, of the previous numerals ; even as we, by adding seven and (ni^ make sciH'ti-lecn. The exact details, of course, difl'er; the general principle, however, is the same viz.: that after jive the mnnerals become, more or less, compound, just as, with us, they become so after Icn. AKDI'.NUA AM) ('()K1!I(J KNDA. 4lt AVitli this prclimiuary obscrv.-ition U-t us ask wliat will ho thn . Kaiiiskadahr for seven avIkmi nillaiiu = Iwo, and JiHindas = five. Tho ansAvor is oitlier nitldmi-kumilas or ktiDithts-nillanu. Hut tlio Kamskadalc lui|)poiis to liavc a separate word for m", viz. Idelntux. What theuV The word for ftt ven may he one of two thinj^'s it may either ==■ G + I, or j + -• The former heiiig the case, and kemmis = onc^ tlic Kamskadale for neven slioidd he either Icemmis- /nl/ciKts or kilkoas-heininis. Hut it is ueitlier one nor the other. It is ittakh-lcmi. Now as ciylil ■=■ Islink-lenu Ave kuoAv this Avord to he compound. Hut Avliat are its elements V AVe fail to tind them amongst the simpler Avords expressiA'o of one, /wv», three, four, five. We fail to find them amongst these if Ave look to the Kamskadale only — not, hoAvcA'er, if Ave go farther. The Aleutian for one :=^ (tlldknn ; the Aleutian for six zn^ dltu-on. And what might 1)0 the Aleutian for seven Y Ea'cu nllttkli-allun , litth' more than illakh lenu in a broader form. 'J'ho Jukahiri giA'es a similar phenomenon. Such is the notice of tlie care Avith Avhicli certain comparisons should he made before Ave venture to commit ourselves to nega- tiA'e statements. '['here is an affinity amongst the American languages, and (tliere being this) there are also the elements of a classification. 'I'luMua- jority, hoAvever, of the Americanlanguages must be classified accor- ding to lijpes rather than de/inilinns. I'pon the nature of this differ- ence, as Avell as upon the cause I have Avritt(Mi more fully else- Avlierc. It is sufficient for present purposes to say that it applies to the languages of North Americain genera], and (of these) to those of the jtarts beyond the Kocky ^Fountains nmre especially. Eskimo characteristics appear i)i the Athabaskan, Athabaskan in the Kolucb forms of speech. F oni these the ][aidah leads to the (Jhiunnesyan (Avhich is, ueA'ertheless , a very outlying form of .speech) and the JIailtsa, akin to the Hillechula, Avhich, itself, loads to the Atiia. Hy slightly raising the value of the class Ave bring in the Ivutani, the Nutkan and the Chinuk. In the (Miinuk neighbourhood av(> move via the .fakon, Kahir puya, Sahaptin, Shoshoni, and Jjufuanii to the languages of Cali- fornia and the I'ueblos; and thence soutliAvards. In American languages sim])lo com]»arison does but little. We n\ay test this in tAvo Avays. We may place, side by side, two languages knoAvn to be undoubtedly, but also knoAvn to be not very clos(dy, allied. Such, for instance, are the (Jennan and (jlreek, the Latin and Ivussian , the English and liithuanic, all of Avhich are Indo-European, and all of Avliich , Avlien placed in simple juxta-position, by no means shoAv themscdves in any very palpable manner as such. This may be seen from the following tabic, Avhich is far from being tlie first Avhich the present Avritev 412 ADIU'.NDA AM) r'OKUIOKXnA, lias coin|)il(>(l ; and that with tlio special view of asc(M'taiiiin in aptitudes, difll'erenco in civilisation, dift'ereuce of creed, dift'erence of ])liysical form, ditt'erence of language. But tlie ditl["erent manner in which the southern tribes of La]) • land comport themselves in respect to their nearest neighbours, according as they lie Avest or east, illustr;;tes this view. On tht- side of Norway i'ow contrasts are more definite and striking than that between tlie nomad Lap with his reindeer, and reindeer-skin liabiliments and the industrial and highly civilized Norwegian. No similarity of habits is here; no affinity of language; little on intermixture, in the way of marriage. "^^IMieir physical frames are as different as their moral dispositions no and social habits. Nor is this difficult to explain. The Norwegian is not only a mend»er of another stock, but his original home was in a southern, or com- ])aratively southern, climate. It was Germany rather Scandinavia ; i'or Scandinavia was, originally, exclusively Lap or Fin. lint the German family encroaclied nortlnvards; and by displacenu'nt after displacement obliterated those members of the Jjap stock whose occupancy was Southern and Central Scandinavia, until nothing Avas left but its extreme northern representatives in the nntst northern and least favored parts of the peninsula. By these means two strongly contrasted populations were brotight in ch)se geographical contact — this being the present condition all ah)iig the South Eastern, or NorAvegian, boundary of Laphuul. But it is by no means tlie present condition of those jiarts of Ivussian Lapland Avhere the ]jap population touches that of Fin- land Proper. Here, although the Lap and Fin differ, the difference lies Avithin a far narrower limit than that Avliich divides the Lap from th(» NorAvegian or the SAvede. The stature of the La]i is less than that of the Fin; though the Fin is more short than tall, and tlu^ Lap is far from being so stunted as books and pictures nmke him. The habits, too, differ. The reindeer goes Avith tlie Lap; the coAV Avith the Fin. Other points differ also. On the Avhole, hoAvever, the Fin physiognomy is Lap , and the J^apFin; and ti.n languages are allied. Furthermore^ — the Fin graduates into the Wotiak, theZirianean, the Permian; the ]*ermian into the Tsheremiss, the Mordvin &.c. In other Avords, if Ave follow the Lap eastwards avc come into a AvhoIe fancy of congeners. ( )n the Avest, hoAVCA'er, the further Ave Avent, the l(>ss Lap Avas everything. Instead of being Lap it AUDKNDA AM) COHIlIfiKNDA. 415 was Novwog'ian, 8\vo(li.sli, Diuiisli, or (Icnnan. TIk* last, of tlioso, liownvcr, would lead us into the Saruiatiau tauiily, and this would Itring us round to the Fins of South Finland. 'I'lio time, hoAVcvcr, nnvy eonio when Russia will have so encroached upon the Fin ]»oj)ulations to the south of tlu^ Arctic (Jivcle as for t\w liap and Slave t(» come in innnediat(^ contact; and when this contact is eiVected there will be contrast also— contrast less strong', i)er- haps, than that between the Lap and Swede, but still contrast. Dlutalis mutandis — this seems to have been the case with the Fskimo and the North American Indians as they are popularly called — popularly but inaccuratcdy ; inasmuch as the ])resent writer consiclers tlu^ Fskimo to be as truly American as any other occupants of the soil of America. On the I'jast there lias been en- croachment, displacement, and, as an c^tt'ect thereof, two strongly contrasted populations in close geographical contact — viz.: the Eskimos and the northern members of tiie Algonkin fanuly. On the west, where the change has been bvss, the Athabaskans, the Ivohitshes, and the Fskimos graduate to each other, coming under the same category, and forming part of one and the same class; that class being by no nu'ans a narrow, though not an inordinate- ly, Avide one. Anotlier special question is 'hat concerning the origin ol' the Nahuatl, Astecs, or Mexicans. 'J'he maritime hypothesis I have abandoned. 'JMie doctrine that their civilisation was iNFaya I re- tain. ' I doubt, however, whether they originated anywhere. By this I nu^an that they are, though not ([uit(^ in silii , nearly so. In th(^ northermost parts of their area they may so entircdy. When 1 refined on this — the conunon sense — view of them I was, like many others, misled by the peculiar phonesis. What it is may lie better seen by an example than explained. Contrast the two following columns. How smoothly the words on the right run, how hai'shly sound (when they can be sounded) those of the left. Xot, however, that they give us the actual sounds of the com- bination h/il &.Q,. All that this means is that tliere is stnne extra- ordinary sound to ho. expressed that no simple sign or no com- mon combination will represent. In Mr. Jlab^'s vocabularies it is represented by a single special sign. ENA AND COllHKi KN'DA. ENfii.isii. Skmhu. Ciiinuk. Shoshon'i. wife makhoiiakli ... iiiaklu'kal wepui. son skokiisea ctsoklia natsl. (l/iiKjIilcr ,st«mt.- tkhliau naiiiei. Now if tlio Astcc pliniiosis bo, more akin to tlio Solisli ami its coiigoiu^rs than to the- Sho.shoni and other interjacent forms of Kpeeeli, Ave get an element of al'linity Avliieli connects \\\v more distant Avhilst it separates the nearer lauynages. Overvalue tliis, and yon may he misled. Now, not to mention the fact of this ])h()nesis being an over- valued character, there is clear proof in the recent additions to the comparative phih)logy of (Jalifornia that its distribution is, by no means, wliat it Avas, originally, supposed to be. This may be seen from the following lists. From the North of California. English. Wish-osk. hoy ligeritl , married weliowut'l ., /irr/d wiitwetl ...., hair (lahHl , fare kulitsouetl ., t)eard tseh'pl Jioilij tall , I'uol wehlilil village niolil chief kuwque'h'tl a.xe iiiahtl , pipe maht'letl wind ralitegut'l .. duck hahalitl ...., WiVOT. kushaina. luKiiich. metwet. jiaht'l. siilatek. cheirpl. hit'l. wellih'tl. katswalf'tl. kaiovvuh. mehtl. iii.ilitlel. ruktagun. hahahlih. (2.) English. IIipaii. neck hosewatl... vil/ai/e chief , Ijoiu a.ve luehlcohlewatl Tahlkwaii. wall' tiki. howiniicquutl. chotlta. In the South of California, English. Dimutno. Cuchan. leg cvvith'l niisith'l. tu-dai/ enyal'l lo-ntorrow inatinyat'i Al)l»i;Nr).\ A\l> COKKKIKNDA. 117 rosiroNi. Enhmhii. . DiniiNo. Ci ciian. hread meyiil'l ear Iimiwit'l siiiytlrl. neck n'yetli'l. arm .... hand ... friend . I'cather . selli iseth'I. iiyct'l. s.'iliwitlrl. 1 cannot conclndo without an ox})rossion of rogrct that the j^Toat work of Aih'hni}^ is .still onlyi in' the condition of a second, or (at best) hnt a third edition. There is Vater's Supplement, and Jiilg-'s fSnpplenient to Vater. But there is nothing that brings it up to the present time. Much might be done by Buschmann and perhaps others. But this is not enough. It recjuires translation. 'V\u' few French writers who treat on Ethnological JMiilology know nothing about it. The Italians and .Spanish are, n foiiinri , in outer darkness as to its contents. The Russians and Scandinavians know all about it — but the Russians and Scandinavians are not the scholars in whose hands the first hand information falls first. The Ameri- cans know it but imperfectly. If Turner has has had easy access to it, Gallatin had not: whilst Hales, with great powers, has been (with the exc(>ption of his discovery of the Athabaskan affinities of the Umkwa and Tlatskanai, out of which Turner s fixation of the Apatch, Navaho, and Jecorilla, and, afterAvards, my own of the Iloopah, seems to have been developed.) little more than a collector — a preeminent great collector — of raw materials. Nevertheless, the Atna class is his. However, the jNlithridates, for America at least, wants trans- lation as well as revision. It is a work in which many weak points may be (and have been) discovered. Klaproth , himself a man who (though he has saved many an en([uirer nuich trouble) has but few friends , has virulently attacked it. Its higher classi- fications are, undoubtedly, but low. Nevertheless, it is not only a great work, but the basis of all others. Should any one doubt its acumen let him read the part which , treating on the Chikkasah, demurrs to the identification of the Natchez with that and other forms of speech. Since it was written a specimen of the Natchez language has shewn its validity. I think that the Natchez has yet to take its full importance. If the language of the Tat'fisus it was, probably, the chief language of Tennessee. But the Creek, or JMuscogulgc , broke it 11]). iMeanwhile the fragmentary Catawba, with which I believe that the Caddo was connected had its congeners far to westward. I also think that the Uchc represents the old language of Florida — the Cherokee being conterminoiis with the Catawba. 27 418 ADDKNDA AM> COUUKiliNJiA. Tf SO, tlic floctriiu' of the. f'niwliimcntal affinity Itctwofii the J'.'iwiii, (!!ul(|o, (!at!i\vl)a, and ('licrokcc ;;'aiiis ;;;ronn(l. TiiP llchc (Icnnnwls special invcstij-ation. Tlic 'rin((uin and Tiimiacana slionid lie coni^tavcd with it. Tlicn wliy ar<' tlicy not V Fow works arc more inaccossildc than a Spanish .trie, IHccitmuriu, or ('ulccAsmii. 'V\w (UtUi I'or th(\s(' cncjnirics, littlo known, arc still U'ss attainaldc. AVithout these, and witliout a niinntc stndy, ol tlie tirst-liand authorities we can do hut little hut sny r ItctWOCii the <> i in((iiin and ' arc tlicy imt V rU', lUcciiiuiiriit, ;nown , arc still liiuitc stiuly, (if it suggest. All I'Morida (in its cr the doctrine irs (tf the Vs w- lacuna, inordi- dio (for a great s intrusive. ->^